Huawei OSN6800 Commissioning Guide V100R006C01 02

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800V100R006C01

Commissioning Guide

Issue 02

Date 2011-10-31

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C01



iManager U2000 V100R005C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R005C00

Intended AudienceThis document provides information about commissioning and testing operations after hardwareinstallation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures for station and networkcommissioning.

This document is intended for:

l Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide About This Document


ii

Symbol Description

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

The update of contents is described as follows:



iii

Update Description

2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.

15.35 ManagingNE PowerConsumption

Managing NE Power Consumption is added.


Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00The update of contents is described as follows:

Update Description

5CommissioningOptical Poweron Site

Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board is deleted.

8 AutomaticCommissioning

Automatic Commissioning is modified.


Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00Update Description

3CommissioningandConfigurationProcedureDuringDeployment

The procedures for commissioning and configuration during deploymentare added.

4 ConfiguringNE andNetwork

4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is added.

5.10CommissioningOptical Powerof ROADMBoard

5.10.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.



iv

Update Description

5.12 Example ofCommissioningOptical PowerBased on 10G(or Lower)Single-WavelengthSystem

5.12.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.

6 RemotelyCommissioningOptical Power

6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths andlink at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.

9 ConfiguringServices andSystemFeatures

The chapter "Configuring Services and System Features" is added andprovides hyperlinks to the Configuration Guide and FeatureDescription where detailed procedures for configuring services andsystem features are described. In this manner, the whole commissioningprocess during deployment is provided.

10Commissioningthe Network

10.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing AbnormalAlarms, 10.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection,10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System, 12 Checklist forCommissioning During Deployment, and 13 Backing Up the NEDatabase to the SCC Board are added.

15 ReferenceOperations fortheCommissioningandConfiguration

The section "Reference for Commissioning During Deployment" isadded.

16 ParametersReference

The section "Parameter Description" is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00The update of contents is described as follows:l Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In thisrelease, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.



v

Update Description

Whole manual l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiXOSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any differencebetween the products is described in the manual.

l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiXOSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

4 ConfiguringNE and Network

Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.

5.7CommissioningGuide of theRamanAmplifier

Description of commissioning the optical power of Raman boards ismodified. The structure of the contents is adjusted and certain contentsare added.


10.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.


10.6.3 Testing Items is added.

7 Example ofCommissioningOptical PowerBased on 40Gbit/s Single-WavelengthSystem

7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System, 7.2 Process forCommissioning a 40G System, 7.3 Preparations forCommissioning, and 7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problemsin a 40G System are added.

8 AutomaticCommissioning

Automatic Commissioning is added. This section describes the scenarioswhere the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used toautomatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations andprocedure for the commissioning.



vi

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................11.1 Safety Operation Guide......................................................................................................................................2

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols........................................................................................................................21.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers..................................................................................................................................21.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on............................................................................................51.1.4 ESD............................................................................................................................................................5

1.2 Instruments and Tools........................................................................................................................................61.3 Reference Documents.........................................................................................................................................81.4 Engineering Design Information........................................................................................................................9

1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document..................................................................................................................91.4.2 Engineering Design Document..................................................................................................................9

1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check ....................................................................................................................91.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers.....................................................................................................91.7 Testing Connection Points................................................................................................................................101.8 Connecting the NMS Computer.......................................................................................................................17

1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly...................................................................................................171.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN.......................................................................................19

2 Quick Guide.................................................................................................................................222.1 U2000 Quick Guide..........................................................................................................................................23

2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)................................................................232.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)....................................................................252.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)................................................................................282.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)........................................................292.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 Client...............................................................................................................312.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 Clients.................................................................................................................332.1.7 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)....................................................342.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)........................................................352.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)......................................................................372.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)..........................................39

2.2 Web LCT Quck Guide......................................................................................................................................412.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs............................................................................................................42

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide Contents


vii

2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT..............................................................................................................................422.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT....................................................................................................................432.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCT..................................................................................................................43

2.3 Entering the Common Views...........................................................................................................................442.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000.............................................................................................442.3.2 NE List on the Web LCT.........................................................................................................................442.3.3 Opening the NE Explorer........................................................................................................................452.3.4 Opening the NE Panel.............................................................................................................................46

2.4 Using Online Help............................................................................................................................................50

3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment...............................52

4 Configuring NE and Network...................................................................................................574.1 Creating NEs in Batches...................................................................................................................................594.2 Creating Optical NEs........................................................................................................................................624.3 Logging In to an NE.........................................................................................................................................624.4 Uploading the NE Data.....................................................................................................................................634.5 Setting NE ID and IP........................................................................................................................................644.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually......................................................664.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE....................................................................................674.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication...........................................................................................684.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions...................................................................................................724.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode................................................................................................734.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search..............................................................................................................764.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................................774.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64............................................................794.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16.............................................................................834.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800....................................................................................87

5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site...................................................................................925.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power.................................................................................................94

5.1.1 Basic Requirements.................................................................................................................................945.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence..........................................................................................................945.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments...................................................................................................96

5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board.................................................................................................965.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light....................................................................................................965.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board..................................................................................97

5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board..........................................................................................985.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board.................................................................................................985.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board..........................................................................................................99

5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards................................................995.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board..........................................101

5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board...............................................................1035.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................104



viii

5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................................1055.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier.............................................................................................106

5.7.1 Preparations...........................................................................................................................................1065.7.2 Checking the Fiber Connections............................................................................................................1105.7.3 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side....................................................................................1115.7.4 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function..................................................................................1135.7.5 Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction..........................................................................1135.7.6 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum................................................................................................................115

5.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel................................................................................1165.8.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC Board..........................................................................1165.8.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board.................................................................................121

5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board.....................................................1215.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Boards..........................................................1215.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board........................................................................1225.9.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board...............................................................................124

5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board......................................................................................1265.10.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)...............................................1265.10.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9).................................................1285.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9).................................................1295.10.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9).................................................1315.10.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4)..........................................1325.10.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD2+WSMD2)..........................................1345.10.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9+WSMD9)..........................................136

5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM......................................................................................................1375.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System...........138

5.12.1 Example Description...........................................................................................................................1385.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station....................................................1395.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA..............................................................................................1435.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End........................................................................1455.12.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)...................1495.12.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)..................................................................1515.12.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)..........................................................1555.12.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)...........................................................1585.12.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)............................................................1625.12.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)..........................................................1685.12.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)...................................................1725.12.12 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD2+WSMD2)...................................................1745.12.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9)...................................................177

6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power............................................................................ 1816.1 General Commissioning Sequence.................................................................................................................182

6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network................................................................................1846.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network.................................................................................185



ix

6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network................................................................................1876.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning...............................................................189

6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards..................................................................................................1896.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards.............................................................................................1916.2.3 Configuring the MCA Board.................................................................................................................1926.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards..............................................................................192

6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network....................................................1936.3.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................1936.3.2 Commissioning Procedure.....................................................................................................................1966.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A..................................2026.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B..................................................................2066.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)..........................................................................................................................................................2106.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................2176.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................2196.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM).........................................................................................................................................................2216.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)......................................................................................................................................................2226.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)......................................................................................................................................................2246.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9)......................................................................................................................................................2256.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D......................................................................2266.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)........................................................................................................................................................................2276.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)...................................................................................................................................2306.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F.......................................................................2326.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G....................................................................2336.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.............2346.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.............2396.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization..............2406.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)...............................................................................2416.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU.....................................................................................2426.3.22 Commissioning BERs..........................................................................................................................2446.3.23 Commissioning OSNR........................................................................................................................249

6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans......................................................................250

7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-WavelengthSystem.............................................................................................................................................253

7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System........................................................................................................2557.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System.....................................................................................................259



x

7.3 Preparations for Commissioning....................................................................................................................2607.3.1 Checking Design Documents................................................................................................................2607.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter...................................................................................................................263

7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System....................2657.4.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................2657.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station................................2707.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive End........................................................................................................................................................................2727.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization...................................................................................2747.4.5 Commissioning BERs............................................................................................................................2747.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System..........................................................................................2807.4.7 OSNR Penalties.....................................................................................................................................2867.4.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................299

7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System...............................3017.5.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................3017.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.......................................................3077.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station..............................................................................3107.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station........................................................3127.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization...................................................................................3157.5.6 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................316

7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System.....................................................................3177.6.1 OSNR Failure........................................................................................................................................3177.6.2 Excessively High Incident Optical Power.............................................................................................3177.6.3 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration.......................................................................................................3177.6.4 Methods for Handling Other Faults.......................................................................................................318

8 Automatic Commissioning......................................................................................................3208.1 Version Mapping............................................................................................................................................3228.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios..................................................................................................3228.3 Precautions for Commissioning......................................................................................................................3358.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network.......................................................336

8.4.1 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................3368.4.2 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................3378.4.3 Uploading Commissioning Data...........................................................................................................3388.4.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................3398.4.5 Creating a WDM Link...........................................................................................................................3408.4.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning................................................................................3468.4.7 Commissioning Optical Power..............................................................................................................3478.4.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................353

8.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded Network.............................................3548.5.1 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................3548.5.2 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................3558.5.3 Uploading Commissioning Data...........................................................................................................356



xi

8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................3578.5.5 Creating a WDM Link...........................................................................................................................3598.5.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning................................................................................3658.5.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of Expanded Wavelengths.............................................................3668.5.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................375

8.6 Optical Power Commissioning Report...........................................................................................................3768.6.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report..............................................................................3768.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board.......................................................................3768.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board..................................................379

8.7 Managing the Commissioning Index Data.....................................................................................................3838.8 Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning........................................................................3858.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS....................................................................................................................3858.10 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................................387

8.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window.........................................................................3878.10.2 FAQs and Solutions During the Generation of WDM Links..............................................................3898.10.3 FAQs About Setting Subnet Parameters.............................................................................................3908.10.4 FAQs About Link Commissioning......................................................................................................390

9 Configuring Services and System Features..........................................................................3929.1 Configuring Boards........................................................................................................................................393

9.1.1 Checking Board Parameters..................................................................................................................3939.1.2 Adding Ports..........................................................................................................................................4089.1.3 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board................................................................................................408

9.2 Configuring Services......................................................................................................................................4099.3 Configuring System Features.........................................................................................................................410

10 Commissioning the Network................................................................................................41210.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms........................................................41410.2 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................415

10.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection..............................................................................41610.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800......41810.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board for OptiX OSN 6800.......................41910.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards..................................................................42010.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching.........................................................................................42110.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching....................................................................................42310.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................42510.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.............................................................................................42810.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching........................................................................................43210.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching.....................................................................................43510.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching.................................................................................43810.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching.......................................................................................44010.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching...........................44210.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching................................................................................44610.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching...........................................................................449



xii

10.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching.....................................................................................45310.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching....................................................................................45510.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching...............................................................45810.2.19 Testing Linear MS Protection Switching..........................................................................................46110.2.20 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching...................................................46210.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching...................................................46410.2.22 Testing SNCP Protection Switching..................................................................................................46710.2.23 Testing SNCTP Protection Switching...............................................................................................46910.2.24 Testing Transoceanic MSP Ring Protection Switching ...................................................................47110.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching..................................................................................................47410.2.26 Testing the DLAG(OCS)...................................................................................................................476

10.3 Testing Data Characteristics.........................................................................................................................47710.3.1 Testing the LCAS................................................................................................................................47710.3.2 Testing the LAG..................................................................................................................................48010.3.3 Testing the LPT...................................................................................................................................48110.3.4 Testing the STP/RSTP.........................................................................................................................48210.3.5 Testing the MSTP................................................................................................................................484

10.4 Testing System Features...............................................................................................................................48510.4.1 Testing IPA..........................................................................................................................................48510.4.2 Testing ALC........................................................................................................................................48810.4.3 Testing APE.........................................................................................................................................48910.4.4 Testing EAPE......................................................................................................................................491

10.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks.....................................................................................................................49410.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2....................................................................................................................................496

10.6.1 Testing Process....................................................................................................................................49710.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation...............................................................................................................49810.6.3 Testing Items.......................................................................................................................................501

10.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels...............................................................................................................50410.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops........................................................................50410.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function........................................506

10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System.......................................................................................................50710.8.1 Setting the Orderwire Board................................................................................................................50710.8.2 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................50810.8.3 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................50910.8.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................510

10.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System..................................................................................51110.9.1 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................51110.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................51210.9.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................513

10.10 Testing Orderwire Functions......................................................................................................................514

11 Testing Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................51611.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel..............................................................................518



xiii

11.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................520

12 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment.........................................................523

13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board................................................................525

14 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems...........................................52714.1 OSC/ESC Conflict........................................................................................................................................52814.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports..........................................................................................................529

15 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration...............................53115.1 Configuring the NE Data..............................................................................................................................535

15.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.....................................................................................................53515.1.2 Replicating the NE Data......................................................................................................................536

15.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack..............................................................................................................53715.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration...................................................................................................53715.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE................................................................................53715.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute.............................................................................................................53815.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack..............................................................................................53815.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack.....................................................................................................................539

15.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming.............................................................................................................54015.3.1 Basic Concepts....................................................................................................................................54015.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow........................................................................................54115.3.3 Configuring the ROADM....................................................................................................................541

15.4 Configuring the NE Time.............................................................................................................................55215.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and NEs...................................................55315.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time..........................................55315.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key....................................................................................................55415.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time......................................................555

15.5 Performance Management............................................................................................................................55615.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold...........................................................................................55615.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters......................................................................................55615.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers..............................................................................................559

15.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs..................................................................................................................56015.6.1 Modifying the NE Name.....................................................................................................................56015.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name.........................................................................................................56115.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters................................................................................................................56115.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs.................................................................................................................56215.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE.......................................................................................................56315.6.6 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE.......................................................................................................56315.6.7 Deleting NEs........................................................................................................................................564

15.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration...........................................................................................................56515.7.1 Deleting Boards...................................................................................................................................56515.7.2 Adding Boards.....................................................................................................................................565

15.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration.............................................................................................................566



xiv

15.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information....................................................................................................56615.8.2 Deleting Fibers....................................................................................................................................567

15.9 Creating a Single NE....................................................................................................................................56815.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User................................................................................................................56915.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode..................................................................................................57015.12 Configuring the Edge Port..........................................................................................................................57215.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection.................................................................................................57415.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes..................................................................................................57515.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes....................................................................................................57615.16 Opening/Closing Lasers.............................................................................................................................57615.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board.....................................................................................57715.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards........................................................................................57815.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters............................................................................................57915.20 Configuring the Service Mode...................................................................................................................58015.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC).......................................................................................................58115.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board...........................................................................58215.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board.............................................................................58215.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching..............................................................58315.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status.............................................................................................................58415.26 Configuring Path Binding...........................................................................................................................58515.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring......................................................................................58615.28 Configuring the FEC Function...................................................................................................................58815.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT......................................................................................................................58915.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans.................................................................................................................58915.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port...................................59015.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards......................................................................................................................591

15.32.1 Configuring Internal Ports.................................................................................................................59215.32.2 Configuring External Ports................................................................................................................593

15.33 Verifying Ethernet Services........................................................................................................................59515.34 Configuring the PRBS Test........................................................................................................................595

15.34.1 PRBS Application Scenarios.............................................................................................................59615.34.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board...............................................................59715.34.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board ....................................................................................598

15.35 Managing NE Power Consumption............................................................................................................59915.35.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption.................................................................................................59915.35.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE....................................................................................60115.35.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report...........................................................602

15.36 Configuring NE Clock Sources..................................................................................................................60315.36.1 Adding Clock Sources.......................................................................................................................60315.36.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE...........................................................................604

15.37 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data...........................................................................................................60515.37.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods..............................................................605



xv

15.37.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card......................................................................60715.37.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client.....................................................60815.37.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board..............................................................................60915.37.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card..................................................................................61015.37.6 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client....................................................611

16 Parameters Reference..............................................................................................................61316.1 Parameters (Creating a Network).................................................................................................................614

16.1.1 Laser Spectrum Analysis.....................................................................................................................61416.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management.................................................................................................61616.1.3 Orderwire Board Settings....................................................................................................................61616.1.4 General.................................................................................................................................................61616.1.5 Conference Call...................................................................................................................................61816.1.6 Auxiliary..............................................................................................................................................61916.1.7 NE Attributes.......................................................................................................................................61916.1.8 NE User Management.........................................................................................................................62016.1.9 NE Time Synchronization...................................................................................................................62516.1.10 Standard NTP Key Management.......................................................................................................62916.1.11 Path Binding......................................................................................................................................630

16.2 Parameters: WDM Interface.........................................................................................................................63016.2.1 Optical Transponder Board.................................................................................................................63116.2.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board.................................................................................................64116.2.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board..............................................................................................64516.2.4 Tributary and Line Boards...................................................................................................................64816.2.5 Optical Amplifier Board......................................................................................................................65016.2.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Board....................................................................................................65616.2.7 Protection Board..................................................................................................................................65816.2.8 Spectrum Analysis Board....................................................................................................................65916.2.9 Variable Optical Attenuation Board....................................................................................................66216.2.10 Dispersion Compensation Board.......................................................................................................664

16.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)........................................................................................66516.3.1 Parameters: Edge Port.........................................................................................................................66516.3.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................66616.3.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection.........................................................................66716.3.4 Parameters: Enabling the Port Blocking Function..............................................................................668

A Glossary......................................................................................................................................670



xvi

1 Preparations for Commissioning

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning.

1.1 Safety Operation GuideThis section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulationsand equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personalinjuries or damages to the equipment during operations.

1.2 Instruments and ToolsThis section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.

1.3 Reference DocumentsThis section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.

1.4 Engineering Design InformationThis section describes the engineering design information required for equipmentcommissioning.

1.5 Commissioning Conditions CheckBefore commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.

1.6 Requirements for Commissioning EngineersThis section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.

1.7 Testing Connection PointsThis section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function andconnection types.

1.8 Connecting the NMS ComputerThis section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS managesthe NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning


1

1.1 Safety Operation GuideThis section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulationsand equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personalinjuries or damages to the equipment during operations.

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety SymbolsDuring equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarmand safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.

Table 1-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment.

Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment

Symbol Describes

ESD protection symbol.You must wear an ESD wrist strap or glove to avoiddamage caused by electrostatic discharge to boards.

HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL

INSTRUMENTS

CAUTION

Laser level symbol.Indicates the laser level and warns that laser beamscan cause injuries to eyes.

Grounding symbol.Indicates the position of the grounding point.

Regular cleaning symbol.Warns you to regularly clean the air filter.

Fan warning symbol.Warns you not to touch the fan blade until the fanstops moving.

1.1.2 Safe Usage of FibersThis section describes how to safely use fibers.



2

DANGERLaser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause damage to youreyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards and optical fibers, avoid directlyexposing your eyes to the laser beams originating from the optical interfaces or fiber connectors.

Protection of Optical Connectors

All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical interface boardsmust be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the replaced boards must be promptlycovered with protective caps. In addition, properly store these boards in their packages to keepthe optical ports clean.

Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Recommended protective caps

Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 Protective caps that are not recommended



3

NOTE

Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and other material.These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.

Connecting Fibers

CAUTIONWhen applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the attenuation toavoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is excessively high. For boards thathave the capability of having optical attenuators added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx opticalport rather than at the Tx optical port.

Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical power isexcessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to avoid damages to thedevice caused by a high input of optical power.

DANGERBefore removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser toavoid injuries due to the high optical power from the laser.

The CRPC board has specific requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, see Table1-2.

Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirements of the CRPC

Distance Loss (dB) Connector (piece)

0–10 (km) ≤0.1 0

10–20 (km) ≤0.2 0

NOTE

The ODF has only one connector for connecting to the CRPC board. All the other fiber connection points mustbe spliced.

Cleaning Fibers

CAUTIONIf fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriouslyaffected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber must be cleaned beforethe fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports on the boards in the equipment.



4

The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaningtools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are:

l Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or formalin is neverused)

l Non-woven lens tissuel Special compressed gasl Dust-free cotton stickl Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or propyll Fiberscope

For details on how to clean fibers, see the Supporting Tasks.

1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power onThis section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when thepower is on.

Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when the power is on:

l Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on.l Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on.l Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with installation

requirements.

1.1.4 ESDDuring installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage:

l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.l Check that the equipment is securely grounded.

CAUTIONWear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make surethat the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of theequipment.

For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 1-3.



5

Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

NOTE

Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.

When you are following antistatic procedures, take the following precautions:

l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be between0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two years) hasexpired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a wrist strapthat provides the required resistance value.

l Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is notprotected by the wrist strap.

l Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards orchips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips, circuits,or pins with your bare hands.

l Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place theremoved boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-antistaticmaterials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack boards, and donot let these materials touch the boards.

l Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESD-sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connectthem to the ports.

l Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment roomfor packing boards in the future.

ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089-CORE.

1.2 Instruments and ToolsThis section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.

Table 1-3 lists the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.



6

Table 1-3 Instruments and tools

Tool or Tester Usage

Optical power meter Used to measure the received optical power, the receiversensitivity, and the receiver overload at an optical port. It ismainly used to measure the optical power on the client side andthe WDM side of the OTU, and the total optical power of themultiplexed signals.

Laptop Used to install the U2000 Web LCT and U2000 during thenetwork element (NE) commissioning.

Multimeter Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current intensity duringthe power test.

Fiber microscope Used for checking the cleanliness of the endface of the fiber.

Fiber jumper Used for connections during the optical power test of opticalports on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.

Cassette cleaner or lenstissue

Used to clean the end faces of fibers.

Flange Used to transfer the fiber jumper.

Fixed optical attenuator Used to attenuate the received optical power, which maydamage the optical component, during the received opticalpower test for an optical port.

Variable optical attenuator(VOA)

Used for testing the receiver sensitivity and overload opticalpower of an optical port.

Optical spectrum analyzer Used mainly to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noiseratio (OSNR), and the central wavelength for each wavelengthin the multiplexed signals.

SDH analyzer Used in the network commissioning and index test of the SDHservice.

GE analyzer Used for the GE service index test.

10GE analyzer Used for the 10GE service index test.

OTN analyzer Used for the OTN service index test.

ESCON analyzer Used for the ESCON service index test.

Ethernet analyzer Used for the data service index test.

FICON/FC analyzer Used for the FICON service and FC service index test.

Phillips screwdriver Used to install or uninstall the board screws.

Special compressed gas Used to clean optical ports of boards.



7

NOTE

In a DWDM system, the optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to bemeasured by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result from this method is moreaccurate. When using this method, the noise impact does not need to be considered.

Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to perform the test. Use the followingmethod to verify the calibration:

Measure the optical power of the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the optical spectrumanalyzer. Then compare it with the optical power obtained by using an optical power meter. Ifthe difference is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is greater than0.5 dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.

1.3 Reference DocumentsThis section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.

The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 8800 equipmentcommissioning:

l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description

l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines

l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide

l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide

l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Feature Description


l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines


l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide


l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description


l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description

l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines


l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide


l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description



8

1.4 Engineering Design InformationThis section describes the engineering design information required for equipmentcommissioning.

1.4.1 Engineering Survey DocumentThis section describes the required engineering survey documents.

The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and the work instructionsassociated with the engineering survey.

1.4.2 Engineering Design DocumentThis section describes the engineering design documents required during equipmentcommissioning.

The following engineering design documents are required for equipment commissioning:

l Network diagram (including the networking diagram for the entire network, the basictopological diagram, and the network management diagram)

l Board layout diagram of the cabinetl Wavelength allocation diagraml Cabinet fiber connection diagraml Configuration diagram of the optical amplifiersl Fiber connection diagraml Optical attenuator listl Design description file

1.5 Commissioning Conditions CheckBefore commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.

For details about checking the commissioning conditions, see the Installation Guide.

1.6 Requirements for Commissioning EngineersThis section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.

Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical networkcommissioning and are skilled in using the test equipment.

Commissioning engineers must be familiar with:

l WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theoriesl WDM equipmentl U2000/Web LCT and service configuration by using the U2000/Web LCT.l Analyzers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)



9

1.7 Testing Connection PointsThis section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function andconnection types.

Figure 1-4 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Forthe functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-4 and Table1-8.



Figure 1-7 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800. For thefunctional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-5, and Table1-8.

Figure 1-8 shows the testing connection points on the chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800. For thefunctional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-6, Table 1-7and Table 1-8.

Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64

53APWR

-48VRTN

PIU

SE

RIA

LN

M_E

TH2

EFI1EFI2E

TH1

ETH

2E

TH3

LAM

P1

LAM

P2

NM

_ETH

1

ATE

ALM

I1A

LMO

1A

LMO

2

ALM

I2A

LMO

3A

LMO

4

STI

CLK

2TO

D2

CLK

1TO

D1

Front Back



10


Fan

Fan

53APWR

-48VRTN

PIU

SERIAL

NM

_ETH2

EFI1EFI2

ETH1

ETH2

ETH3

LAMP1

LAMP2

NM

_ETH1

ATE

ALMI1

ALMO

1ALM

O2

ALMI2

ALMO

3ALM

O4



11


EFI AUX ATE

PIU



12

Figure 1-7 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800

Fan

SCC

SCC

STATACTPROGSRVPWRAPWRBPWRCALMC

RESET

LAMP TEST

ALM CUT

SubRACK_ID

RUN

NEG

(-)R

TN(+)

PIU

AUX

STATPROG

NM

_ETH1

NM

_ETH2 ETH

1ETH2

xcs

xcs

STATACTPROGSRV

ETH3COM ALM02ALM01 ALM03

ALM04ALMI2

ALMI1 LAMP1ALMP2SERIAL



13

Figure 1-8 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3800

SCC

STATACTPROGSRVPWRAPWRBPWRCALMC

RESET

LAMPTEST

ALMCUT

PWR

CRI

MAJ

MIN

AUX

STATPROG

EX

TN

M_E

TH1

NM

_ETH

2

PIU

RUN

S2

S1

S11

PIU

PIU

SC

CS

CC

AUX

S6

S5

S4

DO not hotplug this unit！

NEG

(-)R

TN(+)

FAN

Table 1-4 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 8800

Interface Silk-Screen

Function Description ConnectionType

ALMO1ALMO2ALMO3ALMO4

Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralizedalarm and power distribution cabinet by outputports and cascading ports. Other modes can beconfigured to send the alarm output for assemblingand displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 8800provides eight channels of alarm output. The firstthree channels, by default, are critical alarms,major alarms, and minor alarms. The other fivechannels are reserved for alarm output cascading.

RJ-45

SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM)port which supports the X.25 protocol.

DB9



14



ALMI1ALMI2

The external alarm input function is designed foran external system that has alarms requiring remotemonitoring (for example, an environmentmonitoring system). The names for the eight alarmchannels can be set to achieve remote monitoringof the external alarms with the external system.

RJ-45

LAMP1LAMP2

Used to drive the running indicators and alarmindicators for the cabinet where the subrack ishoused.

RJ-45

NM_ETH1NM_ETH2

Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network porton the OptiX OSN 8800 using a network cable tothe network port on the U2000 server to achievemanagement of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN8800.Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network porton one NE through a network cable to that onanother NE to achieve communication betweenNEs.

RJ-45

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on onesubrack using a network cable to the same ports onanother subrack to achieve communicationbetween the master subrack and its slave subracks.

RJ-45




COM Commissioning port used for communicationsbetween the EFI and AUX boards.

RJ-45

ALMO1ALMO2ALMO3ALMO4

Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralizedalarm and power distribution cabinet by outputports and cascading ports. Other modes can beconfigured to send the alarm output for assemblingand displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 6800provides eight channels of alarm output. The firstthree channels, by default, are critical alarms,major alarms, and minor alarms. The other fivechannels are reserved for alarm output cascading.

RJ-45

SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM)port which supports the X.25 protocol.

DB9



15



ALMI1ALMI2

The external alarm input function is designed forexternal system that has alarms requiring remotemonitoring (for example, an environmentmonitoring system). The names of the eight alarmchannels can be set to achieve remote monitoringof the external alarms with the external system.

RJ-45

LAMP1LAMP2

Used to drive the running indicators and alarmindicators of the cabinet where the subrack ishoused.

RJ-45

NM_ETH1NM_ETH2

Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiXOSN 6800 using a network cable to the networkport on the U2000 server to achieve managementof the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network porton one NE using a network cable to the networkport on another NE to achieve communicationbetween NEs.

RJ-45

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on onesubrack using a network cable to the same ports onanother subrack to achieve communicationbetween the master subrack and its slave subracks.

RJ-45


Interface Silk-Screen Function Description

ConnectionType

NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2

Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network porton the OptiX OSN 3800 using a network cable tothe network port on the U2000 server to achievemanagement of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN3800.Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network porton one NE using a network cable to the networkport on another NE to achieve communicationbetween NEs.

RJ-45

EXT Accesses and outputs all external signals. DB64



16

Table 1-7 Function description of the testing EXT connectors on the OptiX OSN 3800

Interface Silk-Screen (onCables) Function Description

ConnectionType

ETH Used as the COM commissioning port. RJ-45

F&f Debugs the serial port. DB9

ALMO The alarm output is sent to the centralized alarmand power distribution cabinet by output ports andcascading ports. The port provides two channels ofalarm output and two channels of output cascading.

RJ-45

ALMI1ALMI2

The external alarm input function is designed foran external system that has alarms requiring remotemonitoring (for example, an environmentmonitoring system). It is used to input six channelsof external alarms.

RJ-45

LAMP1LAMP2

Used to drive the running indicators and alarmindicators for the cabinet where the chassis ishoused.

RJ-45

Table 1-8 Function description of the testing buttons

Interface Silk-Screen Function Description

RESET Used to reset the SCC board.

ALM CUT The trigger switch is used to mute the alarm from the subrack.You can either hide the prompt of current alarms by pressingand then immediately releasing the button, or mute the alarmsby pressing the button for five seconds. When the audiblealarm function is turned off, the ALMC indicator on the SCCboard remains on. Otherwise, the audible alarm function isturned on, and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board remainsoff.

LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this button, allindicators are lit.

1.8 Connecting the NMS ComputerThis section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS managesthe NE.

1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server DirectlyThis section describes how to connect the U2000 server to Ethernet port in the subrack using acable.



17

PrerequisiteThe subrack must work normally.

The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same networksegment.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, network cable

PrecautionsIf the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to themaster subrack through a network cable.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of the NMScomputer. The other end should be connected to the specified port on the board.

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2port on the EFI board.

For the OptiX OSN 6800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on theAUX board.

For the OptiX OSN 3800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on theAUX board.

Step 2 Determine if the green indicator of the network card interface of the NMS computer remainsconstantly on.

Step 3 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or theindicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for theNM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.

For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.

For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.

Step 4 On Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the StartMenu. The Control Panel window is displayed.

Step 5 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window isdisplayed.

Step 6 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area ConnectionProperties window is displayed.



18

Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)window is displayed.

Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP addressthat is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integerfrom 1 to 255. Note that the IP address must be unique and cannot be the same as any of theexisting IP addresses.

Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

CAUTIONWhen configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do notconfigure the gateway. Otherwise, the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. Ifthe U2000 server has more than one network card, select the corresponding local connection forthe network card connected to the subrack.

Step 11 Click OK.

----End

1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LANThis section describes how to connect the U2000 server to the NE through a LAN.

PrerequisiteWhen the U2000 server connects to the NE through a LAN, the IP address is set in a way thatis similar to connecting the U2000 server to an Ethernet port in the subrack using a cable. Notethe following requirements:

l The subrack must work normally.l The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network

segment.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, network cable

PrecautionsIf the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to themaster subrack through a network cable.



19

ProcedureStep 1 Connect the NMS computer into the LAN.

Step 2 Check the cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN using cables. The equipment isconnected to the LAN through the specified port on the board using cables.

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2port on the EFI board.The OptiX OSN 6800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX boardusing cables.The OptiX OSN 3800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX boardusing cables.

Step 3 Determine if the indicator for the network card interface of the NMS computer remainsconstantly on.

Step 4 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or theindicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for theNM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.For the OptiX OSN 3800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.

Step 5 In Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the StartMenu. The Control Panel window is displayed.

Step 6 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window isdisplayed.

Step 7 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 8 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area ConnectionProperties window is displayed.

Step 9 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)window is displayed.

Step 10 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP addressthat is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integerfrom 1 to 255. Note that the IP address is unique and cannot be the same as any of the existingIP addresses.

Step 11 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.



20

CAUTIONWhen configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do notconfigure the gateway. Otherwise the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. Ifthe U2000 server has more than one network cards, select the corresponding local connectionfor the network card connected to the subrack.

Step 12 Click OK.

----End



21

2 Quick Guide

About This Chapter

The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT and theU2000.

The U2000 is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can centrallymanage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, securityequipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). With powerful management functions at the NEand network layers, the U2000 is the major future-oriented network management product andsolution for Huawei equipment. In the telecommunication management network (TMN)hierarchy, the U2000 is located between the element management layer and networkmanagement layer, and supports all functions of the NE and network layers.

The Web LCT is an element management system (EMS) in an optical transport network. In theTMN, the Web LCT is located at the NE layer. Based on the browser/server architecture, theWeb LCT allows you to perform all operations of NE-level configuration and maintenance. TheWeb LCT accesses a local NE through a LAN or a serial port, and accesses a remote NE overdata communications channels (DCCs).

2.1 U2000 Quick GuideThe U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You arerecommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, inorder not to affect other users who are operating the U2000.

2.2 Web LCT Quck GuideThe following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.

2.3 Entering the Common ViewsThis task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS)and functions of the views.

2.4 Using Online HelpOnline Help provides help information about the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide


22

2.1 U2000 Quick GuideThe U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You arerecommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, inorder not to affect other users who are operating the U2000.

Context

You are recommended to start the computer and the U2000 application according to thefollowing sequence:

l Start the computer.

l Start the U2000 server.

l Start the U2000 client.

You are recommended to shut down the U2000 application and the computer according to thefollowing sequence:

l Exit the U2000 client.

l Stop the U2000 server.

l Shut down the computer.

2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database,and start the U2000 server processes.

Starting the Database

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to startthe database on the Windows single-server system.

PrerequisiteThe OS must have been started.

ContextGenerally, the database starts along with the OS.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whetherMicrosoft SQL Server 2000 is running.The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed.

If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.



23

Step 3 If Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is not running, click Start/Continue.

----End

Starting the U2000 Server ProcessesYou can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where theU2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start theU2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.

PrerequisiteThe OS on the computer where the U2000 server is installed must be running properly, and thedatabase must have been started.

ContextGenerally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.

During the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided.The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.

Procedure


Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes.If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe,imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, andimapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes havestarted.

Step 3 If the U2000 server processes have not started, choose Start > Programs > NetworkManagement System > U2000 Server > U2000 Server or click the shortcut icon on the desktopto start the U2000 server.Starting the U2000 server processes takes about 3 minutes.

Step 4 Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 System Monitor or clickthe shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U2000 System Monitor client.

Step 5 In the Login dialog box, enter a user name and a password to access the System Monitor clientwindow. The user name is admin, and the password is empty by default. You are required tochange the password at the first login.

NOTE

Two data transmission modes are available: Common and Security(SSL). You can run a command on theserver to query the data transmission mode. The default data transmission mode is Common.

Step 6 Check whether the U2000 processes start properly. The processes for which the start mode ismanual must be started manually.l If the U2000 processes for which the start mode is automatic start successfully, the U2000

runs properly.l If any process does not start, right-click the process and choose Start Process from the

shortcut menu.



24

l If the U2000 runs abnormally, contact Huawei engineers.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

The network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning,maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenancesuite server processes start along with the OS.

In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed.l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started.l If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C:

\HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuiteserver.

2.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database,and start the U2000 server processes.

Starting the Database

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to startthe database on the Solaris single-server system.

Prerequisite

The OS must have been started.

Context

Generally, the database starts along with the OS.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.TIP

Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.

Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:$ ps -ef | grep sybase

Information similar to the following is displayed:

sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/dataserver -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/backupserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR sybase 5248 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back ...



25

NOTE

The database is running if the displayed information contains /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.

Step 3 Run the following commands to start the Sybase database if it is not running:# su - sybase $ cd /opt/sybase/ASE*/install$ ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR &$ ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR_back &

----End

Follow-up ProcedureRun the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:

$ ps -ef | grep sybase



NOTE


Starting the U2000 Server ProcessesYou can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where theU2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start theU2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.


ContextGenerally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user.

Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the U2000 is running:$ daem_ps


nmsuser 27069 1 0 10:31:39 ? 1:39 imapmrb nmsuser 27079 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:00 imapwatchdog -cmd start



26

nmsuser 27075 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:50 imapsysd -cmd start nmsuser 27086 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:09 imapeventmgr nmsuser 23679 1 1 17:57:06 pts/8 0:02 imap_sysmonitor -cmd start nmsuser 27116 1 0 10:31:40 ? 0:52 ResourceMonitor -cmd start

NOTE

The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.

Step 3 Run the following command to start the U2000 if it is not running:$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin$ ./startnms.sh

Step 4 View the running status of each process through the System Monitor as user nmsuser to log into the server GUI, as follows:

CAUTIONIf you cannot log in to the GUI of the server, run the svc_adm -cmd status command to viewthe status of processes as user nmsuser.

1. On the desktop of the OS, double-click the U2000 System Monitor shortcut icon.

NOTE

The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACLrestriction range based on the security requirements. .

2. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the U2000 user name and password (to open theSystem Monitor window). The default password of user admin is blank. You must changethe default password during first-time login.

NOTE

There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and Security(SSL). You can run thessl_adm -cmd query command to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -cmdquery command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and SUSE Linux OS. The default datatransmission mode is Normal.

The U2000 is functioning properly if it can initiate in automatic startup mode, indicatingthat the U2000 is functioning properly.

If a process cannot start, right-click the process and choose Start the Process from theshortcut menu.

If the U2000 works properly, contact Huawei engineers.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureThe network management system maintenance suite is used to debug, maintain, and redeploythe U2000. Generally, the network management system maintenance suite server processes startalong with the OS. If the processes do not start, run the following command:

$ su - rootpassword: password_of_the_root_user# cd /opt/HWENGR/engineering# ./startserver.sh

Run the following command to switch back to the nmsuser user:



27

# exit

Run the following command to check whether the network management system maintenancesuite process is started:$ ps -ef | grep javaroot 19913 19907 0 04:04:09 pts/1 0:00 grep java...root 18382 18311 0 03:42:33 pts/2 12:20 /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java -server -Dequinox.conf=engineering/conf/installE

NOTE

If the displayed information contains /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java -server, it indicates that thenetwork management system maintenance suite process is started.

2.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database,and start the U2000 server processes.

Starting the DatabaseThe U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to startthe database on the Windows HA system.

PrerequisiteThe OS must have been started.

ProcedureStep 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights.

Step 2 Start the VCS client.1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster

Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.2. Choose File > New Cluster.3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.

Then, click OK.

Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-clickAppService-SQLServer2000 and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu. In thedialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

Starting the U2000 Server ProcessesYou can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where theU2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start theU2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.




28

ContextDuring the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided.The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the following command to manually start the U2000 processes:1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster

Manager - Java Console to start a VCS client.2. Choose File > New Cluster.3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.

Then, click OK.5. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Online > host_name from the

shortcut menu.6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureThe network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning,maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenancesuite server processes start along with the OS.

In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed.l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started.l If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C:

\HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuiteserver.

2.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System(Solaris)

Four steps are required to start the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris): poweron the server safely, check the high availability system, start the database, and start the U2000server processes.

Starting the DatabaseThe U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to startthe database on the HA system (Solaris).

Prerequisitel The OS must have been started.l The VCS service must have started along with the OS and the disk must function properly.



29

Procedure

Step 1 Perform the following operations to start the Sybase database service in the HA system:l GUI mode:

1. Log in to the primary site as user root.2. Run the following command to start the VCS client:

# hagui &

3. Choose File > New Cluster from the main menu. In the window that is displayed, enterthe IP address of the server and click OK.

4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password of the VCSclient. Click OK.

5. Expand the AppService node in the navigation tree, and expand the SybaseBk node.Right-click BackupServer and check whether the Enabled check box is selected. If itis not selected, select it and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu.

6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.Wait until BackupServer and DatabaseServer on the Resources tab page areavailable, which indicates that the Sybase database service is running.

l CLI mode:

1. Log in to the primary site as user root.2. Run the following command to start the Sybase database service:

# hares -online BackupServer -sys hostname

----End

Starting the U2000 Server ProcessesYou can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where theU2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start theU2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.


Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS of the primary site as user root.

Step 2 Start the U2000 server processes.l GUI mode:

1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:# hagui&

NOTEIf the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that thecurrent status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.

2. Click Connect to Cluster name.



30

NOTEIf you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster.

a. Click File > New Cluster.

b. Enter the IP address of application network.

c. Click OK.

3. Enter User Name and Password.

NOTEThe default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.

4. Click OK.5. In the Cluster Explorer window, right-click the AppService resource group in the

navigation tree and choose Online > primary from the shortcut menu to start the Sybaseprocess and U2000 server process.

TIPClick the Resources tab to view the start status of each resource.

Normally, on the Status tab page, Online is displayed for State in the Group Statuson Member Systems area on the active site, and Online on primary is displayed forStatus in the Resource Status area.

NOTE

l In actual configuration, use the actual host name.

l If a fault has occurred during start of the AppService process, right-click AppService and chooseclear fault from the shortcut menu to clear the fault. Then, choose Online > host_name to startthe AppService process.

6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.l CLI mode:

# hagrp -online AppService -sys hostname

----End

2.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 ClientLog in to a U2000 using the client, and then perform management operations in the GUI of theU2000 client.

Prerequisite

Before logging in to the U2000 client, ensure that the following conditions are met:

l The U2000 processes are started.l The network communication between the U2000 client and the U2000 is available.

NOTE

Run the ping peer_IP_address command to check network communication.

– In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the system IP address of theserver.

– In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the system IP address of themaster server.

– In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is the IP address of NMSapplication network in the active site server.



31

– In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is the IP address of NMSapplication network in the master server of active site.

l The ports used between the U2000 client and the U2000 are opened by the firewall.l The IP address of the client must be contained in the access control list (ACL) that is

configured on the U2000.

NOTE

The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACLrestriction range based on the security requirements.

l The legitimate U2000 user account and password must be allocated.l U2000 Licenses have been correctly loaded to the server.

ContextBy default, after you enter an incorrect password for three consecutive times, the user accountthat you use is locked by the U2000. The super user admin can unlock the account of a commonuser. In addition, the system can automatically unlock the account in 30 minutes.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS where the client program is installed.l On Windows OS, log in to the OS as user administrator.l On Solaris OS, log in to the GUI as user nmsuser.

Step 2 On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog box isdisplayed.

TIP

l In the case of a Windows OS, you can double-click the startup_all_global.bat file in the D:\U2000\client directory to start the client.

l In the case of a Solaris OS, you can run the command of ./startup_all_global.sh in the /opt/U2000/client directory to start the client.

Step 3 In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User Name andPassword to the valid values, and click Login.l If the intended server is not configured, perform the following operations to add a server:

1. Click the ... button. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.2. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the parameters of the U2000 server to

be added, and then click OK.

Table 2-1 Server parameter settings

Parameter Settings

Name It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP addressfor login or the related host name.



32

Parameter Settings

Server Name (orIP Address)

It is recommended that you set this parameter to an IP address.l In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the

system IP address of the server.l In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the

system IP address of the master server.l In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is

the IP address of NMS application network in the active siteserver.

l In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is theIP address of NMS application network in the master serverof active site.

Port There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal andSecurity(SSL). By default, port 31037 is used in Normal modeand port 31039 is used in Security(SSL) mode.

Mode There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal andSecurity(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query commandto query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -cmd query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris andSUSE Linux OS. The default data transmission mode isNormal.NOTEl If the client and server applications are on the same host and the server

uses the SSL mode, then the client can use the Normal or SSL mode.The client can only use the Normal mode if the server uses theNormal mode.

l If the client and server applications are not on the same host, the clientcan log in to the server only when it uses the same mode as the server.

3. In the Server List dialog box, select a record from the record list. Then, click OK.

l When you log in to the U2000 client, if the system detects that the local version is earlierthan the server version, a prompt is displayed, asking you whether to upgrade the client.– Click Yes to upgrade the client.– Click No to log in to the client.

----End

ResultAfter the login to the U2000 client is successful, the U2000 client obtains related data from theU2000.

2.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 ClientsYou must ensure that all U2000 clients are shut down before you shut down the U2000 server.

PrerequisiteThe U2000 clients must be started properly.



33

ProcedureStep 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.If certain operations are performed on the Main Topology but not saved, a prompt is displayed,asking you whether to save them.

----End

2.1.7 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System,Windows)

Three steps are required to shut down the U2000 server: stop the U2000 server processes, shutdown the database, and power off the server safely.

Stopping the U2000 Server ProcessesDo not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop theU2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system timeof the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes howto stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.

PrerequisiteExit all running U2000 clients.

ProcedureStep 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes.If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe,imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, andimapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes havestarted.

Step 3 In the U2000 software installation directory, for example, D:\U2000\server\bin, runstopnms.bat to stop U2000 server processes.

----End

ResultIn Windows Task Manager, click the Processes tab and check that imapmrb.exe,imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe, imap_sysmonitor.exe,ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and imapPortTrunkSvc.exehave been stopped.

Shutting Down the DatabaseThe U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down thedatabase, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the databaseon the Windows single-server system.



34

PrerequisiteThe U2000 server processes must have been stopped.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whetherMicrosoft SQL Server 2000 is running.The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed.

If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.

Step 3 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager.

Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, click .

Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

2.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System,Solaris)

Three steps are required to shut down the U2000 server: stop the U2000 server processes, shutdown the database, and power off the server safely.

Stopping the U2000 Server Processes

Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop theU2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system timeof the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes howto stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.

Prerequisite

Exit all running U2000 clients.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user.

Step 2 To check the running status of the U2000 process, run the following command:$ daem_ps


nmsuser 27069 1 0 10:31:39 ? 1:39 imapmrb nmsuser 27079 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:00 imapwatchdog -cmd start nmsuser 27075 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:50 imapsysd -cmd start nmsuser 27086 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:09 imapeventmgr nmsuser 23679 1 1 17:57:06 pts/8 0:02 imap_sysmonitor -cmd start nmsuser 27116 1 0 10:31:40 ? 0:52 ResourceMonitor -cmd start



35

NOTE

The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.

Step 3 Run the following commands to stop U2000 if it is running:

$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin$ ./stopnms.sh

----End

ResultRun the following command to check the running status of the U2000 process:

$ daem_ps

NOTE

The process is stopped if the displayed information is empty.

Shutting Down the DatabaseThe U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down thedatabase, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the databaseon the Solaris single-server system.


Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.TIP

Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.

Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:$ ps -ef | grep sybase



NOTE


Step 3 Run the following commands to stop the Sybase database if it is running:$ su - sybase$ . /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh$ cd /opt/sybase/OCS*/bin$ ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme1231> shutdown SYB_BACKUP



36

2> go1> shutdown2> go

NOTE

l Leave a space between the dot (.) and the command /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh.

l In the ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme123 command, Changeme123 specifies the password for thesa user of the Sybase database.

----End

ResultRun the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:

$ ps -ef | grep sybase

NOTE

The database is stoped if the displayed information does not contain /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.

2.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)This topic describes how to shut down a system. Do not power off a U2000 when it is properlymanaging NEs. The U2000 only needs to be shut down in special circumstances, such asswitching the power supply.

Procedure

Step 1 Stop all running U2000 clients.

Step 2 On the primary site, do as follows to stop the U2000 processes:1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster

Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.2. Choose File > New Cluster. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in the following figure.3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.

Then, click OK.5. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Offline > host_name from the

shortcut menu.6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.Wait patiently. If all the resources on the Resources tab page turn grey, it indicates that the NMSprocesses are stopped.

Step 3 Log in to the server of the active site and run the following commands to stop the VCS service:

C:\> hastop -all -force

In the Task Manager, check whether the had.exe process exists. If yes, right-click the processand stop it.

Step 4 Log in to the server of the standby site and perform the preceding step to stop the VCS serviceon the server of the standby site.

Step 5 Shut down the OS of the standby site.



37

1. Choose Start > Shut Down.2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.

Step 6 Shut down the OS of the active site.1. Choose Start > Shut Down.2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.

----End


Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop theU2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system timeof the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes howto stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.

Prerequisite


Procedure


Step 2 End the U2000 processes of the Veritas high availability system.1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster

Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.2. Choose File > New Cluster.3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.

Then, click OK.5. Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click

NMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu.6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

Shutting Down the Database

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down thedatabase, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the databaseon the Windows HA system.


Procedure

Step 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights.



38

Step 2 Start the VCS client.

1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas ClusterManager - Java Console to start the VCS client.

2. Choose File > New Cluster.

3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.

4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.Then, click OK.

Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-clickNMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that isdisplayed, click Yes.

Step 4 After the NMSServer resource is stopped, right-click AppService-SQLServer2000 and chooseOffline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.

----End

2.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High AvailabilitySystem (Solaris)

Four steps are required to shut down the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris):stop the U2000 server processes, shut down the database, stop the VCS service, and power offthe server safely.


Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop theU2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system timeof the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes howto stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.

Prerequisite


Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS of the active site as the root user.

Step 2 Stop the U2000 server processes.

l GUI mode:

1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:# hagui&

NOTEIf the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that thecurrent status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.

2. Click Connect to Cluster name.



39

NOTEIf you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster.

a. Click File > New Cluster.

b. Enter the IP address of application network.

c. Click OK.

3. Enter User Name and Password.

NOTEThe default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.

4. Click OK.5. Choose AppService from the navigation tree.6. Click the Resources tab. Right-click NMSServer and choose Offline > Host name

from the shortcut menu.Wait about 1 minute. If the NMSServer icon changes to grey, the U2000 processeshave been stopped.

l CLI mode:# hagrp -offline AppService -sys hostname

----End

Shutting Down the DatabaseThe U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down thedatabase, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the databaseon the Solaris HA system.


Procedure

Step 1 Perform the following operations to disable the Sybase database service at the primary site inthe HA system:

NOTE

By default, the Sybase database service at the secondary site is not running.

l GUI mode:

1. Log in to the primary site as user root.2. Run the following command to start the VCS client at the primary site:

# hagui &3. In the Cluster Monitor window, click the server record in the list.4. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the user name and the password of the VCS,

and click OK.

NOTE

The default user of the VCS is admin and the default password is password.

5. On the VCS client of the primary site, right-click the NMSServer node and chooseOffline > hostname from the shortcut menu.



40

6. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.7. Right-click the BackupServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut

menu.8. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.9. Right-click the DatabaseServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut

menu.10. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

l CLI mode:

1. Log in to the primary site as user root.2. Run the following command to shut down the U2000:

# hares -offline NMSServer -sys hostname3. Run the following command to disable the Sybase database service:

# hares -offline BackupServer -sys hostname# hares -offline DatabaseServer -sys hostname

Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database service is disabled:

# ps -ef | grep sybase

If the following message is displayed, the Sybase database service has been disabled:

root 9629 14603 0 07:46:52 pts/3 0:00 grep sybase

----End

Stopping the VCS ServiceThis topic describes how to stop the VCS service.

PrerequisiteThe U2000 and database must have been shut down.

ContextBefore powering off the server safely, manually stop the VCS service; otherwise, the server mayfail to shut down properly.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OS on the server as the root user.

Step 2 Run the following command to stop the VCS service:

# hastop -all -force

----End

2.2 Web LCT Quck GuideThe following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.



41

2.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEsTo configure and manage NEs by using the Web LCT, first connect the Web LCT to the NEswith Ethernet cables or serial port cables.

Procedurel Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using Ethernet cables.

1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Web LCT computer.2. Route the cable to the equipment side and connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet

cable to the NMS interface of the equipment panel.NOTE

The IP address of the NMS and the IP address of the equipment must belong to the same networksegment.

l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs over the DCN.1. Connect the Web LCT computer to the DCN using an Ethernet cable.2. Connect one end of another Ethernet cable to the NMS interface of the equipment

panel and connect the other end of the line to the DCN.l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using the RS 232 serial port cable.

1. Connect the serial port cable to the Web LCT computer.2. Route the cable to the equipment and connect the RS 232 connector of the serial port

cable to the RS 232 interface of the equipment panel.NOTE

For the location of the RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet interface on the equipment, see theHardware Description for your equipment.

----End

2.2.2 Starting the Web LCTYou need to start the Web LCT before logging in to configure and manage NEs.

PrerequisiteThe Web LCT computer and equipment must be correctly connected.

ProcedureStep 1 Start the Web LCT computer.

Step 2 Double-click the shortcut icon Start Web LCT on the desktop. The Web LCT starts and thelogin page for the Web LCT is displayed.

Step 3 Enter Password.NOTE

By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT fromillegal logins, immediately change the initial password and keep the new one.

Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.

----End



42

2.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCTYou can log in to the Web LCT server through Internet Explorer without installing the serveron the local computer.

Prerequisitel The Web LCT server must be started correctly.l The Internet Explorer pop-up blocker must be turned off.

Procedure

Step 1 Open Internet Explorer.

Step 2 Enter the IP address of the Web LCT server in the address field. The Web LCT Login dialogbox is displayed.

NOTE

Enter the IP address of the server, for example, http://10.70.73.1:11080/WebLCT. The four octets10.70.73.1 is the IP address of the server computer and 11080 is the port number.

NOTE

The IP address of the Web LCT server is case-sensitive. Ensure that WebLCT is entered correctly.

Step 3 Enter the Password.

NOTE

By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT fromillegal logins, immediately change this password and keep the new one.

If a user account is used to log in to the NE with incorrect passwords for consecutive five times, the useraccount is locked and will be unlocked 15 minutes after the last failed login. Two login attempts areconsidered as consecutive if the interval between the two attempts is within three minutes.

The unlocking operation cannot be performed through the NMS. Only the system can (automatically)unlock the user account.

Here locking means that the user account of a specified NE is locked and the other NEs are not affected.

Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.

NOTE

An NE supports the login of a single Web LCT user at a time. Concurrent logins of several Web LCT userson an NE is not supported on an NE.

----End

2.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCTYou are recommended to shut down the Web LCT by strictly observing the following procedure.

PrerequisiteThe Web LCT must be started normally.

Procedure

Step 1 Click to close the NE Explorer.



43

Step 2 lick to close the NE list.

Step 3 Double-click the shortcut icon for Web LCT shutdown to stop the Tomcat service.

----End

2.3 Entering the Common ViewsThis task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS)and functions of the views.

2.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.

PrerequisiteYou are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

U2000

Procedurel To open the Main Topology, log in to the U2000 client.

l Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.

----End

2.3.2 NE List on the Web LCTNE List is the main user interface of the Web LCT. The Web LCT performs the following NEmanagement operations through NE List: adding NEs, logging in to NEs, logging out of NEs,deleting NEs, browsing system logs, and setting time format.

NOTE

NE List is refreshed periodically and the NE information is automatically refreshed every five seconds.

The Web LCT supports the focus display function. After the mouse cursor resides on a shortcut icon forabout two seconds, the description of the shortcut icon is displayed.

After the Web LCT client is successfully started, the NE List window is displayed.

The Web LCT supports backup of the NE database to the SCC board so that the configuration data of theNE can be stored.

User Interface

Figure 2-1 shows the NE List window of the Web LCT.



44

Figure 2-1 NE List

2.3.3 Opening the NE ExplorerThe NE Explorer is the key interface for the U2000 to configure a single station. After openingthe NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in ahierarchical manner.


Background InformationYou can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000l Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. In the displayed window, right-click

an NE in the left-hand pane and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800/6800, the icon of the NE can be directly placed on the Main Topology.

Double-click the NE icon and then click to display the NE Explorer.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCTl In the NE List, select an NE and click NE Explorer, or double-click the NE in the NE

List. Then, the NE Explorer is displayed.

----End



45

2.3.4 Opening the NE PanelThe NE Panel displays subracks and boards on an NE. The color of the icon indicates the currentstate of the component. On the NMS, the NE Panel is a key user interface for configuring,monitoring, and maintaining equipment.

PrerequisiteYou are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000l In the Main Topology, double-click an NE icon and select the NE in the pane on the left

side. The pane on the right side displays the NE Panel by default.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCTl Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. The pane on the right side displays the NE

Panel by default.

----End

User InterfaceNE Panel is product-specific. Figure 2-2 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.Figure 2-3 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 2-4shows the NE Panelof the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 2-5shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800.



46

Figure 2-2 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32



47

Figure 2-3 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64



48



49

Figure 2-4 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 6800

Figure 2-5 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800

2.4 Using Online HelpOnline Help provides help information about the U2000.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is displayed.



50

TIP

When using the U2000 client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help page.

----End



51

3 Commissioning and ConfigurationProcedure During Deployment

This section describes the general commissioning procedures.

The commissioning procedures for the equipment can be divided into two parts: optical powercommissioning and network commissioning.

l Optical power commissioning procedures individually commission the optical powervalues of NEs and boards based on the optical signal flow. They also remove the abnormalattenuation of lines or boards based on the requirements of optical power, and the gain andinsertion losses of the boards.

l Network commissioning procedures include the commissioning protection function,testing bit errors, and other functional commissioning operations at the network level.

Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 provides the general commissioning procedures.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide

3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure DuringDeployment


52

Figure 3-1 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 8800/6800

Uploading the NE Data

Checking the Installation

Powering On and Checking the Equipment

Setting Up Optical Paths

Installing the Equipment

Commissioning Optical Power

Testing Bit Errors

Configuring the WDM

Protection

Commissioning the System

Installation

Configuration&

Commissioning

Configuring NE and Network

Configuring the Service

Creating an Optical Network

Element

Setting NE ID and IP

Creating an NE

Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS

Setting Performance Monitoring

Parameters of an NE

Creating FibersCreating OCh trails using the

trail search function

Configuring the WDM Feature

Refer to Configuring the

Service on Configuration

Guide

Setting Manually

Extended ECC Communication

Checking Network-Wide

Software Version

Configuring the ROADM

Configuring Port of the Board


Feature on Feature

Description

Backing Up the NE Data

: Mandatory

: Optional




53

Figure 3-2 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 3800

Uploading the NE Data

Checking the Installation

Powering On and Checking the Equipment

Setting Up Optical Paths

Installing the Equipment


Testing Bit Errors

Configuring the WDM

Protection

Commissioning the System

Installation

Configuration&

Commissioning

Configuring NE and Network

Configuring the Service

Creating an Optical Network

Element


Creating an NE

Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS

Setting Performance Monitoring

Parameters of an NE

Creating FibersCreating OCh trails using the

trail search function

Configuring the WDM Feature


Service on Configuration

Guide

Setting Manually

Extended ECC Communication

Checking Network-Wide

Software Version

Configuring Port of the Board


Feature on Feature

Description

Backing Up the NE Data

: Mandatory

: Optional

You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment byusing either the iManager U2000 (hereinafter referred to as U2000) or the OptiX iManagerU2000 Web LCT (hereinafter referred to as Web LCT). All the operations that can be performedon the Web LCT can be performed on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT haslower requirements on the computer hardware and can be started quickly.

Table 3-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment.

Table 3-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment

No. Task Mandatory/Optional

Tool

1 Creating NEs in Batches. Mandatory U2000 or WebLCT

2 Creating Optical NEs. Mandatory U2000




54


Tool

3 Uploading the NE Data. Mandatory U2000

4 Setting NE ID and IP. Mandatory U2000 or WebLCT

5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/WebLCT Server Manually.

Mandatory U2000 or WebLCT

6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters ofan NE.


7 Setting Manually Extended ECCCommunication. Perform this task when thenetwork uses HWECC for communication andmore than four Huawei equipment NEs use theextended ECC for communication.

Optional U2000

Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task whenthe network uses IP over DCC for communication.

Optional U2000

Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task whenthe network uses OSI over DCC for communication.

Optional U2000

8 Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Optional U2000

9 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode.Perform this task on the U2000.

Mandatoryon theU2000

U2000

10 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search. Perform thistask on the U2000.

Mandatoryon theU2000

U2000

11 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection. Perform this task when ROADMstations are configured on the actual network.

Optionalaccordingto thenetwork

U2000 or WebLCT

12 Commission optical power by using one of thefollowing methods as required:l Commissioning Optical Power on Sitel Remotely Commissioning Optical Powerl Automatic CommissioningNOTE

See Example of Commissioning Optical Power Basedon 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System to commissionoptical power of a 40Gbit/s system.


13 Configuring Boards. Mandatory U2000 or WebLCT

14 Configuring Services. Mandatory U2000




55


Tool

15 Configuring System Features. Mandatory U2000

16 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE andRemoving Abnormal Alarms.


17 Testing Protection Switching. Mandatory U2000

18 Testing Data Features. Mandatory U2000

19 Testing System Features. Mandatory U2000

20 Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Mandatory U2000

21 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System andConfiguring the Orderwire Phone in an OCSSystem.

Optional U2000 or WebLCT

22 Testing Orderwire Functions. Optional U2000 or WebLCT

23 Testing Bit Errors. Mandatory OTN analyzer orSDH analyzer

24 Checking the entire network against the Checklistfor Commissioning During Deployment. Ensurethat the network configurations are correct.


25 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCCBoard.





56

4 Configuring NE and Network

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks.

4.1 Creating NEs in BatchesWhen the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs thatcommunicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to whichthe IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker andmore accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches isrecommended.

4.2 Creating Optical NEsThe U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. Thereare four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA andWDM_OTM.

4.3 Logging In to an NEOn the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.

4.4 Uploading the NE DataBy uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the networkmanagement system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data byuploading the data.

4.5 Setting NE ID and IPECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searchingon the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign aunique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if youneed to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on theU2000.

4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server ManuallyFor NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistentwith the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record thetime that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time ofthe U2000/Web LCT server.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network


57

4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NEBy setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performancemonitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running ofthe NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed bymaintenance personnel.

4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC CommunicationWhen there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can beused to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extendedECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECCcommunication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead.

4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software VersionsAfter you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each boardon the NE.

4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic ModeIn graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flowdiagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number offiber connections one by one.

4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail SearchAfter you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trailinformation does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search forthe cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDMtrails at the network layer of the U2000.

4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-ConnectionOptical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.

4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflictand avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. TheID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.

4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflictand avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. TheID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.

4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflictand avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. TheID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.



58

4.1 Creating NEs in BatchesWhen the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs thatcommunicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to whichthe IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker andmore accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches isrecommended.

Prerequisite

l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.

l The U2000 must communicate properly with the GNE.

l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched out.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000 or Web LCT

Procedure on the U20001. Choose File > Discovery > NE... from the Main Menu. The NE Discovery window is

displayed.

2. Select the Transport NE Search tab.

3. Select the search mode from the drop-down list of Search Mode.

l Sets the Search Mode as Search for NE.

(1) In the Search Domain dialog box, click Add and the Input Search Domain dialogbox is displayed.

(2) Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAPAddress, and enter Search Address, User Name, and Password. Then, clickOK.

NOTEYou can repeat the above steps to add more search domains. You can delete the systemdefault search domain.

l If you use IP address to search for NEs:

l only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can be searched outin normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range of GNE becausebroadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the network (to prevent networkstorm).

l search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address of GNE if youneed to search for the NEs across routers.

l If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAPAddress.

(3) In the Search for NE dialog box, you can perform the following operations:

– Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.



59

NOTE

l The default NE user is root.

l The default password is password.

– Select Upload after being created, so that the NE data can be uploaded to theU2000 after the NE is created.

NOTE

You can select all options in the Search for NE area to search for NEs, create NEs,and upload the NE data at a time.

l Sets the Search Mode is IP auto discovery.

NOTE

If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After enabling IPauto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEs related tothe GNE.

CAUTIONIn the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router, these NEs cannotbe searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be searched out only by networksegment.

4. Click Next and the Result area is displayed.TIP

You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.

5. Optional: Click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE ID dialog box is displayed. Userscan check against the Bar Code List by the value of Bar Code, and then modify the NEName, Extend NE ID, Base NE ID, and IP Address fields accordingly.

NOTE

The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the software commissioningpersonnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.

6. Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the search, youcan select the uncreated NEs from the Relust list and click Create. The Create dialog boxis displayed. Enter the NE User and Password. Click OK.

7. Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The Set GatewayNE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is

displayed.

2. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.

3. Click Add, and the New Domain dialog box is displayed.

4. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address in theDomain Address field.

5. Click OK.



60

NOTEYou can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.

6. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search dialog box.

7. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.

NOTE

l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment.

l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.

8. After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A promptmessage is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.

9. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or right-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enterlct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.

TIP

You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.

If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to multipleNEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.

If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do notneed to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name andpassword for login last time.

Reference Information

Category Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Creating a Single NE If you have obtained the ID ofan NE, you can create the NEmanually.

Switching a Logged-In NEUser

You can switch a login NEuser without logging out ofthe U2000 or Web LCT.

Modifying the NE Name You can change the NE nameas required. This operationdoes not affect the running ofthe NE.

Deleting NEs If you have created a wrongNE, you can delete the NEfrom the U2000 or Web LCT.

Postrequisite

After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:

l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.

l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.



61

4.2 Creating Optical NEsThe U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. Thereare four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA andWDM_OTM.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.

l For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creatingthe NE of the type.


U2000

Procedure on the U20001. Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > NE.

2. In the Create NE dialog box that is displayed, click corresponding to Optical NE in theleft pane, and then select the type of the optical NE that you want to create.

3. Click Basic Attributes and enter the attributes such as the optical NE name according tothe customer's planning.

4. Click Resource Division and select an NE or a board from the idle optical NEs, and then

click .TIP

To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE andchoose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list on

the left, and then click to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.

5. Click OK.

6. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.



(Optional) Related Operation Modifying the Optical NEName

See this section to change thename of an optical NEindependently.

4.3 Logging In to an NEOn the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.



62

Prerequisite

The NE must be created and must be working normally.

The user must have logged in to the U2000.


U2000

Background Information

On the U2000, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in to the NE.

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel for the ONE.

Step 2 Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the OperationResult dialog box.

----End

4.4 Uploading the NE DataBy uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the networkmanagement system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data byuploading the data.

Prerequisite

l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

l The NE must be created successfully.


U2000

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management.

2. In the left topology tree, select a created NE and click . In Configuration DataManagement List, select an NE whose NE Status is Unconfigured.

3. Click Upload. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the upload.

4. When the upload is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. ClickClose.



63



(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the NE Data You can configure the NEdata in upload or manualmode.

4.5 Setting NE ID and IPECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searchingon the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign aunique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if youneed to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on theU2000.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher.

The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.


U2000


The master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000. They share one NE IDand one NE IP.

Precautions

CAUTIONl Changing the NE ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt NE communication.

l Before changing the NE ID, delete the function connected with the NE ID, for example,the Client 1+1 Protection group, the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection group, the OpticalWavelength Shared Protection group, the Optical Line Protection group, IPA, ALC, APE,EAPE, fiber connection and so on. After changing the NE ID, reconnect the fiber connectionand re-configure the protection group, IPA, ALC and other function connected with NE IDon the U2000.

l Before changing the NE ID, delete the manually added monitoring relationship betweenthe WMU board and the OTU board on the NE. After changing the NE ID, restore thedeleted monitoring relationship on the U2000.



64

Procedurel For Non-Gateway NEs

1. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.

2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute fromthe Function Tree.

3. Click the Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and theNew Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

CAUTIONFor non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between thisNE and other NEs on the U2000.

l For Gateway NEs

1. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.

2. In the NE Explorer, select the GNE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute fromthe Function Tree.

3. Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the NewExtended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

CAUTIONFor GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and otherNEs on the U2000. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs thatare originally connected to the GNE.

l Setting NEs IP

NOTEIf the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE varieswith the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE ID and IPaddress is deleted automatically.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > CommunicationParameters from the Function Tree.

2. Set the communication parameters of the NE, including IP, extended ID, gatewayIP and subnet mask.

3. Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Warning dialog boxes. Then clickClose in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

NOTE

For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs thatare originally connected to the GNE.

----End



65

4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCTServer Manually

For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistentwith the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record thetime that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time ofthe U2000/Web LCT server.


On the Web LCT, the synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or NULL.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000 or Web LCT

Background InformationSynchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verifythat the system time on the U2000/Web LCT server is correct. If you want to change the systemtime, exit the U2000/Web LCT to reset the time, and then restart the U2000/Web LCT.

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization

from the Function Tree. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.2. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. A dialog box is

displayed. Click Yes.3. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In this manner, the NE time

is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization

from the Function Tree.2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.3. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the NE

time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.



66



(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the NE Time With the timesynchronization function,consistency is maintainedbetween the NE time and theU2000/Web LCT servertime.

4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NEBy setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performancemonitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running ofthe NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed bymaintenance personnel.

Prerequisite

You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.


U2000 or Web LCT

Procedure on the U20001. Choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu of

the U2000.

2. Select an NE in the left-hand pane, and click .

3. Select the desired NE in the right-hand pane.

4. Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the check box24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled.

5. Click the behind From field, select the date, and enter the time to set the beginningtime and end time for monitoring.

NOTE

The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to monitor theperformance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of the NMS andNE. To set the end time, select the check box before To first. The end time must be later than thestart time. If the check box before To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring function isenabled all the time.

6. Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed, click OK.

7. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close to finish the operation.



67

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor

Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE.NOTE

An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.

2. In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind theFrom field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.

TIP

The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, right-clickthe time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.

3. In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the Fromfield to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE.

4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

Reference InformationCategory Item Description

(Optional) Related Operation Performance Management To ensure the normalfunctioning of the network,the network management andmaintenance personnelshould periodically checkand monitor the network bytaking proper performancemanagement measures.

4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC CommunicationWhen there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can beused to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extendedECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECCcommunication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead.

PrerequisiteThe NE must be created on the U2000. The communication between the U2000 and the NE mustbe normal.

The communication between NEs must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000

PrecautionThe extended ECC communication is disabled by default. To use the automatic extended ECCcommunication, you must enable the extended ECC communication on the U2000 as follows:



68

In the NE Explorer, select Communication > ECC Management from the function tree, andclick Apply. And click OK in the Warning dialog box.

Background Informationl OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet

port on the EFI1 and EFI2 board.

l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet porton the EFI board.

l OptiX OSN 6800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on theAUX board.

l OptiX OSN 3800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on theAUX board.

When configuring the manually extended ECC, one server end NE can have a maximum ofseven client end NEs. One client end NE can function as the server end NE of another ECCgroup. Normally, the NE without the optical supervisory channel board is configured as theclient end, and the NE with the optical supervisory channel board is configured as the serverend.

The manually extended ECC communication can be set on site or remotely. When setting theECC extended mode remotely, with the normal communication between the NE and theU2000, set the client NE first and then the server NE.

When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, set the NE without the optical supervisorychannel board first and then the NE with the optical supervisory channel board.

In the case of the NE without the optical supervisory channel board, the communication betweenthe U2000 and the NE stops after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The communicationbetween the U2000 and the NE is restored after the setting on the NE with the optical supervisorychannel board at the station is complete.

CAUTIONWhen setting the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly follow the setting sequence as required.The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of the gateway NEmust be modified last. Otherwise, the communication between the U2000 and the unreachableNEs cannot be restored automatically. In this case, the ECC extended mode of the NEs must beset again on site.

The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs.

Hence, when setting the ECC extended mode remotely, work out the ECC setting plan in advanceto ensure that the settings are correct.

For example, a station has nine NEs. The optical supervisory channel board is configured at NEA. NE A is the server end. NE H is the client end of NE A and the server end of NE I. Figure4-1 shows the network topology and Table 4-1 provides the IP addresses of the NEs and theECC setting plan.

For example, a station has nine NEs.



69

Figure 4-1 Network topology of a station

H

C

D

E

F

G

A

Server NE

Client NE

I

B

DCN

NOTE

NEs of the station are cascaded through network cables.

Table 4-1 Manually extended ECC setting plan

NE IP Address Set Server Set Client

IP Port Opposite IP Port

A 132.37.49.130 0.0.0.0a 1601 - 1601

B 132.37.49.131 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

C 132.37.49.132 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

D 132.37.49.133 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

E 132.37.49.134 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

F 132.37.49.135 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

G 132.37.49.136 - - 132.37.49.130 1601

H 132.37.49.137 0.0.0.0a 1602 132.37.49.130 1601

I 132.37.49.138 - - 132.37.49.137 1602

a: Indicates the local NE.



70

When setting the manually extended ECC communication at the station remotely, follow thesequence below:

NOTE

The default ECC extended mode is automatic mode.

I→H client end→G, F, E, D, C and B→A server end→H server end

During the configuration, the status of the communication between the U2000 and NEs changesfrequently.

l After the setting at NE I is complete, the communication between the U2000 and NE Istops.

l After the setting at NE H client end is complete, the communication between the U2000and NE H stops.

l After the settings on NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G client end are complete, the communicationbetween the U2000 and NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G stops.

l After the setting at NE A server end is complete, the communication between the U2000and NEs B, C, D, E, F, G, and H restores automatically.

l After the setting at NE H server end is complete, the communication between the U2000and NE I restores automatically.

Procedurel Setting the Client NE

1. Log in to the U2000.2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed.3. Select one NE as the server NE. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.4. Choose Communication > Communication Parameter from the left-hand Function

Tree. Observe the NE IP in the right-hand view and record the NE IP.5. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click any one remote NE and select NE

Explorer.6. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.7. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.8. Enter the IP of the server NE in the Opposite IP field and the port number in the

Port field in the Set Client dialog box.

NOTEThe port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the server NE.

9. Click Apply in the Set Client dialog box.10. An Operation Result dialog is displayed indicating an Operation succeeded

message. Click Close.

NOTE

l The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet.

l The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port and theserver port of the local NE cannot be the same. For specific procedure, refer to Setting the ServerNE.

l The port number must be within the range from 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.

l Setting the Server NE



71

1. Log in to the U2000.

2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed.

3. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.

4. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.

5. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.

6. Enter the port number in the Port field in the Set Server dialog box. The port numbermust be the consistent with that value entered in the Port field in the Set Client dialogbox of the client NE.

NOTE

l The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the client NE.

l The port number of the server NE must be the same as that of the client NE forcommunication.

7. Click Apply in the Set Server dialog box.

8. A dialog box is displayed indicating an This operation will reset the NEcommunication. Continue? message. Click OK.

----End

4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software VersionsAfter you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each boardon the NE.

PrerequisiteThe U2000 server and client must be started up.


U2000

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the main menu.

2. Select Board in the Physical Inventory Type. The Board List tab is displayed.

3. Click Filter... in the Board List tab. The Filter window is displayed.

4. Click corresponding to NE Object. The Select NE Object tab is displayed. Thenselect the desired NE from the tab, and click OK.

5. The status and version information of each board of the NE are displayed in the userinterface.

6. Click Query. In the displayed Please Select Query Scope dialog box, select Selectedrows or All rows as prompted. Then click OK to query information, such as the softwareversion of the board. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

7. Obtain the software version of each board in the Software Version column and makerecords.



72

NOTE

The NEs that are loaded with the same software package should have the same software version. Similarly,the same boards on different NEs that are loaded with the same software package should also have thesame software version. If version inconsistency occurs, immediately provide feedback to the regionaloffice of Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic ModeIn graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flowdiagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number offiber connections one by one.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l Optical NEs and NEs must be created.l Logic board has been created on the U2000.l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Planned Wavelength No./

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designedwavelength.

l Applies to WDM equipment.



After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE.You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with theU2000 side.

Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. ClickSynchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in theUncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fiberscannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networkingdesign, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create theremaining fibers.

NOTE

The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topologyview, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Procedure on the U2000

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber/CableSynchronization from the Function Tree.

2. Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side andthat on the NE side are displayed.



73

NOTE

Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides. U2000 is thesame as the fiber data on NEs.

Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.

Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.

3. Handle different situations as follows:l If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click

Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronizedfibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.

l If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cableto delete the uncreated fibers in U2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click CreateFiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.

Step 2 To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:

NOTEThe source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, seeConfiguring the Edge Port.

1. Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab.2. In the Signal Flow Diagram, right-click in the blank area and choose Create Fiber from

the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as "+".3. Select the source board and port and click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+".4. Select the sink board and port and click OK.

TIP

When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exitobject selection.

5. In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.

6. Click OK.



74

TIP

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

Step 3 To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:NOTE

The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, seeConfiguring the Edge Port.

NOTECreating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. In fact, the FIU fiberconnections between stations are created.

1. Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" .2. Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology.3. Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box

displayed.4. Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again.5. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology.6. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box displayed.7. Click OK and enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box

displayed.

8. Click OK. The created fiber is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE on theMain Topology.

TIP

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.

Step 4 Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.

----End



75


(Optional) Related Operation Creating FiberConnections in List Mode

Compared with the graphicmode, the creating fiberconnections in the list modeis not visual. Hence, the listmode is applicable to thescenario where you create afew fiber connections only.

PostrequisiteAfter you create fiber connections, you need to verify all fibers are created to ensure that thefiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.

4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail SearchAfter you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trailinformation does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search forthe cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDMtrails at the network layer of the U2000.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l Fiber connections must be correctly created for the WDM equipment.

Precautionsl If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the

following methods:– Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the trail

function. This method affects services.– Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail.

l You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUTport of the RMU9 board and from the IN port to the DM port of the WSMD4/WSMD2board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is not supported. These types ofsingle-NE optical cross-connections do not impact services. You need to create these typesof single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to manage theservices transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management function.




76

Procedure for the U20001. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail

from the main menu.

2. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.

NOTEIn the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from thenetworking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area beyondthe selected subnet range.

3. Click Next to begin the search for trails. The U2000 takes a while to return the results,depending on the number of services.

NOTE

l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end toend trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.

l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: If the networking changes, the trail maycause interruption of service flow. For example, the key information for the trail, includingdeleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.

4. Click Next to view the conflicting trail information. If you want to set a trail managementflag, check the Management Flag check box, or right-click it and select the managementflag.

NOTESkip this step if you selected the "Automatically create trails after searching policy" in Step 2.

5. Click Next to view all discrete services in the network.

NOTEIf Step 4 is performed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the networklayer. This does not affect services for the actual NE or the data for an individual NE on theU2000.

6. After the search is complete, click Finish.

4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-ConnectionOptical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.

Prerequisite


The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT.

The edge port must be configured.

When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical cross-connection of the single station uses.


U2000 or Web LCT



77

Background InformationWhen you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automaticallyor manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board automaticallyadjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, youneed to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic opticaladd/drop multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the several types of optical cross-connection trails. For details, see Feature Description.

NOTE

The WSMD9/WSMD4/WSMD2 can be used to replace the WSD9 or the WSM9.

OA indicates the optical amplifier boards such as OAU1 and OBU1.

The FIU can be added before or after the OA.

In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards such as D40, D40V and MR2 can be added between theWSD9 and OTU.

In add networking, the multiplexer boards such as M40, M40V and MR2 can be added between the OTUand WSM9.

NOTE

The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be configuredin addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a singlestation. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection

Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab inthe right-hand pane.

2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

NOTE

Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right ofSource Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the Available

Wavelength list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelength. Click OK.

3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

NOTE

When the operation is performed on the U2000, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operationis successful. Click Close.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection

Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab inthe right-hand pane.

2. Click Create. The Create NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

NOTE

1. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right ofSource Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available

Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Click OK.



78

3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.



(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the Edge Port Setting an edge port is to setan optical port of an NE as aconnection point betweenthis NE and another NE.

Creating Board OpticalCross-Connection

The intra-board opticalwavelength route can be setfor a board that performsgrooming at the optical layer.The intra-board service routeis established through thecreation of single-boardoptical cross-connection.

4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800T32/8800 T64

The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflictand avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. TheID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.

Prerequisite

The U2000 server and client should be started normally.

The master/slave subracks should be installed.

Fiber connection should be done.


U2000


The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of theEFI2. The EFI1 board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0.The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the twoDIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW2,and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid.The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently,the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-2, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.



79

l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the CPLD, the two DIP switches arenumbered SW1 and SW2.

l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

NOTE

For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in theProduct Description.

Figure 4-2 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board

ON

SW1

(ID5)ONONON

ON

SW2

ONONON

EFI1

(ID6)(ID7)(ID8)

(ID1)(ID2)(ID3)(ID4)

CPLD

Figure 4-3 The ID of the subrack: 1-15

ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14ONONONON


15



80


SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

16

SW2 Subrack ID

17

SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

18

SW1

19 20 21

22 23 24

25 26 27

ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


28 29 30ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


31ONONONON


ONONONON


The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrackis 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.

On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE withone ID and one IP.

Precautions

CAUTIONChanging the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slavesubracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrackID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust theDIP switches on the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planningso that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.

NOTEAfter the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reseton the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.

Step 2 Log in to the U2000.

Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE.



81

Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer.

1. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reseton the NE after the DIP switches adjustment.

2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warmreset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.

NOTE

l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack powersupply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slavesubracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.

l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a resetoperation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, changethe ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the powersupply of this subrack.

Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current Alarms todisplay the Browse Current Alarms.

Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.

1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between themaster subrack and the slave subracks are chains.

Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.

1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI1board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIPswitches setting for each subrack is unique.

2. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.

Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.

1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches onthe EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set theID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCCboard in this subrack.

2. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.

Step 9 Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave subrack andadd the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board is available andoperate normally (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave subrack iscorrect.

----End



(Optional) Related Operation Configuring Master/SlaveShelf

Describes how to modify theattributes of a master or slaveshelf.



82

4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflictand avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. TheID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.

PrerequisiteThe U2000 server and client should be started normally.




Background InformationThe master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of theEFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0. Thesetting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIPswitches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW2, andID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. Thebits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently, thefirst 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-5, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 000001,which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the T1, the two DIP switches are

numbered SW1 and SW2.l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.

NOTE




83

Figure 4-5 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board

U8SERIAL

NM_ETH2

T1

SW1 SW2

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID1)

(ID2)

(ID3)

(ID4)

ON

ON

ON

ON

(ID5)

(ID6)

(ID7)

(ID8)

SW1 SW2


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14ONONONON


15



84


SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

16

SW2 Subrack ID

17

SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

18

SW1

19 20 21

22 23 24

25 26 27

ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


28 29 30ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


ONONONON


31ONONONON


ONONONON


The LCD front panel of the AUX indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrackis 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.


Precautions


Procedure

Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LCDs on the AUX boards in the master and slavesubracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrackID displayed on an LCD blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust theDIP switches on the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planningso that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.

NOTEAfter the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reseton the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.





85


1. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reseton the NE after the DIP switches adjustment.

2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after DIP switch adjustment,warm reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.

NOTE


l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a resetoperation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, changethe ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the powersupply of this subrack.

Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE select Browse Current Alarms to displaythe Browse Current Alarms.




1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFIboard in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIPswitches setting for each subrack is unique.



1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches onthe EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set theID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LCD on the AUXboard in this subrack.



----End







86

4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflictand avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. TheID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.

PrerequisiteThe U2000 server and client should be started normally.




Background InformationFor OptiX OSN 6800, the master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3 of the EFI. The ID of the master subrack is 0 by default. TheAUX board can be used to set the ID of the slave subrack. The setting is realized by jumpers.l The TN11AUX01 has three jumpers, Figure 4-8 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to

low are 1–3.l The TN11AUX02 has eight jumpers, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. Figure

4-9 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to low are J16, J15, J4, J3, and J2.Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. The three jumpers of the TN11AUX01 can beused to realize eight states that represent decimal values 0–7. The default value of the threejumpers is 000. The five jumpers of the TN11AUX02 can be used to realize 32 states thatrepresent decimal values 0–31. The default value of the three jumpers is 00000.l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the

value 1.l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are

not placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 0.

NOTE


For OptiX OSN 6800, in Figure 4-10 the value represented by the three jumpers is 0001, whichis 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.



87

Figure 4-8 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01

jumpers

321

CPU

Figure 4-9 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02

Jumpers

CPU

J2J3J4

J15J16J17

J14J18



88

Figure 4-10 Jumper on the AUX

1 2 3

jumper cap

representing 0

J4 J3 J2

TN11AUX01

TN11AUX02

jumper cap

representing 0 representing 1

representing 0 representing 0 representing 1

J15

representing 0

J16

representing 0

NOTE

The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed overthe two pins.

The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrackis 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.


Precautions


ProcedureStep 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slave

subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack



89

ID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust thejumpers on the AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planningso that the jumper setting for each subrack is unique.

NOTEAfter the adjustment of the jumpers (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset onthe NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.




1. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reseton the NE after the jumper adjustment.

2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warmreset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.

NOTE


l To avoid service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform the resetoperation in this manner: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then,change the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot thepower supply of this subrack.

Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE to display the Browse CurrentAlarms.



2. Perform a warm reset on all boards in the master and slave subracks.


1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the jumpers on the AUXboard in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the jumpersetting for each subrack is unique.



1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the jumpers on theAUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the IDof the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCCboard in this subrack.



----End



90






91

5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to commission optical power on site.

5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical PowerThis section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.

5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.

5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.

5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.

5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH BoardIf the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. Whenthis occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. Bytesting the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmittedoptical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.

5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifierboard.

5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman AmplifierThis section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Ramanamplifier.

5.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory ChannelThis section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.

5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer BoardThis section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of themultiplexer and demultiplexer board.

5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site


92

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of theROADM board.

5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of DCMThe single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.

5.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-WavelengthSystemThis section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioningprocedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.



93

5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical PowerThis section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.

5.1.1 Basic RequirementsThis section describes the basic requirements on commissioning optical power.

Basic requirements on commissioning optical power are as follows:

l After commissioning, the optical power should be in the range of the minimum andmaximum values.

l Certain optical power margins should be reserved during commissioning to ensure that thepower fluctuations in a range do not affect services.

l After commissioning, the optical power must meet the requirements for system expansion.

Requirements of commissioning the CWDM network are as follows:l The CWDM network does not support the OA (Optical Amplifier). Therefore, for a CWDM

network, only the optical power needs to be commissioned. The OSNR and flatness do notneed to be commissioned.

l Only the receive optical power of the OTU needs to be commissioned. Specificcommissioning requirements and procedures are similar to those for the DWDM network.

During capacity expansion, the maximum number of wavelengths that you can add at one timeis half the number of existing wavelengths or less. If there is only one wavelength in the system,only one wavelength can be added at a time.

5.1.2 General Commissioning SequenceThis section describes the general sequence of commissioning optical power.

General Sequence of Commissioning Optical PowerOptical power for NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow.During the commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the requirementson optical power, gain, and insertion loss for each board.

Generally, the optical power for the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisorychannel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements on theboards.

Optical Power Commissioning ProceduresUsually, the spans between two OTMs in an OptiX WDM system are considered as one networksegment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit direction and thereceive direction.

For an OptiX WDM system, the optical power for a network segment is commissioned on a per-NE basis according to the signal flow.

First, commission the transmit optical power for one OTM. Then commission the optical powerfor each downstream NE along the transmit direction. Finally, commission the receive optical



94

power for the destination OTM. After commissioning the optical power along the transmitdirection, commission the optical power in the reverse direction of the system.

Project X is used as an example to describe how to commission the optical power of an OptiXWDM system.

Figure 5-1 shows the networking diagram of Project X. A, B, C, D, E and F are optical NEs(ONEs). The equipment forms a ring network. ONE A and ONE C are back-to-back OTMstations, ONE B, ONE D, and ONE F are OLA stations, and ONE E is an OADM station.

Figure 5-1 Networking diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM

Station D OLAStation B OLA Station C 2OTM

135km/39dB 85km/27dB


55km/15dB 60km/16dB

:OTM :OLA : OADM

Project X consists of two network segments: A-B-C and A-F-E-D-C.

First, commission the optical power on the A-B-C network segment according to the followingsequence.

l Commission the optical power along the A-B-C signal flow:

– At ONE A, commission the optical power to ONE B.

– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE A.

– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE C.

– At ONE C, commission the optical power from ONE B.

l Commission the optical power along the C-B-A signal flow:

– At ONE C, commission the optical power to ONE B.

– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE C.

– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE A.

– At ONE A, commission the optical power from ONE B.

Based on the previous procedure sequence, commission the optical power for the A-F-E-D-Cnetwork segment in both directions.

NOTE

For details on how to commission the optical power of an NE, see 5.12 Example of CommissioningOptical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System.



95

5.1.3 Commissioning Tools and InstrumentsThe optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are required for commissioningoptical power.l Optical power meter: Used to measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM

side of the OTU, and measure the total optical power of the multiplexed signals.l Optical spectrum analyzer: Used to measure the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio

(OSNR), and the central wavelength of each wavelength in the multiplexed signals.

Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to measure the optical power. Usethe following method to verify the calibration:Measure the optical power at the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the optical spectrumanalyzer. Compare it with the optical power obtained by using the optical power meter. Ifthe difference is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is morethan 0.5 dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.

NOTE

The optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured by using anoptical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result is more accurate when this method is used. Whenthis method is used, the noise impact does not need to be considered.

5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.

CAUTIONThe overload of the APD receiver laser is -9 dBm. If the input optical power is higher, the APDlaser may be damaged. Therefore, it is recommended that you insert the fiber loosely from theinput optical port of the OTU during commissioning. After commissioning, make sure the inputoptical power is lower than the receiver overload before you insert the fiber.

For the receiver sensitivity, overload, and output optical power specifications for the OTU, seethe Product Description.

5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit LightThis section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.

PrerequisiteThe NE must be created on the U2000.


Background InformationThe signals accessed on the client side or the WDM side should be service signals in actualtransmission, or the optical signals generated by forcing the board to emit light.



96

The WDM side of the OTU board by default is forced to emit light. If it does not emit light, referto the following procedure to query whether the board is forced to emit light. If the board is notforced to emit light, set the board to emit light.

NOTE

See the Hardware Description to determine whether Automatic Laser Shutdown can be set for the OTU board.

PrecautionsNOTE

l The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel) is that the OTU is forcedto emit light.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer window, select the desired OTU and choose Configuration > WDMInterface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Optional: Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of the opticalport on the WDM side of the OTU to DISABLE.

NOTE

Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS can set Automatic Laser Shutdown of the WDM side.

Step 4 Set the Laser Status of the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to OPEN.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

5.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU BoardThis section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.


Optical power meter

Precautions

CAUTIONBefore the equipment is powered on, verify that the fixed optical attenuator is configuredaccording to the configuration rules. Verify the input optical power of the OTU (including theWDM side and client side) is lower than the receiver overload to avoid damage to the opticalmodule during commissioning. Note that the overload of the APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm.For the specifications about the sensitivity and overload point of the OTU board, see the ProductDescription.



97

Commissioning Requirementsl For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port

on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimalrange: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the clientside of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from(sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.

l For the other OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client sideand the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that theinput optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overloadpoint -5) dBm.

NOTE

For certain OTUs, if the overload point of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivityis -17 dBm, the receive optical power should be adjusted within the following range: from -14 dBmto -5 dBm.

l Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end has outputthe standard optical power of single wavelength. When this occurs, the input optical poweron the WDM side can be adjusted based on the actual optical power by adding, changingor removing the fixed optical attenuators.

l After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the OTU when the inputoptical power reaches a normal state.

5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical power meter

Background InformationThe tributary boards include the TDX, TOM, TOG, TQS, TDG, TBE, TQM, TSXL, THA,TOA and TQX.

For the tributary unit specifications, see the Product Description.

Commissioning RequirementsBefore the optical signals of a single wavelength are sent to the corresponding tributary board,adjust the input optical power by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator at the RXnon the client side of the tributary board. This ensures that the input optical power is within theoptimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point - 5) dBm.

5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical power meter



98


The line board includes the NS2, NS3, NQ2 and ND2.

For the line unit specifications, see the Product Description.

Commissioning Requirementsl For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are

accessed by the corresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side opticalport IN of the line unit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within theoptimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm.

l For the other line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed by thecorresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical port IN of the lineunit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the optimal range:from higher than the sensitivity by 3 dBm to lower than the overload point by 5 dBm.

l Generally the commissioning of the output optical power is not needed. However, if thestation is an OADM station or configured with wavelength protection, adjust the VOA ofthe output port on the WDM side of the line unit to make the gain flatness for each addwavelength amplified by the OAU to be less than 2 dB.

5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH BoardIf the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. Whenthis occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. Bytesting the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmittedoptical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.

The test items are the mean launched optical power and actual received optical power of anoptical interface board.

CAUTIONIf the rate of the optical port is variable, add the logical port with the corresponding rate throughthe U2000 before testing the specifications of this optical port.

5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical InterfaceBoards

If the mean launched optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment.When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged.This section describes how to test the mean launched optical power of an optical interface board.This test is performed to ensure that the mean launched optical power of each port is correct.

Prerequisite

The optical port to be tested must be enabled.



99

NOTE

The optical port of certain SDH optical interface boards is disabled by default. Before performing the test,you need to check whether the optical port to be tested is enabled. Determine if it is enabled by doing asfollows: In the NE Explorer window of the U2000 or U2000 LCT, select the board to be tested. ChooseConfiguration > SDH Interface, and check the status of the Laser Switch in the list. The status shouldbe Open.

The optical fiber connections must be tested to ensure the optical fibers are connected correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical power meter, fiber jumpers with different connectors, optical fiber connectors, fibercleaning tools

Test Connection DiagramFigure 5-2 shows the connections for testing the mean launched optical power of an opticalinterface board.

Figure 5-2 Connection diagram for testing the mean launched optical power of an opticalinterface board.

Optical power meter

SDH Board



100

Precautions

DANGERDuring NE commissioning, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser light.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the optical fiber from the OUT port of the optical interface board to be tested. Cap theremoved optical fiber with a protective cap.

Step 2 Use the test jumper to connect the OUT port and the optical power meter.

NOTEThe port of the optical power meter varies. Select a fiber jumper with the corresponding connector.

Step 3 Identify the board feature code and the type of the corresponding optical port by referring to thesection that describes the board bar code in the Hardware Description. Query the specificationsof the corresponding optical port by referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doingthis, you can obtain the working wavelength for the optical port to be tested.

Step 4 Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter according to the working wavelength of theoptical port.

Step 5 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable.The recorded value is the mean launched optical power. It should be within the range of thetransmitted optical power for this optical port, specified in the Technical SpecificationReference.

Step 6 If the actual transmitted optical power is outside the range, check and clean the optical fiberconnectors used for the equipment test and the optical power meter. For more information, see"Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting Tasks. After cleaningthe connectors, repeat Steps 1-5.

Step 7 After the test is complete, reconnect the optical fiber to the test optical port.

----End

5.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an OpticalInterface Board

If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. Whenthis occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. Thissection describes how to test the actual received optical power for an interface board. This testis performed to ensure the actual received optical power for each port is correct.

Prerequisitel The test of optical fiber connections must be complete. Ensure that the optical fibers are

connected correctly.

l The test result of the mean launched optical power at the optical port must be normal.



101

l The fibers for the opposite station must be routed to the ODF of the local station. In addition,the opposite station must be commissioned and powered on.


Optical power meter, optical fiber connectors

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-3 shows the connections for testing the actual received optical power.

Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the actual received optical power for an opticalinterface board

Fiberjumper

- ODF ODF

Fiberjumper

Adjacent stationLocal station

Optical interfaceboard

Testedoptical

interfaceIN

OUT

Procedure

Step 1 At the local station, remove the fiber jumper from the IN port of the optical interface board.Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter through the fiber connector.

Step 2 Identify the number of the optical port by referring to the section that describes the board barcodes in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications of the corresponding optical portby referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doing this, you can obtain the workingwavelength for the optical port to be tested.

Step 3 Set the test wavelength for the optical power meter based on the working wavelength of theoptical port.

Step 4 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable.The recorded value is the value for the actual received optical power.

Step 5 Check whether the value of the actual received optical power is correct by referring to the opticalpower range, which is specified in the Technical Specification Reference.

NOTE

The actual received optical power should meet the following requirement:

Minimum sensibility + 3 dB ≤ Actual received optical power (measured value) ≤ Minimum overloadpoint – 5 dB

Step 6 If the received optical power is not correct, do as follows:



102

l If the received optical power is excessively low, check whether the fiber connector, ODFfiber adapter, and optical attenuator are normal. For information about cleaning the fiberconnector, see "Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the SupportingTasks.

l If the received optical power is excessively high, check whether the optical attenuator isnormal or add an attenuator on the ODF. For information about the values of the opticalattenuators, see the Technical Specification Reference and the description about the actualreceived optical power in Step 5.

Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until the measured value is normal.

Step 8 When the measured value is normal, reconnect the removed optical fiber to the optical port undertest.

----End

5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA OpticalAmplifier Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifierboard.

The EDFA optical amplifier board includes HBA, OAU1, OBU1, and OBU2.l Five types of OAU1 are valid: OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103 and OAU105.l Three types of OBU1 are valid: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.l One type of OBU2 is valid: OBU205.

The relationship between the multiplexed signal and the single wavelength of the opticalamplifier board with regard to the optical power is as follows.

Optical power of multiplexed signal = Optical power of single wavelength + 10lgN (where Nis the number of wavelengths of the multiplexed signal)

Commissioning RequirementsBecause the maximum output power of the HBA board is high (26 dBm), the end face of a fiberat an optical port may be burned. To prevent this from happening, the following two solutionscan be adopted.l 1. When there is direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, complete the following operations:

– (1) Remove the flange on the ODF, and prepare to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 onthe ODF. See Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Fiber splicing on the ODF

ODFHBA

13FIU02

OUT

RC

OUT



103

– (2) Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers that are to be spliced. Use a

fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break the 250um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.

– (3) Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Splice the fiber jumpers in the standardsingle mode. The splice point must be free of flaws and voids. If the splice point is notfree of flaws and voids, re-splice the fiber jumpers.

– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath thesplice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heatshrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment roomand be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot.

l 2. When there is fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, completethe following operations:– (1) Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called

the E2000-E2000) flange. The flange can only be installed on the ODF for the SC.– (2) Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the OUT port of the

FIU board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. See Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5 Fiber splicing on the line side

ODFHBA

13FIU02

OUT

RC

OUT

– (3) Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate

point. Connect the cut end of one of the two fiber jumpers to the client-side line fiberat point 4, as shown in Figure 5-5.

– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath thesplice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heatshrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment roomand be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot. The redundant fiber needs tobe spooled on the fiber management tray after the splicing.

5.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier BoardThis section describes how to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier board.

Commissioning RequirementsAdjust the average single wavelength input optical power of the IN port of the optical amplifierboard to the typical input power for single wavelength ±1 dB. Ensure that the number ofwavelengths whose optical power is higher than the typical value is equal or close to the numberof wavelengths whose optical power is smaller than the typical value.



104

l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11HBA is –19 dBm (40-channel) and–13 dBm (10-channel).

l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU101/TN12OBU101 is –20 dBm(40-channel) and –23 dBm (80-channel).




l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –19 dBm (80-channel).

l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 is –19 dBm(40-channel) and –22 dBm (80-channel).



l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN12OAU100 is –14 dBm (40-channel)and –17 dBm (80-channel).

If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifierboard is added with a VOA that is higher than the typical input power of single wavelength,adjust the VOA before the optical amplifier board to make the average single wavelength inputoptical power reach the typical value.

NOTE

For the TN12/TN13 OA board, the input end of the OA is not added with a VOA, but instead uses the innerEVOA.

If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifierboard is added with a VOA that is lower than the typical input power of single wavelength, noVOA is needed.

5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier BoardThis section describes how to adjust the gains for the optical amplifier board.

PrerequisiteThe commissioning of the optical power for the upstream board must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, optical power meter

Commissioning RequirementsFor the optical amplifier board, set the gain to ensure that the mean output optical power equalsthe maximum output optical power for single wavelength. Gain = Maximum output power ofsingle wavelength - Mean input optical power of single wavelength.



105

After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the mean output opticalpower of single wavelength is in the range of maximum output optical power of singlewavelength - 0.5 dBm to maximum output optical power of single wavelength + 0.5 dBm. If itexceeds this range, fine tune the gain value.

ProcedureStep 1 Display the NE Explorer on the U2000.

Step 2 Select the desired optical amplifier board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 3 Select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 4 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain LowerThreshold to get the nominal range for the gain.

Step 5 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Upper Threshold of Actual Gain and Lower Threshold ofActual Gain to get the settable gain range for the OAU board.

Step 6 Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of single wavelength.Calculate the gain value.

Gain = Maximum output power of single wavelength - Average input power of single wavelength

NOTEThe average per-channel input optical power is measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 7 Check whether the gain is within the value range calculated in Step 6.l If the gain is less than the minimum gain calculated in Step 6, increase the attenuation value

of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This decreases the average inputpower of single wavelength to the standard value.

l If the gain is more than the maximum gain calculated in Step 6, decrease the attenuationvalue of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This increases the averageinput power of single wavelength. If the gain cannot meet the requirement, confirm thenetwork design value with the network designer.

Step 8 In the Basic Attributes tab, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board.

Step 9 Click Apply.

Step 10 Click Query. Query the Gain displayed on the U2000. If the gain difference of the actual valueand the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting is successful. If the setting fails, checkwhether the gain is within the gain range.

----End

5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman AmplifierThis section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Ramanamplifier.

5.7.1 PreparationsThis section describes the requirements on the fiber line, precautions, and tools required forcommissioning the Raman amplifier.



106

Compared with general amplifiers, the Raman amplifier has a lower noise figure. When generalamplifiers and the Raman amplifier are used in one system, the system can achieve better OSNR.After the Raman amplifier is used, the optical power that is close to the fiber line should be testedon the LINE port on the Raman amplifier. Shut down the pump lasers of the Raman amplifierbefore the test.

Requirements on the Fiber LineThe additional loss of a single point on the fiber line should meet the following requirements:

NOTE

Whether the single-point loss exceeds the threshold must be determined by performing a bi-directional test.Use an OTDR to test the additional loss at both ends of the fiber line and calculate the average of the testedtwo loss values.

Before the deployment of the Raman amplifier, OTDR must be used to determine if the quality of the local40 km optical cable meets the requirements of deployment.

l 0 km–20 km (0 mi.- 12 mi.): Do not use fiber connectors. The fibers should be connectedto each other by splicing. If the fiber connector is used, components may be burned and theon-off gain of the Raman amplifier is affected.

l 0 km–10 km (0 mi.–6 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.1 dB (G.652) or0.2 dB (G.655).

l 10 km–20 km (6 mi.- 12 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.2 dB (G.652)or 0.4 dB (G.655).

l 20 km–30 km (12 mi.- 18 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.4 dB.l 30 km–40 km (18 mi.- 24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 1 dB.l Over 40 kilometers: The single-point additional loss is less than 1 dB.l The single-point return loss is not less than 40 dB.

PrecautionsThe output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. Therefore, take the followingprecautions when using the Raman amplifier:

l Do not insert or remove a fiber when the laser is enabledWhen the laser of the Raman amplifier is enabled, do not insert or remove the fiberconnector. Otherwise, the laser may result in fire after the fiber connectors are burned orthere may be personal injuries especially to the eyes.

l Clean the fiber surface.The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. If the surface of the fiber jumperis dirty, the filth of the fiber surface absorbs the energy and heats. As a result, the jumperis easy to be damaged or burned, and the system performance is affected.

l Perform cable testing.The gain medium of the Raman amplifier is the transmission cable. Hence, the type andquality of the transmission cable influences the performance of the Raman amplifier. If thefiber, especially the end near the Raman amplifier has the poor quality (big loss point orlarge reflection factor), the system performance is greatly influenced, and may result in theline being burned. Hence, testing the cable before enabling the Raman amplifier isnecessary.

l Dedicate the LSH/APC fiber connector.



107

The reverse output optical power of the Raman amplifier reaches 30 dBm. Hence, the fiberconnector must be the dedicated LSH/APC fiber connector. If the PC fiber connector isused, a large reflection is formed, which damages the fiber connector.

l Do not bend the fiber.The bend radius of the fiber jumper of the Raman amplifier should meet the requirementsand cannot be bent. Otherwise, the fiber jumper will burn.

l Enable the laser of the Raman amplifier on the U2000.For security consideration, if the laser is disabled after the Raman amplifier is workingnormally, the Raman amplifier will stop working. You can issue the correspondingcommand on the NMS to enable the laser of the Raman amplifier.

l Review the jumper connection before enabling of the laser.Before enabling the laser of the Raman amplifier, you must connect the jumper at the inputport and the corresponding ODF subrack jumper.

l Meet output optical power requirements.When the Raman amplifier is used, the pump optical power is high. The requirements ofthe near-end fiber increase directly with the optical power. High optical power may bringdamages to equipment and injuries to human body. Hence, the power of the Raman pumpinglight should be as low as possible on the premise that the on-off gain is not less than 10 dB.

Before you enter the equipment room, perform the following operations:

l Wear laser-protective glasses (Class 4). Wear long-sleeve ESD coat, shoe covers, andprotective gloves.

l Confirm the number of adopted Raman boards. Be familiar with the fiber connectionbetween the local Raman boards and remote boards. Be familiar with the connectionbetween these fibers and the upstream/downstream sites. Be familiar with the location ofthe connector. Take the drawings into the equipment room.

l Prepare tools for fiber cleaning: CLETOP cassette cleaner, a video fiberscope (400x orhigher magnification). Clean solvent with wipes. Use only video fiberscopes. For moreinformation, see Inspecting and Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Connectors.

l U2000 or Web LCT has been installed on the local engineer's PC before the single stationcommissioning is performed. This section uses the U2000 as an example to describe thecommissioning procedure.

After the CRPC board works properly, to connect the board to a subrack on another NE, youmust reset the board instead of removing and re-inserting the network cable. The operation ofresetting the CRPC board, however, may interrupt services.

Setting JumperThere are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 andJ4.Figure 5-6 shows the number of each jumper.



108

Figure 5-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board

CPU

J3J4

1 2

9 10

10

12

9

CRPC

Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensurethe normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.l Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.l Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3.l Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3.l Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3.l Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode)l Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3.(Extended slot numbering mode)l Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.l Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4.l Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4.

NOTEJumpers 9 to 10 in J3 cannot be connected only when the OptiX OSN 6800 is in non-extended slot numberingmode.

Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board.

The following are jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode:

l When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28.l When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot

is IU29.l When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot

is IU30.l When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31.

The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode:

l When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120.l When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot

is IU121.l When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot

is IU122.l When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.



109

5.7.2 Checking the Fiber ConnectionsThis section describes the method of checking the fiber connections of the Raman amplifier.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.

Generally, the Raman amplifier is used in the case of extremely low input optical power. Whenthe SYS port of the Raman amplifier is connected to an optical amplifier board, the variableoptical attenuator (VOA) is not required and it should be replaced with a fiber.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Optical power meter.l Optical fiberscope with 400x magnification. A video fiberscope is recommended.l CLETOP cassette cleaner.l Clean solvent. Isoamylol is preferred and propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin cannot

be used.l Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes, or fiber cleaning tissue. Non-woven lens tissue is

recommended.l Special compressed gas.l Special cleaning roll.l Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs.

Precautions

CAUTIONl Strictly comply with the following procedure to ensure the operation safety.l The LINE port of the Raman board has extremely high output optical power. Be very careful

during operation.

ProcedureStep 1 Ensure that the Raman board is in "power-off" state before any operation. Do not completely

insert the Raman board in the designated slot. That is, the board can be placed in the designatedslot but not plugged thoroughly. In this case, the board will not receive power from the subrack.

Step 2 Determine if the SYS port of the Raman board is well connected to the IN port of the FIU oroptical amplifier board with fibers.

Step 3 Before you connect the line-side fiber to the LINE port of Raman board, ensure that the fiberloss is normal and that the connection surface of the fiber is clean. Check this with a videofiberscope (400x or higher magnification).

Step 4 The connection surface should have no dust or scratches. If there is any, immediately replacethe line-side fiber. It is recommended that the customer prepares spare fibers.

----End



110

5.7.3 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line SideThis section describes how to connect the fiber jumpers on the line side of the Raman amplifier.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsFiber cutter, fiber stripper, fusion splicer, heat shrink tubing

Precautions

CAUTIONl The Raman amplifier board must be powered off before the fiber jumpers are spliced, and

the personnel to splice the fiber jumpers must be experienced in fusion splicing.l Ensure that the endfaces of fiber connectors are clean before you install the fiber connectors.l The flange must be cleaned using an ultrasonic cleaner.l To ensure the quality of fiber connectors, it is recommended that you insert and remove an

E2000-E2000 connector for less than 500 times.

ContextThe output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. In this case, if the endface of a fiberconnector inserted to a port on the Raman amplifier is contaminated, the probability is high thatthe fiber endface is damaged. The high output optical power can cause eye damage or skin burnsin case of misoperation. The Raman amplifier has very strict requirements on the loss of thenear-end line fiber. The fiber should have no connector within the distance of 0 km to 20 km(12 mi.) and fibers should be connected to each other by means of fusion splicing. There are twofiber splicing modes. (Select the slicing mode according to the actual situations on site.)

Fiber SplicingMode on theODF

Probability ofEndfaceDamage

Risks ofPersonalInjury

Difficultyof On-SiteOperation

DifficultyofMaintenance

PreferenceLevel

Direct fiberfusion splicingon the ODF

None None Medium Low High

Fiber splicingthrough theE2000-E2000connector on theODF

Low Very low Medium Medium Medium

Procedure

Step 1 In the case of direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, the procedure is as follows:



111

1. Remove the flange on the ODF, and ready to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on the ODF.The CRPC board shown is used as an example.

ODF CRPCLine Sys

2. Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers to be spliced, and use a fiber stripperto remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break a 250 um bare fiber core,cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.

3. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper to protect the melting point after fibersplicing.

4. Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Then, splice the fiber jumpers in the standardsingle mode. The splice point must be free of flaws or voids. Otherwise, re-splice the fiberjumpers.

5. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splicepoint. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heatshrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room andbe fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot.

Step 2 In the case of fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, the procedure isas follows:

1. Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called E2000-E2000) flange.

2. Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the LINE port of the CRPCboard to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. The CRPC board shownis used as an example.

ODF CRPCLine Sys

3. Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate point.Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper that is cut off or the customer line cableto protect the melting point after fiber splicing. Then splice the cutoff end of the fiber withthe customer line cable at point specified by 4 in the figure above.

4. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splicepoint. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heatshrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and



112

be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot. The redundant fiber after the splicingneeds to be spooled on the fiber management tray.

Step 3 Insert the Raman board thoroughly into the designated slot. If this is a new cabinet that isinstalled, proceed in powering on the cabinet and the corresponding subrack. If the cabinet andthe subrack are already in service and therefore powered on, see 5.7.4 Checking theConfiguration of the IPA Function.

----End

5.7.4 Checking the Configuration of the IPA FunctionThis section describes the procedure for checking the configuration of the IPA function whenyou commission the Raman amplifier.


Precautions

CAUTIONThe optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. It is recommended to configure the IPAfunction should be previously. When a Raman amplifier is configured, set the threshold for thedetection board when configuring the IPA function. Before the commissioning at each station,disable the IPA function and the laser of the Raman board. For more information regardingconfiguring the IPA function, see Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System.

ProcedureStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the

Function Tree. For more information regarding IPA configuration, refer to Intelligent PowerAdjustment (IPA) of Raman System.

Step 2 Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set them toDisabled and click Apply.

Step 3 Select the desired CRPC board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the FunctionTree.

Step 4 Select By Board/Port (Channel).

Step 5 Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the NE**-Shelf0(subrack)-**-CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the NE**-Shelf0(subrack)-**-CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 ofthe Raman board WDM interfaces are Close. If not, set them to Close and click Apply.

----End

5.7.5 Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive DirectionThis section describes the procedure for adjusting the optical power of the Raman amplifier inthe receive direction.



113

Prerequisite

The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.

The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.

Return loss detection is enabled.


Spectrum analyzer, U2000.

PrecautionsNOTE

The on-off gain of each channel must be greater than 10 dB, which is required by the backward Ramanamplifier. The gain medium of the reverse Raman amplifier is transmission fiber, so the gain value dependson the type, length and attenuation of the transmission fiber. If the gain values are required to be the same,different fibers should correspond to different optical power of pumps. Set the initial optical power of theRaman amplifier during network commissioning to the optical power values in the following table.

Table 5-1 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump for different fibers

Fiber Type P1(Optical Power of PumpGroup 1)

P2(Optical Power of PumpGroup 2)

G.652/G.655 +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm

G.653 +23.0 dBm +22.5 dBm

Procedure

Step 1 Disconnect the fiber between the SYS port of the RAMAN board and the IN port of the FIU oroptical amplifier board.

Step 2 Connect the fiber from the SYS port to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan the spectrum.Obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.

Step 3 Reconnect the SYS port of the RAMAN board to the IN port of the FIU or optical amplifierboard.

Step 4 Select the desired CRPC from the left-hand Navigator Tree, and choose Configuration > WDMInterface from the Function Tree.

Step 5 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Step 6 Set the optical power of the pump laser to the recommended value.

Step 7 On the U2000 select the desired NE from the left-hand Navigator Tree and chooseConfiguration > IPA Management from the Function Tree.

Step 8 Set the IPA Status attribute of the IPA pair to Enabled.



114

Step 9 Connect the fiber from the MON port of the RAMAN board to the test port of the spectrumanalyzer. Scan the spectrum and obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.

Step 10 Calculate the on-off gain of the SYS port by using the following formula:

SYS on-off gain = MON output power (CRPC laser enabled) + 20 – SYS output power (CRPClaser disabled)

NOTE

±1 dB offset between the on-off gain that is obtained by using the preceding formula and the actual on-offgain is allowed.

Step 11 Adjust the On-off Gain.

NOTEThe on-off gain of each channel must be greater than 10 dB, which is required by the CRPC board. If the on-off gain is smaller than 10 dB, adjust the on-off gain to make it meet the requirements.

1. Select the desired CRPC in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDMInterface from the Function Tree.

2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list.3. Click Advanced Attributes. Increase the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the

CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 port of Optical Interface/Channel. Increase the optical power of both groups of pumps by 0.1 dBm respectively ata time until the minimum on-off gain of each channel is higher than 10 dB.

NOTEIf the pump optical power is set too high, the PUM_BCM_ALM alarm is generated. If this alarm occurs, thepump optical power set is excessive and must be decreased. If this alarm occurs while the gain does not reach10 dB, shut down the pump lasers and check the line fiber. Replace or repair the line fibers if necessary.

----End

5.7.6 Adjusting the Gain SpectrumThis section describes the procedure for adjusting the gain spectrum of the Raman amplifier.


The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsSpectrum analyzer, U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Adjust the pump power to ensure that the gain spectrum meets the requirement.l After adjusting the on-off gain to 10 dB, determine if the gain flatness among all the

wavelengths is within 3 dB. If yes, the gain flatness requires no adjustment.l If the gain flatness among all the wavelengths exceeds 3 dB, proceed to the next step to adjust

the pump optical power according to the Raman gain spectrum to improve the gain flatness.

Step 2 Find the wavelengths of the highest and lowest gains.



115

Step 3 If the shortwave gain is low, increase the optical power of pump laser group 1 to elevate theshortwave gain or decrease the optical power of pump laser group 2 to lower the long-wave gain.Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meets therequirement. That is, the gain flatness among all the wavelengths is within 3 dB.

Step 4 If the shortwave gain is high, decrease the optical power of pump laser group 1 to lower theshortwave gain or increase the optical power of pump laser group 2 to elevate the long-wavegain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meetsthe requirement. That is, the gain flatness of each wavelength is within 3 dB.

Step 5 Retest the on-off gains to determine if the on-off gain of each wavelength is higher than 10 dB.If not, increase the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2 in steps of 0.1 dBm untilthe on-off gain of each wavelength is greater than 10 dB.

NOTE

After item 3 of step 6, the pump optical power is changed. As a result, the on-off gains need be retested.If the on-off gain of any wavelength is smaller than 10 dB, the optical power of both pump laser groups 1and 2 need be increased to meet the gain requirement according to the new optical power rate between thetwo pump laser groups. The gain difference between the two pump laser groups cannot change.

----End

5.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory ChannelThis section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.

The system offers two types of supervisory channels:

l Optical supervisory channel (OSC)

l Electrical supervisory channel (ESC)

The OSC requires the optical supervisory channel unit HSC1, SC1 or SC2. The unit is used totransmit and receive the supervisory information.

The ESC does not need the optical supervisory channel units. In this mode, the opticaltransponder unit (OTU) multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channels fortransmission.

NOTE

After the boards are commissioned and work normally, the ESC and OSC are enabled by default.

5.8.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.

Prerequisite

The commissioning of the optical power at the transmit end of the upstream station must becomplete.


Optical power meter, fixed attenuator



116

Commissioning Requirements

The receive optical power of OSC is in the range of -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The transmit opticalpower of OSC is in the range of -4 dBm to 0 dBm. Basic requirements of the optical powercommissioning on the OSC are as follows:

l The receive optical power of the OSC should be in the range of -45 dBm to -8 dBm.

NOTE

The receive optical power of the ST2 board and the OSC unit on the DAS1 board is in the range of –41 dBm to–10 dBm.

To prevent the laser on the OSC board at the receive end from being burnt, fixed attenuators thatare required must be configured properly by referring to the following tables.

l When the SC1 or SC2 board is used as the OSC board,

Table 5-2 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the SC1 or SC2 board

System Rate Line FiberType

StandardOpticalPowerIncidentScenario orNot

Fix Attenuator on the SC1/SC2 Board (Line InsertionLoss Is the EOL Value)

0 ≤ InsertionLoss < 20

InsertionLoss ≥ 20

10 Gbit/s SSMF/LEAF/TWRS/TWC/TW+

Yes (and anEVOA isconfiguredbefore anopticalamplifier)

15 dBa N/A

No (and anEVOA isconfiguredbefore anopticalamplifier)

G.653/SMF-LS

- - -

No (and noEVOA isconfiguredbefore anopticalamplifier)

15 dBa N/A

40 Gbit/s, or amixture of 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s

SSMF/LEAF/TWRS/TWC


15 dBa N/A



117

System Rate Line FiberType

StandardOpticalPowerIncidentScenario orNot

Fix Attenuator on the SC1/SC2 Board (Line InsertionLoss Is the EOL Value)

0 ≤ InsertionLoss < 20


LEAF/TWRS/TWC/TW+/SMF-LS/G.653


a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM port on the SC1 board or the TM1/TM2 porton the SC2 board.

l When the ST2 board is used as the OSC board,

Table 5-3 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the ST2 board

SystemRate

Line FiberType

StandardOpticalPowerIncidentScenarioor Not

Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (LineInsertion Loss Is the EOL Value)

0 ≤InsertionLoss < 15





15 dBa N/A N/A


G.653/SMF-LS

- - - -


20 dBb 10 dBa N/A



118

SystemRate

Line FiberType


Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (LineInsertion Loss Is the EOL Value)




40 Gbit/s, ora mixture of10 Gbit/sand 40 Gbit/s

SSMF/LEAF/TWRS/TWC


15 dBa N/A N/A



20 dBb 10 dBa N/A

a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board.b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board and a 10dB fixed attenuator at the RM port on the FIU board.

l When the DAS1 board is used,

Table 5-4 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the OSC unit of the DAS1 board

SystemRate

Line FiberType


Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of theDAS1 Board (Line Insertion Loss Isthe EOL Value)






15 dBa N/A N/A


G.653/SMF-LS

- - - -



119

SystemRate

Line FiberType


Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of theDAS1 Board (Line Insertion Loss Isthe EOL Value)





20 dBb 10 dBa N/A

40 Gbit/s, ora mixture of10 Gbit/sand 40 Gbit/s

SSMF/LEAF/TWRS/TWC


15 dBa N/A N/A



20 dBb 10 dBa N/A

a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board.b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board and a 10 dBfixed attenuator at the RM port.

ProcedureStep 1 Check the fiber connection of the OSC unit.

l The RM port of the OSC board connects to the TM port of the FIU board at the local station.l The TM port of the OSC board connects to the RM port of the FIU board at the local station.l The RX port on the DAS1 board is the receive optical port of the OSC unit and must be

connected to the TM port. The TX port is the transmit optical port of the OSC unit and mustbe connected to the RM port.

Step 2 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the transmit opticalpower of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -4 dBm to 0 dBm. If it does not meetthe requirement, replace the board.

NOTE

The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.

Step 3 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the actual receiveoptical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The inputoptical power of the OSC board can be adjusted on the basis of the actual optical power byadding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators.



120

NOTE

The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.

NOTE

If the result does not meet the requirements, clean the fiber connector. If the problem persists, check whetherthe OSC is faulty, and if so, clear the fault.

Step 4 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then test the insertion loss betweenthe IN and TM ports, and between the RM and OUT ports of the FIU. The values should be lessthan 1.5 dBm.

----End

5.8.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC BoardThis section describes the basic requirements on commissioning the optical power of the ESCboard.


When the OTU starts to work and the service is normal (or the WDM side of the OTU sidetransmits light), the ESC route is set up.

By default the WDM side of the OTU board emits light forcibly. If it does not emit light, see5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light to query whether the board is forced to emit light.If the board is not forced to emit light, configure the board so that it emits light forcibly.

5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer andDemultiplexer Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of themultiplexer and demultiplexer board.

5.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V BoardsThis section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the M40Vand D40V boards.

Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000


Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR by adjusting the built-in VOA for eachwavelength at the receive end to meet the requirements.l Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the M40V or D40V at the transmit

end to 5 dB before commissioning.

1. In the NE Explorer and select the desired M40V board, choose Configuration >WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.



121

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.3. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation is successful. Click

Close.l Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow.

Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel in the WDM mode. Orconnect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in thesignal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel on theU2000 as follows:– Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board in the NE Explorer, choose Configuration >

Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.– Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.– In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR(dB) for each current

wavelength.NOTE

l The MON port of the OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 and CRPC board is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signalat the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).

l The MON port of the HBA board is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30dBlower than the actual signal power).

l According to the optical spectrum figure, determine the channels with the largest or thesmallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA for the corresponding channels of theM40V/D40V to make the optical power (or OSNR) near the average value.

l Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is within 4dB, and the maximum different of the OSNR among all the channels is within 2 dB.

NOTE

Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious changes after thiscommissioning. If changes are obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the signal flow to makethe input optical power reach the standard value. There is no need to adjust the successive OAUs. Ensurethat the OSNR is flat and that the optical power is near the standard value.

5.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU BoardThis section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the insertion loss of the FIUboard.

Tools, Equipment, and materialsOptical power meter, Optical spectrum analyzer


CAUTIONIf fiber connectors or fiber adapters are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriouslyaffected. Therefore, the two end faces and the fiber adapter for every external fiber that isconnected into the equipment through the ODF must be cleaned. Perform the cleaning beforeinserting an external fiber to an optical port on the equipment.

Note the insertion loss for the FIU boards:



122

l IN–>TC insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TC portl RC–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RC port – Output optical power of OUT

portl IN–>TM insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TM portl RM–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RM port – Output optical power of OUT

port

Note the insertion loss for the SFIU boards:l LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS1 port – Output optical power

of LINE1 portl LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS2 port – Output optical power

of LINE2 portl LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC1 port – Output optical power

of LINE1 portl LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC2 port – Output optical power

of LINE2 port

The optical power can be measured with an optical power meter or an optical spectrum analyzer.The basic requirements for the measurements are as follows.

Method one: measurement with an optical power meter of the FIU/SFIUl For IN–>TC insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when

disconnecting the fiber of the RM port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0dB.

l For IN–>TM insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when

disconnecting the fiber of the RC port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5dB.

l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port whendisconnecting the fiber of the OSC1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than1.0 dB.

l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port whendisconnecting the fiber of the OSC2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than1.0 dB.

l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port whendisconnecting the fiber of the SYS1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than1.5 dB.

l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port whendisconnecting the fiber of the SYS2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than1.5 dB.

Method two: measurement with an optical spectrum analyzer of the FIU/SFIUl For IN–>TC insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical power

of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertionloss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the opticalpower of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Theinsertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.



123

l For IN–>TM insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm with theoptical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Theinsertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm withthe optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Theinsertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the opticalpower of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Theinsertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with theoptical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer.The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nmwith the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nmwith the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

5.9.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM BoardThis section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of theFOADM board.

Network with MR2+MR2

Figure 5-7 shows the diagram of a network with MR2+MR2.

Figure 5-7 Diagram of a network with MR2+MR2

FIU

FIU

IN

OUT

OUT

IN

OAOUT OUT

OUT INOUT OUT

TC

RCININ

INRC

OA OA

OA

MR2 MR2

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

INTC OUT

MO

MI

MI

MO

East

1 2 3 4

West

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU



124

Network with MR8V+MR8VFigure 5-8 shows the diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V.

Figure 5-8 Diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V

FIU

FIU

IN

OUT

OUT

IN

OAOUT

OUT

OUT IN

OUT

OUT TC

RCINVI

VIRC

OA OA

OA

MR8V MR8V

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

INTC OUT

MO

MI

MI

MO

East

1 2 3 4

West OTU

OTU


Commissioning RequirementsThe commissioning requirements for the FOADM board are as follows.

NOTE

For the specifications of the OAU board, see the Hardware Description.

l In the pass-through direction:– For MR8V, adjust the VOA on the MR8V in the pass-through direction. Make the pass-

through wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical power of the OAU atthe transmit end.

– For MR2, adjust the VOA between MR2s. Make the pass-through wavelength meet therequirements for the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end.

l In the drop wavelength direction, add an appropriate fixed optical attenuator at the inputend of the OTU. Make the drop wavelength meet the requirements for the input opticalpower of the OTU.

l In the add wavelength direction:– For MR8V, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengths

and the MR8V to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-throughwavelength.

– For MR2, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengthsand the MR2 to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-throughwavelength.



125

5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM BoardThis section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of theROADM board.

This section describes how to commission the optical power of a ring network using ROADMboards along the west-to-east signal flow. In general, the ring network uses the followingROADM boards:l ROAM+ROAMl WSD9+WSM9l WSD9+RMU9l RDU9+WSM9l WSMD4+WSMD4l WSMD2+WSMD2

NOTE

l The requirements of the intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming of the WSM9, WSD9, RMU9,RDU9, RDU9, WSMD2 and WSMD4 are the same.

l The automatic power adjustment mode can be chosen in creating optical cross-connection. Forapplications not supporting automatic power adjustment, choose the manual power adjustment mode.

l The optical power of the OUT port at the receive end and the rated optical power of the IN port at thetransmit end of the OAU have their default values on the U2000.

5.10.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with ROAM+ROAM.

Network with ROAM+ROAMFigure 5-9 shows the diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM.



126

Figure 5-9 Diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM

FIU

OA

U

OA

U

ROAMFIU

OA

U

OA

U

1 2 3 4

OBU

D40

OTU

OTU

ROAM

D40

OTU

OTU

OBU

West East

IN OUT

INOUT

OUTIN

INOUT


NOTE

TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion compensation or connecteddirectly.

Commissioning Requirementsl Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add and pass-through wavelength

directions.– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU

at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of eastOAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The systemthen automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure that theinput optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the addwavelength.

– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU tothe east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the rated optical power of theIN port of east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength.The system then automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensurethat the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements forthe pass-through wavelength.

l Manual power adjustment is required in the drop wavelength direction. Configure the fixedoptical attenuator at the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end. Select the fixed opticalattenuator according to the input optical power of the OTU to ensure that the input opticalpower meets the requirements. The VOA (in the dashed frame) between the ROAM andD40 boards is used to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier to a value inthe nominal range. If the input optical power is in the nominal range when the VOA is notadded, then the VOA is not required.



127

NOTE

l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and anavalanche photodiode (APD) is configured on the WDM side of the OTU board at the receiveend, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.

l If the PIN photodiode is configured at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frameare required.

5.10.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+WSM9.

Network with WSD9+WSM9

Figure 5-10 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9.

Figure 5-10 Diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9

FIU

FIU

OAOUT

OUT IN

IN

OA

OAIN OUT

WSM9 WSD9

West

WSD9

OAINOUT

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

M40

OTU

OTU

WSM9

OTU

OTU

M40

OTU

OTU

East

1 2 3 4


NOTE



Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through wavelengthdirections.



128

l In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIUto the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAUat the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system thenautomatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of theWSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for thedrop wavelength.

NOTE

Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength directly to the OTUor through the MRx or D40 to the OTU.

l In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to theeast FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT port ofthe west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. Set therated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical inputpower of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts theattenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 and WSM9 to ensure that the inputoptical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-throughwavelength.

l I the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU atthe transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the eastOAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system thenautomatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of theWSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets therequirements for the add wavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through theMRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmitend. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.

NOTEMRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.

5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+RMU9.

Network with WSD9+RMU9Figure 5-11 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9.



129

Figure 5-11 Diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9

FIU

FIU

OAOUT

OUT

IN

IN

OA

OAIN OUT

RMU9 WSD9

WSD9

OAINOUT

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

RMU9

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

West East

M40

ROA

ROA

M40

1 2 3 4OA

TOA

OA

TOA MRx

MRx




l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-throughwavelength (the wavelength is added either directly or through the MRx or M40V board)directions.– In the wavelength-dropping direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection

from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. The system then automaticallycalculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 boardto ensure that the optical power of each drop wavelength sent to the OTU board meetsthe specification requirements.

NOTE

Automatic power adjustment can be used when the WSD9 drops a wavelength directly to theOTU or drops a wavelength to the OTU board through the MRx or D40.

– In the pass-through direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection from thewest FIU to the east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts theattenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input opticalpower of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-throughwavelength.

– In the wavelength-adding direction (the OTU board adds wavelengths directly): Createa single-station optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to theeast FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of theVOA in each port of the RMU9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU atthe transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.



130

l When wavelengths are added through the MRx board or the M40 board, the optical powerneeds to be manually adjusted.When wavelengths are added through the M40/M40V board, an optical amplifier needs tobe configured between the TOA and ROA ports on the RMU9 board. And a VOA needsto be configured between the ROA port and the optical amplifier. When wavelengths areadded through the MRx board, the TOA and the ROA ports on the RMU9 board areconnected to each other directly by a fiber.Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx or M40 board to ensure that the inputpower flatness of the add wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths on the east OAUat the transmit end meet the system requirements.

l In the case of a network with WSD9+RMU9, to implement the APE function, the RMU9board has certain requirements on configuration. These requirements are as follows:– Configure the VA1 or VA4 board between the OTU and RMU9 boards when the OTU

board adds wavelength directly to the RMU9 board. In this case, the APE function canbe automatically implemented.

– When a multiplexer board, through which the OTU adds wavelength to the RMU9board, needs to be configured, configure the M40V board. In this case, the APE functioncan be automatically implemented.

– If the VA1, VA4, or M40V board is not used, the APE function cannot be implemented.

5.10.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with RDU9+WSM9.

Network with RDU9+WSM9Figure 5-12 shows the diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9.

Figure 5-12 Diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9

FIU

FIU

OAOUT

OUT IN

IN

OA

OAIN OUT

WSM9

West

RDU9

OAINOUT

MRx

OTU

OTU

MRx

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

M40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

M40

OTU

OTU

1 2 3 4

D40V

WSM9

RDU9

OTU

OTU

D40VEast

1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end



131

3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU

NOTE



Commissioning Requirementsl Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add wavelength, pass-through

wavelength, and drop wavelength through the MRx board or the D40V board.

– In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIUto the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the westOAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The systemthen automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channelof the MRx board or the D40V board to ensure that the input optical power of the OTUmeets the requirements for the drop wavelength.

– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU tothe east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUTport of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength,and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to thetypical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates andadjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the inputoptical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.

– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTUat the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of theeast OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The systemthen automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channelof the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit endmeets the requirements for the add wavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through theMRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmitend. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.

l When wavelengths are dropped through the MRx board or the D40 board, the optical powerneeds to be manually adjusted.

Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx board or the D40 board to ensure that theinput optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.

5.10.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD4+WSMD4.



132

Network with WSMD4+WSMD4

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD4. In this section, thenetwork diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes.The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-13shows the diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4.

Figure 5-13 Diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4

FIU

FIU

OAOUT

OUT IN

IN

OA

OAIN OUT

WSMD4

West

OAINOUT

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

East

D40

WSMD4

D40

1 2 3 4

M40 M40

AM1DM1

AM4

DM4

DM4

AM4

AM1 DM1OUT

IN

IN

OUT

OA OA


NOTE

l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown.These two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.

l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.


The commissioning requirements for the WSMD4 are as follows:

l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.

You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU boardon the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range ofthe OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTUdesign requirement. The optical power of the VOA (in the dashed frame) between thedemultiplexer and WSMD4 should be adjusted so that the input optical power is within thenominal input range of the optical amplifier. If the input optical power is already withinthe nominal input range of the optical amplifier before the VOA is added, the VOA is notrequired.



133

NOTE

l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APDmodule is configured on the WDM side of OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in thedashed frame are not required.

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA inthe dashed frame need to be configured.

l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the eastFIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuationof the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input optical power of theOAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.

l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIUand from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates andadjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the inputoptical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the addwavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengthsthrough the M40, the VOA is not required.


This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSMD2+WSMD2.

Networking with WSMD2+WSMD2This section describes the commissioning requirements of the WSMD2. In this section, thenetworking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustrationpurposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure5-14 shows the diagram of a network with WSMD2+WSMD2.



134


OA

OAOA

OA

WSMD2FIU

FIU

IN TC

INTC

IN

OUT

IN EXPO

EXPI OUT

IN

OUT

RC OUT

ININ

OUTEXPO

EXPIOUT

IN

OUT

RC

OUT

1 2 3 4

WSMD2

Fixed attenuator Variable attenuator

OTU

OTU

M40D40

OTU

OTU

DM

D40

OTU

OTU

DM

AM

AM

OTU

OTU

M40

West East


NOTE

l The M40 or M40V can be used as the multiplexer board.l If only one wavelength needs to be added, you can directly connect one OTU to the AM port of the

WSMD2.

Commissioning RequirementsThe commissioning requirements of the WSMD2 are as follows:l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.

You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU boardon the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range ofthe OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTUdesign requirements.

l In the pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the eastFIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuationof the VOA in each channel of the WSMD2 to ensure that the input optical power of theOAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.

l In the add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIUand from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and



135

adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD2 to ensure that the inputoptical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the addwavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA needs to be addedbefore the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40,the VOA is not required.



This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD9+WSMD9.

Network with WSMD9+WSMD9

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD9. In this section, thenetwork diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes.The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-15shows the diagram of a network with WSMD9+WSMD9.


DAS1 DAS1

M40

M40

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

DCMDCM

WSMD9WSMD9

DCM DCM

LIN

LOUT

SOUT

SIN

IN

OUTAM1

DM1

DM1

AM1EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

OUT

IN

SIN

SOUT

RXTX

LOUT

LIN

TM

RM

RXTX

TM

RM



136

NOTE

l Optical ports AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boardsin other dimensions.


l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.

You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU boardon the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range ofthe OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTUdesign requirement.

l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.

Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the eastFIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuationof the VOA in each channel of the WSMD9 to ensure that the input optical power of theOAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.

l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.

Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIUand from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates andadjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD9 to ensure that the inputoptical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the addwavelength.

5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of DCMThe single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.

Prerequisite

Fiber connections on the DCM must be established properly.


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, fiber jumper

Procedure

Step 1 Measure the input optical power of the DCM. The single-wavelength input optical power mustbe equal to or lower than –3 dBm.

Step 2 Measure the output optical power of the DCM.

Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss of the DCM. The insertion loss should be within the specified range.Otherwise, replace the DCM.

Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of the DCM

----End



137

Related InformationFor more information about the specifications of the insertion loss of the DCM, see the ProductDescription.

5.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System

This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioningprocedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.

CAUTIONEnsure that the ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise, the systemperformance is affected.

l All the channels must be accessed with service signals or forced to emit light before opticalpower commissioning. Once all the OTUs can emit light normally, start the commissioningstation by station.

l Enable the performance monitoring of NEs during optical power commissioning. Comparethe value reported by the NE and the value tested by the instruments. Ensure that the twooptical power values are the same.

NOTE

The optical power is queried by using the U2000. The difference between the U2000 value and the valuetested by instruments should be within 1 dB.

5.12.1 Example DescriptionThis section describes the network of project X.

Figure 5-16 shows the network diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F are theNG WDM systems which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE Care the back-to-back OTM stations. The ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations. Andthe ONE E is the OADM station.

Station E can use the FOADM boards or ROADM boards to form the network.

If station E uses the FOADM boards, see 5.9.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADMBoard for its commissioning description.

If station E uses the ROADM boards, see 5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADMBoard for its commissioning description.



138

Figure 5-16 Network diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM

Station D OLAStation B OLA Station C 2OTM



55km/15dB 60km/16dB

: OTM :OLA : OADM

NOTE

In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to illustrate thecommissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from east to west is the same asthe commissioning method for the signal flow from west to east.

NOTE

As shown in Figure 5-16, 2OTM means back-to-back OTM

Table 5-5 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-wavelengthsystem.

Table 5-5 Requirements on incident optical power

Module Type Number ofWavelengths

G.652 SSMF G.655 LEAF G.653

NRZ/DRZ 40 +4 +4 -5

80 +1 +1 -7

The optical power listed in this table is expressed in dBm.

NOTE

If modules or fibers of another type need to be used, confirm the incident optical power with the product manageror network designer.

5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTMStation

This section describes how to commission the optical power at the transmit end of an OTMstation along the west-to-east signal flow.



139

Prerequisite

The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA, U2000

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-17 Fiber connection of OTM station A on the OptiX OSN 8800

M40

M01

M02

M40

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

DCM

D40

OAU1

FIU

M40

OUT OUT

To F

DCMTDC RDC

OUT IN OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

OUT

TC

OUT

IN

To B

OUT

INININ

RC

Station A

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OBU1

IN

West East

LQM

LOM

LSX

LQM

LOM

LSX

RxTxD01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

D01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

Rx TxM01

M02

M40

CRPC

LINE SYS

VOA Fixed optical attenuator ODF side


M40

M01

M02

M40

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

DCM

D40

OAU1

FIU

M40

OUT OUT

To F

DCMTDC RDC

OUT IN OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

OUT

TC

OUT

IN

To B

OUT

INININ

RC

Station A

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OBU1

IN

West East

LQM

LOM

LSX

LQM

LOM

LSX

RxTxD01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

D01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

Rx TxM01

M02

M40

CRPC

LINE SYS




140


SC2

OAU1

FIU

RxTx

To F

DCMTDC RDC

OUT IN OUT

IN

OUT

TC OUT IN

RC

Station A

RM1

TM1RM

TM TM2

RM2

OBU1

IN

MR2

LQM

L4G

OBU1

FIU

DCM

OUT OUT

OUT TC

RCIN

To B

OUT

INININ

OBU1

MR2

LQM

L4G

RM

TM

D1 D2 A2A1

IN OUT

RxTx

IN OUT

D1 D2 A2A1

West East

CRPC

LINE SYS


Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber should be loosely inserted to the input port Rx on the client side of the OTU.

Step 2 Send the client signal to the east OTU.

Step 3 Query the bar code on the front panel or manufacturing information of the board to obtain theoptical module information on the client side of the OTU.

Step 4 Obtain the launched optical power and optical module information on the client side. Comparethe launched optical power of the client equipment with the received optical power on the clientside of the OTU. If required, prepare the fixed optical attenuator for later use.

Step 5 Measure the optical power of the fiber jumper connected to the RX port on the client side of theOTU by using an optical power meter.

Step 6 Install a fixed optical attenuator before the input port on the client side of the OTU to ensurethat the input optical power of the OTU meets requirements.



141

Step 7 If the optical power of all input ports on the OTU meets the specification requirements, insert afiber into the RX port on the OTU and record the input optical power at the RX port in thecommissioning record.

Step 8 Check whether the OUT ports on the WDM sides of all the east OTUs emit light. If not, checkwhether lasers on the WDM sides of the OTU are enabled.

Step 9 Measure the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU by using an opticalpower meter.

Step 10 Measure the input optical power at the following port by using an optical power meter, andrecord the value in the commissioning record. If the variance between the optical power of theport and the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU is greater than 1 dB,check whether fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean.

l For OptiX OSN 8800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by usingan optical power meter.

l For OptiX OSN 6800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by usingan optical power meter.

l For OptiX OSN 3800, measure the input optical power at the A1 and A2 port on the MR2by using an optical power meter.

Step 11 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the following board to scan themultiplexed signal. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA connected to the output port on the OTUto adjust the optical power flatness of add wavelengths. In this manner, ensure that the single-wavelength output optical power of the M40 is consistent with the nominal single-wavelengthinput optical power of the OA at the transmit end.

l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40board.

l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40board.

l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the MR2board.

Step 12 Record the optical power of each wavelength and multiplexed signal and calculate the insertionloss of each wavelength for the following board. Check whether the insertion loss of eachwavelength meets the requirements after the wavelength passes through the board. If the opticalpower is abnormal, check the fiber connection to the Mn port.

l For OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.

l For OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.

l For OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the MR2 board.

Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-TransmitOBU1 by using a fiber jumper. Then scan the multiplexed signal and measure the optical powerat the IN port on the OBU1.

Step 14 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the OUT port on the OBU1 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer. Check whether the mean output optical power of a single wavelength is inthe standard range.

Step 15 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1 according to the following formula: Gain =Output optical power of a single wavelength - Input optical power of a single wavelength. Thegain flatness of a single wavelength must be lower than 2.0 dB.



142

Step 16 Record the optical power at IN and OUT ports, input and output optical power, and gain of eachwavelength of the OBU1.

Step 17 Query the input and output optical power of a multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using theU2000. The variance between the power displayed on the U2000 and the power measured byusing the optical spectrum analyzer must be smaller than 2.0 dB. Otherwise, replace the board.

Step 18 Measure the input optical power at the RC port on the FIU by using an optical power meter. Ifthe variance between the optical power at RC port on the FIU and the optical power at the OUTport on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly and whetherthe fibers are clean.

Step 19 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter(during the test, the RM port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RC toOUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.0 dB.

Step 20 Measure the output optical power at the TM2 port on the SC2 by using an optical power meter,and then measure the input optical power at the RM port on the FIU. If the variance between theoptical power at the two ports is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properlyand whether the fibers are clean.

Step 21 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter(during the test, the RC port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RM toOUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.5 dB.

Step 22 Measure the output optical power on the ODF side. Compare the value with the output opticalpower at the OUT port on the FIU to check whether the fiber is correctly routed.

----End

5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLAThis section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at anOLA station.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station A at the transmit end must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA, U2000



143

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-20 Fiber connection of OLA station B

SC2FIU

To A

DCM

OUT IN

IN

OUT

TC

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1DCM

OUT TCIN

OAU1

TDCRDC

OBU1OUT RCIN

FIU

To C

OUT

IN

Station B

West East

VOA Fix optical attenuator ODF side

Procedure

Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare thevalue with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the lineattenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is largerthan the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whetherthe cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear thefault by following the appropriate procedures.

Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TM port on thewest FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values inthe commissioning record.

Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port of the west FIU. The insertion lossshould be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port on the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than –3dBm. Record the input opticalpower of the RM1 port in the commissioning record.

Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.Record the output optical power of the TM2 port in the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the OUT port onthe east FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber tothe RC port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertionloss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.



144

Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TC port on thewest FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical powervalues in the commissioning record.

Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion lossshould be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

Step 10 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the VOA before the OBU tocommission the mean input optical power of single wavelength of the OBU to nominal value.

Step 11 Test and record the input and output optical power of the DCM. Calculate the insertion loss ofthe VOA and DCM.

Step 12 The optical power commissioning method of the OBU is the same as that at the transmit end ofthe OTM. For more information, see Step 13 through Step 17 in 5.12.2 CommissioningTransmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station.

Step 13 Test the input optical power of the RC port and the output optical power of the OUT port of theeast FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting thefiber to the RM port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioningrecord.

Step 14 Calculate the insertion loss from the RC port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion lossshould be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

----End

5.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive EndThis section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at thereceive end of an OTM station.


The optical power commissioning of station B must be complete.




145

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-21 Fiber connection of OTM station C on the OptiX OSN 8800

M40

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

D40

OAU1

FIU

M40

OUT OUT

To B

DCM

TDC RDC

OUT

IN

OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

OUT

TC OUT

IN

To D

OUT

ININRC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

West East

LQM

LOM

LSX

LQM

LOM

LSX

RxTxD01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

D01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

Rx TxM01

M02

M40

M01

M02

M40

DCM

IN

Station C

IN



M40

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

D40

OAU1

FIU

M40

OUT OUT

To B

DCM

TDC RDC

OUT

IN

OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

OUT

TC OUT

IN

To D

OUT

ININRC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

West East

LQM

LOM

LSX

LQM

LOM

LSX

RxTxD01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

D01

D02

D40

LQM

LOM

LSX

Rx TxM01

M02

M40

M01

M02

M40

DCM

IN

Station C

IN




146


SC2FIU

RxTx

To B

OUT IN OUT

IN

OUT RC

Station C

RM1

TM1RM

TM TM2

RM2

OBU1 MR2

LQM

L4G

FIU

TC

To D

ININ

RM

TM

D1 D2 A2A1

IN OUT

OBU1OUT OUT RCIN OUT

MR2

LQM

L4G

RxTx

IN OUT

OAU1DCM

TDC RDC

TC OUTOBU1

OAU1

TDCRDC

IN

D1 D2 A2A1

East

DCMINOUT

West


Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports onthe west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT portson the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports onthe west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Thenmeasure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel in WDM mode. Or connect the INxport of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Thenmeasure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel on the U2000 by completing thefollowing operations.



147

l Log in to U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of theNE is displayed.

l Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.l Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum

Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.l Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.l In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR (dB) for each current

wavelength display.

NOTE

You can also connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the optical power and OSNR of each wavelengthof the IN port on the OAU1.

Step 8 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the OUT port on the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the gain of the OAU1 on theU2000 to commission the launched optical power to the maximum value for single wavelengthfor the OAU1.

NOTE

For the methods and requirements of gain adjustment for the OAU, see 5.6 Commissioning Optical Power ofEDFA Optical Amplifier Board.

Step 9 Calculate the gains of each wavelength of the OAU1. Record the output optical power, gain ofeach wavelength, and the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal.

Step 10 Check whether the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal is compliant to thetypical value by using the U2000.

Step 11 The tested OSNR of the output signals for the optical amplifier at the receive end must be higherthan the designed OSNR in the actual project.

Step 12 The commissioning method of the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU and DCM is the sameas that of the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 10 through Step 12 in 5.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper for the following port on the westboard to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power of each wavelength.l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40

board.l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40

board.l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the MR2

board.

Step 14 Test the output optical power of each wavelength for the following port by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.l For OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on

the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.l For OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on

the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.l For OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the D1 and D2

ports on the MR2 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer.



148

Step 15 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following boards. The insertion loss mustsatisfy the following requirements and the maximum difference between the insertion loss valuesmust be lower than 2.0 dB. If the difference is greater than 2.0 dB, replace the board with a newboard.

l For OptiX OSN 8800, the insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB.



Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether theoptical power for the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.

NOTE

If a PIN receiver is used on the WDM side of the OTU, no fixed optical attenuator is needed. If an APDis used on the WDM side of the OTU, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be added to ensure that theinput optical power of the IN port of the OTU meets the requirements. If the optical power does not meetthe requirements, add, change or remove the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the received opticalpower is within the standard range.

Step 17 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port of the OTU after the input optical power meetsthe requirements.

Step 18 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power of the ODF.Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is correctlyconnected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.

Step 19 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by using the U2000. The differencebetween the values on the U2000 and the test values must be lower than 2.0 dB. The number oferror corrections within 15 minutes for the board with FEC function must be less than 100,000.If the number of error corrections is more than 100,000, locate and correct the fault.

Step 20 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors of the clientequipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop back the TX and RX portson the client side of all OTUs for station C on the ODF side. In addition, a fixed optical attenuatorneeds to be added before the RX port.

NOTE

Section 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 5.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA and 5.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM ReceiveEnd show the commissioning process for the optical multiplex section. The commissioning for themultiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations are similar to these.

----End

5.12.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MultiplexerBoard+Demultiplexer Board)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the FOADM station along thewest-to-east signal flow.

PrerequisiteFiber connections and network configuration must be complete.



149

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fibers, fixed optical attenuator,variable optical attenuator (VOA), U2000 computer


Figure 5-24 Fiber connection diagram of the FOADM station

M40

M02

M03

M01

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

DCM

D40OAU1

FIU

M40

OUT OUT

To F

DCMTDC RDC

OUT

IN

OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

OUT

TC

OUT

IN

To B

OUT

INININRC

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OBU1

IN

East

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

RxTxD03

D02

D01

OTU

OTU

OTU

D01

D02

D03

OTU

OTU

OTU

Rx TxM01

M02

M03

CRPC

LINE SYS

West

VOA Fixed optical attenuator Optical distribution frame (ODF)

Procedure

Step 1 For information on how to commission the received optical power of the FOADM station usingthe multiplexer board and demultiplexer board, see 5.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power ofOTM Receive End.

Step 2 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 to scan the multiplexedsignals. Based on the tested optical power for each pass-through wavelength, adjust the VOAin each pass-through channel. Adjust the optical power flatness of the pass-through wavelengthso that the single-wavelength optical power input to the OBU1 is consistent with the nominalsingle-wavelength input optical power.

Step 3 The optical power at the transmit end of the FOADM station is commissioned the same way asthe optical power at the transmit end of the OTM station. For more information about thecommissioning procedure, see 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of theOTM Station.

----End



150

5.12.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)This section describes how to commission the optical power along the west-to-east signal flowin the FOADM station using the MR2+MR2 scheme.

Prerequisite

The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.



This section uses station E using the MRx boards as an example to describe the optical powercommissioning procedure for an FOADM station.


l For the OptiX OSN 8800, MR8V is considered as an example.


l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR2 is considered as an example.

Set-up Diagram

Figure 5-25 Fiber connection of FOADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT

IN

OUT OUT TC

RCIN

VI

VIRCOBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

MR8V MR8V

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

INTC OUT

MO

MI

MI

MO

DCM

West East

DCM

OTU

OTU




151


FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT

IN

OUT OUT TC

RCIN

VI

VIRCOBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

MR8V MR8V

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

INTC OUT

MO

MI

MI

MO

DCM

West East

DCM

OTU

OTU



FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

OUT

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OUT IN OUT

IN

RC

OBU1

OBU1

MR2 MR2

L4G

L4G

TC OUT IN

MO MO

MI

MI

OUT

MI

MO

MR2

LQM

L4G

To F

IN

OBU1OUT

OUT

TC

RCIN

IN

TDCRDC

LQM

L4G

OUT

West East

DCM

OAU1

DCM

IN




152

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board based on the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss ofthe IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning OpticalPower of OLA.

Step 4 For information about how to commission the optical power of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss ofthe RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning OpticalPower of OLA.

Step 6 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss ofthe IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning OpticalPower of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method for the OAU at the receive end and the DCM is the same as thecommissioning method for the OLA station. For more information, see Step 10 through Step 12in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

NOTE

The TDC and RDC ports on the OAU1 can connect to a DCM module. After input optical powercommissioning, set the gain to adjust the output optical power to the standard value. The optical power,gain and OSNR are tested the same way as described previously.

Step 8 Test the output optical power of the following ports in the west after commissioning the westOBU1 at the receive end. Determine the optical port with the highest output optical power.l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V

boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end.l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V

boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end.l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of the D1 and D2 ports on the two

MR2 boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receivingend.

Step 9 Add a proper fixed optical attenuator at the receive end of the OTU to ensure that the inputoptical power at the IN port on the OTU meets the requirements.

NOTE

l The optimal range of the input optical power of the OTU is from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overloadpoint – 5) dBm.

l For the specific specifications of OTUs, see the Product Description.

Step 10 Insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU after the input optical powermeets the requirements.

Step 11 Test the optical power at the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the

west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.



153

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on thewest MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the IN, D1, D2 and MO ports on thewest MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 12 Calculate the following drop insertion loss.l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of

the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on thewest MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one ofthe D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on thewest MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.

l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the D1 portand to the D2 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on thefirst west MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.

Step 13 For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of each wavelength of the IN, D1, D2 and MOports on the second MR2 of west. Calculate the drop insertion loss of the MR2 in the same way.

Step 14 Test the input optical power of the east OBU1 at the transmit end.l For the OptiX OSN 8800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the

west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical powerof the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit endconforms to the standard value.

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and thewest MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical powerof the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit endconforms to the standard value.

l For the OptiX OSN 3800, adjust the attenuation of the VOA between the east MR2 and thewest MR2 at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical powerof the pass through wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit endconforms to the standard value.

Step 15 Test the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU with an optical power meter.

Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end by using anoptical spectrum analyzer. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the OTU to ensure that theinput optical power of the add wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit endconforms to the typical input power for a single wavelength.

Step 17 Test the optical power of the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the

east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the

east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the MI, A1, A2 and OUT ports on the

east MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 18 Calculate the add insertion loss as follows.l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 ports

to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the eastMR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.



154

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 portsto the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the eastMR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.

l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the add insertion loss from the A1 port and the A2 portto the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to the OUT port on theeast MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.

Step 19 Test the optical power for each output wavelength at the OUT port on the east OBU1 by usingan optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 20 Calculate the gain for each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = Output optical power of a singlewavelength – Input optical power of a single wavelength. The gain flatness for each wavelengthmust be lower than 2 dB.

Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signals of the OBU1 by using theU2000. The difference between the value on the U2000 and the measured value must be lowerthan 2 dB.

Step 22 For information about how to commission the optical power and insertion loss of the RC andthe OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

----End

5.12.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the ROAM+ROAM mode.






155

Testing Diagram (Networking with ROAM+ROAM)

Figure 5-28 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with ROAM)

SC2

ROAM

OBU

D40

LOG

LQM

ROAM

D40

LOG

LQM

OBU

IN OUT

INOUT

OUTIN

INOUT

OBU1

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

DCM

FIU

FIUWest East

IN

OUT

OUT

IN

TM

TM1

RM1

RM

TM2 RM

TMRM2EXPO

EXPI

EXPOEXPI

M01

DM DMM02

Station E

RDC TDC

To D To FRC

TCRC

TC

M01

M02


Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.



Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT portson the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports onthe west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of theOLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power ofOLA.



156

Step 8 Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU, from the west FIU to thewest OTU. Create the optical cross-connection from east OTU at the transmit end to the eastFIU on the U2000.

Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power of the west OTUsmeets the requirements.

NOTE

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in thedashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the opticalamplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD moduleis configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frameare not required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.

l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific type can be identifiedthrough the bar code information pasted on the front panel of the module. The APD also has acorresponding APD warning identifier on the panel of the board.

Step 10 After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into theinput port on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN, DM and EXPO ports for the west ROAM with an optical powermeter. Measure the input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength output opticalpower at the Dn port of the D40.

Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port. Calculate the pass-throughloss from the IN port to the EXPO port of the west ROAM. Calculate the insertion loss for theD40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

NOTE

l For the ROAM board, Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuationvalue of the inside VOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about theinsertion loss of the ROAM board.

Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the ROAM.Method 1 is recommended.

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.The ROAM automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for east OTUand west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the IN portfor the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a singlewavelength.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the ROAM board. This ensuresthat the average input power of the IN port for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equalto the typical input power of a single wavelength.

Step 14 Test the optical power of the EXPI, Mn and OUT ports for the east ROAM by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss from the Mn port to the OUT port and the pass-through lossfrom the EXPI port to the OUT port for the east ROAM.



157

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the insideVOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about theinsertion loss of the ROAM board.

Step 16 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power for each outputwavelength of the OUT port for east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelengthshould be less than 2 dB.

Step 18 Query the input and output optical power for the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using theU2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than2 dB.

Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT portsof the east FIU, sees Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

----End

5.12.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.






158

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+WSM9)

Figure 5-29 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+WSM9)

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT IN OUT

OUT

TC

RCININ

INRC

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

WSM9INTC OUT

DCMM40

LSX

LOG

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

WSM9 WSD9

LQM

LOG

M40D40

AMDMWest East

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

WSD9

SC2

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG


NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelengthat the same time.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.




Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT portson the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.



159

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports onthe west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of theOLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power ofOLA.

Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, fromthe west FIU to the east FIU, and from east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on theU2000.

Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelength. Method 1 is recommended duringdeployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength. This ensuresthat the average input power of the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end meets therequirements.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OTU. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelengthof the WSD9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port of the westOTU at the receive end meets the requirements.

Step 10 Test the optical power of IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets therequirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Adjust the optical power for the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommendedduring deployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The WSD9 and the WSM9 automatically adjust the optical power for the west pass-throughwavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for theIN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a singlewavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use the second methodto fine-tune the optical power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-throughwavelength of the WSD9 and WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power ofpass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal tothe typical input power of a single wavelength.

Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of the D40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. Theinsertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

NOTE

The insertion loss of D40 = the input optical power of D40 – the output optical power of D40



160

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through lossfrom the IN port to the EXPO port of the east WSD9.

NOTE


l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to orless than 8 dB.

Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommendedduring deployment commissioning.

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU.This ensures that the average input power of add wavelengths for the IN port on the eastOBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-tune the optical power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-throughwavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-throughwavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typicalinput power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengthsthrough the M40, the VOA is not required.


Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. Theinsertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports of the WSM9 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate thepass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of theinside VOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSM9 board should be equalto or less than 8 dB.

Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of theOUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength shouldbe less than 2 dB.



161

Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using theU2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than2 dB.

Step 22 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT portsof the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

----End

5.12.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSD9+RMU9 mode.






162

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+RMU9)

Figure 5-30 Fiber connections of ROADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUTIN

OUT OUT

TC

RCIN

IN

INRC

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

RMU9INTC OUT

DCM

LSX

LOG

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

RMU9 WSD9

LQM

LOG

D40

AMDM

West East

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

WSD9

SC2

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

MR8V

MR8V

IN




163


FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUTIN

OUT OUT

TC

RCIN

IN

INRC

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

RMU9INTC OUT

DCM

LSX

LOG

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

RMU9 WSD9

LQM

LOG

D40

AMDM

West East

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

WSD9

SC2

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

MR8V

MR8V

IN




164


FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

OUT OUT

TC

RCIN

IN

IN

RCOBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

RMU9IN

TC OUT

DCM

LSX

LQG

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

RMU9 WSD9

LQM

LQG

D40

AMDM

West East

LSX

LQG

LQM

LQG

LSX

LQG

LQM

LQG

WSD9

SC2

LSX

LQG

LQM

LQG

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

MR4

MR4

IN


NOTE


Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.


Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports onthe west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.






165

Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of theOLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power ofOLA.

Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, fromthe west FIU to the east FIU on the U2000. Create the optical cross-connection from the eastOTU that is connected with RMU9 directly at the transmit end to the east FIU.

Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended duringdeployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength from the westOTU. This ensures that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU at the receive endis equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-tune the optical power.

2. Method 2: Set the attenuation value of each drop channel of the WSD9 on the U2000.Ensure that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU is equal to the typical inputpower of a single wavelength.

Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meetsthe requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Test the input and output optical power of the west D40. Calculate the insertion loss of the D40board, which should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 12 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelengths. Method 1 is recommendedduring deployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The WSD9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each pass-throughwavelength. This ensures that the input power of the single pass-through wavelength forthe OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Testthe input power of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Manually set thecorresponding VOA of each pass-through wavelength of the west WSD9. This ensures thatthe input power of the single pass-through wavelength for the OBU1 is equal to the typicalinput power of a single wavelength.

Step 13 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port and the pass-through loss fromIN port to the EXPO port of the WSD9 board.



166

NOTE


l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to orless than 8 dB.

Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths for the east OTU board (the OTU is directlyconnected to the RMU9 board). Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The RMU9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each add wavelength of eacheast OTU. This ensures that the input power the single add wavelength of the OBU1 isequal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use method 2 tofine-tune the optical power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Testthe input power of east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. M set thecorresponding VOA of each add wavelength for the east OTU in the east RMU9. Thisensures that the input power of the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the typicalinput power of a single wavelength.

Step 16 For wavelengths added through the RMU9 after the wavelengths are multiplexed by the MRx,perform the following substeps:




l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR4 is considered as an example.

1. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx to3 dB.

2. Set the VOA attenuation between the MRx and OTU to the minimum.3. Determine the smallest input optical power value for wavelengths added through the MRx

to the IN port of the OBU1. Adjust the optical power for each of the other wavelengths tothe smallest input optical power value to flatten the optical power.

4. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx toobtain the typical input power of a single wavelength of the OBU1 added through the MRx.

Step 17 Test the input and output optical power of MRx, and calculate the insertion loss of it. Theinsertion loss of the MRx board must satisfy the following requirements.l For the MR8V board, the insertion loss for the MR8V board should be equal to or less than

3.5 dB.l For the MR4 board, the insertion loss for the MR4 board should be equal to or less than

1.5 dB.

Step 18 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the RMU9 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 19 Calculate the insertion loss for each add wavelength from the AMn port to the OUT port.Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the RMU9.



167

NOTE


l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about theinsertion loss of the RMU9 board.

Step 20 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of theOUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 21 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelengthshould be less than 2 dB.

Step 22 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using theU2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than2 dB.

Step 23 For the optical power commissioning of the insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUTports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power ofOLA.

----End

5.12.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the RDU9+WSM9 mode.



Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA



168

Testing Diagram (Networking with RDU9+WSM9)

Figure 5-33 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with RDU9+WSM9)

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1

OUT OUT

OUT

IN

OUTOUT TC

RCININ

INRCOBU1 OAU1

OAU1

TDCRDC

WSM9IN

TC OUT

DCMM40

LSX

LOG

D40V

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

WSM9 RDU9

LQM

LOG

M40D40V

AMDMWest East

LSX

LOG

LQM

LOG

LQM

LOG

RDU9

SC2

LSX

LOG


NOTE


Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.






169


Step 7 The commissioning method for the west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that ofthe OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end, fromthe west FIU to the east FIU, and from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on theU2000.

Step 9 When wavelengths are dropped through the MR8V board or the D40V board, method 1 isrecommended to adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths during deploymentcommissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The MR8V board or the D40V board automatically adjusts the optical power for the dropwavelength. This ensures that the average input power for the IN port of the west OTU atthe receive end meets requirements.

NOTE


2. Method 2: In the scenario where the RDU9 is directly connected to the OTU, selectManual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust theattenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelength of the RDU9 board.This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the west OTU at the receiveend meets the requirements.


Step 11 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended duringdeployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength.This ensures that the average input power of the pass-through wavelengths of the IN porton the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a singlewavelength.

NOTE


2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-throughwavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-throughwavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical inputpower of a single wavelength.

Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west RDU9 board by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of D40V, and calculate the insertion loss of it. Theinsertion loss of the D40V board should be equal to or less than 8.0 dB.



170

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through lossfrom the IN port to the EXPO port for the east RDU9.

NOTE

l For the insertion loss of the RDU9 board, refer to the Product Description.

Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommendedduring deployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU.This ensures that the average input power for the add wavelengths of the IN port on theeast OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE


2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-throughwavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of the pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to thetypical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the D40V, a VOA (in the solid frame)needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengthsthrough the M40, the VOA is not required.

Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. Theinsertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the WSM9 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate thepass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.

NOTE


l When the attenuation for the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss for the WSM9 board should beequal to or less than 8 dB.

Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and the single wavelength for each output wavelength forthe OUT port of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelengthshould be less than 2 dB.

Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OBU1 by using theU2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than2 dB.


----End



171

5.12.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.

Prerequisitel The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.l The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.



Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the WSMD4 board. In this section, thenetworking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used for illustration purposes. Thenetwork providing multi-dimensional grooming can be considered as multiple networksproviding two-dimensional grooming.

Figure 5-34 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

FIU

FIU

OUT

OUT IN

IN

OBU1

IN OUT

WSMD4West

OBU1INOUT

East

D40

WSMD4

D40M40 M40

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

DM4

DM4

AM4

AM4

AM1DM1 AM1 DM1

OBU1 OAU1

LOG

LOG

LSX

LSX

OB

U

OB

U

TC

RC

IN

OUT

RC

TC

OUT

IN

To D To F




172

NOTE

l In this diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports for the WSMD4 board are not shown.The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in other direction.


Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.






Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that for theOLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 12 in 5.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power ofOLA.

Step 8 Create a Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and createone from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000.

Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUsmeets the requirements.

NOTE

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in thedashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the opticalamplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD moduleis configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.

l The previous commissioning method is for the OTU board with a PIN photodiode. For the OTU withAPD, a 10 dB fixed attenuator needs to be configured.

l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific module type can beidentified by the bar code information pasted on the front panel. The APD had a corresponding APDwarning identifier on the panel of the board.


Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD4 with an optical powermeter. Test the output optical power for the D40.



173

Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD4, andcalculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or lessthan 6.5 dB.

NOTE

l For the WSMD4 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero +Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board.

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about theinsertion loss for the WSMD4 board.

Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD4.Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.The WSMD4 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the eastOTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power ofpass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal tothe typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD4 board. This ensuresthat the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equalto the typical input power of a single wavelength.

Step 14 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD4 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT portfor the east WSMD4.

Step 16 Test the single wavelength optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power ofeach output wavelength for the OUT port of the east OAU1 by using an optical spectrumanalyzer.

Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OAU1. The gain flatness for each wavelengthshould be less than 2 dB.

Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OAU1 by using theU2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than2 dB.


----End





174

PrerequisiteThe fiber connections must be correct.

To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must beforced to emit light.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selectedaccording to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator,Variable optical attenuator, U2000



FIU

FIU

OUT

OUT IN

IN

OBU1

IN

OUT

WSMD2West

OAU1INOUT

East

D40

WSMD2

D40M40 M40

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

EXPO

EXPI

AMDM AM DM

OAU1 OBU1

LOG

LOG

LSX

LSX

TC

RC TC

RC OUT

INOUT

IN

To D To FEXPI

EXPO

Procedure

Step 1 Check if the fiber connection between boards is correct based on the fiber connection diagram,and check that the fiber on each board is well inserted. If not, immediately correct the error.

Step 2 Test the optical power of the west FIU and the SC2. See step 1 to step 9 in 5.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 3 Perform the commissioning on the west OAU. See step 10 to step 12 in5.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 4 Create optical cross-connections on a per-NE basis from the west FIU. Create optical cross-connections on a per-NE basis from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on theU2000.

Step 5 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelengthoutput optical power at the DM and EXPO ports on the west WSMD2. Calculate the insertionloss of the wavelength dropped from the IN port to the DM port and the insertion loss of thewavelength that traverses from the IN port to the DM port on the WSMD2.



175

Drop insertion loss = Input optical power for a single drop wavelength at the IN port on theWSMD2 – Output optical power for a single drop wavelength at the DM port on the WSMD2

Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the IN port onthe WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPO port onthe WSMD2

NOTE

For information about the parameters of optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.

Step 6 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN portand the single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the west D40. Calculate theinsertion loss of the D40.

Single-wavelength insertion loss of the D40 = Single-wavelength input optical power at the INport on the D40 – Single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the D40

Step 7 Test the input optical power from the IN port on all the west OTU boards. Replace or removethe fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power from the IN port on the OTUboards is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point – 5) dBm.

Step 8 Test the client-side transmitting optical power of the west OTU board. There are two possiblesituations, described as follows:l If the client equipment is also newly installed, connect the OTU boards to the client equipment

for test.l If the client equipment is not connected, use a fiber to connect the client-side TX port on the

west OTU board to the client-side RX port on the east OTU board of station C by using afixed optical attenuator on the ODF.

NOTE

The client side of the OTU board is connected to the client equipment normally after commissioning. Theinterconnection of the OTU boards exists for the testing of 24-hour bit errors in serial after an analyzer isconnected to station A after commissioning.

Step 9 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power of the east OBU. On the U2000, setthe attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east WSMD4. Set theattenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each pass-through wavelength of the OBUconforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technicalspecifications for the OBU board, see the Product Description.

Step 10 Measure the optical power at the RX port on the east OTU board. Add, replace or remove a fixedoptical attenuator to ensure that the optical power at this RX port is within the optimal range:from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload – 5) dBm.

NOTE

Optical ports on the OTU board used in this network scenario are the S-64.2b ports. For client-sidespecifications for other types of OTUs, see the Product Description.

Step 11 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the east OTU board. This value should bein the range from 0 dBm to –5 dBm. This value is usually about –2 dBm.

Step 12 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the received single-wavelength optical power at the Mnport and the single-wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east M40. Calculatethe insertion loss of the M40.



176

NOTE

For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.

Step 13 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power at the IN port on the east OBU. Onthe U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the eastWSMD2. Set the attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each add wavelength ofthe OBU conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technicalspecifications of the OBU board, see Product Description.

Step 14 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the AM and EXPI ports and the single-wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east WSMD2. Calculate the insertionloss of the wavelength added from the AM port to the OUT port, and the insertion loss of thewavelength that traverses from the AM port to OUT port on the WSMD2.

Add insertion loss = Input optical power of a single add wavelength at the AM port on theWSMD2 – Output optical power of a single add wavelength at the OUT port on the WSMD2

Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPI porton the WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the OUT porton the WSMD2

NOTE

For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description. The insertion lossmeasured in the previous steps includes the VOA attenuation, which differs from the insertion lossmeasured when the VOA attenuation is set to 0.

Step 15 Perform the commissioning on the east OBU. See 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-EndOptical Power of the OTM Station.

Step 16 Perform the commissioning on the east FIU. See 5.12.2 Commissioning Transmit-End OpticalPower of the OTM Station.

----End




To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must beforced to emit light.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selectedaccording to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator,Variable optical attenuator, U2000



177

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)

This section describes the commissioning procedure based on the network in Figure 5-36. If thesystem is required to support the 1588 clock, see 5.10.5 Commissioning Optical Power ofROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4) for the commissioning procedure.


DAS1 DAS1

M40

M40

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

DCMDCM

WSMD9WSMD9

DCM DCM

LIN

LOUT

SOUT

SIN

IN

OUTAM1

DM1

DM1

AM1EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

OUT

IN

SIN

SOUT

RXTX

LOUT

LIN

TM

RM

RXTX

TM

RM

NOTE


Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 Test the optical power of the LIN port on the west DAS1 with an optical power meter. Comparethe value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station D to calculate the lineattenuation between station D and station E on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is largerthan the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whetherthe cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear thefault by following the appropriate procedures.

Step 3 Test the input optical power of the LIN port and the output optical power of the TM port on thewest DAS1 at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power valuesin the commissioning record.



178

Step 4 Calculate the insertion loss from the LIN port to the TM port of the west DAS1. The insertionloss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 5 Test the input optical power of the RX port on the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.Add a proper attenuator to make the input optical power less than –3 dBm. Record the inputoptical power of the RX port in the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the output optical power of the TX port of the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.Record the output optical power of the TX port in the commissioning record.

Step 7 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the LOUT port onthe east DAS1 at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiberto the SIN port of the DAS1 board). Record the optical power values in the commissioningrecord.

Step 8 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the LOUT port on the east DAS1. The insertionloss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 9 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the SOUT port on the DAS1 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer. Check whether the average output optical power of a single wavelength isin the range of nominal optical power of a single wavelength ± 2 dB.

Step 10 Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west DAS1 to the east DAS1, and createone from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east DAS1 on the U2000.

Step 11 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUsmeets the requirements.


Step 13 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD9 with an optical powermeter. Test the output optical power for the D40.

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD9, andcalculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or lessthan 6.5 dB.

NOTE

l For the WSMD9 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero + Attenuationvalue of the internal VOA of the board.

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about theinsertion loss for the WSMD9 board.

Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD9.Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.

The WSMD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the eastOTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power ofpass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal tothe typical input power of a single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalport on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-tune the power.



179

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD9 board. This ensuresthat the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equalto the typical input power of a single wavelength.

Step 16 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD9 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 17 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT portfor the east WSMD9.

Step 18 Test the single wavelength optical power of the SIN port and single wavelength optical powerof each output wavelength for the LOUT port of the east DAS1 by using an optical spectrumanalyzer.

Step 19 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the DAS1. The gain flatness of each wavelength mustbe lower than 2 dB.

----End



180

6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to remotely commission optical power.

6.1 General Commissioning SequenceThis section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.

6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power CommissioningWhen remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for eachchannel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical powerby changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.

6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain NetworkThis section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioningprocedures.

6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long SpansThis section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power


181

6.1 General Commissioning SequenceThis section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.

Basic Conditions for Remotely Commissioning Optical Powerl The EVOA configured on the main optical path must be an EVOA board (VA1 or VA4).l MCA boards must be configured at optical power monitoring points so that you can query

and analyze the optical spectrum through the U2000.l Optical fibers on the entire network are properly connected. The attenuation of the optical

fibers is normal and the communication between all NEs and the U2000 is normal.

General Sequence for Commissioning Optical PowerOptical power of NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow.During commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the optical power,gain, and insertion loss requirements for each board.

Generally, the optical power of the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisorychannel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements for theboards.

Optical Power Commissioning ProceduresFigure 6-1 shows the commissioning procedure.

NOTE

If the line attenuation is greater than the End of Life (EOL) specified in the design drawing, check the internalfiber connections and external fiber attenuators.

If the customer raises specific requirements on fiber margin and provides the measured value: the line attenuation≤ EOL – required fiber margin.

If the customer provides only the EOL, it is required that the line attenuation only be smaller than the EOL.

Figure 6-1 General commissioning flow

Commission optical power ofadd wavelengths

Commission links

Equilibrate optical power

Commission receive opticalpower of OTUs



182

Before commissioning the optical power, determine optical power monitoring sites and opticalpower commissioning stations on the network according to Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Distribution of the stations for commissioning

MCA\OSA

OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTMOLA

Line attenuation commissioning

Optical power equilibrium

Power adjustingstation (in add

direction)

Powermonitoring

station

MCA\OSA

MCA\OSA

Line attenuation commissioning

Optical power equilibrium

Power adjustingstation

Powermonitoring

station

Power adjustingstation (in add

direction)

Powermonitoring

station

OSA: Optical Spectrum Analyzer MCA: Spectrum Analyzer Unit

NOTE

Consider the OTM, FOADM and ROADM stations as the optical power commissioning stations. As the opticalpower for pass-through wavelengths on the FOADM stations cannot be commissioned for equalization purposes,consider the FOADM stations as fibers during commissioning.

NOTE

If the optical power monitoring point is settled at the OTM or OADM station, the optical power of the OLAstations does not need to be adjusted.

NOTE

To achieve optical power equilibrium, the network needs to be divided according to the network model, the startand end stations should be specified, and the power-adjusting stations should be determined. When determiningwhat stations will have optical power adjustment monitoring, adhere to the following principles:

l If the number of spans between two power-adjusting stations is N, determine the power-monitoring stationin the middle of the span (N/2). If N is an odd number, the power-monitoring point should be shifted (N/2±0.5). And configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the transmit and received ends as required.

NOTE

OPM8 boards are recommended.

The WDM system commissions the optical power for each NE individually based on the signalflow in each network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmitdirection and the receive direction.

First, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in the transmit direction. Thenindividually commission the optical power for each downstream NE. Complete the optical powercommissioning of the destination OTM in the receive direction. Finally, complete the opticalpower commissioning for the other signal flow in the reverse direction.

Project X is used as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning in the followingprocedures:



183

6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain NetworkThis section describes the commissioning procedure for the chain network.

Prerequisite

The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.

Network Diagram for the Chain Network

Figure 6-3 shows the commissioning procedure for the chain network.

Figure 6-3 Commissioning procedure for the chain network

MCA MCA MCA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8910111213

A B C D E F G

OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM

West East

: OTM : OLA : OADM


First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of OTM station A. Thencommission the optical power station by station along the signal flow until the optical powercommissioning is complete in the west-to-east direction. For the commissioning sequence, seeFigure 6-3 (steps 1 through 7). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction, thatis, in the east-to-west direction. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-3 (steps 7 through13).

Commission the optical power along the A-B-C-D-E-F-G signal flow in the following sequence.

NOTE

For the technical specifications for each amplifier board and the OTU board, see Quick Reference Table of theUnits in the Hardware Description.

Commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and then commission the links:l At station A, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths to ensure that the input

optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input opticalpower for the OA.

l At station B, commission the B-from-A optical power to ensure that the input optical powerfor the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.



184

l At station C, commission the C-from-B optical power to ensure that the input optical powerfor the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

l At station C, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-throughwavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end isconsistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

l At station D, commission the D-from-C optical power to ensure that the input optical powerfor the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

l At station E, commission the E-from-D optical power to ensure that the input optical powerfor the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

l At station E, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-throughwavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end isconsistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

l At station F, commission the F-from-E optical power to ensure that the input optical powerfor the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

l At station G, commission the G-from-F optical power to ensure that the input optical powerfor the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

Equilibrate the optical power:l If the MCA board is configured at station B, commission the optical power for the add

wavelengths at station A for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCAboard at station B. This ensures that:Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power ± 1)dBm

l If the MCA board is configured at station D, commission the optical power for the addwavelengths and pass-through wavelengths at station C for the equilibrium based on theoptical power tested by the MCA board at station D. This ensures that:Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power ± 1)dBm

l If the MCA board is configured at station F, commission the optical power for the addwavelengths at station E for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCAboard at station F. This ensures that:Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power ± 1)dBm

Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs:l Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs to be in the nominal range of the receive

optical power along the A-C-E-G span.

6.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring NetworkThis section describes the commissioning procedure for the ring network.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

Network Diagram for the Ring NetworkFigure 6-4 shows the commissioning procedure for the ring network.



185

Figure 6-4 Commissioning procedure for the ring network

MCA

MCA

MCAMCA

1 2 3

4

567

8

9 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

171819

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

: OLA : OADM

NOTE

When the commissioning of 1–10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-monitoringsites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power of each single wavelength meets the equilibriumrequirement, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a single wavelengthplus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps 11 through 19.If the optical power of any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirement, re-commission the optical power ina clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning in a counter-clockwisedirection until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.


Before commissioning a ring network, select the start station and end station according to thefollowing principle:l The start station or end station should be a station which adds or drops wavelengths.



186

First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of ROADM station A. Commissionthe optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by arrows in the figure. Forthe commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-4 (steps 1 through 10). Then commission the opticalpower in the reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure6-4 (steps 11 through 19).

For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chainnetwork.

6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh NetworkThis section describes the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.

Network Diagram for the Mesh NetworkFigure 6-5 shows the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.



187

Figure 6-5 Commissioning procedure for the mesh network

MCA

MCA

MCAMCA27

20

21

22

23

1 2 3

4

567

8

9 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

171819

MCA

MCA

24

26

25

28

29

30

31

32

A C

D

E

F

G

H

B

I

J

K

: OLA : OADM

NOTE

When the commissioning of steps 1 through 10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-monitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power for each single wavelength meets theequilibrium requirements, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of asingle wavelength plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is,steps 11 through 19. If the optical power for any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirements, re-commissionthe optical power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioningin a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.


Before commissioning the mesh network, divide the mesh network into chain subnets and ringsubnets. Then commission the subnets. Divide the mesh network according to the followingprinciples:



188

l Divide the mesh network into ring and chain subnets according to the wavelengthconnection. The ring subnets should carry the most wavelength connections, and the chainsubnets should carry the least wavelength connections. Determine the ring subnets first andthen the chain subnets.

l Divide the mesh networks into large-scale ring subnets and small-scale chain subnets whenpossible.

l When dividing the mesh network is complete, select the start and end stations for each ringsubnet. For other principles, see the corresponding commissioning requirements on the ringnetwork.

Divide the mesh network shown in Figure 6-5 as follows:

l Ring subnet: A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-ACommission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by thearrows in Figure 6-5 (steps 1 through 10). Then, commission the optical power in thereverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps11 through 19).

l Chain subnet: A-K-J-I-ECommission the optical power station by station along the signal flow. For thecommissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 20 through 24). When commissioning theoptical power for the chain network is complete, the optical power at station E changes.Therefore, you need to measure and analyze the optical power between the adjacent D andF stations. In addition, you need to re-commission the optical power at station E forequilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 24 through26). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction along the signal flow. Forthe commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 27 through 30). Measure and analyzethe optical power between station H and station B. At station A, commission the opticalpower for equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps30 through 32).

For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chainnetwork.

6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical PowerCommissioning

When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for eachchannel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical powerby changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.

6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier BoardsThis section describes how to set the gain and Rated Optical Power for an optical amplifier(OA) board.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.

The board must be created.



189

Impact on SystemNone


Background Informationl OAU and OBU are OA boards that support gain adjustment. In practical use, calculate the

gain range that can be set based on the intermediate insertion loss.

NOTE

Adjust the gain of the OBU board only when the ALC function is used.

l Before enabling the OPA function, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field of theOA board at the transmit end as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.

Procedure1. On the U2000, set the gain for an OA board.

(1) Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus of the NE is displayed.

(2) Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.(3) Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.(4) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.(5) On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click Nominal Gain field, and enter an

appropriate value.(6) Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

2. On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for an OA board.

(1) Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from theFunction Tree.

(2) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.(3) On the Advanced Attributes tab page, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field

as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.

NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of the OA boards, see Quick Reference Table of theUnits in the Hardware Description.

(4) Click Apply.3. On the U2000, close the laser of the OUT port for the OA board.


(2) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.(3) On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to Off.(4) Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

4. On the U2000, enable the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.



190


(2) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.(3) On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to On.(4) Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

6.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on BoardsWhen a board has an internal attenuator, you can adjust the optical power of this board bychanging the attenuation of the internal attenuator. This section describes how to adjust theattenuation based on engineering design documents.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.



Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000

Background InformationThe electrical variable attenuator boards are the VA1, VA4, M40V, MR8V, ROAM, RMU9,WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD9 and WSMD2 boards.

NOTE

l The variable attenuator built in the WSM9 or WSD9 board can be adjusted only when the board has beenconfigured with routes.

l The variable attenuator built in the AMx port of the WSMD2 or WSMD4 board can be adjusted only whenthe board has been configured with routes.

Procedure1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of

the NE is displayed.2. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand

Function Tree.4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.5. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the Optical Interface Attenuation

Ratio field, and then enter an appropriate value.

NOTE

The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.

6. Click Apply. Click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.



191

6.2.3 Configuring the MCA BoardThis section describes how to set the parameters for an MCA board so that it monitors the opticalpower for the specified channels.





Background InformationThe MCA boards include the MCA4 ,MCA8 and OPM8 boards.

Procedure1. Set parameters for an MCA board to monitor the optical power of wavelengths.


(2) Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.(3) Select the desired MCA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from

the Function Tree.(4) Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Monitor Wavelength from the drop-

down list.(5) Click Query.(6) Set Wavelength Monitor Status of the specified wavelength to Monitor or No

Monitor as required.(7) Click Apply. Click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

2. Query the optical power and OSNR of the wavelengths on the specified channels by usingan MCA board.

(1) Select the desired MCA board, and then choose Configuration > Laser SpectrumAnalysis from the Function Tree.

(2) Select the number for the desired channel from Port Number, and click Query.

6.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line BoardsThis section describes how to set the board relay mode for the Line boards.




192




Background InformationThe board works either in Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When the optical-layer ASON is applied, however, the board must work in Optical Relay Mode. When there isno optical-layer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or opticalrelay mode. But, it is recommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.

NOTE

For the line boards that support the regeneration mode, see the Hardware Description.

Procedure1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of

the NE is displayed.2. Right-click and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired line board, and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Board from the drop-down list.5. Set Board Mode to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.

NOTE

The board mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layerASON is applied, however, the board mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. When there is no optical-layer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or optical relay mode. But, it isrecommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.

6. Click Apply, and click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on theChain Network

This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioningprocedures.

6.3.1 Example DescriptionThis section describes the networking for project X.

Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E, F and G arethe WDM systems which form the chain network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE Gare the OTM stations, the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations, the ONE C is theROADM station and the ONE E is the FOADM station.



193

Networking Diagram of the Project XFigure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X.

Figure 6-6 Networking diagram of project X

MCA MCA MCA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8910111213

FOADMROADM

West East

A B C D E F G

OLAOTM OLA OLA OTM

:OTM :OLA : OADM

In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example toillustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow fromeast to west is the same as the signal flow from west to east.

Figure 6-7 shows the commissioning procedure.



194

Figure 6-7 General commissioning flow of project X

Equilibrate optical power

Commission optical power of addwavelengths

Commission links

Commission receive opticalpower of OTUs

In the station, setthe "OPA Mode" to "Auto"

In the station, setthe "OPA Mode" to "Manual"

Adjust the gain of the lineamplifier to compensate the line

attenuation

Make sure that the overalloptical power of the multiplexed

wavelength is constant andadjust VOA or VA1 of each add

wavelength for power equilibriumof each wavelength

Measure the receive opticalpower of each OTU and adjustVOA or VA1 of the channel so

that the receive optical power ofthe OTU meets requirements

Preset VOA or VA1 of links

Set "Rated Optical Power" totypical input optical power of asingle wavelength for the OA

Commission optical power of addwavelengths

Preset VOA or VA1 of addwavelengths of multiplexer board

as 5 dB

Adjust VOA or VA1 beforeOA or gain of OA so that the

output optical power reaches thenominal optical power

Force one OTU to emit lightand close WDM-side lasers of

other OTUs

OPA function isavailable in the ROADM?OTM\FOADM

YesNo



195

Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 6-1 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-wavelengthsystem.

Table 6-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Module Type Number ofWavelengths

G.652 SSMF G.655 LEAF G.653

NRZ/DRZ 40 +4 +4 -5

80 +1 +1 -7

The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm.

NOTE

For other optical modules or fiber types, contact the product managers or network design personnel to determinethe incident optical power.

NOTE

The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incidentpower is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator(VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channelincident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.

OAU

: VOA

OAU

FIU

6.3.2 Commissioning ProcedureThis section describes the procedure for commissioning optical power.

Commissioning Procedure for the Add-Wavelength and Link Optical Power

Table 6-2 lists the procedure for each site.



196

Table 6-2 Commissioning procedures

Procedure

From West to East

1(OTM)

2 (OLA) 3(ROADM)

4 (OLA) 5(FOADM)

6 (OLA) 7(OTM)

CommissioningOpticalPowerfor theAddWavelengths

Y N Y N Y N N

Commissionlinks

N Y Y Y Y Y Y

NOTE

l “Y” indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.

l “N” indicates that the procedure need not be performed.

NOTE

The optical power for single channel is not optimized at this step, but during equalization.

NOTE

Before starting, set the attenuation of DEMUX to maximum, if EVOA is available.

The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of the OTM/OADM is shown in Figure6-8.



197

Figure 6-8 Commissioning procedure for OTM/OADM optical power

Start

OPA is available?

Configure the E2E OCH trail

Configure the E2E OCH trail of ROADM node if ROADM is

there

Block all wavelengths except one local added wavelength

Set reference OA power by NMS

Set OA Gain to minimum if variable Gain OA

Enable OPA of ROADM node(OPA set attenuation of

EVOA to calculated value)

Adjust input power of local wavelength to target power

Set OPA to manual

Release all the blocked traffic which is going to

downstream

End

N

Y

The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of an OLA is shown in Figure 6-9.



198

Figure 6-9 Commissioning procedure for OLA optical power

Start

Design loss <minimum Gain OA?

Set EVOA at the receive endto Minimum

Span loss is less thandesign data?

Span loss is more thanminimum gain of OA?

Calculate and set the targetattenuation according to the

design span loss

Check fiber

Set VOA makeSpan loss=Min gain

Set OA Gain=Span loss

End

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

Commissioning Procedure for Optical Power EqualizationTable 6-3 lists the procedures for each site.


Procedure

From West to East

1(OTM)

2 (OLA) 3(ROADM)

4 (OLA) 5(FOADM)

6 (OLA) 7(OTM)

Equalizeopticalpower

Y Ya Y Ya Yb Ya N



199

NOTE



l “a” indicates that the OLA station works as a monitoring station during the commissioning process ofcommissioning the optical power for equilibrium purposes.

l “b” indicates that the optical power for each add channel at the FOADM station is commissioned forequalization purposes.

The commissioning flowchart for equalizing wavelength optical power is shown in Figure6-10.

Figure 6-10 Commissioning procedure for equalizing wavelength optical power

Start

Query the power level of each channel at monitor site

Compare to the reference level and get target

attenuation set

Set EVOA by NMS

Is flatness in range of target?

Is the last OEQ in equalization order?

End

N

Y

Y

N

Commissioning Procedure for Drop-Wavelength Optical PowerTable 6-4 lists the procedures for each site.



200


Procedure

From West to East

1(OTM)

2 (OLA) 3(ROADM)

4 (OLA) 5(FOADM)

6 (OLA) 7(OTM)

Commissionreceiveopticalpower ofOTUs

Y N Y N Y N Y

NOTE



The commissioning flowchart for drop wavelength optical power is shown in Figure 6-11.



201

Figure 6-11 Commissioning procedure for drop wavelength optical power

Start

Is EVOA available?

Set default attenuation by NMS

Query input Power of OTU by NMS

Is it in recommended range?

Adjust the EVOA until the power is inside the

recommended range

Go to the site to change the fixed attenuator or adjust

attenuation of MVOA until the power is inside the

recommended range

N

Y

Y

N

End

N

Is EVOA available?

Y

6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths atOTM Station A

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A that is in thewest-to-east signal flow.



202


The ECC communication must be created.

The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.

The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.


Background InformationFor the technical specifications of each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of theUnits in the Hardware Description.

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-12 Fiber connections of OTM station A

Station A

M40V

OAU1

FIU

SC1

D40

OUT OUT

OUT TC

RCIN OUT

ININ

RMTM

TMRM

OAU1

TDCRDC

To B

OTU

OTU

OTU

Rx

OTU

OTU

OTU

D31

D32

D40

Tx

M31

M32

M40

DCM

From B

EVOA Fixed optical attenuator ODF side

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-12, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on thenetwork, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, you must configure the MVOAand then perform the optical power commissioning on site.

Procedure

Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.



203

1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NEFunction from the Main Topology.

2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.

3. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Disabled.4. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light and close WDM-side lasers for theother OTUs.

NOTE

After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser of the OTU is automatically enabled andis forced to emit light.

1. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed.2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-

hand Function Tree.4. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to Off. Click Apply.

----End

Scenario 1: An EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.

NOTE

The EVOA attenuation set at this point is the preset value. It is used to adjust the optical power of each wavelengthduring commissioning of the optical power equilibrium.

1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from theleft-hand Function Tree.

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.3. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation is successful. Click

Close.

Step 2 On the U2000, set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

left-hand Function Tree.2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain to 20.0dB.3. Click Apply.

NOTE

The OAU101 is used as an example of the OAU1. The minimum nominal gain is 20 dB, and the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is –16 dB (40 channels). For the technical specifications of the amplifier, seeQuick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power

Management from the left-hand Function Tree.2. Click Query to query the Input Power of the OAU1.3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.



204

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 board (EVOA) so that the actual input optical power of theOAU1 reaches about -16 dBm, based on the Input Power of the OAU1 queried by using theU2000.1. Select the desired VA1 board (EVOA), and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from

the left-hand Function Tree.2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the desired

value.3. Click Apply.

NOTE

If the input optical power of the OAU cannot meet the requirements after adjusting the attenuation of theVA1, you can adjust the gain of the OAU to ensure that the output optical power meets requirements.

NOTE

In the Basic Attributes tab, Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold(dB) indicate the adjustable range of the gain of the OAU1.

Step 5 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers for the other OTUs.1. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-

hand Function Tree.2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On.3. Click Apply.

Step 6 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE

Function from the Main Topology.

2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.

3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close.

----End

Scenario 2: No EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 On the U2000, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channelto 10 dB.

Step 2 Set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.

Step 3 Query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at the add wavelength channel so that theinput optical power of the OAU1 reaches the nominal input optical power, based on the inputoptical power of the OAU1 queried by using the U2000.

Step 5 Shut down the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTUthat accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform the commissioning based on Step 1 throughStep 4.

Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding steps.



205

Step 7 Step 7 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the other OTUs.1. Select the desired OTU boards, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

left-hand Function Tree.2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On. Click Apply.

Step 8 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE

Function from the Main Topology.

2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.Then select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrowbutton.

3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close.

----End

6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station BThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station B that is in the west-to-east signal flow.






Background InformationFor the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of theUnits in the Hardware Description.



206

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-13 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OAU1)

SC2FIU

IN

OUT

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

TC

RC

FIU

OUT

IN

Station B

From A To C

OAU1IN OUT

DCMTDC RDC

OAU1 INOUT

DCMTDCRDC

TC

West East


Figure 6-14 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OBU1+OBU1)

SC2FIU

IN

OUT

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

TC

RC

FIU

OUT

IN

Station B

From A To C

OBU1IN OUT

OAU1 INOUT

DCMTDCRDC

TC

West East

OBU1IN OUTD

CM


NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA andthen perform the optical power commissioning on site.



207

NOTE

The preset values for the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input opticalpower of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick ReferenceTable of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Scenario 1: Commissioning for the OLA (OAU1) Networking

Step 1 Calculate the link attenuation for this span of optical transmission line based on the engineeringdesign documents provided by the client.

Step 2 You should preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the amplifier by using the followingformula: Attenuation of the VA1 = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstreamstation - link attenuation - Nominal input optical power of the amplifier at the OLA station.

NOTE

If the calculated preset value is a negative number, preset the attenuation of the VA1 to the minimum attenuation.

NOTE

For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Powerof the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 3 Query the output optical power (Pout) of the OA at the upstream station A and input opticalpower (Pin) of the OA at the downstream station B. Calculate the attenuation between the twoamplifiers according to the following formula: Attenuation between the two amplifiers = Pout– Pin.

NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Querying the optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Powerof the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 4 If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is smaller than the attenuation specified in theengineering design document, increase the attenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical powerreaches the minimum nominal input optical power. If the actual attenuation between amplifiersis greater than the attenuation specified in the engineering design document, decrease theattenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical power of the amplifier reaches the nominal inputoptical power.

NOTE

For the technical specifications of each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in theHardware Description.

Step 5 See Step 3, and calculate the attenuation between amplifiers after adjustment.

Step 6 Set the gain of the amplifier according to the following formula: Gain of the amplifier = Nominaloutput optical power of the amplifier at the station - Nominal output optical power of theamplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation between amplifiers.

1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from theleft-hand Function Tree.

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain according to the following formula:Gain of the amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station -Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuationbetween amplifiers.

3. Click Apply.



208

Step 7 Optional: If the calculated gain exceeds the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU, theoutput optical power of the OA cannot reach the nominal output optical power. Therefore, setthe gain to the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU.

NOTE

Maximum gain that can be set = Maximum gain of the OA - Intermediate insertion loss. Intermediate insertionloss = Output optical power of the PAOUT optical port - Input optical power of the BAIN optical port.

1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from theleft-hand Function Tree.

2. In the Basic Attributes tab, click Query. Check Nominal Gain Upper Threshold andNominal Gain Lower Threshold to obtain the tunable range of the gain for the OAU1.

3. Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the left-hand Function Tree.4. Click Query. Query and record the value of Output Power of PAOUT and the value of

Input Power of BAIN, and calculate the insertion loss.5. Calculate the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU1 based on the insertion loss.6. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.7. In the Basic Attributes tab, set Nominal Gain to the maximum gain that can be set.8. Click Apply.

----End

Scenario 2: Commissioning for the OLA (OBU1+OBU1) Networking

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the OBU1 at the input end to the minimumvalue (1 dB). For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". Commissionthe two OBU1 amplifiers as one amplifier. Query the output optical power of the amplifier atthe transmit end of the upstream station (Pout) and the input optical power of the OBU1 amplifierat the receive end of the station (Pin). Calculate the line attenuation according to the followingformula: Line attenuation = Pout – Pin. For the operations on the U2000, see Querying theOptical Power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths atOTM Station A".

NOTE

If the input optical power is within the input range of the optical power amplifier, you do not need to adjust theoptical power of the VA1. Otherwise, you should adjust the attenuation of the VA1 to make sure that the inputoptical power meets the requirements for the input optical power of the optical power amplifier.

Step 2 Adjust the optical power of the VA1 between the two OBU1 amplifiers based on the lineattenuation, making the following formula valid. Output optical power of the OBU1 at thereceive end - input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end = fixed gain of the OBU1 +fixed gain of the OBU1 - line attenuation.

NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Powerof the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End



209

6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in thewest-to-east signal flow.






Background InformationFor the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of theUnits in the Hardware Description.



210

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-15 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+RMU9)

FIU

FIU

To D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station CRM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT IN

OUT OUT

TC

RCININ

IN

RCOBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

RMU9INTC OUT

DCM

OTU

OTU

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPOAM DM

RMU9 WSD9

OTU

OTU

D40

AMDM

West East

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

WSD9

SC2

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

M40V

M40V

OB

U1

OB

U1

IN


NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-15, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on thenetwork, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must configure the MVOA, thenperform the optical power commissioning on site.

NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-15, if the 80-wavelength system is used, it is recommended to add the VA1 in the dashedframe.

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength atthe same time.

NOTE

The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength inputoptical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see QuickReference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA at each drop channel of the WSD9 on the receiving side ofthe ROADM station to the maximum value.



211

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status ofNE C is displayed.

2. Right-click an NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired WSD9 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the

maximum value (15.0).5. Click Apply.

----End

Scenario 1: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (OPA)

Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used forcompensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.

Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmitend based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with system(40-channel system or 80-channel system).1. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0. The OBU103

(40 channels) is used as an example here.3. Click Apply.

Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 atthe transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varieswith system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). For more information, see QuickReference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see step Step 2 .

Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.1. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration > Optical

Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode and

choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections.3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

Scenario 2: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (OPA)

Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used forcompensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.

Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmitend according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies withsystem (40-channel system or 80-channel system).



212

NOTE

Rated Optical Power should be set for the OBU1 behind the M40V and the OBU1 behind the RMU9. Therecommended OBU to use behind the M40V is the OBU104.

NOTE


Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 atthe transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, whichvaries with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). See Quick Reference Table ofthe Units in the Hardware Description.

NOTE


Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.

NOTE


----End

Scenario 3: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (ManualPower Adjustment)


NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the OpticalPower of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasersfor all the other OTUs.

NOTE

Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSD9 to block the pass-through wavelengths.

Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths.

For details, see the Configuration Guide.

NOTE

For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power ofthe Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end.

1. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management fromthe Function Tree.

2. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1.

3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the RMU9 so that thesingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end is the same as the nominalsingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers andthe type of system should be considered.)



213

NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in theHardware Description.

1. Select the desired RMU9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the FunctionTree.

2. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio of thedesired channel to the desired value.

3. Click Apply.

Step 5 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU thataccesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 throughStep 4.

Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the precedingsteps.

Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In the pass-throughdirection, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical powerattenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Powerat OLA Station B.

Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, presetthe attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each of pass-through wavelengths channel to 7dB.1. Select the desired WSD9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each

wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0.3. Click Apply.

Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset theattenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. Inaddition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelengthchannel to the minimal attenuation value.

Step 10 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU in"Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM station A".

Step 11 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End

Scenario 4: Wavelengths are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual PowerAdjustment and the VA1 Appears in the Dashed Frame)


NOTE


Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasersfor all the other OTUs.



214

NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of theAdd Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 3 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Attenuation(dB) for each wavelength in the add

wavelength direction to 5.0.3. Click Apply.

Step 4 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, seestep Step 3.

Step 5 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 after the M40V so that the single-wavelength input opticalpower of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input opticalpower of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should beconsidered.)

NOTE


Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, seeStep 3.

Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that thesingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominalsingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.

NOTE

For the technical specifications of each type of the amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units inthe Hardware Description.

Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU thataccesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 throughStep 4.

Step 9 Adjust the optical power of all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the precedingsteps.

Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.

Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating theline optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning theLink Optical Power at OLA Station B.

Step 12 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, presetthe attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.

Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port for the RMU9, preset theattenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. Inaddition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelengthchannel to the minimal attenuation value.

Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs again. For details, see Setting the Laser of theOTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".



215


----End

Scenario 5: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual PowerAdjustment and the VA1 Does not Appear in the Dashed Frame)


NOTE


Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser of only one OTU to emit light, and shut down WDM-side lasers forall the other OTUs.

NOTE


Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, seestep Step 3.

Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the M40V so that thesingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominalsingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers andthe type of system should be considered.)

NOTE


Step 5 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for each of the other wavelength add channels for theM40V to the attenuation value of the EVOA in the wavelength add channel mentioned in stepStep 4.

Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, seestep Step 3.

Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that thesingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominalsingle-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.

NOTE


Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU thataccesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 throughStep 4.

Step 9 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the precedingsteps.

Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.



216


Step 12 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, presetthe attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.

Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset theattenuation of the EVOA of the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. Inaddition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelengthchannel to the minimal attenuation value.

Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the laser of the OTU in"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NEFunction in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End

6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSD9+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.






Background InformationFor the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Unitsin the Hardware Description.



217

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-16 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+WSM9)

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station C

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT IN OUT

OUT

TC

RCININ

INRC

OBU1 OAU1

OAU1

TDCRDC

WSM9INTC OUT

DCMM40V

OTU

OTU

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

WSM9 WSD9

OTU

OTU

M40VD40

AMDM

West East

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

WSD9

SC2

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU


NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-16, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on thenetwork, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must first configure the MVOA andthen perform the optical power commissioning on site.

NOTE


NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength inputoptical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see QuickReference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure

Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the optical amplifier before the WSD9 at the receive end is usedto compensate the line optical attenuation. Commission the optical power for the pass-throughchannel based on the procedure for 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLAStation B.

Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for the OBU1 at the transmit end based on the nominalinput optical power for a single wavelength, which varies with the system (40-channel systemor 80-channel system).



218

NOTE


NOTE

For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the rated optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the opticalpower of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C".

Step 3 Set OPA Mode to Auto.

NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the OPA function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the AddWavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".

Step 4 According to the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstreamstation, adjust the EVOA for each add channel and pass-through channel for power equilibriumpurposes. For the specific commissioning steps, see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power ofROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.

----End

6.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (RDU9+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.









219

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-17 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with RDU9+WSM9)

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station C

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT IN OUT

OUT

TC

RCININ

INRC

OBU1 OAU1

OAU1

TDCRDC

WSM9INTC OUT

DCMM40V

OTU

OTU

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

WSM9 RDU9

OTU

OTU

M40VD40

AMDMWest East

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

RDU9

SC2

OTU

OTU


NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-17, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on thenetwork, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then performthe optical power commissioning on site.

NOTE


NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input opticalpower for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick ReferenceTable of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure

Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the AddWavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

----End



220

6.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (ROAM+ROAM) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite






U2000


For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Unitsin the Hardware Description.

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-18 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with ROAM+ROAM)

SC2

ROAM

OBU

D40

OTU

OTU

ROAM

D40

OTU

OTU

OBU

IN OUT

INOUT

OUTIN

INOUT

OAU1

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

DCM

FIU

FIUWest East

IN

OUT

OUT

IN

TM

TM1

RM1

RM

TM2 RM

TMRM2EXPO

EXPI

EXPOEXPI

M01

DM DMM01

Station C

RDC TDC

TC

RC TC

RC




221

NOTE


NOTE


Procedure

Step 1 See Step 1 through Step 3 in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

Step 2 Based on the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream station,adjust the EVOA for each add channel for power equilibrium. For specific commissioning steps,see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D forEqualization.

NOTE

The ROAM board cannot be used to commission the optical power for the wavelength in the pass-throughchannels, and only the optical power for the add wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.

----End

6.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD4+WSMD4) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite






U2000





222

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-19 Fiber connection of ROADM station (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

FIU

FIU

OUT

OUT IN

IN

OBU1

IN OUT

WSMD4West

OAU1INOUT

East

D40

WSMD4

D40M40V M40V

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

Station C

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

DM4

DM4

AM4

AM4

AM1DM1 AM1 DM1

OAU1 OBU1

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OB

U

OB

UTC

RC TC

RC OUT

INOUT

IN


NOTE


NOTE

l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown. The twopairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.


NOTE


Procedure

Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

----End



223

6.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD2+WSMD2) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.







Testing Diagram

Figure 6-20 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSMD2+WSMD2)

FIU

FIU

OUT

OUT IN

IN

OBU1

IN OUT

WSMD2West

OAU1INOUT

East

D40

WSMD2

D40M40V M40V

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

Station C

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

EXPO

EXPI

AMDM AM DM

OAU1 OBU1

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OB

U

OB

U

TC

RC TC

RC OUT

INOUT

IN

EXPO

EXPI




224

NOTE


NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input opticalpower for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Tableof the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure

Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the AddWavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

----End

6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengthsand link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9)










225


Figure 6-21 Fiber connections of ROADM station (networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)

DAS1 DAS1

M40

M40

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

DCMDCM

WSMD9WSMD9

DCM DCM

LIN

LOUT

SOUT

SIN

IN

OUTAM1

DM1

DM1

AM1EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

OUT

IN

SIN

SOUT

RXTX

LOUT

LIN

TM

RM

RXTX

TM

RM

NOTE


NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input opticalpower for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Tableof the Units in the Hardware Description.

ProcedureStep 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add

Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).

----End

6.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station DThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station D that is in the west-to-east signal flow.





226





Procedure

Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA StationB.

----End

6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link OpticalPower at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in thewest-to-east signal flow.









227

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-22 Fiber connections of FOADM station E

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT

IN

OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

INRCOBU1 OAU1

OAU1

TDCRDC

MR8V

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

IN

TC

OUT

MO

VI

VI

MO

DCM

West East

DCM

MR8V

TDCRDC

VO

MI

VO

MI


NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-22, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If no VA1 or VA4 is configured onthe network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure MVOA and commissionthe optical power on site.

NOTE


Procedure


NOTE


Step 2 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA on each add channel for the MR8V to 7 dB.1. Double-click NE E in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE E is displayed.2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired MR8V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each add

channel of the MR8V to 7.0.5. Click Apply.

Step 3 Block all add wavelengths.



228

NOTE



Step 5 On the U2000, query the output optical power for the receive-end amplifier OAU1.1. Select the desired OAU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from

the Function Tree.2. Click Query to query the Output Power for the amplifier board.3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 6 According to the nominal input optical power of the transmit-end amplifier OBU1, calculateand set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port between the two MR8V boards and the VA1board before the OBU1 at the transmit end as follows: Attenuation = Output optical power ofthe receive-end amplifier - Nominal input optical power of the transmit-end amplifier - Insertionloss of the MR8V at the receive end - Insertion loss of the MR8V at the transmit end.

NOTE

For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the HardwareDescription.

Step 7 Equally distribute the attenuation value (10 dB) to the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V atthe transmit end and the VA1 board. Set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in theMR8V at the transmit end and the VA1 board to 5 dB. For the adjustment of the VA1 on theU2000, see Step 2 and Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the OpticalPower of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

NOTE

The OBU103 is used as the example of the transmit-end OBU1. The typical single-wavelength input opticalpower of OBU103 is –19 dB (40 channels), and the typical single-wavelength output optical power of the receive-end OAU1 is +4 dB. Therefore, the whole attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at the transmitend and the VA1 board is as follows: Attenuation = 4 + 19 - 3.5 -3.5 – 6= 10 dB.

Step 8 Block the pass-through wavelengths.

NOTE

For details about the operations on the U2000, see Disabling the laser at an output port on an OA board in"Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards".

Step 9 Enable the laser on an OTU that accesses the longest wavelength.

Step 10 On the U2000, adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the add channel for the MR8V based onthe input optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that theinput optical power of the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a singlewavelength.

Step 11 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs thataccess adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on Step 10.


Step 13 Enable the disabled WDM-side lasers on the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of theOTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".



229

Step 14 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NEFunction in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

----End

6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link OpticalPower at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+DemultiplexerBoard)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in thewest-to-east signal flow.







The optical power for the first wavelength after being adjusted is used as the reference opticalpower during commissioning. In general, the longest wavelength is selected as the firstwavelength.



230

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-23 Fiber connection of FOADM station E

M40VM02

M03

M01

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

DCM

D40OAU1

FIU

M40V

OUT OUT

To F

DCMTDC RDC

OUT

IN

OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

OUT

TC

OUT

IN

To B

OUT

INININRC

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OBU1

IN

West East

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

RxTxD03

D02

D01

OTU

OTU

OTU

D01

D02

D03

OTU

OTU

OTU

Rx TxM01

M02

M03

CRPC

LINE SYS


NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-23, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If no VA1 or VA4 is configured onthe network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure MVOA and commissionthe optical power on site.

NOTE

The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength inputoptical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see QuickReference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.

Procedure

Step 1 Block the pass-through wavelengths.

NOTE

For details about the operation on the U2000, see "Disabling the laser on an output port on an OA board" inConfiguring Optical Amplifier Boards.


NOTE


Step 3 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and close WDM-side lasers for allthe other OTUs.



231

NOTE

After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser for the OTU is automatically enabled andis forced to emit light.

Step 4 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.

NOTE

The attenuation set here is the preset value and is used to adjust the optical power for each wavelength at thecommissioning stage for the optical power equilibrium purposes.

Step 5 Set the attenuation of the VA1 before the OBU1 at the transmit end to the minimum value.

Step 6 On the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA on the add channel for the MR8V based on theinput optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that the inputoptical power for the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.

Step 7 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser on another OTU.Then perform commissioning based on Step 6.


Step 9 Block all add wavelengths.

NOTE



Step 11 Unblock the pass-through wavelengths.

NOTE

For details about operations on the U2000, see "Enabling the laser at an output port on an OA board" inConfiguring Optical Amplifier Boards.

Step 12 At the upstream station, enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that accesses the longestwavelength. Disable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths. Then,perform commissioning according to step Step 6.

Step 13 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs thataccess adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on step Step 6.

Step 14 Adjust the optical power for all the other pass-through wavelengths based on the preceding steps.

Step 15 Re-enable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths, and enable the laserson OTUs that add wavelengths.


----End

6.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station FThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station F that is in the west-to-east signal flow.



232

Prerequisite






U2000



Procedure

Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.

----End

6.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station GThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station G that is in thewest-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite






U2000





233

Testing Diagram

Figure 6-24 Fiber connections of OTM station G

Station G

FIU

SC1

OUT

IN

RM TM

TM RM

To F

From F

M40V

OAU1

OUTOUT

RC IN

OTU

OTU

OTU

RxM31

M32

M40

D40OUTTC IN

OAU1

TDC RDC

OTU

OTU

OTU

D31

D32

D40

Tx

DCM


NOTE

As shown in Figure 6-24, each EVOA can be considered as aVA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on thenetwork, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then performthe optical power commissioning on site.

Procedure

Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.

----End

6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A andOLA Station B for Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A and OLA stationB that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.

Prerequisite







234


U2000




After wavelengths are transmitted over a certain distance, the optical power for differentwavelengths differs greatly because the loss or gain varies according to the components, boards,fibers, and the non-linear effects of fibers. As a result, the input optical power of differentwavelengths at the downstream optical amplifier unit (OAU) is different and the OSNRs ofdifferent wavelengths at the receive end are different.

When the optical power variation is very great, the wavelengths with very low optical powerhave much lower OSNR than the wavelengths with high optical power once the wavelengthsare transmitted in the system. To ensure that wavelengths with the lowest optical power meetsystem requirements, you need to increase the original OSNR tolerance. You must ensure thatthe optical power at the intermediate station is flattened. For more information, see Figure6-25.

Figure 6-25 Equalizing optical power at the intermediate station

OA OA OA

OA at theintermediate station

OA at thetransmit end

OA at thereceive end

Flattening theoptical power atthe transmit end

Flatnessof 2.5 dB

Flattening theoptical power atthe receive end

Flattening the opticalpower at the

intermediate station

Flatnessof 5.2 dB

Flatnessof 5.2 dB

Flatnessof 2.5 dB

Flatnessof 2.5 dB

Flatnessof 2.5 dB

Fixed optical attenuator

Objectives of single-wavelength optical power commissioning:



235

l According to the engineering requirements, the optical power flatness for each wavelengthof the intermediate OAU must be ensured. The optical power at the transmit end remainsat a certain slope that is opposite to the optical power slope at the receive end.

l According to the engineering requirement, the optical power of a single wavelength candeviate from the nominal single-wavelength input optical power by at most 3 dB at thetransmit and receive ends.

NOTE

l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes. Thenumber of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of affectedadjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuationadjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that for the adjustedchannel.

l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it isrecommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not repeatedly adjust the attenuationfor a channel, and do not adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously.

l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct any unflat link optical power resultingfrom accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects from long distance transmission. When theoptical power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat (±2dB). But each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR, which results in thesame transmission performance.

Procedure

Step 1 The optical power equalization is commissioned by using the following methods:l If the MCA is not configured at OLA station B, at the MON port for each supervisory point

OA, use the optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) to monitor the optical power for eachwavelength on site. Commission the EVOA for each wavelength channel for the M40V atthe upstream station A based on tested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. Thatis, verify that the following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remainsunchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength outputoptical power ± 1.0 dBm.

l If OLA station B where the MCA is configured is considered as the supervisory station, testthe flatness of the optical power for each wavelength through the MCA. Commission theEVOA for each wavelength channel of the M40V at the upstream station A based on thetested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. That is, verify that the followingformula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power ± 1.0dBm.

l Query the optical power of each wavelength through the MCA8 as follows:1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology and the Running Status

of NE B is displayed.2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis

from the Function Tree.4. Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.

Step 2 Adjust the attenuation of the channel with the highest optical power and the attenuation of thechannel with the lowest optical power. Use a step of 0.5 dB based on the spectrum analysis resultof the MCA8 board. After the attenuation is adjusted, the optical power for the two channelsmust satisfy the following formula: Optical power = Highest optical power - (Highest optical



236

power - Nominal single-wavelength optical power)/2 or Optical power = Lowest optical power+ (Nominal single-wavelength optical power - Lowest optical power)/2. For the adjustmentprocess on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each channel of the M40V in“Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A”.

Step 3 Use the MCA8 board again to measure the optical power for each wavelength and determinethe wavelengths with the highest and lowest optical power. Then equalize the optical power ofthe wavelengths based on Step 2.

Step 4 View the spectrum analysis result of the MCA8 board. If the deviation between the optical powerof each wavelength and the nominal single-wavelength optical power does not exceed 1 dB, theoptical power for the wavelengths is equalized.

----End

Equalizing Optical Power (the MCA Board at the Transmit/Receive End)When the MCA boards are configured at the transmit and receive ends, observe the followingprinciples to commission optical power:l When there are less than four (inclusive) spans and there is no ROADM station on the link,

commission the optical power at the transmit end to ensure that the optical power is flattenedat the transmit end.

l When there are more than four spans and there is no ROADM station on the link, afterflattening the optical power at the transmit end, ensure that the system optical power isequalized.

l When there are more than four spans and there is an ROADM station on the link, adjustthe attenuation of all channels of the ROADM station (configured with WSD9 and RMU9boards, for example) to the same value. After flattening the optical power at the transmitend, ensure that system optical power is equalized.

l If there is an REG station on the link, divide the link into two spans with the REG stationas the dividing point. In this case, consider the REG station as either the transmit end orthe receive end.

Step 1 When the optical power at the transmit end is flattened and the commissioning at the OLA stationis complete, monitor the optical power for each wavelength by using an MCA board at the receiveend. Calculate the difference between the optical power for each wavelength and the averageoptical power of the wavelengths. The difference is actually the flatness deviation.

NOTE

Equalize the optical power at an intermediate station in compliance with the principles of "Commissioning theOptical Power at the Transmit End based on that at the Receive End".

Step 2 Check the optical power at the receive end. Identify the channel that has the highest opticalpower as channel A, and identify the channel that has the lowest optical power as channel B. Ifthe optical power difference between the two channels is greater than 2 dB, calculate thedifference between the optical power of channel A and the nominal single-wavelength opticalpower, and record it as X. Also calculate the difference between the optical power of channel Band the nominal single-wavelength optical power, and record it as Y. Then consider half of Xor Y as the target flatness deviation for commissioning the optical power at the transmit end.See Figure 6-26.

Step 3 Commission the optical power at the transmit end. Increase the attenuation of channel A for theM40V at the transmit end by X/2 and decrease the attenuation for channel B by Y/2. After that,the flatness deviation at the transmit end has the same absolute amount but the reverse value as



237

the flatness deviation at the receive end. See Figure 6-27. For example, the optical power for awavelength at the receive end is 6 dBm, and the nominal single-wavelength optical power is 3dBm. Adjust the optical power for this wavelength based on the following equation: 6 - (6 - 3)/2 = 4.5 dBm.

Figure 6-26 Checking the optical power at the receive end

X

Y

X/2Y/2

B A B AOptical power atthe transmit end

Optical power atthe receive end

Figure 6-27 Commissioning the optical power at the transmit end

B A B AOptical power atthe transmit end

Optical power atthe receive end

Step 4 Ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged when adjusting the optical power flatnessfor each wavelength. To keep the total optical power unchanged, decrease the highest opticalpower by 0.5 dB, but increase the lowest optical power by 0.5 dB.

Step 5 Adjust the optical power of wavelengths sequentially. After adjusting the highest and lowestoptical power, query the optical power for the two wavelengths again. If the optical powerdifference between the two wavelengths is equal to or smaller than 2 dB, it indicates that theoptical power for the wavelengths is equalized. If they are not equalized, repeat steps Step 1through Step 4 to recommission the optical power again.



238

NOTE

When the equalization of optical power is complete, if the average optical power for the wavelengths is not equalto the nominal single-wavelength optical power, do not adjust the optical power for each wavelength at thetransmit end. Instead, check and adjust the total optical power at the OLA station so that the average opticalpower is equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power.

----End

6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C andOLA Station D for Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization of the ROADM stationC and OLA station D that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.

Prerequisite






U2000


For the technical specifications for each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of theUnits in the Hardware Description.

Procedure

Step 1 At ROADM station C, set OPA Mode to Manual.1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of

NE C is displayed.2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function

Tree.4. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode, and choose

Manual for the optical cross-connections.5. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 2 For the information about querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA, seeQuerying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA in“Commissioning theOptical Power Equalization of the OTM station A and OLA station B”.

Step 3 Adjust the EVOA of each add channel for the RMU9 (or M40V) based on the optical poweranalysis result. The single-wavelength optical power for each add wavelength is equalized.



239

NOTE

Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while thetotal output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power ± 1.0 dBm.

NOTE

For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each add channel of the RMU9 or Settingthe attenuation of each add channel of the M40V in “Commissioning the Optical Power of the AddWavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C”.

Step 4 Adjust the optical power equalization in the pass-through direction based on the optical spectrumanalysis result from the downstream supervisory station D.

NOTE

Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while thetotal output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power ± 1.0 dBm.

NOTE

For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each pass-through channel of the WSD9 in“Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C”.

----End

6.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E andOLA Station F for Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E and OLAstation F that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.

Prerequisite






U2000



The static optical add/drop multiplexer board cannot be used to commission the optical powerof the wavelength for the pass-through channels. Only the optical power for the add wavelengthat the local station can be commissioned.



240

Procedure

Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station Aand OLA Station B for Equalization.

----End

6.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)This section describes how to commission optical power for a network that has no MCA boardconfigured.

PrerequisitesFibers must be connected and network configuration must be complete.

ECC communication must be established.

Commissioning of an optical supervisory channel must be complete.

The cross-connections at each station must be configured.

Tools, Meters, and MaterialsU2000

Background InformationFor the technical specifications for all the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in theHardware Description.

If no MCA board is configured for the entire network, commission the optical power for eachwavelength to ensure that the optical power for each wavelength is consistent with the nominaloptical power for a single wavelength, and that the performance of each wavelength is optimal.

Commissioning Requirementsl The commissioning must start at the station where the wavelength with the worst BER

performance is added.l The wavelengths with better performance and involving fewer spans are preferred for BER

optimization.

Commissioning Procedure

Step 1 Shut down lasers on all OTU boards. Commission the optical power for each add wavelengthbased on6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM StationA so that the optical power before entering the OA at the transmit end is equal to the nominaloptical power for a single wavelength.

Step 2 For the methods of commissioning an OLA station on the line, see 6.3.4 Commissioning theLink Optical Power at OLA Station B.

Step 3 After commissioning and equalizing the optical power for each add wavelength at a back-to-back OTM or OADM station on the line, suppress all add wavelengths. In the case of an OADMstation configured with a WSS module, commission the optical power for each pass-through



241

wavelength so that the optical power for each pass-through wavelength is equal to the nominaloptical power for a single wavelength. For details about the commissioning methods, see 6.3.14Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E(Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board), 6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of theAdd Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9), and 6.3.13Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E(MR8V+MR8V).

NOTE

If an FOADM station (excluding the back-to-back OTM) is an intermediate station, commission only the opticalpower for the multiplexed pass-through wavelength.

Step 4 After commissioning the optical power for each wavelength, test the total input optical powerof an OA at the transmit end to verify that it satisfies the following formula: Total input opticalpower = Nominal input optical power for each wavelength + 10logN (N represents the numberof wavelengths) + input offset. If the total input optical power fails to satisfy this formula, adjustthe attenuation of the VA1 board before the OA or the attenuation of the EVOA built in the OAto ensure that the total input optical power meets requirements.

NOTE

The offset value is determined by the number of wavelengths and OSNR and varies inversely with the OSNR.The input offset is generally smaller than 0.5 dB.

Step 5 Optimize the performance of each wavelength based on the procedures included in6.3.22Commissioning BERs because the optical power flatness of each wavelength in a multiplexedwavelength cannot be measured. Ensure that the system performance is optimal, and at the sametime, ensure that the optical power for each wavelength is equal to the nominal optical powerfor a single wavelength, and that the multiplexed optical power remains unchanged.

----End

6.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTUThis section describes how to commission the input optical power of the OTU in a west-to-eastsignal flow. Follow the commissioning sequence of A-C-E-G.

Prerequisite





NOTE

If no VA1 (or EVOA in the drop wavelength channel) is configured before the IN port of the OTU at the station,it indicates that a fixed optical attenuator or MVOA is configured. In this case, check only the receive opticalpower of the OTU. If the measured receive optical power of the OTU is not within the required range, replacethe fixed optical attenuator or adjust the MVOA on site.


U2000



242



Procedure

Step 1 Query the input optical power of the OTU on the U2000.1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the stations to be queried in the Main Topology. The

Running Status of the stations to be queried is displayed.2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power

Management from the Function Tree.4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close.

Step 2 Compare the queried input optical power of the OTU to the range of the input optical power ofthe OTU.l If the actual input optical power is higher than the upper threshold of the input optical power

of the OTU, increase the VA1/EVOA attenuation for this channel. The actual input opticalpower is then within the range of the input optical power.

l If the actual input optical power is lower than the lower threshold of the input optical powerof the OTU, decrease the VA1/EVOA attenuation of this channel. After the attenuation isadjusted to the minimum value, if the actual input optical power is still not within the rangeof the input optical power, check the internal fiber connections.

NOTE

For the specifications for the input optical power of the OTU, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in theHardware Description.

NOTE

For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side ofthe OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust theinput optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is withinthe optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.

For the other OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side and the input opticalpower at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimalrange: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.

NOTE

For certain OTUs, if the overload point of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivity is –17dBm, the input optical power should be adjusted within the range from –14 dBm to –5 dBm.

NOTE

When commissioning the input optical power of the OTU at the ROADM station, you do not need to configurethe VA1 before the IN port on the WDM-side of the OTU. You need to adjust only the EVOA for each dropchannel of the WSD9. For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each drop channel of theWSD9 in “Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C”.

NOTE

For operations of the VA1 on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in “Commissioning the OpticalPower of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A”.

----End



243

6.3.22 Commissioning BERsThe objective of BER commissioning is to optimize a BER. To ensure stable operation of thesystem, a certain BER margin must be reserved for the system.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

The optical power of the main optical path must be commissioned.


U2000

Precautions

CAUTIONDuring the deployment commissioning, ensure that the bit errors before FEC meet the customerrequirements, and that the bit errors after FEC are zero considering the line attenuation and theconfigurations.

Networking Application

BER commissioning involves two types of networks: networks on which wavelengths share thesame source and the same sink, and networks on which wavelengths have different sources anddifferent sinks. See Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-28 Networking application

u同源同宿

u同源不同宿

u同宿不同源

u源宿均不同

uWith the same source and the same sink

uWith the same source but different sinks

uWith the same sink but different sources

uWith different sources and different sinks

Commissioning Rules

Figure 6-29 shows the BER commissioning process.



244

Figure 6-29 BER commissioning process

Is the BER before correction of all

wavelengths better than the specified value?

Finish power commissioning for main

optical path

Start BER optimization

Query BER before correction of each

wavelength

Finish BER optimization

Start from the transmit end of the wavelengths to be optimized and select required wavelengths for

BER optimization

Are there required wavelengths for

BER optimization?

Allocate attenuation to relevant wavelengths

Adjust the attenuation of each relevant wavelength

with a step of 0 5 dB

Are the faults removed?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Request maintenance engineers to remove

network faults.

Provide feedback on the optimization failure.


wavelengths is better than the specified

value?

Yes

No



245

l The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER beforecorrection of a wavelength fails to meet the acceptance requirement, you need to optimizethe BER. Otherwise, you do not need to optimize the BER.

NOTE

l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected byeither excessively high or low optical power.

l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB inthe OSNR of the system.

l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB inthe OSNR of the system.

l BER optimization for a single node is implemented by reducing the wavelength power fora channel with better performance to increase the wavelength optical power for a channelwith poorer performance.

l For BER optimization of a single node, the performance of the wavelength to be optimizedis compared with the performance of the adjacent wavelengths. By doing this, theadjustment point can be determined. During BER optimization, you need to consider theefficiency and must understand the status of all the services on the network. Control theBERs for all wavelengths at the same adjustment point only once.

l BER optimization is performed based on the service performance before BER at thetransmit end of each node. BER flatness control is performed based on the averageperformance of the associated wavelengths for the wavelength to be optimized. The opticalpower of the wavelength to be optimized can be adjusted by at most 2 dB. If an MCA boardis used in the system, you also need to pay attention to the optical power flatness (+/-3 dB).

l According to the BER performance, the wavelengths whose BERs are three orders ofmagnitude higher than the average BER must be optimized first. In this case, the adjacentwavelengths for all the wavelengths that meet the optimization requirement are preferredfor BER optimization. During the optimization, monitor the trend of how performancechanges for all wavelengths. If the BERs of the wavelengths with better performancedegrade by more than two orders of magnitude after the power compensation, restore theoptical power to the state before optimization.

l During BER optimization, reserve a margin for the optical power of the main optical pathfor each node and comply with the WDM principles. You are not allowed to improvewavelength performance by forcibly increasing the optical power of the main optical pathbecause this consumes the power margin reserved for future expansion.

l During BER optimization, adjust the optical power for the wavelengths that have poorerperformance with a step of 0.5 dB. After adjusting the optical power, re-query the serviceperformance and provide the feedback with the commissioning results.

l During BER optimization, you can restore the optical power to the state beforeoptimization. If the service performance fails to improve by one order of magnitude afterthe wavelength optical power is increased by 2 dB, decrease the optical power by 2 dB andprovide the failure information to the maintenance engineers. Ask the engineers to checkthe network conditions.

l During BER optimization, the fluctuation of the total optical power on the line must becontrolled within +/-1 dB.

Principles for Selecting Wavelengths for BER Optimizationl If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and then added again or a new

wavelength is added at this OADM node, consider this wavelength when optimizingwavelength BERs.



246

l If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and a group of wavelengths isadded at this OADM node, and the BER performance of this group of wavelengths is betterthan the performance of the wavelengths to be optimized, consider this wavelength whenoptimizing wavelength BERs.

l If the following four conditions are met, consider each pass-through wavelength whenoptimizing wavelength BERs:

– A wavelength is dropped at a downstream OADM station and a group of wavelengthsis re-added at this OADM station.

– The optical power of each added wavelength cannot be separately adjusted.

– The BER performance for this group of wavelengths has little room for optimizationwhen compared with the BER performance for the wavelengths to be optimized.

– The optical power for each pass-through wavelength can be separately adjusted.l In the WSD+RMU configuration mode, if the RMU+M40V boards are configured at the

wavelength-adding direction, the single-wavelength power must be adjusted first.l If no wavelength is added at the downstream OADM node after a wavelength is dropped

at this OADM node, and the optical power of each pass-through wavelength can be adjustedseparately, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.

l If an MVOA is configured at the downstream FOADM that a wavelength traverses, do notconsider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.


The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER beforecorrection of a wavelength is higher than the value specified by the acceptance requirement, youdo not need to optimize the BER. Otherwise, you need to optimize the BER.

NOTE

l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected by eitherhigher or lower optical power.

l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB in theOSNR of the system.

l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB in theOSNR of the system.

Scenario 1: With Different Sources or Sinks

Step 1 When optical power commissioning is complete, read the BERs before and after correction ofeach wavelength at the OTM station at the receive end to determine the BER optimization plan.1. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the

U2000, and click the Current Performance Data tab.2. Select the desired boards in the left pane, and click the red double-right-arrow button.3. Select the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition.4. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.5. Click the Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select

Display Zero Data for the Display Options.6. Click Query to query the performance value for the bit error on the NE side.7. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.



247

8. In the Monitored Object, FEC_BEF_COR_ER represents the BER before FEC, andFEC_AFT_COR_ER represents the BER after FEC.

Step 2 Start the optimization from the transmit end of the wavelength that has the BER that needs tobe optimized. Select all required wavelengths based on Principles for Selecting Wavelengthsfor BER Optimization.

Step 3 Increase/Decrease the power at the first adjustment point (the transmit end of the wavelength tobe optimized) by 1 dB (the adjustment step is 0.5 dB). If the BER performance improves,continue to adjust the power at the first adjustment point. If the BER performance degrades,decrease/increase the optical power by 1 dB so that the optical power is restored to the previousstate.

Step 4 Along the signal flow, adjust the optical power for the remaining nodes based on the methodsdescribed in step Step 3 until the BER before the correction reaches the optimal state.

Step 5 After the BERs for all the wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and aftercorrection for each wavelength.

Step 6 If the BER for a certain wavelength worsens but still meets the acceptance requirement, you donot need to further commission the BER. Otherwise, repeat steps Step 1 through Step 5 tocommission the BER for this wavelength.

Step 7 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limitedto the range of –1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches –1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning isrequired. In the subsequent process of commissioning BERs, ensure that the total optical powerafter the commissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power for thewavelength with the highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjustedwith a step of 0.5 dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength thathas the highest BER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power for the wavelength that has thelowest BER by 0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude for the total optical power iscontrolled.

NOTE

In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted for 2 dB, stop thecommissioning. Analyze why this is occurring and perform specific commissioning.

----End

Scenario 2: With the Same Source and the Same Sink

Step 1 When optical power commissioning is complete, read the BERs before and after correction ofeach wavelength at the OTM station at the receive end to determine the BER optimization plan.

1. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of theU2000, and click the Current Performance Data tab.

2. Select the desired boards in the left pane, and click the red double-right-arrow button.

3. Select the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition.

4. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.

5. Click the Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and selectDisplay Zero Data for the Display Options.

6. Click Query to query the performance value for the bit error on the NE side.

7. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.



248


Step 2 Adjust the optical power at the transmit end by at most 1 dB. Observe the changes in the BERbefore correction at the receive end. Continue adjusting the optical power at the transmit enduntil the BER before correction reaches the optimal value. Note that the total adjustmentmagnitude cannot exceed 2 dB, and the adjustment magnitude for each time is 0.5 dB.

Step 3 After the BERs for all wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and after correctionof each wavelength.


Step 5 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limitedto the range of –1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches –1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning isrequired. In the subsequent commissioning of BERs, ensure that the total optical power after thecommissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power of the wavelength withthe highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjusted with a step of 0.5dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength that has the highestBER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest BER by0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude of the total optical power is controlled.

NOTE

In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted by 2 dB, stop thecommissioning. Determine why this is occurring and then perform specific commissioning.

----End

6.3.23 Commissioning OSNRThis section describes how to commission the OSNR for a wavelength.

Prerequisite



Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000


The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength ishigher than the design OSNR tolerance. OSNR tolerance refers to the tolerance at which theboards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lowerthan a specified threshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted,but a certain OSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR for thewavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengthsthat have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR value may beincorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boardson the link. Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallelOADM station on the link.



249

Procedure

Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioningremains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power for the wavelengththat has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the wavelength that hasthe lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.

Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheckthe existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR. Thencontinue the commissioning in the same way as specified in Step 1. If the OSNRs for the twowavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning issuccessful.

NOTE

If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning, analyzethe cause, and then continue with specific commissioning.

----End

6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-LongSpans

This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.

Prerequisite






U2000



Networking Diagram

Figure 6-30 shows the network topology of Project Y. In a chain network, optical networkelements (ONEs) 1 - 24 are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE 1 and ONE24 are configured as OTM stations. ONE 2–6, 8–12, 14–19, and 21–23 are OLA stations. ONE7 and 20 are ROADM station. ONE 13 is an OEQ station.

Figure 6-30 shows the span loss and distance between NEs.



250

Figure 6-30 Service requirement matrix in Project Y

：OLA：OTM ：ROADM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9101112131415

16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Commissioning Span 1

Commissioning Span 2

Commissioning Span 3 Commissioning Span 4

60km16.5dB

80km22dB

92km25.3dB

80km22dB

80km22dB

76km20.9dB

86km23.65dB

80km22dB

80km22dB

72km19.8dB

76km20.9dB

60km16.5dB

60km16.5dB

80km22dB

86km23.65dB

90km24.75dB

60km16.5dB

80km22dB

80km22dB

60km16.5dB

60km16.5dB

80km22dB

80km22dB

West

East

Commissioning Requirementl In an ultra long-haul transmission system with multiple transmission spans, divide the line

into different commissioning spans according to service stations and equalization stations(namely, ROADM and back-to-back OTM stations) and then commission the system spanby span. As shown in Figure 6-30, the network is divided into four commissioning spans.

l Determine the stations that can serve as optical power equalization stations. For example,the stations represented as dotted rectangles in the figure.

l Determine the optical power monitoring station for each commissioning span based on theprinciple of equalizing optical power at the middle of a transmission link, for example,stations 4, 10, 17, and 22 (represented as dotted rectangles).

NOTE

Define the OTM, FOADM, and ROADM stations as optical power commissioning stations. For anFOADM station, the optical power of pass-through wavelengths cannot be equalized. Therefore, anFOADM station is regarded as a fiber during the commissioning.

NOTE

If you select an OTM or OADM station as the optical power motioning station, skip the step for equalizingoptical power at an OLA station.

NOTE

Before equalizing optical power, divide the network into different parts and select the source and sinkstations according to the network model. Then determine the optical power adjustment station. Theprinciples for selecting a station for monitoring optical power on a line are as follows:

l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is greaterthan 4, determine the position of a monitoring station by dividing N by 2 (N/2). If N is an odd number,determine the position of the monitoring station according to N/2±0.5.

l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is equal to4, determine the transmit end as the monitoring station.



251

l Commission the entire network from west to east. Then, commission the entire network inthe reverse direction.

Procedure

Step 1 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power at station 1 (OTM), see 6.3.3Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A.

Step 2 For the steps for commissioning the link optical power at station 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (OLA), see 6.3.4Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.

NOTE

The input optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) cannot be out of the range of the total optical power of theOA. That is, an OA cannot work with over-saturated optical power.

Step 3 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power and link optical power atstation 7 (ROADM), see 6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengthsand Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9), 6.3.13 Commissioning the AddWavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V) or 6.3.14Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E(Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board).

Step 4 For the steps for equalizing the optical power for the span 1, see 6.3.17 Commissioning theOptical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.

NOTE

l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes. Thenumber of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of affectedadjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuationadjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that of the adjustedchannel.

l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it isrecommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not adjust the attenuation of for achannel repeatedly, or adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously.

l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct the unflat link optical power due toaccumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects after long distance transmission. When the opticalpower equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat (±2 dB),but each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR and therefore has the sametransmission performance.

Step 5 Commission the optical power in commissioning spans 2, 3, and 4 based on Step 1 through Step4.

Step 6 Optimize the BER and OSNR for the entire network based on 6.3.22 Commissioning BERsand 6.3.23 Commissioning OSNR so that the system performance of the entire network isoptimal.

----End



252

7 Example of Commissioning Optical PowerBased on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System

About This Chapter

This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40 Gbit/s (hereinafter referred toas 40G) OTM and OLA stations.

CAUTIONEnsure that the optical ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise,system performance will be affected.

NOTEWhen commissioning the optical power, ensure that all channels configured for the project access servicesignals, or that the WDM side is forced to emit light. By doing this, all the OTUs can emit light normally.Then start the commissioning station by station.

NOTEThe optical power queried on the U2000 is general optical power. The difference between this value andthe value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.

7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G SystemThis section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system.

7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G SystemThis section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system.

7.3 Preparations for Commissioning

7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength SystemThis section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations onthe U2000.

7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength SystemThis section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred toas 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.

7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System


7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System


253

This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that mayhappen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle theproblems according to actual situations.




254

7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G SystemThis section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system.

Requirements on Incident Optical PowerTable 7-1 shows the incident optical power requirements.

Table 7-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power

ModuleType

Number ofWavelengths

G.652 G.655LEAF

TW-RS TW-C

40G ODB 80 +1 +1 +1 +1

40G DQPSK 40 +4 +2 +2 +2

80 +1 +1 +1 +1

The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm, and is applicable to optical amplifierswith total output optical power of 20 dBm.

NOTE

If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on the link, the incidentoptical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be increased by 3 dB in the commissioningprocess. The optical power of 2 dBm listed in the table, however, is changed to 4 dBm.

NOTE

A 40G signal is sensitive to non-linear effects. It is prohibited to randomly increase the optical power of 40Gsignals. Also, it is prohibited to let an optical amplifier work in an abnormal state.

For information about the single-wavelength incident power for fiber G.653, see Table 7-2.




255

NOTE

The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incidentpower is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator(VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channelincident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.

OAU

: VOA

OAU

FIU

Table 7-2 Single-Wavelength Incident Power for fiber G.653

Module Type Channel Spacing OAU Type Standard Single-WavelengthIncident Power

40G eDQPSK 100 GHz(no wavelength at thezero dispersion point)

OAU101,0AU103, 0BU103

-4 dBm

100 GHz(full configuration,including the zerodispersion point)

OAU101,0AU103, 0BU103

-5 dBm

50 GHz(no wavelength at thezero dispersion point)

OAU101,0AU103, 0BU103

-4 dBm

50 GHz(full configuration,including the zerodispersion point)

OAU101,0AU103, 0BU103

-5 dBm

Selection of Channels for Mixed Transmission of 10G and 40G SignalsIn the system design, a 10G channel is separated from a 40G channel with an idle channel inbetween. Therefore, do not configure a 10G channel as an adjacent channel of a 40G channel.




256

40G channels are preferred for carrying medium or long wavelengths. After all the medium andlong wavelengths are allocated, properly allocate the short wavelengths. 10G channels arepreferred for carrying short wavelengths.

Mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals are described as follows in the order of the smallestimpact to the greatest impact:

l Mixed transmission with maximum spacing between a 10G channel and a 40G channel.

– For G.652 fibers, the spacing is at least one channel.

– For G.655 fibers, the spacing is at least 400 GHz.

l One-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on one sideof a 40G channel.

l Two-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on eachside of a 40G channel.

l Do not apply mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals when there are fiber types otherthan G.652 and G.655.

Commissioning Rules

Observe the following rules when commissioning a 40G system:

l When commissioning the 40G system, the MCA boards or an optical spectrum analyzermust be used in the commissioning to ensure that the optical power is preciselycommissioned.

l Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power. It is prohibited toimprove the optical power performance by increasing the transmit optical power in theinitial engineering phase. During the equalization of the system optical power, the actualincident optical power for every section cannot deviate from the typical incident opticalpower over ±1.5 dB regardless of the fiber type. Otherwise, the system performancedegrades quickly and the BER before FEC increases rapidly.

l For an ODB board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate towithin ±5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must beused to ensure this level of accuracy.)

l For an eDQPSK board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate towithin ±5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must beused to ensure this level of accuracy.)

l The optical power at the IN optical port on a 40 OTU board must be within the range of –8 dBm to –3 dBm.

l The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power flatness and theOSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power flatnessis small, the system OSNR flatness is obtained by maintaining the optical power flatness.

l In the case of 40G system commissioning, adjust the optical power difference between eachwavelength in the middle of two equilibrium stations (stations that balance the opticalpower, including ROADM, and back-to-back OTM) to a value not more than ±0.5 dB. Ifthe spacing between two equilibrium stations is less than or equal to four spans, you onlyneed to adjust the output optical power difference of equilibrium stations at the transmitend to ±0.5 dB.

l If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-wavelength opticalpower commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are as follows:




257

– According to the engineering requirement, the optical power of a single wavelength candeviate from the nominal single-wavelength input optical power by at most 3 dB at thetransmit and receive ends.

l When the 10G signal and the 40G signal are mixed in transmission, the generalcommissioning method is same as that for 40G system commissioning. When the 10Gsignal is adjacent to the 40G signal, however, make sure that the optical power of the 10Gsignal is not higher than the nominal power of a single wavelength. If the 10G signal isstable for a long time, commission the 10G signal power to a value 1 dB less than the powerof the adjacent 40G signal.

l In the mixed spectrum of the 40G signal and the 10G signal, the spectrum of the 40G signalis wider and its amplitude is lower than that of the 10G signal. Actually, the power of the10G signal is equal to the power of the 40G signal. Therefore, measure optical power ofthe 40G wavelength and the 10G wavelength accurately, Figure 7-1 shows the mixedoptical spectrum.

Figure 7-1 Mixed optical spectrum of 40G signals and 10G signals

40G signals

10G signals




258

TIPWhen the system has more than 20 spans, the noise signal of the short wavelengths increases and there isa great difference between OSNR flatness and optical power flatness. Therefore, during the extra long-haul40G transmission, avoid using short wavelengths. If short wavelengths must be used, you need to considerthe OSNR limits of the short wavelengths when planning the network.

7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G SystemThis section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system.

Figure 7-2 shows the process for commissioning a 40G system.

Figure 7-2 Process for commissioning a 40G system

Design documents and network conditions comply

with the commissioning requirements?

Start

Identify the nonconformance with

relevant network design department

Configure boards and stations

Flatten the optical power of the OTM station at the transmit end

Commission the optical power of an OLA station

Equalize the optical power at intermediate stations

Optimize performance of each wavelength

Document and save the commissioning result

End

Yes

No




259

7.3 Preparations for Commissioning

7.3.1 Checking Design DocumentsBefore starting the deployment commissioning, check the design documents to ensure that thedesigns, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, PMD, OSNR, ITLconfiguration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission of 10G and 40G signals, meet therequirements for setting up a 40G system.


The optical amplifier (OA) design for a 40G system is the same as that for an Nx10G system.Compared with an Nx10G system, a 40G system has higher requirements on incident opticalpower, dispersion compensation, OSNR, and PMD.

Checking Dispersion Configurations

Check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM) configured on each optical pathmeets the actual dispersion compensation requirement. First, obtain the dispersion value of eachoptical path from the parameter document for optical paths. Then check whether the DCMspecified in the System Configuration Diagram at each station on the optical path can compensatedispersion properly based on the following table. If a DCM fails to compensate the dispersionon the optical path, provide feedback to the commissioning leader immediately.

Table 7-3 Dispersion configuration checklist for a G.652 fiber system

No. Checklist Check Result

1 Precompensation of 20 km atthe transmit end

□Yes □No

2 The dispersion on the line iscompensated equally and thecompensation deviation doesnot exceed ±10 km. Over-compensation (for example,the 80 km DCM is used on65, 70, or 75 km span) isgenerally applied. Whenunder-compensation isapplied, compensation issupplemented on the first orsecond subsequent span.

□Yes □No

3 The compensation for thechromatic dispersion (CD) ata fiber entry point on the lineis within the range of -30 kmto -10 km.

□Yes □No




260


4 The compensation for the CDat the end point on the line isin the range of -5 km to +5km.

□Yes □No

Table 7-4 Dispersion configuration checklist for a leaf fiber system


1 No dispersionprecompensation is providedat the transmit end.

□Yes □No

2 If ODB OTU boards are used,overcompensation of 10 kmto 25 km is applied to eachspan. The dispersion of thefourth or fifth span is 0 afterperiodic compensation.

□Yes □No

3 Over-compensation (forexample, the 80 km DCM isused on 65, 70, or 75 kmspan) is generally applied.When under-compensation isapplied, compensation issupplemented on the first orsecond subsequent span.

□Yes □No

4 The compensation for the CDat a fiber entry point on theline is within the range of-100 km to +100 km.

□Yes □No

5 The compensation for the CDat the end point on the line isin the range of -5 km to +5km.

□Yes □No

Checking PMD ConfigurationsCheck whether the PMD penalty on each optical path is within the range specified in theengineering design. Check whether the PMD value for an optical path is smaller than the PMDtolerance for the optical path against the parameter document for optical paths.




261

Table 7-5 PMD configuration checklist


1 The PMD value for an opticalpath is smaller than the PMDtolerance for this optical path.

□Yes □No

Checking OSNR Configurations

The OSNR penalty for a network includes PMD penalty, dispersion penalty, and individualdevice OSNR penalty. These OSNR penalties can be obtained from the parameter document foroptical paths. Compare the OSNR penalties specified in this document with the system OSNRtolerance.

Table 7-6 OSNR configuration checklist


1 The sum of OSNR penaltyand aging margin is smallerthan the system OSNRtolerance.

□Yes □No

Checking ITL Board Configurations of a 40G System

Currently, only the TN11ITL04 board uses an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends. Checkthe ITL board configurations against Table 7-7. If an ITL board using an interleaver at thetransmit and receive ends must be configured, check whether the ITL board type in theengineering configuration is TN11ITL04.

NOTE

After a 40G electrical signal is encoded (ODB), two peaks appear at the spectral edges. This affects the signalquality of the receiver. In addition, the peaks make the bottoms of the CD and OSNR curves unflat, which affectsthe TDCM in searching for the optimal compensation value. Configuring an ITL board with 0.3 nm bandwidthbetween the transmit end (behind the MUX board) and the receive end (before the DEMUX board) helps filternoise and optimize OSNR tolerance, and it has no negative impact on signals.

NOTE

The 40G DQPSK signal spectrum is comparatively wide. The 20 dB spectrum width is about 0.8 nm. Therefore,the signal overlapping in an 80-channel system is of major concern, and an ITL board that uses an interleaverat the transmit and receive ends must be configured in an 80-channel system.

Table 7-7 ITL configuration checklist for a 40G DQPSK 80-channel system


1 The TN11ITL04 board isused in a 40G DQPSKsystem with 50 GHz channelspacing.

□Yes □No




262


2 The TN11ITL04 board isused at an OADM station toadd/drop DQPSKwavelengths with 50 GHzchannel spacing.

□Yes □No

3 An ITL board is used at aWSS-based ROADM stationto add/drop wavelengths with100 GHz channel spacing.

□Yes □No

7.3.2 40G Commissioning MeterThis section describes the types of test meters used to commission a 40G system.

Context

A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required tocommission a 40G system. Table 7-8 lists certain 40G SDH analyzers. Table 7-9 lists certainoptical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.

NOTE

A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate theoptical spectrum analyzer with respect to the optical power setting.

Table 7-8 40G SDH analyzers

Name Appearance

ONT-506

NX 4000




263

Name Appearance

MP1797A

Table 7-9 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing

Name Appearance

MTS8000

Agilent86145B/86142

AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317




264

7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System

This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations onthe U2000.

7.4.1 Example DescriptionThe commissioning of the 40G system has higher requirements when compared with thecommissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to becommissioned is a long-haul 40G link.

Networking DiagramFigure 7-3 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical networkelements (ONEs) A, B, C and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipments. ONE Aand ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. Thereare several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are transmittedbetween ONEs A and D.

Figure 7-3 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the lineoptical fiber.

Figure 7-3 Service requirement matrix in Project H

A C DBOLA80 km/22dB 76 km/20.9dB

：OLA：OTM

Wavelength Allocation DiagramFigure 7-4 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project H. The solid line represents theworking channel and the dashed line represents the protection channel.




265

Figure 7-4 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

LSXL 192.10THz

LSXL 192.20THz

LSXL 192.30THz

LSXL 192.40THz

LSXL 192.50THz

LSXL 192.60THz

LSXL 192.70THz

LSXL 192.80THz

LSXL 196.00THzLSXL 192.90THz

A D

LSXL 192.10THz

LSXL 192.20THz

LSXL 192.30THz

LSXL 192.40THz

LSXL 192.50THz

LSXL 192.60THz

LSXL 192.70THz

STM-256


LSXL 196.00THzSTM-256STM-256

STM-256STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 7-5 shows the configuration for an optical amplifier at each station in project H.

Figure 7-5 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H

OBU103

DCM

OAU103

OAU103

DCM

DCM

OAU103

OBU103

OAU103from

M40

toD40

DCM

A C D

80 km22dB

76 km20.9dB

OAU103

DCM

DCM

OAU103

B

fromM40

toD40

OLA

NOTE

For the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be used in an 80-channel system for wavelength filtering.

NE Board ConfigurationNOTE

The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.

Figure 7-6 shows the board configuration for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations forONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure7-8.




266

Figure 7-7 shows the board configuration of ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations forONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure7-9.

Figure 7-6 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)

SCC

FIU

OAU1

OBU1

SC1

PIUPIUAUX

SCC

FIU

OBU1

MR2

PIUPIUAUX

DCM

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

M40

D40

LSXL

LSXL

MCA

DCM

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

PDU PDU




267

Figure 7-7 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)

PDU

XCH

XCH

SCC

SCC

PIU PIU PIU PIU

AUX

LSXL

LSXL

MCA

M40

D40

SC1

OAU1

OBU1

FIU

XCH

XCH

SCC

SCC

PIU PIU PIU PIU

AUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

NOTEThe TN11LSXL occupies four slots.

NOTEThe TN12LSXL occupies three slots.




268

Figure 7-8 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)

SCC

FIU

OAU1

SC2

PIUPIUAUX

DCM

OAU1

FIU

PDU




269

Figure 7-9 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)

PDU

XCH

XCH

SCC

SCC

PIU PIU PIU PIU

AUX

SC2

OAU1

FIU

OAU1

FIU

7.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths atthe OTM Station

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that is in thewest-to-east signal flow.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

The fiber connections must be correct.

All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light, which makes theOTU emit light normally.




270


U2000

Background InformationIn this example, the specifications for the hardware are as follows:l G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.l The type of OAU1 is OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.


Testing Diagram

Figure 7-10 Fiber connections of the OTM station

Station A

M40V

OBU1

FIU

SC1

D40

OUT OUT

OUT TC

RCIN OUT

ININ

RMTM

TMRM

OAU1

TDCRDC

To B

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

Rx

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

D31

D32

D40

Tx

M31

M32

M40

DCM

From B


NOTE

As shown in Figure 7-10, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on thenetwork, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA and thenperform the optical power commissioning on site.

Procedure

Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the AddWavelengths at OTM Station A.

----End




271

7.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Stationand the OTM Station at the Receive End

This section describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA station and OTMstation at the receive end that are in the west-to-east signal flow.







Testing Diagram

Figure 7-11 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OAU1)

SC2FIU

IN

OUT

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

TC

RC

FIU

OUT

IN

Station B

From A To C

OAU1IN OUT

DCMTDC RDC

OAU1INOUT

DCMTDCRDC

TC

West East

MCA

MON

MCAMON





272

Figure 7-12 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OBU1+OBU1)

SC2FIU

IN

OUT

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

TC

RC

FIU

OUT

IN

Station B

From A To C

OBU1IN OUT

OAU1 INOUT

DCMTDCRDC

TC

West East

OBU1IN OUTD

CM

MCA

MON

MCAMON


Figure 7-13 Fiber connections of the OTM station at the receive end

Station D

FIU

SC1

OUT

IN

RM TM

TM RM

To C

From C

M40V

OAU1

OUTOUT

RC IN

OTU

OTU

OTU

RxM31

M32

M40

D40OUTTC IN

OAU1

TDC RDC

OTU

OTU

OTU

D31

D32

D40

Tx

DCM


NOTE

As shown in Figure 7-11, Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-13, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If thereis no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configurethe MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.




273

Procedure

Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.

----End

7.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power EqualizationThis section describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in the west-to-east signal flow.







Procedure

Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLAStation B for Equalization.

Step 2 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a certain wavelengthis poor, improve the performance of this wavelength by changing its optical power. In addition,reversely change the optical power of the wavelength that has the best performance to ensurethat the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.

NOTE

When changing the optical power for the wavelength, increase or decrease the optical power. Increasing theoptical power or decreasing the optical power can improve wavelength performance.

----End

7.4.5 Commissioning BERsThe objective of BER commissioning is to optimize a BER. To ensure stable operation of thesystem, a certain BER margin must be reserved for the system.




274

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

The optical power of the main optical path must be commissioned.


Precautions

CAUTIONDuring the deployment commissioning, ensure that the bit errors before FEC meet the customerrequirements, and that the bit errors after FEC are zero considering the line attenuation and theconfigurations.

Networking ApplicationBER commissioning involves two types of networks: networks on which wavelengths share thesame source and the same sink, and networks on which wavelengths have different sources anddifferent sinks. See Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 Networking application

u同源同宿

u同源不同宿

u同宿不同源

u源宿均不同

uWith the same source and the same sink

uWith the same source but different sinks

uWith the same sink but different sources

uWith different sources and different sinks

Commissioning RulesFigure 7-15 shows the BER commissioning process.




275

Figure 7-15 BER commissioning process


wavelengths better than the specified value?

Finish power commissioning for main

optical path

Start BER optimization

Query BER before correction of each

wavelength

Finish BER optimization

Start from the transmit end of the wavelengths to be optimized and select required wavelengths for

BER optimization

Are there required wavelengths for

BER optimization?

Allocate attenuation to relevant wavelengths

Adjust the attenuation of each relevant wavelength

with a step of 0 5 dB

Are the faults removed?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Request maintenance engineers to remove

network faults.

Provide feedback on the optimization failure.


wavelengths is better than the specified

value?

Yes

No




276

l The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER beforecorrection of a wavelength fails to meet the acceptance requirement, you need to optimizethe BER. Otherwise, you do not need to optimize the BER.

NOTE

l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected byeither excessively high or low optical power.

l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB inthe OSNR of the system.

l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB inthe OSNR of the system.

l BER optimization for a single node is implemented by reducing the wavelength power fora channel with better performance to increase the wavelength optical power for a channelwith poorer performance.

l For BER optimization of a single node, the performance of the wavelength to be optimizedis compared with the performance of the adjacent wavelengths. By doing this, theadjustment point can be determined. During BER optimization, you need to consider theefficiency and must understand the status of all the services on the network. Control theBERs for all wavelengths at the same adjustment point only once.

l BER optimization is performed based on the service performance before BER at thetransmit end of each node. BER flatness control is performed based on the averageperformance of the associated wavelengths for the wavelength to be optimized. The opticalpower of the wavelength to be optimized can be adjusted by at most 2 dB. If an MCA boardis used in the system, you also need to pay attention to the optical power flatness (+/-3 dB).

l According to the BER performance, the wavelengths whose BERs are three orders ofmagnitude higher than the average BER must be optimized first. In this case, the adjacentwavelengths for all the wavelengths that meet the optimization requirement are preferredfor BER optimization. During the optimization, monitor the trend of how performancechanges for all wavelengths. If the BERs of the wavelengths with better performancedegrade by more than two orders of magnitude after the power compensation, restore theoptical power to the state before optimization.

l During BER optimization, reserve a margin for the optical power of the main optical pathfor each node and comply with the WDM principles. You are not allowed to improvewavelength performance by forcibly increasing the optical power of the main optical pathbecause this consumes the power margin reserved for future expansion.

l During BER optimization, adjust the optical power for the wavelengths that have poorerperformance with a step of 0.5 dB. After adjusting the optical power, re-query the serviceperformance and provide the feedback with the commissioning results.

l During BER optimization, you can restore the optical power to the state beforeoptimization. If the service performance fails to improve by one order of magnitude afterthe wavelength optical power is increased by 2 dB, decrease the optical power by 2 dB andprovide the failure information to the maintenance engineers. Ask the engineers to checkthe network conditions.

l During BER optimization, the fluctuation of the total optical power on the line must becontrolled within +/-1 dB.

Principles for Selecting Wavelengths for BER Optimizationl If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and then added again or a new

wavelength is added at this OADM node, consider this wavelength when optimizingwavelength BERs.




277

l If a wavelength is dropped at the downstream OADM node and a group of wavelengths isadded at this OADM node, and the BER performance of this group of wavelengths is betterthan the performance of the wavelengths to be optimized, consider this wavelength whenoptimizing wavelength BERs.

l If the following four conditions are met, consider each pass-through wavelength whenoptimizing wavelength BERs:

– A wavelength is dropped at a downstream OADM station and a group of wavelengthsis re-added at this OADM station.

– The optical power of each added wavelength cannot be separately adjusted.

– The BER performance for this group of wavelengths has little room for optimizationwhen compared with the BER performance for the wavelengths to be optimized.

– The optical power for each pass-through wavelength can be separately adjusted.l In the WSD+RMU configuration mode, if the RMU+M40V boards are configured at the

wavelength-adding direction, the single-wavelength power must be adjusted first.l If no wavelength is added at the downstream OADM node after a wavelength is dropped

at this OADM node, and the optical power of each pass-through wavelength can be adjustedseparately, consider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.

l If an MVOA is configured at the downstream FOADM that a wavelength traverses, do notconsider this wavelength when optimizing wavelength BERs.


The BER before correction must at least meet the acceptance requirement. If the BER beforecorrection of a wavelength is higher than the value specified by the acceptance requirement, youdo not need to optimize the BER. Otherwise, you need to optimize the BER.

NOTE

l If the BER before correction fails to meet the acceptance requirement, the BER will be affected by eitherhigher or lower optical power.

l For the ODB modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 1.5 dB in theOSNR of the system.

l For the DQPSK modulation, an order-of-magnitude change in the BER generates a change of 2 dB in theOSNR of the system.

Scenario 1: With Different Sources or Sinks

Step 1 When optical power commissioning is complete, read the BERs before and after correction ofeach wavelength at the OTM station at the receive end to determine the BER optimization plan.1. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of the

U2000, and click the Current Performance Data tab.2. Select the desired boards in the left pane, and click the red double-right-arrow button.3. Select the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition.4. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.5. Click the Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select

Display Zero Data for the Display Options.6. Click Query to query the performance value for the bit error on the NE side.7. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.




278


Step 2 Start the optimization from the transmit end of the wavelength that has the BER that needs tobe optimized. Select all required wavelengths based on Principles for Selecting Wavelengthsfor BER Optimization.

Step 3 Increase/Decrease the power at the first adjustment point (the transmit end of the wavelength tobe optimized) by 1 dB (the adjustment step is 0.5 dB). If the BER performance improves,continue to adjust the power at the first adjustment point. If the BER performance degrades,decrease/increase the optical power by 1 dB so that the optical power is restored to the previousstate.

Step 4 Along the signal flow, adjust the optical power for the remaining nodes based on the methodsdescribed in step Step 3 until the BER before the correction reaches the optimal state.

Step 5 After the BERs for all the wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and aftercorrection for each wavelength.


Step 7 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limitedto the range of –1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches –1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning isrequired. In the subsequent process of commissioning BERs, ensure that the total optical powerafter the commissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power for thewavelength with the highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjustedwith a step of 0.5 dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength thathas the highest BER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power for the wavelength that has thelowest BER by 0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude for the total optical power iscontrolled.

NOTE

In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted for 2 dB, stop thecommissioning. Analyze why this is occurring and perform specific commissioning.

----End

Scenario 2: With the Same Source and the Same Sink

Step 1 When optical power commissioning is complete, read the BERs before and after correction ofeach wavelength at the OTM station at the receive end to determine the BER optimization plan.

1. Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the Main Menu of theU2000, and click the Current Performance Data tab.

2. Select the desired boards in the left pane, and click the red double-right-arrow button.

3. Select the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter Condition.

4. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.

5. Click the Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and selectDisplay Zero Data for the Display Options.

6. Click Query to query the performance value for the bit error on the NE side.

7. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.




279


Step 2 Adjust the optical power at the transmit end by at most 1 dB. Observe the changes in the BERbefore correction at the receive end. Continue adjusting the optical power at the transmit enduntil the BER before correction reaches the optimal value. Note that the total adjustmentmagnitude cannot exceed 2 dB, and the adjustment magnitude for each time is 0.5 dB.

Step 3 After the BERs for all wavelengths are optimized, recheck the BERs before and after correctionof each wavelength.


Step 5 When the BER commissioning is complete, the change in the total optical power must be limitedto the range of –1 dB to +1 dB. If the change reaches –1 dB or +1 dB, further commissioning isrequired. In the subsequent commissioning of BERs, ensure that the total optical power after thecommissioning remains unchanged. To achieve this, the optical power of the wavelength withthe highest BER and the wavelength with the lowest BER must be adjusted with a step of 0.5dB simultaneously. That is, decrease the optical power for the wavelength that has the highestBER by 0.5 dB, but increase the optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest BER by0.5 dB. By doing this, the change magnitude of the total optical power is controlled.

NOTE

In the adjustment process, if the BER remains the same after the optical power is adjusted by 2 dB, stop thecommissioning. Determine why this is occurring and then perform specific commissioning.

----End

7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G SystemThis section describes how to commission the OSNR for a 40G System.

Prerequisite



U2000


The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength ishigher than the design OSNR tolerance, which refers to the tolerance at which the boards at thereceive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a specifiedthreshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a certainOSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR of the wavelengthsthat have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengths that have differentsources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR value may be incorrect if there isa parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link.Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallel OADMstation on the link.




280

Procedure

Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioningremains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power of the wavelength thathas the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the wavelength that has thelowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.

Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheckthe existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR. Thencontinue the commissioning in the same way as specified in step 1. If the OSNRs for the twowavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning issuccessful.

NOTE

If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning, analyzethe cause, and then continue specific commissioning.

----End

Example

If a wavelength traverses a parallel OADM station, adjust the OSNR based on the OEQconfiguration modes and the OSNR tolerance listed in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table7-12.

Table 7-10 OSNR tolerance for a 40G ODB 80-channel system

1. G.652 ODB 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR ToleranceIndex (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)

Fiber InputPower

+1 dBm +1 dBm +1 dBm +1 dBm -

DispersionTolerance

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

PowerEquilibrium

OSNRTolerance(With M40)

OSNRTolerance(WithM40V)

OSNRTolerance(WithM40V+OEQ)

OSNRTolerance(WithM40V+OEQ+OEQ)

Transmission hops

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

TypicalPMDOSNRPenalty

1 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 0.0

2 18.8 18.7 18.7 18.7 0.2

3 19.3 19.1 19.1 19.1 0.3

4 19.6 19.4 19.4 19.4 0.5




281

1. G.652 ODB 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR ToleranceIndex (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)

Fiber InputPower


DispersionTolerance

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

PowerEquilibrium





Transmission hops

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance


5 20.1 19.8 19.8 19.8 0.7

6 20.4 20.0 20.0 20.0 0.8

7 21.0 20.5 20.5 20.5 1.0

8 21.3 20.7 20.7 20.7 1.2

9 - 20.9 20.9 20.9 1.4

10 - 21.1 21.1 21.1 1.6

11 - 21.5 21.5 21.5 1.7

12 - 21.7 21.7 21.7 1.9




282

Table 7-11 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

1. G.652 eDQPSK 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNRTolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)

Fiber InputPower


DispersionTolerance

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

PowerEquilibrium





Transmission hops

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance


1 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 0.3

2 15.7 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3

3 15.8 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3

4 16.0 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3

5 16.1 15.8 19.8 19.8 0.3

6 16.4 15.9 15.9 15.9 0.3

7 16.5 16.0 16.0 16.0 0.3

8 16.8 16.1 16.1 16.1 0.3

9 - 16.2 16.2 16.2 0.3

10 - 16.3 16.3 16.3 0.3

11 - 16.8 16.8 16.8 0.3

12 - 16.8 16.8 16.8 0.3

13 - - 16.9 16.9 0.3

14 - - 17.0 17.0 0.3

15 - - 17.1 17.1 0.3

16 - - 17.3 17.3 0.3

17 - - 17.6 17.5 0.3

18 - - 17.9 17.7 0.3

19 - - 18.2 17.9 0.3




283


Fiber InputPower


DispersionTolerance

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

PowerEquilibrium





Transmission hops

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance


20 - - 18.6 18.2 0.3

Table 7-12 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system


Fiber InputPower


DispersionTolerance

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

PowerEquilibrium





Transmission hops

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance


1 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 0.3

2 15.7 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3

3 15.8 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3

4 15.9 15.7 15.7 15.7 0.3




284


Fiber InputPower


DispersionTolerance

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

-5 km to 5km

PowerEquilibrium





Transmission hops

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance

OSNRTolerance


5 16.0 15.7 15.7 15.7 0.3

6 16.2 15.7 15.7 15.7 0.3

7 16.3 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3

8 16.5 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3

9 - 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3

10 - 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3

11 - 16.1 16.1 16.1 0.3

12 - 16.1 16.1 16.1 0.3

13 - - 16.2 16.2 0.3

14 - - 16.2 16.2 0.3

15 - - 16.3 16.3 0.3

16 - - 16.4 16.4 0.3

17 - - 16.7 16.6 0.3

18 - - 17.0 16.8 0.3

19 - - 17.3 17.0 0.3

20 - - 17.6 17.0 0.3




285

NOTE

In Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12, "OSNR Tolerance (With M40)" indicates that the M40 board isused at the transmit end, and that neither pre-equalization is applied nor is the OEQ station configured on theline. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalizationbut no OEQ station is used on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is usedat the transmit end for pre-equalization and one OEQ station is configured on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (WithM40V+OEQ+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization and two OEQstations are configured on the line. The concept of the OEQ station covers the back-to-back OTM station andROADM station on the line. The configuration modes are designed in the engineering design phase. Duringcommissioning, you need to select an appropriate mode and commission the optical power based on the OSNRtolerance given in the tables.

NOTE

The OSNR tolerance given in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12 increases with the number of spans. Themaximum number of transmission spans is 20. That is, the regenerator section must be terminated at the 20thtransmission span. If the services on the network need to be transmitted further, a regeneration board must beadded.

The number of transmission spans (also called the number of transmission levels) corresponding to the OSNRtolerance indicates how many times that a wavelength enters a transmission fiber after being amplified by anoptical amplifier. It is equivalent to the number of spans of the transmission fibers or optical transmission sections(OTSs). Note that a fiber connection inside a station is not considered a transmission span.

NOTE

The OSNR tolerance given in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12 includes the "Typical PMD Penalty"listed in the last column. The typical PMD penalty is obtained when the customer fiber PMD coefficient is

.

7.4.7 OSNR PenaltiesIf the system is still operating abnormally after the preceding commissioning tasks areperformed, you need to consider the OSNR penalty. With the OSNR penalty, you can evaluateimpacts of configuration nonconformance on the system to meet system requirements.

Background InformationThe OSNR penalty (expressed in dB) covers various penalty types, such as, OSNR penaltyresulting from over-limit dispersion and PMD penalty resulting from over-limit PMD. Currently,focus on the following types of OSNR penalties: power penalty, hybrid transmission penalty,high-power hybrid transmission penalty, PDL penalty, PMD penalty, and ROADM penalty.

Power PenaltyIn the system design process, if a high-power amplifier is being used as required, you need toconsider the extra penalty due to an increase in the single-wavelength signal power. This extrapenalty is called the power penalty, and the high-power amplifier in this context refers to anamplifier with the maximum output power higher than +20 dBm. For the OptiX OSN8800/6800/3800, these high-power amplifiers include TN11HBA, TN11OAU105,TN12OAU105, and TN11OBU205. If the amplifier has a maximum output power of +20 dBmor less, you do not need to consider the power penalty. If an amplifier has a maximum outputpower of +26 dBm, you need to consider this amplifier in the 40G system as a separate span.

The power penalties in a 40G ODB system are as follows:l In a 40G ODB 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a single

wavelength is +1 dBm.




286

l In a regenerator section, if one to two +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do notneed to consider a power penalty.

l In a regenerator section, if three to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers dBm are used, youneed to consider a power penalty of 0.7 dB.

The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system are as follows:

l The standard incident power configured for a single wavelength is +4 dBm.

l Table 7-13 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system.

Table 7-13 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

PowerPenalty

Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Number oftransmissionspans

1 0.4 - - - - - - - - -

2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - - -

3 0.4 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - -

4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - - -

5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 - - - - -

6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 - - - -

7 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 - - -

8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 - -

9 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 -

10 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

11 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

12 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

13 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

14 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

15 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

16 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

17 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

18 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

19 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

20 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4

The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system are as follows:




287

l In a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a singlewavelength is +1 dBm.

l Table 7-14 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.

Table 7-14 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system

PowerPenalty

Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11


1 0.2 - - - - - - - - - -

2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - - -

3 0.2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - -

4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 - - - - - - -

5 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - -

6 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - -

7 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 - - - -

8 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 - - -

9 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 - -

10 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 -

11 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

12 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

13 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

14 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

15 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

16 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

17 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

18 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

19 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

20 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0

Hybrid Transmission PenaltyIf low-rate modulated signals (including 2.5G NRZ signals, 10G NRZ signals, and 10G RZsignals) need to be transmitted over the channels adjacent to a 40G channel, in the system designprocess you need to consider an extra penalty, called a hybrid transmission penalty in this case.In this context, hybrid adjacent transmission of a 40G ODB channel refers to transmission of10G/2.5G signals over channels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength channel within 200 GHzchannel spacing. In the case of a network on which the standard incident power is +1 dBm for




288

the entire regenerator section, you can ignore the extra OSNR penalty generated by the hybridadjacent transmission in each section.

In the case of a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entireregenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table7-15 and Table 7-16 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channelsystem.

Table 7-15 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type

One-Side Adjacency

100 GHz 200 GHz

NRZ RZ NRZ RZ


1 0.5 0.7 0.0

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 0.8 1.2

14

15

16

17 2.7 2.6

18

19

20




289


HybridTransmission Penalty

Adjacency Type

Two-Side Adjacency

100 GHz and 100GHz

100 GHz and 200GHz

200 GHz and 200GHz

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

Numberoftransmissionspans

1 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.6 1.6 0.0 0.3 0.3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 2.5 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.8 2.8 0.2 0.5 0.5

14

15

16

17 4.0 - - 4.3 - - 0.4 0.8 0.8

18

19

20

For a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entire regeneratorsection is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table 7-17 andTable 7-18 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.




290


Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type

One-Side Adjacency

50 GHz 100 GHz

NRZ RZ NRZ RZ


1 0.6 0.7 0.3 0.3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 1.0 1.5 0.4 0.4

14

15

16

17 -

18

19

20




291


HybridTransmission Penalty

Adjacency Type

Two-Side Adjacency

50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 GHz 100 GHz and 100GHz

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

Numberoftransmissionspans

1 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.7 0.3 0.5 0.5

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 1.9 2.6 2.6 1.9 2.6 2.6 0.5 0.7 0.7

14

15

16

17 -

18

19

20

NOTE

If both 40G and 10G signals are transmitted and high-power amplifiers are used on the network, you need toconsider the overall penalty instead of only the separate 40G/10G hybrid transmission penalty and the powerpenalty caused by the high-power amplifier. For details, see High-Power and Hybrid TransmissionPenalty.




292

High-Power Hybrid Transmission PenaltyIf high-power amplifiers (the maximum output optical power exceeds +20 dBm) are used and40G and low-rate signals are transmitted on a network at the same time, you need to considerthe OSNR penalty on the 40G signals. This type of penalty is referred to as a high-power hybridtransmission penalty.

If a 10G or 2.5G single wavelength, or if both 10G and 2.5G wavelengths, are transmitted overchannels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength channel within 200 GHz channel spacing, the high-power hybrid transmission penalties are as follows:l In a regenerator section, if one to three +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do

not need to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty.l In a regenerator section, if four to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you need

to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty of 0.5 dB.

Table 7-19 and Table 7-20 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK40-channel system.

Table 7-19 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

High-Power HybridTransmission Penalty

Adjacency Type

One-Side Adjacency

100 GHz 200 GHz

NRZ RZ NRZ RZ


1 1.5a 1.8a 0.8a 1.0a

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16




293


Adjacency Type

One-Side Adjacency

100 GHz 200 GHz

NRZ RZ NRZ RZ

17 -

18

19

20


High-PowerHybridTransmission Penalty

Adjacency Type

Two-Side Adjacency

100 GHz and 100GHz

100 GHz and 200GHz

200 GHz and 200GHz

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ


1 l 1.5b

l 2.2c

l 1.7b

l 2.7c

l 1.7b

l 2.7c

l 1.5b

l 2.2c

l 1.7b

l 2.7c

l 1.7b

l 2.7c

1.0a 1.2a 1.2a

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 -

14




294


Adjacency Type

Two-Side Adjacency

100 GHz and 100GHz

100 GHz and 200GHz

200 GHz and 200GHz

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

15

16

17 -

18

19

20

NOTE

l "a" indicates that one to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used. If more than five +23 dBm amplifiers are used,reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than five.

l "b" indicates that one or two +23 dBm amplifiers are used.

l When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see Hybrid Transmission Penalty.

l "c" indicates that three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceedsthree, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than three.

Table 7-21 and Table 7-22 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties for a 40GeDQPSK 80-channel system.



Adjacency Type

One-Side Adjacency

50 GHz 100 GHz

NRZ RZ NRZ RZ


1 l 1.3a

l 2.1b

l 1.4a

l 1.5b

l 0.2a

l 0.2b

l 0.2a

l 0.4b2

3

4

5




295


Adjacency Type

One-Side Adjacency

50 GHz 100 GHz

NRZ RZ NRZ RZ

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 l 2.6c

l 2.7d14

15

16

17 -

18

19

20



Adjacency Type

Two-Side Adjacency

50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 GHz 100 GHz and 100 GHz

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

Numberoftransmission

1 l 1.8a

l 2.5b

l 1.8a

l 2.5b

l 1.3a

l 2.0b

l 1.8a

l 2.5b

l 1.8a

l 2.5b

l 1.3a

l 2.0b

l 0.3a

l 0.5b

l 0.8c

l 0.2a

l 0.4b

l 0.6c

l 0.2a

l 0.4b

l 0.6c

2

3

4




296


Adjacency Type

Two-Side Adjacency

50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 GHz 100 GHz and 100 GHz

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

NRZ+NRZ

NRZ+RZ

RZ+RZ

spans

5 l 1.2d

l 1.2d

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 -

14

15

16

17 -

18

19

20

NOTE

l "a" indicates that one to three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see HybridTransmission Penalty.

l "b" indicates that four to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used.l "c" indicates that six to eight +23 dBm amplifiers are used.l "d" indicates that nine to twelve +23 dBm amplifiers are used.l When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds 12, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value

smaller than 12.

PDL PenaltyIf no ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, the OSNR tolerance specification describedin 7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System includes the PDL penalty in a normalsituation. In this case, you do not need to consider an extra PDL penalty.




297

If an ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, you need to consider an extra PDL penaltycaused by the WSS component at the ROADM station. In this case, you need to consider a PDLpenalty of 0.15 dB for each WSS component that a 40G ODB or 40G eDQPSK wavelengthtraverses.

PMD PenaltyThe "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNR tolerance table in 7.4.6 CommissioningOSNR for the 40G System includes the typical PMD penalty, which is given based on the fiber

PMD coefficient of a regenerator section. If customers provide the actualfiber parameter values or the actual fiber PMD coefficient is greater than the provided PMDcoefficient, you need to calculate the PMD penalty based on the following formula, thensubstitute the calculated PMD penalty for the "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNRtolerance table in 7.4.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System. The calculated PMDpenalty is used as the OSNR tolerance of the regenerator section after the PMD penalty isconsidered.

NOTE

The PMD tolerance is a key specification in a module test of a WDM system. As a random function of opticalwavelengths and time, the PMD may be different for different fibers at a specified time. The differential groupdelay (DGD) is used to measure the PMD of a line. As a statistical value, the DGD probability distribution mustcomply with the Maxwell distribution rate when long fibers are used. As the maximum DGD value is three timesthe average DGD value, you need to calculate the PMD value permitted by a fiber based on the maximum DGDvalue.

In general, the actual PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 is given in engineering designdocuments. Based on this PMD coefficient, you can calculate the DGD value (ps) of each opticalamplifier span and optical multiplex section.

For optical amplifier spans, the DGD calculation formula is , whereDGD represents the DGD value expressed in ps for each span, PMD represents the PMDcoefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 for each span, L represents the span distance expressed inkm, and L1/2 represents the square root of the span distance.

For the multiplex section, the DGD calculation formula is

, where (DGDi) represents theDGD value of each section and is expressed in ps, and Li represents the distance for each section.

In a 40G system, a DCM module introduces a PMD penalty while compensating for distributeddispersions. In addition, the board using a WSS component also introduces a PMD penalty of0.2 ps.

For example, there are X (an integer representing the quantity) multiplex sections on the network.

The DGD of these multiplex sections can be calculated by using the formula, where i is an integer equal to or smaller than X. In addition, there are M (an integerrepresenting the quantity) DCM modules and the PMD penalty introduced by each DCM module

can be calculated by using the formula, where j is an integer equal to




298

or smaller than M. Furthermore, there are N (an integer representing the quantity) boardsconfigured with WSS components. In this case, the DGD value of all the multiplex sections canbe calculated by using the

formula. Youcan then convert the DGD value into the OSNR penalty by using the following formulas:

and

.

ROADM Penalty

Each WSS component at an ROADM station generates a certain OSNR penalty in 40G signals.In a regenerator section, the number of WSS components at the ROADM stations that 40Gsignals traverse corresponds to an OSNR penalty. This type of OSNR penalty is called theROADM penalty. For the association between the number of the WSS components and theOSNR penalty, see Table 7-23.

Table 7-23 OSNR penalty

Number ofWSSComponentsThat40GSignalsTraverse

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ExtraTransmissionPenalty

0 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

7.4.8 Adjusting Dispersion CompensationThis section describes how to adjust dispersion compensation.




299

Prerequisite


The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.


U2000


When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts the automaticdispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started, manually start it for a 40Gboard on the U2000.

NOTE

The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit errors in the processof the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an exception.

Procedure

Step 1 On the U2000, check the current Dispersion Compensation Value of a 40G board. In addition,determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is correct based on the followingprinciples.

l If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion compensation is proper.

l If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of -300 to +300,attention is required. The project manager should provide feedback to the network designpersonnel.

l If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide feedback to the projectmanager and ask the network design personnel to optimize the design for the dispersioncompensation module (DCM) for the network.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status ofthe NE is displayed.

2. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.

3. Select the required LSXL board, and choose Configuration > Dispersion CompensationManagement from the Function Tree on the left side of the window.

4. Optional: Select the IN/OUT port row under Port, and click Start Search.

CAUTIONSearching for dispersion configurations interrupts service.

5. Click Query to obtain the current Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm).

6. Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.

----End




300

7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System

This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred toas 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.

7.5.1 Example DescriptionThe commissioning of the 40G system has higher requirements when compared with thecommissioning requirements for a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to becommissioned is a long-haul 40G link.

Networking DiagramFigure 7-16 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical networkelements (ONEs) A, B, C, and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE Aand ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. Thereare several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are transmittedbetween ONEs A and D.

Figure 7-16 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the lineoptical fiber.

Figure 7-16 Service requirement matrix in project H

A C DBOLA80 km/22dB 76 km/20.9dB

：OLA：OTM

Wavelength Allocation DiagramFigure 7-17 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project H.




301

Figure 7-17 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

LSXL 192.10THz

LSXL 192.20THz

LSXL 192.30THz

LSXL 192.40THz

LSXL 192.50THz

LSXL 192.60THz

LSXL 192.70THz

LSXL 192.80THz


A D

LSXL 192.10THz

LSXL 192.20THz

LSXL 192.30THz

LSXL 192.40THz

LSXL 192.50THz

LSXL 192.60THz

LSXL 192.70THz

STM-256


LSXL 196.00THzSTM-256STM-256

STM-256STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 7-18 shows the configuration of an optical amplifier at each station in project H.

Figure 7-18 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H

OBU103

DCM

OAU103

OAU103

DCM

DCM

OAU103

OBU103

OAU103from

M40

toD40

DCM

A C D

80 km22dB

76 km20.9dB

OAU103

DCM

DCM

OAU103

B

fromM40

toD40

OLA

NOTE

In the case of the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be usedin an 80-channel system for wavelength filtering.

NE Board ConfigurationNOTE

The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.

Figure 7-19 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurationsfor ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown inFigure 7-21.




302

Figure 7-20 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurationsfor ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown inFigure 7-22.

Figure 7-19 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)

SCC

FIU

OAU1

OBU1

SC1

PIUPIUAUX

SCC

FIU

OBU1

MR2

PIUPIUAUX

DCM

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

M40

D40

LSXL

LSXL

MCA

DCM

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

PDU PDU




303

Figure 7-20 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)

PDU

XCH

XCH

SCC

SCC

PIU PIU PIU PIU

AUX

LSXL

LSXL

MCA

M40

D40

SC1

OAU1

OBU1

FIU

XCH

XCH

SCC

SCC

PIU PIU PIU PIU

AUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

NOTEThe TN11LSXL occupies four slots.

NOTEThe TN12LSXL occupies three slots.




304

Figure 7-21 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)

SCC

FIU

OAU1

SC2

PIUPIUAUX

DCM

OAU1

FIU

PDU




305

Figure 7-22 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)

PDU

XCH

XCH

SCC

SCC

PIU PIU PIU PIU

AUX

SC2

OAU1

FIU

OAU1

FIU

Commissioning Procedures

Table 7-24 Commissioning stations reference list

Station Commissioning Method and Fiber Connection Diagram

A Refer to 7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTMStation

B, C Refer to 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station

D Refer to 7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTMStation




306

For the commissioning method for each station in project H and the fiber connection diagramof each station, see Table 7-24. The commissioning is performed in two directions:

Direction 1: A→B→C→D

Direction 2: D→C→B→A

Because the commissioning for the two directions are performed similarly, only thecommissioning for direction 1 is described in this document.

CAUTIONBefore the equipment is connected to the line fiber at each station, you must complete thefollowing operations:l Test the span loss to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement of the

engineering design.l Test the transmission distance of the line signals to ensure the value is in accordance with

the requirement of the engineering design.l Check the type of the line fiber to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement

of the engineering design.If any one of the preceding operation is not performed, the system commissioning will beaffected. In this case, provide feedback to the appropriate personnel who are in charge of thatparticular issue.

NOTE

The fibers between the FIU and ODF subrack, the fibers between the LSXL and client equipment, and thefibers between cabinets are all external fibers that should be routed on site.

7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTMStation

This section uses direction 1 as an example to describe how to commission the optical power atthe transmit end of the OTM. The objective of commissioning is to ensure that the total transmitoptical power meets the specification requirements and that the optical power flatness for everywavelength is achieved.




Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed opticalattenuator, VOA, U2000




307

Background InformationIn this example, the hardware specifications are as follows:

l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.

l The type of OAU1 is OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.

NOTEWhen the 40G ODB system is used, a dual-module ITL board must be configured at the transmit and receiveends. If certain OADM stations add/drop ODB wavelengths (wavelengths with 100 GHz channel spacing), adual-module ITL board must also be used at the transmit and receive ends. For the ROADM stations with 50GHz channel spacing, no ITL board is required because the 50 GHz WSS module provides the 50 GHz filterfunction.


Figure 7-23 Fiber connections at OTM station A

Station A

ODFFixed opticalattenuator

Variable opticalattenuator

M40

OBU1

FIU

SC1

D40

OUT OUT

OUT TC

RCIN OUT

ININ

RMTM

TMRM

OAU1

TDCRDC

To B

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

Rx

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

D31

D32

D40

Tx

M31

M32

M40

DCM

From B

Procedure

Step 1 Check if the fiber connections between boards are correct based on the fiber connection diagram.Check if the fiber on each board is properly connected. If not, correct the error immediately.

Step 2 Access real service signals on the client sides of all OTU boards.

Step 3 Obtain the information on the optical module of the OTU by referring to the bar code on thefront panel or the board manufacturing information.

Step 4 Ask the customer equipment engineer to provide the transmitting optical power and the opticalmodule equipment type. Compare the optical power with the receiving optical power on theclient side of the OTU to determine if the fixed attenuator should be replaced. Record thereceiving optical power on the client side of the OTU.




308

For project H, the receiving optical power for the client-side OTU (the input optical power ofthe client-side LSXL ports) must be within the range:

l TN11LSXL: from 0 dBm to +3 dBm.

l TN12LSXL: from -1 dBm to +1 dBm.

Step 5 Check whether the WDM-side OUT ports on all OTUs emit light. If the OUT ports do not emitlight,

l check whether the accessed SDH/SONET services are normal or not. If the services areabnormal, clear the fault.

Step 6 Test the output optical power of the OUT port on the OTU. For the LSXL, the value must bewithin the range from -5 dBm to 0 dBm. The normal value is –3 dBm.

Step 7 Test the receiving optical power of the Mn port for the M40 and record the value.

NOTE

Mn refers to the M31–M40 ports that are used in this example.

If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OTU is greaterthan 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.

Step 8 Pre-adjust the attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40 to +3 dB tofacilitate the fine-tuning of the attenuation in the subsequent steps.

Step 9 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 by using a fiberjumper. Scan the M40 to output multiplexed signals and record the optical power for everywavelength and the multiplexed optical power. Then calculate the wavelength insertion loss forthe M40 to check whether the wavelength insertion loss of the M40 meets the specificationrequirements.

NOTE

When calculating the wavelength insertion loss of the M40, note that the attenuation of the M40 is pre-adjusted to +3 dB.

If the detected output optical power is abnormal, check whether the optical ports M31–M40 are properlyconnected.

Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the OBU1 to anoptical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN opticalport on the OBU1 to ensure that the total input optical power of the OBU1 is near –9 dBm.

NOTE

According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensurethat the total optical power meets the specification requirements. Then, ensure the optical power flatnessfor every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the standards. The total inputoptical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation formulais as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power + 10logN (Nequals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -19dBm, the input total optical poweris -9 dBm.

Step 11 Test the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the OBU1, and ensure that the totaloutput optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.

NOTE

The fixed gain of the TN11OBU103 is 23 dB. In the case, the input optical power of the IN port on theOBU1 is -9dBm, so the output optical power of the OUT port is +14dBm.




309

NOTEThe nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum single-wavelength input optical power should be not more than +5.5 dBm.

Obtain the total output optical power by using the following formula: Total output optical power = Single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).

Step 12 Connect the OUT optical port on the OBU1 to the optical spectrum analyzer to query the opticalpower for every wavelength. Adjust the wavelength attenuation of the Variable optical attenuatorattached to the M40 so that the output optical power flatness is about 0.5 dB.

Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power at the RC port of the FIU board and recordthe test result.

NOTE

If the difference between the optical power at the RC port and the optical power at the OUT port on theOBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fibers.

Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the FIU (when disconnecting the fiber from the RMport), and determine the RC-OUT insertion loss.

The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Opticalpower of the OUT on the FIU

Step 15 Test the output optical power for the TM port on the SC1 with an optical power meter, and thentest the input optical power for the RM port on the FIU. If the difference between the two valuesis more than 1 dB, check the routing and the cleanliness of the optical fibers.

Step 16 Test the output optical power for the OUT port on the FIU with an optical power meter (whendisconnecting the fiber from the RC port). Calculate the insertion loss from RM to OUT portfor the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

----End

7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA StationFor the OLA station, you need to commission only the total optical power in terms of the opticalpower commissioning.




Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Signal analyzer, Fiber adapter,Fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000

Background InformationIn this example, the hardware specifications are as follows:l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.




310

l The type of OAU1 is OAU103.


Figure 7-24 Fiber connections of OLA station B

SC2FIU

From A

IN

OUT

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

TC

RC

FIU

To C

OUT

IN

Station B

OAU1IN OUT

DCMTDC RDC

OAU1INOUT

DCMTDCRDC

TC



West East

Procedure

Step 1 Test the optical power for the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Comparethe value with the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate theline attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation islarger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determinewhether the cable attenuation is excessively high or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables arefaulty, clear the fault immediately.

Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power for the TM port on thewest FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values inthe commissioning record.

Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port for the west FIU. The insertion lossshould be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Add a properattenuator to make the input power less than –3 dB.

Step 5 Test the output optical power for the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.Record the input optical power for the RM1 port and the output optical power for the TM2 portin the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the input optical power for the RM port and the output optical power for the OUT port onthe east FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power valuesin the commissioning record.




311

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertionloss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 8 Test the input optical power for the IN port and the output optical power for the TC port on thewest FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical powervalues in the commissioning record.

Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion lossshould be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the west OAU1 toan optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN opticalport on the OAU1 to ensure that the total input optical power for the OAU1 is about –10 dBm.

NOTE

According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensurethat the total input optical power meets the specification requirement. Then ensure the optical power flatnessfor every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the specification requirements.The total input optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. Thecalculation formula is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input opticalpower + 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -20 dBm, the inputtotal optical power is -10 dBm.

Step 11 Query the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the west OAU1. Then adjust the gainof the OAU1 on the U2000 to ensure that the total output optical power for the multiplexedwavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.

NOTEThe nominal single-wavelength input optical power for the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum single-wavelength input optical power should be not exceed +5.5 dBm.

The total output optical power for the multiplexed wavelengths can be obtained by using the following formula:Total output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).

Step 12 Test the input and output optical power for the DCM and calculate the DCM insertion loss.

DCM insertion loss = DCM input optical power – DCM output optical power

Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power for the RC port on the FIU and record thevalue.

NOTE

If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OAU is greaterthan 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.

Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU (when disconnecting the fiber to theRM port) and calculate the RC-OUT insertion loss.

The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Opticalpower of the OUT on the FIU

----End

7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTMStation

The commissioning rule for the OTM station is to "commission the optical power at the transmitend based on the optical power at the receive end". At the receive end of the OTM station, youneed to commission only the total input optical power. Then adjust the attenuation for every




312

wavelength of the M40 at the transmit end according to the optical power flatness at the receiveend.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

The fiber connections must be established properly.

All channels must have service signals, or the laser on each channel emits light forcibly to ensurethat the OTU emits light normally.


Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fiber jumper, flange, fixedoptical attenuator, VOA, U2000

Background InformationIn this example, the hardware specifications are as follows:

l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.

l The OAU1 type is OAU103. The OBU1 type is OBU103.


Figure 7-25 Fiber connections of OTM station D

Station D



SC1

D40

FIU

M40OUT IN

OUT

IN

OUT

TC OUT IN

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM

OBU1To C

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

TxD31

D32

D40

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

RxM31

M32

M40

OAU1

TDC RDCDCM

From C




313

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the fiber connections between boards are properly established and whether thefibers on each board are tightly inserted. Immediately correct any issues found.

Step 2 Measure the optical power of the FIU and the SC1 by referring to 7.5.2 CommissioningTransmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.

Step 3 Commission the optical power of the OAU1 by referring to 7.5.3 Commissioning OpticalPower of the OLA Station.

Step 4 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN port on the D40 to an opticalspectrum analyzer. Scan the multiplexed signal and record the optical power for eachwavelength.

Step 5 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the west D40 by using a fiber jumper.Scan the multiplexed signal of the D40, and record the input optical power for each wavelength.

Step 6 Measure the single-wavelength optical power at the Dn port on the D40 by using an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the D40. The insertion loss must be lowerthan 6.5 dB, and the maximum insertion loss variance between wavelengths of the D40 must besmaller than 2.0 dB.

Step 8 Measure the input and output optical power of the DCM and then calculate the insertion loss forthe DCM based on the following formula:

Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of theDCM.

Step 9 Measure the optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether theoptical power at the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.

NOTE

The input optical power on the WDM side of the LSXL board must be within the range of -11 dBm to -4dBm. If the measured optical power does not meet the specification requirements, you need to add a properfixed optical attenuator, or replace/remove the existing fixed optical attenuator according to the measuredoptical power, so that the receive optical power of the OTU is within the normal range.

Step 10 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the OTU after the input optical power meetsthe specification requirements.

Step 11 Measure the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power on theODF side. Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is properlyconnected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.

Step 12 On the U2000, query the input and output optical power of each OTU. The variance betweenthe optical power displayed on the U2000 and the measured optical power must be smaller than2.0 dB. The system OSNR flatness must be near ±1 dB after the commissioning. That is, theOSNR measured by the optical spectrum analyzer must meet the specification requirements andthe OSNR for every wavelength is flat when the equalizing optical power for every wavelengthis normal. In addition, check whether the bit error rate conforms to the expected value.

Step 13 If the connected client equipment is new, perform the 24–hour BER test on the client equipment.If the client equipment is not connected or not being used currently, configure a loopbackbetween the TX and RX ports on the client side for every OTU at station C. In this case, a fixedoptical attenuator needs to be installed between the two ports.




314

NOTE

7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 7.5.3 Commissioning OpticalPower of the OLA Station, and 7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTMStation contain the process for commissioning an optical multiplex section. The commissioning for themultiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations is similar.

----End

7.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for EqualizationThis section describes how to commission the optical power for equalization.



All channels must carry services or must be forced to emit light, which makes the OTU emitlight normally.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed opticalattenuator, VOA, U2000

Background InformationIn this example, the hardware specifications are as follows:l The G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.l The type of OAU1 is TN11OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is TN11OBU103.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the MON port on an OA at an OLA station to an optical spectrum analyzer to scan themultiplexed signals. Then record the optical power for each wavelength.

Step 2 Adjust the optical power for each add wavelength by changing the attenuation of the VOA oneach add channel to ensure that the optical power is flat. That is, ensure that the optical powerfor one wavelength differs from that of another wavelength at an intermediate station by lessthan 2 dB.

Step 3 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a specificwavelength is poor, improve the performance for this wavelength by changing its optical power.In addition, make the opposite change to the optical power of the wavelength that has the bestperformance to ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed opticalpower cannot exceed 2 dB.

NOTE

When changing the optical power for the wavelength, increase or decrease the optical power. Increasing theoptical power or decreasing the optical power can improve the wavelength performance.

----End




315

7.5.6 Adjusting Dispersion CompensationThis section describes how to adjust dispersion compensation.

Prerequisite


The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.


U2000


When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts the automaticdispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started, manually start it for a 40Gboard on the U2000.

NOTE

The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit errors in the processof the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an exception.

Procedure

Step 1 On the U2000, check the current Dispersion Compensation Value of a 40G board. In addition,determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is correct based on the followingprinciples.

l If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion compensation is proper.

l If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of -300 to +300,attention is required. The project manager should provide feedback to the network designpersonnel.

l If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide feedback to the projectmanager and ask the network design personnel to optimize the design for the dispersioncompensation module (DCM) for the network.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status ofthe NE is displayed.

2. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the required LSXL board, and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation

Management from the Function Tree on the left side of the window.4. Optional: Select the IN/OUT port row under Port, and click Start Search.

CAUTIONSearching for dispersion configurations interrupts service.

5. Click Query to obtain the current Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm).




316

6. Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.

----End

7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40GSystem

This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that mayhappen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle theproblems according to actual situations.

7.6.1 OSNR FailureThis section describes how to resolve the problem with the OSNR that are not up to the designvalue in the deployment commissioning phase.

ContextThe integral method must be used to test the OSNR of a system to check whether the OSNR isup to the network design value. If the input and output optical power and gain for each OA onthe network are the same as the network design values but the OSNR is not, inform the projectmanager to provide this feedback to the network design engineers.

NOTE

Do not increase the optical power at the transmit end to increase the system OSNR. If you increase the transmitoptical power, the attendant nonlinear effects cause a sharp degrade in the performance of the system. As a result,it is difficult to determine whether the system OSNR fails.

7.6.2 Excessively High Incident Optical PowerThis section describes how to resolve the problem of excessively high incident optical power inthe deployment commissioning phase.

ContextA 40G system is sensitive to nonlinear effects. In general, a 40G system requires that the incidentoptical power should be lower than 4 dBm. If the incident optical power is higher than 4 dBm,nonlinear effects are caused and transmission performance degrade occurs. In the faultidentification process, check the output optical power of each OA on the line to ensure that theactual output optical power of each OA deviates from the nominal output optical power by atmost ±1.5 dB.

7.6.3 Incorrect Dispersion ConfigurationThis section describes how to resolve the problem of incorrect dispersion configuration in thedeployment commissioning phase.

ContextRegardless of whether the system is a 40G or 10G, the methods for handling a dispersion problemare similar. To resolve a dispersion problem, add a fiber or DCM at the receive end to changethe system dispersion (note that the optical power of the OTU boards and the OA boards in the




317

system must remain unchanged after you change the dispersion), and use the TDCM integratedin an 40G OTU board to automatically search for the optimal dispersion compensation value (ifpossible, fine-tune the dispersion compensation). Ensure that the system OSNR and opticalpower are normal. If the TDCM fails to automatically search for the optimal dispersioncompensation value, you need to adjust the DCM configurations by referring to the dispersionconfiguration rules.

NOTE

The TDCM integrated in a 40G OTU board has a requirement on a wavelength carrying the receive opticalsignals. If this wavelength fails to match the TDCM, the dispersion adjustment fails. Therefore, the wavelengthsfor the two interconnected 40G OTU boards must be the same.

7.6.4 Methods for Handling Other FaultsThis section describes how to handle other faults in the deployment commissioning phase.

Contextl The performance of certain 40G channels degrades after the commissioning.

– Possible cause: The TDCM integrated in the relevant 40G boards fails to adjust thedispersion compensation to the optimal value.

– Solution: Refer to the TDCM value of the channel that has good performance and sharesthe same source and sink as the channel being commissioned. Then adjust the TDCMvalue for a channel with poor performance until the channel performance reaches theoptimal value.

l All the 40G channels on a route cannot be set up, or the performance of all these channelsis poor after the commissioning.

– Possible cause 1: After the design, the fiber route or length on this link is changed. A40G system has a high requirement on dispersion compensation deviation. After thefiber route or length is changed, the existing DCM does not match the changed fiberlength. As a result, the 40G channels on this link cannot be set up or the performanceof these 40G channels is poor.

– Solution 1: If a fiber on a link is changed (for example, fiber length, attenuation, andPMD), the changed parameter values must be provided to design engineers forevaluation so that the design engineers can determine whether to adjust the design.

– Possible cause 2: The relevant DCMs are connected incorrectly or the relevantdispersion configurations are incorrect.

– Solution 2: Focus on the dispersion configurations on the network.

NOTE

Compared with a 10G board, a 40G board has a higher rate and thus can tolerate a narrower range ofdispersion.

l For ODB and eDQPSK optical modules, the compensation for chromatic dispersion on a line mustbe accurate to ±5.0 km. In a G.652 fiber network, a 10 km or 5 km DCM must be used to ensurethis compensation accuracy.

l All 40G channels on a route cannot be set up or the performance of these channels is poorafter the commissioning. In addition, this problem exists in both directions of this route.

– Possible cause: The DCMs on the link are connected incorrectly, especially the DCMsthat are used for under-compensation or over-compensation.




318

– Solution: Check the input and output optical power for a DCM on the U2000 . Thencalculate the attenuation of the DCM, or check the fiber connections for a station at thesite to determine whether the DCM at this station is incorrectly connected.

l The OSNR for a 40G channel is lower than the design value after the commissioning. (TheOSNR for the 40G channel is obtained by using the integral method.)– Possible cause: The commissioning is not performed by using a normal method, or the

actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds the design attenuation value.– Solution: Recommission this link. If the actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds

the design attenuation value, adjust the fibers on this span.




319

8 Automatic Commissioning

About This Chapter

This section describes the scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is usedto automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and procedure for thecommissioning. The WDM optical power commissioning tool is mainly used to commissionoptical power of a new WDM network or a live WDM network under expansion. This toolsupports remote and automatic commissioning of optical power of WDM equipment.

8.1 Version MappingThis topic describes the version mapping between the WDM equipment, and U2000.

8.2 Network Models and Application ScenariosThis section describes the network models and topologies that the WDM optical powercommissioning tool supports.

8.3 Precautions for CommissioningThis topic describes the precautions for WDM commissioning.

8.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New NetworkWhen the entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network,you can commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioningprocess described in this topic. The aim of commissioning the optical power is to optimizenetwork performance and ensure that a certain margin of system optical power is reserved underthe condition that expansion is not affected, hence ensuring long-term and stable running of thesystem.

8.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded NetworkWhen the capacity of an existing network is insufficient, you need to expand the network capacity(by expanding wavelengths) according to the service plan. On the expanded network, opticalpower commissioning commissions only the optical power of wavelengths without services.During the wavelength expansion, only the single-wavelength optical power of the links onwhich the specified wavelengths are located is commissioned. You need to set the wavelengthsto be commissioned on the U2000 client.

8.6 Optical Power Commissioning ReportThe U2000 supports various types of reports, helping you to commission the optical power ofWDM equipment.

8.7 Managing the Commissioning Index Data

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 8 Automatic Commissioning


320

The commissioning index data includes the index data of optical amplifier (OA) boards, theinsertion loss index data of components, and code patterns of optical modules. Users can view,add, and delete this data, but cannot modify it.

8.8 Viewing Information About Subnets Under CommissioningThe U2000 server allows a maximum of five users to commission different subnets at the sametime. However, it does not allow multiple users to commission the same subnet at the same time.If multiple users commission the same subnet at the same time, conflicting operations may occur.Conflicting operations can be prevented by properly dividing a network into different subnetsand ensuring that users commission different subnets at the same time.

8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMSWDM commissioning will be affected if it is not synchronized with NMS data. For example,the system may display a message during link generation, indicating that the OTU board doesnot have wavelength information. In this case, synchronize the NMS data to be consistent withthe WDM commissioning data.

8.10 FAQThis topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical powercommissioning.



321

8.1 Version MappingThis topic describes the version mapping between the WDM equipment, and U2000.

Matched WDM Equipment VersionTable 8-1, lists the versions of the WDM equipment that supports automatic optical powercommissioning and quality evaluation.

Table 8-1 Version mapping between the U2000 and WDM equipment

WDM Equipment Version U2000 Version

OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN3800

V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R005C00

8.2 Network Models and Application ScenariosThis section describes the network models and topologies that the WDM optical powercommissioning tool supports.

Principles for Configuring Optical Spectrum Analyzer Boardsl In automatic deployment, multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA) or OPM8 boards are

required and must be connected to the MON port of the optical amplifier (OA) board thatis connected to the FIU.

NOTE

OPM8 boards are recommended.

l If the number of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations isgreater than four, configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the position determined by theformula (Number of transmission spans/2 ± 0.5), and configure MCA or OPM8 boards atthe transmit and received ends as required.

l If the number of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations isequal to or smaller than four, configure an MCA or OPM8 on the transmit end.

Background InformationThis tool supports commissioning of only the sites described in this section. In addition, this toolcannot be used to implement automatic commissioning if a live network does not use a topologydescribed in this section; instead users need to manually commission the network.

PrecautionsNOTE

This section describes how to commission sites OTM, OLA, OADM, and ROADM in a 40-channel system withexamples. The WDM optical power commissioning tool also supports automatic commissioning of these sitesin an 80-channel system.



322

Network Modelsl Chain network:

MCA MCA MCA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8910111213

A B C D E F G

OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM

West East

: OTM : OLA : OADM

l Ring network:

MCA

MCA

MCAMCA

1 2 3

4

567

8

9 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

171819

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

: OLA : OADM

l Mesh network:



323

MCA

MCA

MCAMCA27

20

21

22

23

1 2 3

4

567

8

9 10

11

12

13 14 15

16

171819

MCA

MCA

24

26

25

28

29

30

31

32

A C

D

E

F

G

H

B

I

J

K

: OLA : OADM

AvailabilityTable 8-2 lists the board types supported in the following application scenarios.

Table 8-2 Board types

Multiplexer

Demultiplexer

OA StaticOpticalAdd/DropMultiplexer (MRxSeries)

MCA VOA

M40, M40V D40, D40V OAU1,OBU1,OBU2, HBA

MR2, MR4,MR8, MR8V

MCA4,MCA8,OPM8

VA1, VA4



324

NOTE

This tool supports automatic commissioning of the above-mentioned sites in the figures regardless of whetherthe electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA), multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA), or optical amplifier(OA) in an area enclosed with red dotted lines is configured.

Application Scenarios of OTMl Typical OTM

MUX

OA

FIU

DMUX

OA

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MCA

l Back-to-back OTM

MUX OA

FIU

DMUX

DMUXOA

FIU

MUX

OA OA

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MCA

l OTM using Raman amplifiers



325

MUX

OA

FIU

DMUX

OA

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

CRPC

MCA

Application Scenarios of OLAl OLA using only a single OA on a link

FIU

FIU

OA

OA

MCA

l OLA using cascaded OAs

FIU

FIU

OA

OA

OA

OA

MCA



326

l OLA using a Raman amplifier

FIU

FIU

OA

OA

CRPC

MCA

Application Scenarios of OADMl OADM using cascaded MR2 boards (1)

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

MRx MRx

OTU

OTU

MCA

l OADM using cascaded MR2 boards (2)

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

MRx MRx

OTU

OTU

CRPC

MCA



327


FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MCA


FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

MRx

MRx

OTU

OTU

ITL

ITLRE

TE

TE

RE

TO

ROTO

RO

MCA

Application Scenarios of ROADMl ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (1)



328

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA WSM9

WSM9 WSD9

WSD9

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OA

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OA

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OA

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OAMCA

l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (2)

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

WSM9

WSD9

WSM9

WSD9

WSD9WSM9

FIU

OA OA

MCA



329

l ROADM using WSD9+RMU9 boards (1)

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA RMU9

OTU

OTU

DMUX

RMU9 WSD9

OTU

OTU

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

WSD9

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

MUX

MUX

OA

OA

MCA




330

FIU

FIU OA

OAOA

OA RMU9

OTU

OTU

DMUX

RMU9 WSD9

OTU

OTU

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

WSD9

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MUX

MUX

TOA

ROA

OA

TOA

ROA

OA

MCA


FIU

FIU OA

OAOA

OA RMU9

OTU

OTU

MRx

RMU9 WSD9

OTU

OTU

MRx

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

WSD9

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MRx

MRx

TOA

ROA

OA

TOA

ROA

OA

MCA



331

l ROADM using RDU9+WSM9 boards

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA WSM9

DMUX

WSM9 RDU9

DMUX

OTU

OTU

RDU9

OTU

OTU

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OA

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OA

MCA

l ROADM using cascaded WSMDx boards

FIU

FIU

OA

WSMDx

OA

DMUX

WSMDx

DMUXMUX MUX

OA OA

OTU

OTU

OA OAOAOA

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MCA



332

NOTE

WSMDx boards are classified into WSMD4 and WSMD2 boards. If the WSMD2 board is used, an OTU boardmust be connected to a multiplexer board so that the OTU board can add/drop a wavelength and the demuliplexerboard must be connected to the WSMD2 board.

l ROADM using cascaded ROAM boards

FIU

FIU

OA

ROAM

OA

DMUX

ROAM

DMUXMUX MUX

OA OA

OTU

OTU

OA OAOAOA

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MCA

Application Scenario of PIDl ROADM using PID boards

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA WSM9

WSM9 WSD9

WSD9

PTQX

PTQX

PTQX

PTQX

MCA



333

Application Scenario of OLPl Optical line protection (1)

FIU

FIU

OLP

OLP

TO1

TO2

RI1

RI2

TO1RI1

RI2 TO2

l Optical line protection (2)

M40V

OA FIU

D40

OA

OLP

OA

OA

FIU

M40V

FIU

D40

OLP

FIU

OA

OA

OA

OA

l Optical line protection (3)



334

M40V

OA FIU

D40

OA

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OLP

FIU

8.3 Precautions for CommissioningThis topic describes the precautions for WDM commissioning.

l Optical NEs are classified by function. Ensure that an optical NE is configured withessential boards. For example, an OTM optical NE must be configured with OTU boardsand MUX/DEMUX boards. Configuring the OTU and MUX/DEMUX boards separatelybetween separate NEs is not permitted.

l The U2000 does not support concurrent commissioning on one subnet. For moreinformation, see Viewing Information About Subnets Under Commissioning. TheU2000 allows a maximum of five users to commission different subnets at the same time.

l Subnets selected for expansion commissioning must contain the entire links or wavelengthsto be commissioned; otherwise, the result of optical power commissioning is not accurate.

l Protection groups must be completely configured for to-be-commissioned networks inoptical power commissioning.

l The U2000 commissions optical NEs. Do not add NEs to the Main Topology directly.l The network must adopt the OSC not ESC communication mode. For networks supporting

both OSC and ESC, manually disable the ESC for new wavelengths on the U2000 to ensurethe normal communication during commissioning. After commissioning, manually enablethe ESC on the U2000.

l Ports or channels in the maintenance state on a WDM NE (NA) cannot be commissioned.l Prior to commissioning, ensure that the following conditions are met:

– After importing scripts into the U2000, synchronize NE data on the U2000 to ensuredata consistency between the U2000 and NEs. Then, synchronize commissioning databefore the commissioning by referring to 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS.

– NE data is consistent with the data on the U2000. Otherwise, upload the NE data.– OCh trails have been created or searched out.– Fiber types have been correctly set.



335

8.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of aNew Network

When the entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network,you can commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioningprocess described in this topic. The aim of commissioning the optical power is to optimizenetwork performance and ensure that a certain margin of system optical power is reserved underthe condition that expansion is not affected, hence ensuring long-term and stable running of thesystem.

8.4.1 Preparing for the CommissioningBefore commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, you need to makepreparations for the commissioning. The preparations include preparing related documents,checking the conditions of WDM equipment to be commissioned, preparing the dataconfiguration files for the WDM NEs, and evaluating whether the network scenarios of thenetwork to be commissioned support optical power commissioning.

Evaluating the Network Scenarios of the Network to Be CommissionedThere are certain restrictions on the sites and network modes for automatic optical powercommissioning. Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, evaluatewhether the network scenarios of the WDM network to be commissioned meet thecommissioning requirements. For details about the network scenarios, see Network Modelsand Application Scenarios.

Preparing DocumentsThe documents that you need to prepare are mainly engineering documents. If there are noengineering documents at some offices, obtain relevant information from thetelecommunications design documents and contract. The contents of engineering documentsinclude:

l Network diagram: Used to set the NE ID, IP address, and other parameters before youcommission optical power.

l Network configuration diagram: Used to check and confirm the network topology afterWDM links are generated.

l Wavelength distribution diagram: Used to obtain information about channels contained inWDM links when the wavelengths that have the same source and sink are in the same WDMlink.

l Cabinet panel diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.l Fiber connection diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.

Checking the Commissioning Conditions of WDM EquipmentBefore commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment, check whether the followingconditions are met:

l The WDM equipment version meets the requirementVersion Mapping.



336

l The equipment is installed properly and has passed the hardware installation check. Theexpected results are as follows:– The optical distribution frame (ODF) of each site is installed correctly.– Line fibers are connected correctly through the ODF.– A fiber is connected to the dispersion compensation module (DCM) and the DCM fiber

connection is checked.– The WDM equipment is powered on and ECC communication is proper.– 15-min performance events are enabled for the WDM equipment.– The optical port on the OTU board is enabled at the transmit end of the WDM equipment.

NOTE

You need to check the installation quality of the preceding hardware before commissioning the opticalpower. For the check standards of other hardware, see the relevant equipment manual.

8.4.2 Commissioning ProcessThis topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment byusing the U2000 during the deployment of a new network.

Figure 8-1 shows the flowchart for commissioning optical power by using the U2000.

Figure 8-1 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of a new network

Synchronizing Data on the NMS

Creating a WDM Link


Viewing the Commissioning

Result

End

Start

Uploading Commissioning

Data

Setting Subnet Commissioning

Parameters



337

NOTEPerform the following steps in turn on the entire network after the WDM commissioning component hasbeen installed or deployed:

l 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMSl 8.4.3 Uploading Commissioning Datal 8.4.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parametersl 8.4.5 Creating a WDM Link

8.4.3 Uploading Commissioning DataBefore commissioning the optical power of a WDM subnet, you need to upload thecommissioning data. The commissioning data includes code pattern of OTU boards and typesof optical amplifier boards.

PrerequisiteYou are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.

ContextA subnet can include other subnets and optical NEs.l If all subnets included in a subnet are selected, commissioning data of subnets and optical

NEs will be uploaded to the U2000.l If some subnets included in the subnet are selected, only commissioning data of the selected

subnets is uploaded to the U2000. Commissioning data of optical NEs is not uploaded tothe U2000.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning ParameterConfiguration from the main menu.

Step 2 Click the Upload Commissioning Data tab.

Step 3 Select a subnet on root, and then click Upload. A progress bar displays the uploading progress.



338

Step 4 After the data is loaded, a Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the uploading ofcommissioning data is successful. Click OK.

----End

8.4.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning ParametersThis topic describes how to set the commissioning parameters for a subnet. This operation mustbe completed before the optical power commissioning of a WDM subnet. If any parameter settingis incorrect, the commissioning result will also be incorrect. In this operation, set System FullWavelengths, that determines the typical value of a single wavelength on an optical amplifier(OA) in the WDM subnet.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.l You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.

ContextSystem Full Wavelengths should be set to the actual value. You can determine the actual valuebased on the frequency allocation table in the telecommunications design file or the specificproduct configuration table. For example:l If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M40 or D40 boards, the System Full

Wavelengths value is 80wave.l If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M40 or D40 board, the System Full

Wavelengths value is 40wave.



339

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Parameter

Configuration from the main menu.

Step 2 Click the Set Subnet Parameters tab.

Step 3 Set System Full Wavelengths.NOTE

To set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets at a time, hold down Ctrl to select the requiredsubnets and click Config Batch. In the Config Batch dialog box, you can set System Full Wavelengthsfor multiple subnets.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes to save the settings of the subnet commissioningparameters.

Step 6 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

Step 7 Click OK to close the Commissioning Parameter Configuration dialog box.

----End

8.4.5 Creating a WDM LinkThe U2000 commissions optical power based on the WDM link. Therefore, WDM links (whichare logical links) need to be created for a subnet before commissioning its optical power.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.l The fiber connection data is complete and correct.l To successfully create a WDM link for a subnet, ensure that the following requirements

are met:



340

– Optical cross-connections are correctly configured for reconfiguration optical add/dropmultiplexer (ROADM) sites in the network.

– If wavelength protection, extended wavelength protection, or line protection exists inthe network, protection groups are correctly configured.

– If automatic nesting exists, ensure that no fiber connection exists between this subnetand other subnets; otherwise, use their upper-level shared subnet to create WDM links.

Context

CAUTIONTopological resource changes such as fiber deletion or optical cross-connection deactivationwill affect existing links. Therefore, recreate links before commissioning the optical power.

Logical link: A link that is defined based on add and drop locations of the same wavelength ina network. A wavelength between an add location and a drop location in the network is regardedas a WDM link. Wavelengths that have the same source and sink are regarded as a logical link.

Associated link: Two or more logical links that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) boardand affect each other. Logical links are classified into four types: complete logical links,broadcast logical links, sink-free logical links (no-sink), and source-free logical links (no-source).

Type Definition Remarks

Complete Complete indicates that, in alogical link and its associated linkson a subnet, all wavelengths havesource and sink NEs that are locatedin the same subnet.

l The priority order (from lowestto highest) for displaying thesefour types of logical links isComplete, Broadcast, No-Sink, and No-Source. Forexample, if a source-free linkand a sink-free link coexist insome associated links, LinkStatus will be displayed as No-Source for each link.

l You need to select subnet A andsubnet B when creating links ineither of the subnets forwavelengths with the sink insubnet A and the source insubnet B; otherwise, a source-free or sink-free link will becreated.

Broadcast Broadcast indicates that broadcastwavelengths exist in a logical linkor its associated links on a subnet.

No-Sink No-Sink indicates that in a logicallink or its associated links on asubnet, a wavelength is without asink or it has a sink that is notlocated in this subnet (for example,the U2000 cannot detect the sink fora link because optical cross-connections are not configured).

No-Source No-Source indicates that in alogical link or its associated links ona subnet, a wavelength is without asource or it has a source that is notlocated in this subnet (for example,the U2000 cannot detect the sourcefor a link because of incorrect fiberconnection).



341


An example is given below to illustrate a complete link, a source-free link, and a sink-freelink and also how to convert a source-free or sink-free link into a complete link.As shown in the following figure, subnets A and B carry four wavelengths, λ1, λ2, λ3, andλ4. For λ1, its source is not in subnet A but its sink is in subnet A. λ2 traverses subnets A andB, with its source in subnet A and sink in subnet B. The sources and sinks of λ3 and λ4 arein subnet A.

In the following figure, select subnet A to create WDM links. As a result, Link A, Link B,and Link C are created. Link C is a complete link and is composed of λ3 and λ4. Link A hasno source and Link B has no sink. Link A, Link B, and Link C traverse the same OA boardso they are associated links.l Link Status for these associated links is Complete only when all the links are complete

links. In this example, Link Status for these links is No-Source.l To convert Link A and Link B into complete links, upper-level subnets for subnet A and

subnet B, namely, the subnets that contain complete λ1 and λ2, must be selected whenWDM links are recreated.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > WDM Link Management from the mainmenu.

Step 2 Select a subnet in the navigation tree and click . The WDM links that traverse thesubnet are displayed in the right pane.



342

NOTE

If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree.If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet and the Select allsubnets with resource changes check box is available.

l Select the Select all subnets with resource changes check box to select all subnets before which isdisplayed.

l Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case,

click and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links.

If WDM links do not exist in the selected subnet, click . A message is displayed prompting youto create WDM links.

Step 3 Click Fast Troubleshooting. Rectify the error that occurred during the link creation processaccording to the operation result.

NOTE

After you click Fast Troubleshooting, a temporary link is created for verifying whether the logical fiberconnection is correct and whether the EVOA, MCA, OTU, and OA (with a built-in VOA) boards have idleIN/OUT ports. This link will not be saved on the U2000. After creating the temporary link, clickGenerate to create the formal WDM link.

Step 4 Click Generate in the right pane. A message will be displayed indicating that the original datawill be deleted and WDM links will be re-created.

NOTE

If WDM links in a subnet also traverse another link, a message will be displayed after the WDM links arecreated asking you whether to select the associated subnet.

l If you click OK, a message will be displayed indicating that the associated subnet has been selected.Click OK. All links that traverse the selected subnets will be created.

l If you click Cancel, the associated subnet will not be selected and only the links whose sources andsinks are in the selected subnets will be created.

If an exception occurs during the creation, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.2 FAQs and Solutions Duringthe Generation of WDM Links.

Step 5 Click OK. A progress bar is displayed indicating the generation progress of WDM links.

Step 6 After the links are created, view newly created logical links in the Logical Link area in the upperpane.



343

NOTE

A logical link is a group of wavelengths that are added at the same NE and are dropped at another sameNE. Link creation is a process of grouping wavelengths to several types of logical links.

Multiple wavelengths that traverse only one optical NE and do not traverse any optical amplifiers on theoptical NE is combined into a source-free link or a sink-free link.

Step 7 Optional: Set the number of wavelengths for the boards to be commissioned. Manually enterthe number of wavelengths for each board in the event that the U2000 cannot automaticallycalculate them due to whatever reason (for example, the network-wide fiber connection data isincomplete)1. Select a link in the list and click Set Number of Wave. The Set Number of Wave on

Board dialog box is displayed.



344

2. In the Number of Wave on Board field, enter the number of wavelengths for boards.

NOTE

The number of wavelengths on NG WDM equipment ranges from 1 to 80.

Use the total number of wavelengths that traverse a board as the number of wavelengths. You canobtain the total number of wavelengths from the project design file.

3. Set the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board in the Full Wave Number field.

By default, on the U2000, the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board is thesame as the maximum number of wavelengths for the optical NE where the OA board islocated. When the maximum numbers of wavelengths for subnets are different, and themaximum number of wavelengths for an optical NE in a dimension is different from themaximum number of wavelengths for the target subnet, you need to adjust the maximumnumber of wavelengths for OA boards in this dimension.

As shown in the following figure, SITE_1 and SITE_2 belong to SUBNET_1 whosemaximum number of wavelengths is 40; SITE_3 belongs to SUBNET_2 whose maximumnumber of wavelengths is 80. Hence, you need to modify the maximum number ofwavelengths for A101 and A105 OA boards in the east dimension at SITE_2 to 80 to makeit consistent with the maximum number of wavelengths for SUBNET_2.



345

East West

4. Click Save. The Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the data was successfullysaved.

5. Click OK.

NOTE

When a board is traversed by multiple links, you only need to set Number of Wave on Board for alink. Number of Wave on Board will be automatically updated for other links.

If you create WDM links again after Full Wave Number is set, the value will be changed to themaximum number of wavelengths for the subnet. In this case, set Full Wave Number again.

----End

8.4.6 Recording Optical Power Before CommissioningYou can create an optical power commissioning report that records the before-commissioningdata. The report assists you in verifying whether you have achieved the commissioning resultsafter commissioning the optical power.

Prerequisite

l WDM links have been created in the subnet. For details, see 8.4.5 Creating a WDMLink.

l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see 8.4.4 SettingSubnet Commissioning Parameters.

Context

Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters:

l Bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end

l Input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board and the OTU board

You can directly commission optical power without generating a commissioning report.



346

ProcedureStep 1 Export the OTU commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning

Report of an OTU Board. View the input optical power, output optical power, and the BERbefore FEC of the OTU board. Record and save the parameter values.

Step 2 Export the optical amplifier commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.3 Generating aCommissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board. View the input optical power, outputoptical power, and gain of all optical amplifier boards. Check the optical power and gain of theIN port on the optical amplifier board on the line. Record and save the parameter values.

----End

8.4.7 Commissioning Optical PowerBy using the function of automatic optical power commissioning during deployment of a newnetwork, you can commission the optical power of one or more specified links and associatedlinks at a time. In addition, no manual operation is required during the automatic commissioningprocess. This mode saves manual intervention, shortens the commissioning time, and improvescommissioning efficiency.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.l The links to be commissioned are complete links or links without sinks. Links without

sources cannot be commissioned.

ContextOptical power commissioning commissions the optical power of all optical amplifier boards ina subnet. In the commissioning process, the U2000 logs in to all NEs in the subnet. Because thecommissioning may start the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power equilibrium(APE) function for the NEs, pay attention to the following points:l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, ensures that the ALC and

APE functions of the NEs are in the Disable state and that the OPA function is not in theAuto state before commissioning.

l For NG WDM equipment of V100R005 or later versions, the U2000 will automaticallydisable the ALC and APE functions for the NEs before commissioning. After thecommissioning, the U2000 enables the ALC and APE functions for the NEs automaticallybut automatic ALC adjustment is still disabled.

l The intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function must be disabled for the network to becommissioned before commissioning.

If no MCA board is configured for optical power commissioning, an MUT_LOSLOS-MUTalarm will be reported during commissioning. This alarm does not affect commissioning ornetworks, and will be stopped after the commissioning is complete.

If Raman boards are installed on the link, during the automatic commissioning of optical power,backward Raman commissioning is performed to set the pump optical power of the Ramanboard. Before the commissioning, ensure that the laser on the link is enabled. If the laser isdisabled, the U2000 automatically stops commissioning and displays a message, asking you toturn on the laser.

The U2000 generates the Limit OSNR, The Number of Wavelengths of the link, andIndependency parameters automatically according to fiber connections and board information.



347

If a non-40G system needs to be expanded to a 40G system, commission the non-40G systemaccording to the requirements for a 40G system. Specifically, set Commission Mode to 40GMode and Code Type to the code pattern of the 40G system. If you do not perform the precedingoperations, the non-40G system cannot be expanded to a 40G system.

If OTUs in other code patterns need to be added to a 40G system, commission the 40G systemaccording to the code pattern with the minimum incident optical power requirement. Forexample, if you need to add OTUs in the DQPSK code pattern to a 40G system with OTUs inthe ODB code pattern, or add OTUs in the ODB code pattern to a 40G system with OTUs in theDQPSK code pattern, commission the system according to the DQPSK code pattern.

If the wavelength to be commissioned traverses a regeneration station that supports FEC auto-adaptation, select links by wavelength direction in turn. Do not select all links at a time. Forexample, for wavelength c1 that traverses two regeneration sites, select Link11, Link12, andLink13 in turn to commission them in the forward direction, and select Link21, Link22, andLink23 in turn to commission them in the reverse direction.

During the commissioning, the client may be disconnected from the server due to communicationexceptions, but the server will continue the commissioning. When the client is reconnected to

the server, you can click to view commissioned subnets. For details, see 8.8 ViewingInformation About Subnets Under Commissioning. To ensure successful commissioning,perform the commissioning again after the subnets are commissioned completely.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > New Deployment Commissioning from

the main menu.

Step 2 In the window that is displayed, select the subnet to be commissioned in the navigation tree and

click to import the WDM links to the subnet to be commissioned.



348

NOTE

If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree.If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet.

Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case, click

and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links.

If no WDM link is generated in the subnet to be commissioned, generate WDM links before performingany further operation. For details, see 8.4.5 Creating a WDM Link.

Step 3 In the operation list, view and set each parameter for the WDM link.

Field Description

Limit OSNR (dB) Indicates the minimum OSNR of a WDM system. If the value ofLimit OSNR is 20.0, the OSNR of a WDM link cannot be smallerthan 20.0 dB. Otherwise, the signal quality on the WDM linkseverely degrades.

OSNR Design Value Indicates the OSNR of the optical power of the WDM system. Afterthe U2000 commissions the WDM system, the OSNR of the WDMsystem cannot be smaller than this value.You can modify the value. If you do not modify the value, theU2000 commissions the WDM system according to the value ofLimit OSNR (dB).If OSNR Design Value is set to 0.0 dB, the OSNR of the opticalpower of the WDM system is not set. In this case, the U2000commissions the WDM system according to the value of LimitOSNR (dB).

The Number ofWavelengths of TheLink

Indicates the number of wavelengths carried on a WDM link. Forexample, if the value is 2, the WDM link carries two wavelengths.

Independency Specifies whether any link is associated to this link. The options areas follows:l No: Indicates that no link is associated to the WDM link. When

you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only theWDM link needs to be commissioned.

l Yes: Indicates that the WDM link has an associated link. Whenyou commission the optical power of the WDM link, both theWDM link and its associated link need to be commissioned.



349

Field Description

Protect Type Indicates the protection type of a WDM link.l No Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is not protected. When

you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only theworking link needs to be commissioned.

l Line Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of 1+1 protection.When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, youare advised to commission both the working and protection links.

l Wave Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of wavelengthprotection. When you commission the optical power of the WDMlink, you are advised to commission both the working andprotection links.

l Expand Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of extendedwavelength protection. When you commission the optical powerof the WDM link, you are advised to commission both theworking and protection links.

Work State Indicates the working status of a WDM link. The options are asfollows:l Work: Indicates that the WDM link is a working link.l Backup: Indicates that the WDM link is a protection link.

Link Status Indicates the completeness of the source and sink ends of awavelength on a link in the current subnet.NOTE

The source end refers to the OTU board that adds wavelengths and the sinkend refers to the OTU board that drops wavelengths.

A link refers to a group of wavelengths that are added or dropped by the OTUboards on the same site.

The links on the U2000 are classified into the following types:l Complete: Indicates that every wavelength on the links and

related links in the current subnet has a source and a sink, andboth the source and sink are located in the subnet.

l Broadcast: Indicates that there are broadcast wavelengths on thelinks or the related links in the current subnet.

l No-Sink: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or therelated links have the source but do not have the sink, or the sinkof certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. One instanceof No-Sink is that the system cannot locate the sink because theoptical cross-connection is not configured.

l No-Source: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or therelated links have the sink but do not have the source, or thesource of certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. Oneinstance of No-Source is that the system cannot locate the sourcebecause the fiber connection is incorrect.

The preceding link types are displayed in a downward compatibleorder. For example, if a no-sink link and a no-source link coexist,No-Source is displayed on the U2000.



350

Field Description

Fiber Cut Point Indicates the position of a fiber cut on the working link.

Commission Mode Indicates the modulation mode according to the following rules:1. For a 40G system, when the system generates WDM links, this

parameter is displayed as 40G Mode by default and is dimmed.That is, a user cannot change the commission mode.

2. For a non-40G system, when the system generates WDM links,this parameter is displayed as Non-40G Mode. In this case, auser can change the commission mode as follows:l If the system is not to be expanded to a 40G system, the

commission mode does not need to be changed. Retain theparameter setting as Non-40G Mode.

l If the system is to be expanded to a 40G system, 40G Modemust be selected for commissioning. During deployment, ifthe incident optical power is commissioned for a 40G system,the incident optical power does not need to be adjusted whenthe system is expanded to a 40G system later.NOTE

If 40G Mode is selected for commissioning a non-40G system, aproper coder pattern must be selected. In this case, the incident opticalpower varies with the code patterns. If Non-40G Mode is selectedfor commissioning a non-40G system, a code pattern does not needto be selected.

Code Type Indicates the code pattern that is used during the commissioning ofa 40G board. Select a proper code pattern according to the followingrules:1. For a 40G system, the U2000 automatically starts commissioning

according to the code pattern of the OTU boards along a link. Inthis case, this parameter is dimmed and does not need to be set.NOTE

If there are multiple OTU boards along a link and the code patterns ofthese OTU boards are different, the U2000 starts commissioningaccording to the code pattern of the OTU board with the minimumincident optical power.

2. If a non-40G system (commission mode: 40G Mode) isexpanded to a 40G system, the selected code pattern must be thesame as the code pattern of the expanded 40G board.

3. If a non-40G system (commission mode: Non-40G Mode) is notto be expanded, this parameter does not need to be set.

Step 4 Click Save to save the parameters for the objects to be commissioned.

Step 5 After saving the parameters, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 6 Select the check box of the link to be commissioned.



351

NOTE

When you select a link to be commissioned, all the associated links are selected at the same time.

You can select one or multiple wavelengths of the WDM links to be commissioned. To do so, click SelectCommissioning Wavelength in the WDM Link Management (Deployment) window.

You can also cancel commissioning for the associated links. To do so, in the operation list, select theassociated links of the link to be commissioned. Click Select Commissioning Wavelength, clear allwavelengths in the Select Commissioning Wavelength dialog box, and then click OK.

Step 7 Click Commission.

Step 8 Optional: In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Deployment) dialog box, clickAdvanced Option. Then, the system displays the Advanced Option dialog box, where you canuser-define commissioning options.

NOTE

By default, all the options are selected. If you clear an option and click Start, the system cancels theoperation during commissioning.

Step 9 Click Start. The Prompt dialog box is displayed. Check whether the subnet commissioningparameters are set correctly and then click OK to commission the subnet. The system starts tocommission the subnet and the progress bar displays the commissioning progress.

NOTE

When the laser on the link under commissioning is shut down, the system displays the OTU laser statusdialog box during commissioning. In this case, click the Laser status column and change the OTU laserstatus to On. If you do not perform this operation, the system skips the optimization for single-wavelengthoptical power of the link.

Step 10 After commissioning is complete, click OK.

NOTE

If ongoing commissioning pauses due to an exception, for example, a failure to initialize sites, selectResume Broken Commissioning and click Start. Then, the system resumes the last unfinishedcommissioning.

When you select Resume Broken Commissioning, Advanced Option is dimmed.

Step 11 Optional: Click Detail in the Operate column to view the channel attenuation value of thesingle-wavelength commissioning point and the single-wavelength attenuation value of themonitoring point of each wavelength on the link.

Step 12 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning window, view the commissioning result andconfirm whether the result meets the requirement.



352

NOTE

After the commissioning is complete, you can:

l Click Save to File to save the optical power and BER before and after the commissioning of each linkto an .xls file.

l Click Create Commission Report to generate the OTU commissioning report and optical amplifierreport of the commissioned link and save the reports in a specified path. On Windows OS, you canexport a report to an .html or .xls file. On UNIX OS, you can export a report only to an .html file.

----End

ResultIf the commissioning result indicates exceptions, retry the commissioning.

Troubleshooting

If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.1 FAQs in theOptical Power Commissioning Window.

8.4.8 Viewing the Commissioning ResultWhen optical power commissioning is complete, you can check whether the commissioningresult meets the requirements by viewing the commissioning report.

PrerequisiteOptical power commissioning has been completed.

ContextNOTE

When optical power commissioning is complete, pay attention to the following parameters in thecommissioning result:

l BER before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end


Procedure

Step 1 Generate 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board, and view the inputoptical power, out optical power, and BER before FEC of the OTU board. Check whether theseparameters meet the requirements.

NOTE

The BER before FEC at the receive end must be lower than the preset value. If the BER before FEC doesnot meet the requirement, check whether the optical power is appropriate by performing the follow-upsteps in this topic.

If the optical power is appropriate, check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM)configuration of the related links is consistent with that in the design file.

The optical power of the input port of the OTU board must be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity and5 dB lower than the overload point. In the report, the board data that does not meet the requirements of thecommissioning result is marked red.

The optical power of the output port of the OTU board must be within the specified range of the board.



353

Step 2 Generate 8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board, andview the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of the optical amplifier board. Checkwhether the optical power and gain of the input port of the optical amplifier board meet therequirements.

Step 3 If the average input optical power of a single wavelength of the optical amplifier board is lowerthan the standard input optical power of a single wavelength, check whether the insertion lossand fiber attenuation of the upstream board of the optical amplifier board are appropriate.l The insertion loss of a board must be within the specification range of the board.l For the optical amplifier board, check and analyze the contents marked red in the report.

The contents marked red indicate exceptions.

----End

8.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment ofan Expanded Network

When the capacity of an existing network is insufficient, you need to expand the network capacity(by expanding wavelengths) according to the service plan. On the expanded network, opticalpower commissioning commissions only the optical power of wavelengths without services.During the wavelength expansion, only the single-wavelength optical power of the links onwhich the specified wavelengths are located is commissioned. You need to set the wavelengthsto be commissioned on the U2000 client.

CAUTIONThe WDM network to be expanded must have some system margin and must be free from qualityrisks. Therefore, you need to evaluate the quality of the WDM network, optimize the WDMnetwork according to the evaluation result, expand the WDM network, and then commission theoptical power of the WDM network.

8.5.1 Preparing for the CommissioningThis topic describes how to prepare for commissioning the optical power of WDM NEs on anexpanded network. The preparations include obtaining documents, checking the conditions ofthe WDM NEs to be commissioned, evaluating the network scenarios of the network to becommissioned, and evaluating and optimizing the quality of the network to be commissioned.

Evaluating the Network Scenarios of the Network to Be CommissionedThere are certain restrictions on the sites and network modes for automatic optical powercommissioning. Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, evaluatewhether the network scenarios of the WDM network to be commissioned meet thecommissioning requirements. For details about the network scenarios, see Network Modelsand Application Scenarios.

Preparing DocumentsThe documents that you need to prepare are mainly engineering documents. If there are noengineering documents at some offices, obtain relevant information from the



354

telecommunications design documents and contract. The contents of engineering documentsinclude:

l Network diagram: Used to set the NE ID, IP address, and other parameters before youcommission optical power.

l Network configuration diagram: Used to check and confirm the network topology afterWDM links are generated.

l Wavelength distribution diagram: Used to obtain information about channels contained inWDM links when the wavelengths that have the same source and sink are in the same WDMlink.

l Cabinet panel diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.l Fiber connection diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.

Checking the Commissioning Conditions of WDM EquipmentBefore commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment, check whether the followingconditions are met:

l The WDM equipment version meets the requirementVersion Mapping.l The equipment is installed properly and has passed the hardware installation check. The

expected results are as follows:– The optical distribution frame (ODF) of each site is installed correctly.– Line fibers are connected correctly through the ODF.– A fiber is connected to the dispersion compensation module (DCM) and the DCM fiber

connection is checked.– The WDM equipment is powered on and ECC communication is proper.– 15-min performance events are enabled for the WDM equipment.– The optical port on the OTU board is enabled at the transmit end of the WDM equipment.

NOTE

You need to check the installation quality of the preceding hardware before commissioning the opticalpower. For the check standards of other hardware, see the relevant equipment manual.

8.5.2 Commissioning ProcessThis topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM NEs on anexpanded network.

Figure 8-2 shows the flowchart for commissioning the optical power of an expanded networkby using the U2000.



355

Figure 8-2 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of an expanded network

Create WDM links

Commission the optical power

View the commissioning report

End

Start

Set subnet commissioning

parameters

Update board configuration data

NOTEPerform the following steps in turn on the entire network after the WDM commissioning component hasbeen installed or deployed:

l 8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMS

l 8.5.3 Uploading Commissioning Data

l 8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters

l 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link

8.5.3 Uploading Commissioning DataBefore commissioning the optical power of a WDM subnet, you need to upload thecommissioning data. The commissioning data includes code pattern of OTU boards and typesof optical amplifier boards.


Context

A subnet can include other subnets and optical NEs.



356

l If all subnets included in a subnet are selected, commissioning data of subnets and opticalNEs will be uploaded to the U2000.

l If some subnets included in the subnet are selected, only commissioning data of the selectedsubnets is uploaded to the U2000. Commissioning data of optical NEs is not uploaded tothe U2000.

Procedure


Step 2 Click the Upload Commissioning Data tab.

Step 3 Select a subnet on root, and then click Upload. A progress bar displays the uploading progress.

Step 4 After the data is loaded, a Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the uploading ofcommissioning data is successful. Click OK.

----End

8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning ParametersThis topic describes how to set the commissioning parameters for a subnet. This operation mustbe completed before the optical power commissioning of a WDM subnet. If any parameter settingis incorrect, the commissioning result will also be incorrect. In this operation, set System FullWavelengths, that determines the typical value of a single wavelength on an optical amplifier(OA) in the WDM subnet.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.

l You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.



357

ContextSystem Full Wavelengths should be set to the actual value. You can determine the actual valuebased on the frequency allocation table in the telecommunications design file or the specificproduct configuration table. For example:l If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M40 or D40 boards, the System Full

Wavelengths value is 80wave.l If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M40 or D40 board, the System Full

Wavelengths value is 40wave.

Procedure


Step 2 Click the Set Subnet Parameters tab.

Step 3 Set System Full Wavelengths.

NOTE

To set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets at a time, hold down Ctrl to select the requiredsubnets and click Config Batch. In the Config Batch dialog box, you can set System Full Wavelengthsfor multiple subnets.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes to save the settings of the subnet commissioningparameters.

Step 6 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

Step 7 Click OK to close the Commissioning Parameter Configuration dialog box.

----End



358

8.5.5 Creating a WDM LinkThe U2000 commissions optical power based on the WDM link. Therefore, WDM links (whichare logical links) need to be created for a subnet before commissioning its optical power.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.

l The fiber connection data is complete and correct.

l To successfully create a WDM link for a subnet, ensure that the following requirementsare met:

– Optical cross-connections are correctly configured for reconfiguration optical add/dropmultiplexer (ROADM) sites in the network.

– If wavelength protection, extended wavelength protection, or line protection exists inthe network, protection groups are correctly configured.

– If automatic nesting exists, ensure that no fiber connection exists between this subnetand other subnets; otherwise, use their upper-level shared subnet to create WDM links.

Context

CAUTIONTopological resource changes such as fiber deletion or optical cross-connection deactivationwill affect existing links. Therefore, recreate links before commissioning the optical power.

Logical link: A link that is defined based on add and drop locations of the same wavelength ina network. A wavelength between an add location and a drop location in the network is regardedas a WDM link. Wavelengths that have the same source and sink are regarded as a logical link.

Associated link: Two or more logical links that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) boardand affect each other. Logical links are classified into four types: complete logical links,broadcast logical links, sink-free logical links (no-sink), and source-free logical links (no-source).


Complete Complete indicates that, in alogical link and its associated linkson a subnet, all wavelengths havesource and sink NEs that are locatedin the same subnet.

l The priority order (from lowestto highest) for displaying thesefour types of logical links isComplete, Broadcast, No-Sink, and No-Source. Forexample, if a source-free linkand a sink-free link coexist insome associated links, LinkStatus will be displayed as No-Source for each link.

l You need to select subnet A andsubnet B when creating links ineither of the subnets for

Broadcast Broadcast indicates that broadcastwavelengths exist in a logical linkor its associated links on a subnet.



359


No-Sink No-Sink indicates that in a logicallink or its associated links on asubnet, a wavelength is without asink or it has a sink that is notlocated in this subnet (for example,the U2000 cannot detect the sink fora link because optical cross-connections are not configured).

wavelengths with the sink insubnet A and the source insubnet B; otherwise, a source-free or sink-free link will becreated.

No-Source No-Source indicates that in alogical link or its associated links ona subnet, a wavelength is without asource or it has a source that is notlocated in this subnet (for example,the U2000 cannot detect the sourcefor a link because of incorrect fiberconnection).



360


An example is given below to illustrate a complete link, a source-free link, and a sink-freelink and also how to convert a source-free or sink-free link into a complete link.As shown in the following figure, subnets A and B carry four wavelengths, λ1, λ2, λ3, andλ4. For λ1, its source is not in subnet A but its sink is in subnet A. λ2 traverses subnets A andB, with its source in subnet A and sink in subnet B. The sources and sinks of λ3 and λ4 arein subnet A.

In the following figure, select subnet A to create WDM links. As a result, Link A, Link B,and Link C are created. Link C is a complete link and is composed of λ3 and λ4. Link A hasno source and Link B has no sink. Link A, Link B, and Link C traverse the same OA boardso they are associated links.l Link Status for these associated links is Complete only when all the links are complete

links. In this example, Link Status for these links is No-Source.l To convert Link A and Link B into complete links, upper-level subnets for subnet A and

subnet B, namely, the subnets that contain complete λ1 and λ2, must be selected whenWDM links are recreated.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > WDM Link Management from the mainmenu.

Step 2 Select a subnet in the navigation tree and click . The WDM links that traverse thesubnet are displayed in the right pane.



361

NOTE

If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree.If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet and the Select allsubnets with resource changes check box is available.

l Select the Select all subnets with resource changes check box to select all subnets before which isdisplayed.

l Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case,

click and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links.

If WDM links do not exist in the selected subnet, click . A message is displayed prompting youto create WDM links.

Step 3 Click Fast Troubleshooting. Rectify the error that occurred during the link creation processaccording to the operation result.

NOTE

After you click Fast Troubleshooting, a temporary link is created for verifying whether the logical fiberconnection is correct and whether the EVOA, MCA, OTU, and OA (with a built-in VOA) boards have idleIN/OUT ports. This link will not be saved on the U2000. After creating the temporary link, clickGenerate to create the formal WDM link.

Step 4 Click Generate in the right pane. A message will be displayed indicating that the original datawill be deleted and WDM links will be re-created.

NOTE

If WDM links in a subnet also traverse another link, a message will be displayed after the WDM links arecreated asking you whether to select the associated subnet.

l If you click OK, a message will be displayed indicating that the associated subnet has been selected.Click OK. All links that traverse the selected subnets will be created.

l If you click Cancel, the associated subnet will not be selected and only the links whose sources andsinks are in the selected subnets will be created.

If an exception occurs during the creation, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.2 FAQs and Solutions Duringthe Generation of WDM Links.

Step 5 Click OK. A progress bar is displayed indicating the generation progress of WDM links.

Step 6 After the links are created, view newly created logical links in the Logical Link area in the upperpane.



362

NOTE

A logical link is a group of wavelengths that are added at the same NE and are dropped at another sameNE. Link creation is a process of grouping wavelengths to several types of logical links.

Multiple wavelengths that traverse only one optical NE and do not traverse any optical amplifiers on theoptical NE is combined into a source-free link or a sink-free link.

Step 7 Optional: Set the number of wavelengths for the boards to be commissioned. Manually enterthe number of wavelengths for each board in the event that the U2000 cannot automaticallycalculate them due to whatever reason (for example, the network-wide fiber connection data isincomplete)1. Select a link in the list and click Set Number of Wave. The Set Number of Wave on

Board dialog box is displayed.



363

2. In the Number of Wave on Board field, enter the number of wavelengths for boards.

NOTE

The number of wavelengths on NG WDM equipment ranges from 1 to 80.

Use the total number of wavelengths that traverse a board as the number of wavelengths. You canobtain the total number of wavelengths from the project design file.

3. Set the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board in the Full Wave Number field.

By default, on the U2000, the maximum number of wavelengths for an OA board is thesame as the maximum number of wavelengths for the optical NE where the OA board islocated. When the maximum numbers of wavelengths for subnets are different, and themaximum number of wavelengths for an optical NE in a dimension is different from themaximum number of wavelengths for the target subnet, you need to adjust the maximumnumber of wavelengths for OA boards in this dimension.

As shown in the following figure, SITE_1 and SITE_2 belong to SUBNET_1 whosemaximum number of wavelengths is 40; SITE_3 belongs to SUBNET_2 whose maximumnumber of wavelengths is 80. Hence, you need to modify the maximum number ofwavelengths for A101 and A105 OA boards in the east dimension at SITE_2 to 80 to makeit consistent with the maximum number of wavelengths for SUBNET_2.



364

East West

4. Click Save. The Prompt dialog box is displayed indicating that the data was successfullysaved.

5. Click OK.

NOTE

When a board is traversed by multiple links, you only need to set Number of Wave on Board for alink. Number of Wave on Board will be automatically updated for other links.

If you create WDM links again after Full Wave Number is set, the value will be changed to themaximum number of wavelengths for the subnet. In this case, set Full Wave Number again.

----End

8.5.6 Recording Optical Power Before CommissioningYou can create an optical power commissioning report that records the before-commissioningdata. The report assists you in verifying whether you have achieved the commissioning resultsafter commissioning the optical power.

Prerequisite

l WDM links have been created in the subnet. For details, see 8.5.5 Creating a WDMLink.

l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see 8.5.4 SettingSubnet Commissioning Parameters.

Context

Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters:

l Bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end


You can directly commission optical power without generating a commissioning report.



365

ProcedureStep 1 Export the OTU commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning

Report of an OTU Board. View the input optical power, output optical power, and the BERbefore FEC of the OTU board. Record and save the parameter values.

Step 2 Export the optical amplifier commissioning report. For details, see 8.6.3 Generating aCommissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board. View the input optical power, outputoptical power, and gain of all optical amplifier boards. Check the optical power and gain of theIN port on the optical amplifier board on the line. Record and save the parameter values.

----End

8.5.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of Expanded WavelengthsThis topic describes how to commission the optical power of expanded wavelengths. The opticalpower commissioning in this scenario commissions only the optical power of newly expandedwavelengths to ensure that the flatness of the optical power and OSNR between thesewavelengths and other wavelengths at the receive end meet the system requirements. The opticalpower of expanded sites is commissioned automatically. Before the commissioning, you needto set the wavelengths to be commissioned. During the commissioning, only the single-wavelength optical power of the wavelengths is optimized.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user at the network operator or above level.l BERs of the OTU boards in an expanded subnet can be queried.l The links to be commissioned are complete links. The optical power of non-source or non-

sink links cannot be commissioned.l MCA boards are installed on the network to be commissioned. Otherwise, the

commissioning cannot be performed.

ContextOptical power commissioning commissions the optical power of all optical amplifier boards ina subnet. In the commissioning process, the U2000 logs in to all NEs in the subnet. Because thecommissioning may start the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power equilibrium(APE) function for the NEs, pay attention to the following points:l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, ensures that the ALC and

APE functions of the NEs are in the Disable state and that the OPA function is not in theAuto state before commissioning.

l For NG WDM equipment of V100R005 or later versions, the U2000 will automaticallydisable the ALC and APE functions for the NEs before commissioning. After thecommissioning, the U2000 enables the ALC and APE functions for the NEs automaticallybut automatic ALC adjustment is still disabled.

l The intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function must be disabled for the network to becommissioned before commissioning.

If the link traverses a Raman board, backward Raman commissioning is performed to set thepump optical power of the Raman board and you need to enable the laser of the link before thecommissioning. If the laser is disabled, you will be prompted to enable it.

The Limit OSNR, The Number of Wavelengths of the link, and Independency values areautomatically generated according to fiber connection data and board data.



366

Before expanding a non-40G system to a 40G system, ensure that the non-40G system has beencommissioned during the new deployment according to the requirements for commissioning a40G system. Otherwise, the expansion will fail.

Before adding OTU boards in the DQPSK code pattern to a 40G system with OTU boards inthe ODB code pattern, ensure that the 40G system has been commissioned during the newdeployment according to the requirements for the DQPSK code pattern. Otherwise, the boardaddition will fail.

If the wavelength to be commissioned traverses a regeneration station that supports FEC auto-adaptation, select links by wavelength direction in turn. Do not select all links at a time. Forexample, for wavelength c1 that traverses two regeneration sites, select Link11, Link12, andLink13 in turn to commission them in the forward direction, and select Link21, Link22, andLink23 in turn to commission them in the reverse direction.

During the commissioning, the client may be disconnected from the server due to communicationexceptions, but the server will continue the commissioning. When the client is reconnected to

the server, you can click to view commissioned subnets. For details, see 8.8 ViewingInformation About Subnets Under Commissioning. To ensure successful commissioning,perform the commissioning again after the subnets are commissioned completely.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Expansion Deployment Commissioningfrom the main menu.

NOTE

The optical power commissioning of expanded wavelengths adjusts the optical power to the average opticalpower of the original wavelengths. Therefore, ensure that the optical power of the original wavelengthshas been optimized before the commissioning.

Step 2 Select the required subnet in the navigation tree and click above the navigation treeto import the WDM link data of the subnet.



367

NOTE

If is displayed, network data has changed. In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree.If the topological resources in a subnet have changed, is displayed before the subnet.

Topological resource changes in a subnet may affect the links that traverse the subnet. In this case, click

and a message is displayed prompting you to re-create WDM links.

If no WDM link is generated in the subnet, generate WDM links by referring to 8.5.5 Creating a WDMLink before performing follow-up operations.

Step 3 In the operation list, view and set each parameter for the WDM link.

Field Description

Limit OSNR (dB) Indicates the minimum OSNR of a WDM system. If the value ofLimit OSNR is 20.0, the OSNR of a WDM link cannot be smallerthan 20.0 dB. Otherwise, the signal quality on the WDM linkseverely degrades.

OSNR Design Value Indicates the OSNR of the optical power of the WDM system. Afterthe U2000 commissions the WDM system, the OSNR of the WDMsystem cannot be smaller than this value.You can modify the value. If you do not modify the value, theU2000 commissions the WDM system according to the value ofLimit OSNR (dB).If OSNR Design Value is set to 0.0 dB, the OSNR of the opticalpower of the WDM system is not set. In this case, the U2000commissions the WDM system according to the value of LimitOSNR (dB).

The Number ofWavelengths of TheLink

Indicates the number of wavelengths carried on a WDM link. Forexample, if the value is 2, the WDM link carries two wavelengths.



368

Field Description

Independency Specifies whether any link is associated to this link. The options areas follows:l No: Indicates that no link is associated to the WDM link. When

you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only theWDM link needs to be commissioned.

l Yes: Indicates that the WDM link has an associated link. Whenyou commission the optical power of the WDM link, both theWDM link and its associated link need to be commissioned.

Protect Type Indicates the protection type of a WDM link.l No Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is not protected. When

you commission the optical power of the WDM link, only theworking link needs to be commissioned.

l Line Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of 1+1 protection.When you commission the optical power of the WDM link, youare advised to commission both the working and protection links.

l Wave Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of wavelengthprotection. When you commission the optical power of the WDMlink, you are advised to commission both the working andprotection links.

l Expand Protect: Indicates that the WDM link is of extendedwavelength protection. When you commission the optical powerof the WDM link, you are advised to commission both theworking and protection links.

Work State Indicates the working status of a WDM link. The options are asfollows:l Work: Indicates that the WDM link is a working link.l Backup: Indicates that the WDM link is a protection link.



369

Field Description

Link Status Indicates the completeness of the source and sink ends of awavelength on a link in the current subnet.NOTE

The source end refers to the OTU board that adds wavelengths and the sinkend refers to the OTU board that drops wavelengths.

A link refers to a group of wavelengths that are added or dropped by the OTUboards on the same site.

The links on the U2000 are classified into the following types:l Complete: Indicates that every wavelength on the links and

related links in the current subnet has a source and a sink, andboth the source and sink are located in the subnet.

l Broadcast: Indicates that there are broadcast wavelengths on thelinks or the related links in the current subnet.

l No-Sink: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or therelated links have the source but do not have the sink, or the sinkof certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. One instanceof No-Sink is that the system cannot locate the sink because theoptical cross-connection is not configured.

l No-Source: Indicates that certain wavelengths on the links or therelated links have the sink but do not have the source, or thesource of certain wavelengths is not located in the subnet. Oneinstance of No-Source is that the system cannot locate the sourcebecause the fiber connection is incorrect.

The preceding link types are displayed in a downward compatibleorder. For example, if a no-sink link and a no-source link coexist,No-Source is displayed on the U2000.

Fiber Cut Point Indicates the position of a fiber cut on the working link.



370

Field Description

Commission Mode Indicates the modulation mode according to the following rules:1. For a 40G system, when the system generates WDM links, this

parameter is displayed as 40G Mode by default and is dimmed.That is, a user cannot change the commission mode.

2. For a non-40G system, when the system generates WDM links,this parameter is displayed as Non-40G Mode. In this case, auser can change the commission mode as follows:l If the system is not to be expanded to a 40G system, the

commission mode does not need to be changed. Retain theparameter setting as Non-40G Mode.

l If the system is to be expanded to a 40G system, 40G Modemust be selected for commissioning. During deployment, ifthe incident optical power is commissioned for a 40G system,the incident optical power does not need to be adjusted whenthe system is expanded to a 40G system later.NOTE

If 40G Mode is selected for commissioning a non-40G system, aproper coder pattern must be selected. In this case, the incident opticalpower varies with the code patterns. If Non-40G Mode is selectedfor commissioning a non-40G system, a code pattern does not needto be selected.

Code Type Indicates the code pattern that is used during the commissioning ofa 40G board. Select a proper code pattern according to the followingrules:1. For a 40G system, the U2000 automatically starts commissioning

according to the code pattern of the OTU boards along a link. Inthis case, this parameter is dimmed and does not need to be set.NOTE

If there are multiple OTU boards along a link and the code patterns ofthese OTU boards are different, the U2000 starts commissioningaccording to the code pattern of the OTU board with the minimumincident optical power.

2. If a non-40G system (commission mode: 40G Mode) isexpanded to a 40G system, the selected code pattern must be thesame as the code pattern of the expanded 40G board.

3. If a non-40G system (commission mode: Non-40G Mode) is notto be expanded, this parameter does not need to be set.

Step 4 In the operation list, right-click a link to be commissioned and choose Select CommissioningWavelength from the shortcut menu. The Select Commissioning Wavelength dialog box isdisplayed.



371

Step 5 Select the Commission or Not check box for the wavelength to be commissioned.

NOTE

If you need to commission both expanded sites and expanded wavelengths, select all wavelengths.

If you need to commission multiple links, set the wavelengths to be commissioned for each link.

After you select the Commission or Not check box for a wavelength, the Commission or Not value inthe lower right pane of the WDM Link Management (Expansion) window is changed from no to yes.

Step 6 Click OK to close the Select Commissioning Wavelength dialog box.

Step 7 Select the Commission or Not check box for the WDM link to be commissioned.

NOTE

If you select multiple WDM links to commission, set the target optical power for each link.

Step 8 Click Save to save the parameter settings.

Step 9 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 10 Click Commission. The Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Expansion) window isdisplayed.



372

NOTEThere are six states of wavelength commissioning.

l Not provisioned: The wavelength is not provisioned.

l Provisioning: The wavelength is being provisioned.

l Provisioning completed: The wavelength is provisioned.

l Optimizing: The optical power of the provisioned wavelengths is being equalized and the BER is beingoptimized. If an MCA board is not installed, the optical power will not be equalized.

l Commissioning is successful: After a successful optimization, the BER is 10E-5 or lower.

l Commissioning failed: After a failed optimization, the BER is higher than 10E-5.

Step 11 Click Advanced Option.

Step 12 Optional: In the Advanced Option dialog box, set parameters based on site conditions.

NOTEOnly the NG WDM NE of V100R005 or a later version supports fast service provisioning.

Step 13 Click Start. In the Expansion Deployment Commissioning dialog box, click OK.

NOTE

If the laser on the link under commissioning is disabled, the OTU laser status dialog box will be displayedduring the commissioning. In this case, set Laser status to On. Otherwise, the single-channel optical powerof the link will not be optimized.

Step 14 In the Prompt dialog box that is displayed asking you whether to continue the commissioning,click OK.

Step 15 When the commissioning is complete, click OK.

Step 16 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Expansion) window, verify thecommissioning result is correct.



373

NOTEWhen you close the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Expansion) window, a message will bedisplayed indicating that the optical power cannot be restored if you close this window. Click OK if youconfirm that the optical power does not need to be restored.

----End

Result

If the commissioning result indicates exceptions, click Rollback to restore the optical powerand then perform the following steps to save the commissioning data.

1. Click Save to File to save commissioning information.

2. Enter a filename in File Name and click Save.

A filename must include date and time information (recommended format: Year-Month-Day-Hour-Minute). This avoids the issue of a file saved later overwriting a file with thesame name saved earlier.

3. Right-click in the All Messages area and choose Select All from the shortcut menu to copyand save the commissioning data to a text file for later queries.

4. Contact Huawei engineers.



374

Troubleshooting

If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 8.10.1 FAQs in theOptical Power Commissioning Window.

8.5.8 Viewing the Commissioning ResultWhen optical power commissioning is complete, you can check whether the commissioningresult meets the requirements by viewing the commissioning report.

PrerequisiteOptical power commissioning has been completed.

ContextNOTE

When optical power commissioning is complete, pay attention to the following parameters in thecommissioning result:

l BER before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end


Procedure

Step 1 Generate 8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU Board, and view the inputoptical power, out optical power, and BER before FEC of the OTU board. Check whether theseparameters meet the requirements.

NOTE

The BER before FEC at the receive end must be lower than the preset value. If the BER before FEC doesnot meet the requirement, check whether the optical power is appropriate by performing the follow-upsteps in this topic.

If the optical power is appropriate, check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM)configuration of the related links is consistent with that in the design file.

The optical power of the input port of the OTU board must be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity and5 dB lower than the overload point. In the report, the board data that does not meet the requirements of thecommissioning result is marked red.

The optical power of the output port of the OTU board must be within the specified range of the board.

Step 2 Generate 8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier Board, andview the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of the optical amplifier board. Checkwhether the optical power and gain of the input port of the optical amplifier board meet therequirements.

Step 3 If the average input optical power of a single wavelength of the optical amplifier board is lowerthan the standard input optical power of a single wavelength, check whether the insertion lossand fiber attenuation of the upstream board of the optical amplifier board are appropriate.

l The insertion loss of a board must be within the specification range of the board.

l For the optical amplifier board, check and analyze the contents marked red in the report.The contents marked red indicate exceptions.

----End



375

8.6 Optical Power Commissioning ReportThe U2000 supports various types of reports, helping you to commission the optical power ofWDM equipment.

8.6.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning ReportBefore generating an optical power commissioning report, you need to create WDM links andset subnet commissioning parameters.

Before you generate the optical power commissioning report, ensure that the following taskshave been completed:l The WDM links in the subnet have been created. For details, see 8.5.5 Creating a WDM

Link.l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see 8.5.4 Setting

Subnet Commissioning Parameters.

NOTE

You can generate the report only after logging in to NEs to query data. Therefore, log in to the NEs beforeyou generate the report.

8.6.2 Generating a Commissioning Report of an OTU BoardThis topic describes how to generate a commissioning report of an OTU board. By viewing thereport, you can learn whether the input optical power, output optical power, and BER beforeforward error correction (FEC) of the OTU board meet the commissioning requirements.

ContextBefore the expansion commissioning, you are advised to check the Current Value column todetermine whether the network is ready for the expansion commissioning. Rules for thedetermination:l Determine wavelength information according to the Frequency (THz) and Wave Length

(nm) columns.l Check information about all the wavelengths existing before the expansion.l Check Current Value of each existing wavelength (1E-7=10-7=0.0000001,

1E-9=10-9=0.000000001).l If Current Value is smaller than Board Requirement for a wavelength, the wavelength

is ready for expansion commissioning. If Current Value is "-" or larger than BoardRequirement for a wavelength, the wavelength is not ready for expansion commissioning.

For the expansion commissioning, all the existing wavelengths must be checked to ensure thatthey are ready for expansion commissioning. If any existing wavelength is not ready forexpansion commissioning, stop and contact Huawei engineers for troubleshooting.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Report from the mainmenu. The Commissioning Report window is displayed.



376

Step 2 In the Report Options area, select Commissioning Report of the OTU.

Step 3 In the Save Path area, set the path for storing the report.

Step 4 In the navigation tree, select one or more subnets for which you want to generate the report.

Step 5 Click . All optical NEs in the selected subnets are displayed in the SelectConditions area.

Step 6 In the Select Conditions area, select the node of optical NEs for which you want to generatethe report.

Step 7 Click Generate. A prompt dialog box is displayed, asking you to confirm the subnetcommissioning parameters.

Step 8 After confirming the parameters, click Yes to start generating the commissioning report. Aprogress bar is displayed.

Step 9 After the commissioning report is generated, click OK in the Operation Result dialog box.View the newly generated report in the lower pane of the Commissioning Report window.

NOTE

After generating the report in the Commissioning Report window, close the window and open it again.The newly-generated report is not displayed in the Report name area but is saved in the specified path.

Step 10 Click View to view the contents in the report.

NOTE

The parameter values marked red indicate exceptions.

----End



377

Parameters in the Report

Table 8-3 lists the parameters such as input optical power, output optical power, MCA opticalspectrum data, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR), and BER before FEC in the commissioningreport of the OTU board. In the report, the parameter values marked red indicate exceptions,those marked yellow indicate alarms, and - indicates that the value is blank or cannot be queried.

Table 8-3 Parameters in the commissioning report of an OTU board

Parameter Description

Number Indicates the ID of a parameter in the list.

Site Name Indicates the name of the site where the OTU boardresides.

Frequency (THz) Indicates the frequency of the wavelengths that traversethe OTU board.

Wave Length (nm) Indicates the wavelengths that traverse the OTU board.

NE ID Indicates the ID of the NE where the OTU board resides.

NE Name Indicates the name of the NE where the OTU boardresides.

OTU Board Indicates the slot ID, board name, and port ID of the OTUboard. For example, in "5-LSXR-1", 5 indicates the slotID, LSXR indicates the board name, and 1 indicates theport ID.

Output Optical Power (dBm) Indicates the output optical power of the OTU board.

Input Optical Power (dBm) Indicates the input optical power of the OTU board.The input optical power of the OTU board must be withinthe Input Optical Power Commission Range.Otherwise, the parameter value is marked red, indicatingan exception.

Input Optical Power CommissionRange(dBm)

Indicates the range of the allowable input optical powerof the OTU board.

Optical Power(dBm) Indicates the optical power obtained when the MCAboard scans the optical amplifier board.

OSNR(dB) Indicates the OSNR obtained when the MCA boardscans the optical amplifier board.

OSNR Evaluate Value(dB) Indicates the theoretical OSNR of a wavelength on theoptical amplifier board in the drop direction.

OSNR Design Value(dB) Indicates the OSNR value set in the WDM LinkManagement window according to the designed OSNRvalue in the project file.

OTU Board OSNR Tolerance(dB) Indicates the minimum allowable OSNR of the OTUboard.



378


OSNR Margin(dB) Indicates the obtained OSNR deviation from the OSNRtolerance of the OTU board when the MCA board scansthe optical amplifier board.NOTE

If no MCA board is configured, this parameter value isdisplayed as the deviation of the evaluated OSNR value fromthe OSNR tolerance of the OTU board.

Board Requirement Indicates the maximum allowable BER of the OTUboard.

Current Value Indicates the current BER of the live network.

FEC Indicates the FEC type of the OTU board.

TDC Scan Value Indicates the dispersion compensation value of a 40GOTU board.

8.6.3 Generating a Commissioning Report of the Optical AmplifierBoard

This topic describes how to generate a commissioning report for an optical amplifier board. Byviewing the report, you can know the input optical power, output optical power, and gain of theoptical amplifier board, and confirm whether the optical power and gain of the input port of theoptical amplifier board meet the requirements.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Report from the mainmenu. The Commissioning Report window is displayed.

Step 2 In the Report Options area, select Commissioning Report of the optical amplifier.

Step 3 In the Save Path area, set the path for storing the report.

Step 4 In the navigation tree, select one or more subnets for which you want to generate the report.

Step 5 Click . All links that traverse the selected subnets are displayed in the SelectConditions area.

Step 6 In the Select Conditions area, select the link for which you want to create the report.



379

Step 7 Click Generate. A prompt dialog box is displayed, asking you to confirm the subnetcommissioning parameters.

Step 8 After confirming the parameters, click Yes to start generating the commissioning report. Aprogress bar is displayed.

Step 9 After the commissioning report is generated, click OK in the Operation Result dialog box.View the newly generated report in the lower pane of the Commissioning Report window.

NOTE

After generating the report in the Commissioning Report window, close the window and open it again.The newly-generated report is not displayed in the Report name area but is saved in the specified path.

Step 10 Click View to view the contents in the report.

NOTE

The parameter values marked red indicate exceptions.

----End

Parameters in the ReportTable 8-4 lists the parameters such as basic information, total optical power, gain, lineattenuation, pre-EVOA, and OSNR of an optical amplifier board in the commissioning reportof the optical amplifier board. In the report, the parameter values marked red indicate exceptionsand - indicates that the value is blank or cannot be queried.



380

Table 8-4 Parameters in the commissioning report of an optical amplifier board


Link Indicates the name of a physical link.

Site Name Indicates the name of the optical NE where the opticalamplifier board resides.

NE ID Indicates the ID of the NE where the optical amplifierboard resides.

NE Name Indicates the name of the NE where the optical amplifierboard resides.

Board Indicates the slot ID and name of the optical amplifierboard.

Port Indicates the port type of the optical amplifier board, thatis, input port or output port.

Per-Channel Nominal Value(dBm)

Indicates the standard input and output optical power ofa single wavelength carried by the input and output portsof the optical amplifier board. Set this parameteraccording to the type of the optical amplifier board andthe number of full wavelengths of the system.

Number Of Wave Traversing OA Indicates the number of wavelengths that traverse theoptical amplifier board.

Current Commissioning Value(dBm)

Indicates the current input and output optical power ofthe optical amplifier board.

Value Before Commissioning(dBm)

Indicates the input and output optical power of theoptical amplifier board that is recorded beforecommissioning.

Reference Range (dBm) During the commissioning, the U2000 specifies theoptical power range of the optical amplifier boardaccording to the target commissioning value. Opticalpower beyond the range is considered abnormal.NOTE

For the input port, the U2000 calculates the targetcommissioning value and target gain value. For the output port,its target commissioning value is determined by the targetcommissioning value and target gain value of the input port.



381


Difference(dB) Indicates the difference between the current opticalpower and reference range of the optical amplifier board.l If the current optical power is within the reference

range, this parameter value is 0.l If the current optical power is smaller than the

minimum value in the reference range, this parametervalue is the difference between the current opticalpower and the minimum value in the reference range.

l If the current optical power is larger than themaximum value in the reference range, thisparameter value is the difference between the currentoptical power and the maximum value in thereference range.

Standard Gain(dB) Indicates the gain of the optical amplifier board.

Gain Range (dB) Indicates the gain range of the optical amplifier board. Ifthe gain range can be queried from the NE, the parametervalue is displayed as the queried gain range. If the gainrange cannot be queried from the NE, the parametervalue is displayed as the value queried from thespecifications database.NOTE

If the optical amplifier board is an OAU, the gain range of theOAU is displayed. If the optical amplifier board is of any othertype, this parameter value is blank.

Actual Line Attenuation (dB) Indicates the attenuation of the line between the opticalamplifier boards on two sites. Currently, this parametervalue is equal to the output optical power of one opticalamplifier board minus the input optical power of thefollowing optical amplifier board.

Nominal Attenuation (dB) Indicates the normal attenuation of the line. The normalattenuation is equal to the normal single-wavelengthoutput optical power of one optical amplifier boardminus the nominal single-wavelength input opticalpower of the following optical amplifier board.

Designed Attenuation (dB) Indicates the designed line attenuation, which isdisplayed as Designed Attenuation (dB) in the LinkAttributes dialog box. This parameter can be setmanually or automatically by importing a script. If youdo not set this parameter, it is displayed as the value ofNominal Attenuation (dB).

NE ID Indicates the ID of the NE where the EVOA boardresides.

NE Name Indicates the name of the NE where the EVOA boardresides.



382


Board Indicates the slot ID, board name, and port ID of theEVOA board. For example, in "8-VA1-1", 8 indicatesthe slot ID, VA1 indicates the board name, and 1indicates the port ID.

Actual Attenuation (dB) Indicates the current attenuation of the EVOA board.

Attenuation Range (dB) Indicates the attenuation range of the EVOA boardqueried from the NE.

Link Indicates the name of the logical link matching thephysical link.

Site Name Indicates the name of the site where the optical amplifierboard on the logical link resides.

NE ID Indicates the ID of the NE where the optical amplifierboard on the logical link resides.

NE Name Indicates the name of the NE where the optical amplifierboard on the logical link resides.

Board Indicates the slot ID and name of the optical amplifierboard on the logical link.

OSNR(dB)(IN) Indicates the theoretical OSNR of the input port on thecascaded optical amplifier board.

OSNR(dB)(OUT) Indicates the theoretical OSNR of the output port on thecascaded optical amplifier board.

8.7 Managing the Commissioning Index DataThe commissioning index data includes the index data of optical amplifier (OA) boards, theinsertion loss index data of components, and code patterns of optical modules. Users can view,add, and delete this data, but cannot modify it.

PrerequisiteYou have the required operation rights.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Index Data from the mainmenu.

Step 2 Click the Optical Amplifier Index Data tab and view the index data in the lower pane.

Step 3 In the Optical Amplifier Index Data window, click New. The New OA Index Data dialog boxis displayed.



383

Step 4 In the New OA Index Data dialog box, enter the index data of OA boards and click OK to addthe data.

Step 5 Click the Insertion Loss Index Data tab and view the insertion loss index data in the lowerpane.

Step 6 In the Insertion Loss Index Data window, click New. The New Insertion Loss Index Datadialog box is displayed.

Step 7 In the New Insertion Loss Index Data dialog box, set NE Type, Board Type, and InsertionLoss (dB) for a board.

NOTEAfter you set the NE type and board type, all boards that meet the filter criteria are displayed in the NewInsertion Loss Index Data dialog box. Click Select All to select all the boards.

Step 8 Click OK.

Step 9 Click the Optical Module Type tab. View the types of optical module in the lower pane.

Step 10 In the Optical Module Type window, click New. The New Optical Module Type dialog boxis displayed.

Step 11 In the New Optical Module Type dialog box, enter the index data for the new type of opticalmodule and click OK.

----End



384

8.8 Viewing Information About Subnets UnderCommissioning

The U2000 server allows a maximum of five users to commission different subnets at the sametime. However, it does not allow multiple users to commission the same subnet at the same time.If multiple users commission the same subnet at the same time, conflicting operations may occur.Conflicting operations can be prevented by properly dividing a network into different subnetsand ensuring that users commission different subnets at the same time.

Dividing a Network into SubnetsCommissioning is performed by subnet. A WDM network needs to be divided into differentsubnets.

To divide a network into different subnets, include complete wavelengths/links that need to becommissioned into the same subnet. Otherwise, the information about the wavelengths/links onone subnet may be incomplete, hence affecting the commissioning effects.

Viewing Information About Subnets Under CommissioningThe U2000 allows a user to view information about a subnet under commissioning. With thisfunction, a user is clear about which subnets are under commissioning and then selects othersubnets for commissioning.

On the toolbar, click the to display the WDM Optical Commissioning dialog box. Thesubnets under commissioning are displayed in this dialog box.

8.9 Synchronizing Data on the NMSWDM commissioning will be affected if it is not synchronized with NMS data. For example,the system may display a message during link generation, indicating that the OTU board doesnot have wavelength information. In this case, synchronize the NMS data to be consistent withthe WDM commissioning data.




385

ContextNOTEYou must synchronize the NMS data network-wide after the WDM commissioning component is installedor redeployed.

Procedure


Step 2 Click the Synchronize Data on the U2000 tab.

Step 3 Choose the subnet to be synchronized from the Root navigation tree and click Start. Aconfirmation dialog box is displayed indicating that the commissioning data will be deleted fromthe subnet and needs to be uploaded again after data synchronization to regenerate WDM links.

NOTEFor synchronizing optical NE data, if the selected subnet does not contain any optical NEs, a promptmessage will be displayed asking you to select an optical NE.

Step 4 Click Yes. A confirmation dialog box is displayed asking you whether to continue.

Step 5 Click Yes. Data synchronization starts.

Step 6 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed after the synchronization.

The refresh icon can turn to . In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree.When you synchronize network-wide NMS data, a prompt message is displayed on the otherclients indicating that the commissioning data has been cleared and needs to be uploaded againafter data synchronization to regenerate WDM links. Click OK.

----End



386

Follow-up ProcedureCommissioning data will be deleted after data synchronization. Therefore, if you have performeda network-wide data synchronization, perform the following steps in turn on the entire networkbefore commissioning. If you have not performed network-wide data synchronization, performthe following steps for only the subnets whose data has been synchronized.l 8.5.3 Uploading Commissioning Datal 8.5.4 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parametersl 8.5.5 Creating a WDM Link

8.10 FAQThis topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical powercommissioning.

8.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning WindowThis topic describes the FAQs and solutions during optical power commissioning.

The following prompt messages are displayed in the U2000 commissioning window:

1. The cause of the preceding prompt messages may be that the NE or board does not workproperly.l "Failed to query the adjustable range of the EVOA"

Event code: 0x4A042l "Failed to query the output optical power of the optical amplifier board."

Event code: 0x4A044l "Failed to restore the gain of the optical amplifier board."

Event code: 0x4A061l "Failed to restore the attenuation of the EVOA."

Event code: 0x4A062l "Failed to restore the attenuation of the VMUX."

Event code: 0x4A063l "Failed to query the input optical power of the optical amplifier board."

Event code: 0x4A043l "Failed to query the attenuation of the EVOA."

Event code: 0x4A064The solution is as follows:l Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board.

2. "Failed to obtain the type of the optical amplifier board."Event code: 0x4A007The probable causes for the preceding prompt message are as follows:l The board manufacturer information is incorrect.l The board does not work properly.l The U2000 does not support the optical amplifier board type.



387

The solution is as follows:l Correctly configure the board manufacturer information on the U2000.l Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board.l If the board manufacturer information is correct, send the board manufacturer

information to Huawei R&D engineers and request them to check whether the U2000supports the optical amplifier board type.

3. "The optical power of the IN interface of the OTU board will exceed the thresholdand the commissioning cannot proceed."Event code: 0x4A105If the preceding prompt message is displayed, the budget optical power of the IN interfaceon the OTU board will exceed the upper threshold. If the U2000 continues optimizingoptical power, the optical power exceeds the upper threshold and components are burnedout. The solution is as follows:l Check whether the attenuator before the OTU board at the receive end or transmit end

is configured properly. If the attenuator is not configured properly, replace it with afixed attenuator according to the network design diagram so that the attenuation meetsthe designed attenuation.

l Check whether the logical fiber connections for the U2000 are consistent with thephysical fiber connections on the network according to the fiber connection diagramand correct the inconsistent logical fiber connections.

4. "The IN port power is too low (-60dBm). Stop commissioning."Event code: 0x4A067The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that there is a problem with thefiber used by the link. For example, the fiber is cut, incorrectly connected, severely aged,or excessively attenuated. The solution is as follows:l Check the line attenuation or fiber connection, and replace the aged fiber.

5. "Exceeds the lower threshold. You have commissioned the attenuator to the minimumvalue, which still cannot reach the target optical power"Event code: 0x4A11EThe probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The actual lineattenuation is inconsistent with the designed attenuation, and the line is excessivelyattenuated. The solution is as follows:l Reconstruct the line according to the network design so that the line attenuation meets

the designed attenuation.6. "The optical power at the transmit end is lower than the nominal output optical power

of the optical amplifier board of the added wavelengths by 3 dBm. Check whether thefiber attenuation of the site that adds wavelengths is normal."Event code: 0x4B03EThe probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The fiber attenuationof the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths is abnormal. The solution is as follows:l Check whether the fiber attenuation of the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths

is normal. If the fiber attenuation is abnormal, replace the fiber.7. "The optical power at the transmit end is higher than the nominal output optical

power of the optical amplifier board of the added wavelengths by 3 dBm. Checkwhether the attenuation of the site that adds wavelengths is too lower."Event code: 0x4B03D



388

The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The fiber attenuationof the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths is set inappropriately. The solution isas follows:l Replace a fixed attenuator according to the network design diagram so that the

attenuation meets the designed attenuation.8. "Failed to obtain logical links because links may not exist or related subnets have been

changed."The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: User A does not closethe commissioning window after completing the commissioning. Therefore, link data savedby the commissioning task of user A is refreshed when another user recreates links for thelinks commissioned by user A. Then, when user A performs an operation, such as rollback,in the open commissioning window, this prompt message is displayed.The solution is as follows: Close the commissioning window and select links again forcommissioning.Similarly, if one user does not close the report generation window while another usersynchronizes or uploads data to change the basic data of links and NEs, an error messageor a blank report will be displayed.

8.10.2 FAQs and Solutions During the Generation of WDM LinksThis topic describes the FAQs and solutions during the generation of WDM links by using theU2000.

The following prompt messages are displayed in the U2000 window:

1. Fail to get the fiber between up wave OTU board port (...) and down wave OTU boardport, can not find out fiber.Event code: 0x4A031The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the logical fiber connectiondisplayed on the U2000 is incorrect.The solution is as follows:

(1) Check whether the logical fiber connections displayed on the U2000 are consistentwith the physical fiber connections of the board (...) according to the fiber connectiondiagram and correct the inconsistent logical fiber connections.

(2) Regenerate WDM links.2. Failed to query optical cross-connections for the wavelength of the OTU board port.

Event code: 0x4C010The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the optical cross-connectionis not configured or configured incorrectly, or that the fiber connection is incorrect.The solution is as follows:

(1) Configure the optical cross-connection correctly on the U2000.(2) Regenerate WDM links.

3. Failed to query groups of optical cross-connections.Event code: 0x4C012The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the optical cross-connectgroup is not configured or the board is faulty.The solution is as follows:



389

l Check the NE to remove board faults. Alternatively, configure the cross-connect groupof the board on the U2000.

l Regenerate WDM links.4. Failed to query the wavelength.

Event code: 0x4D104The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that the OTU board is faulty.The solution is as follows:l Check the NE to remove board faults.l Regenerate WDM links.

5. Failed to query the working port on the protection board.Event code: 0x4A02EThe probable cause for the preceding prompt message that the protection group is notconfigured.The solution is as follows:l Configure the protection group on the U2000.l Regenerate WDM links.

8.10.3 FAQs About Setting Subnet ParametersThis topic describes the rules for setting the maximum number of wavelengths that a systemsupports during the process of setting subnet parameters.

How to Set the Maximum Number of Wavelengths for a System with Multi-LevelSubnets

During the commissioning process, the U2000 calculates the power of the optical amplifier basedon the maximum number of wavelengths for the system. If the system contains multiple subnets,calculate the power based on the maximum number of wavelengths supported by the subnetwhere the optical amplifier board is located.

If the subnet contains multi-level subnets, set the maximum number of wavelengths for eachsubnet.

8.10.4 FAQs About Link CommissioningThis topic describes the FAQs and solutions about link commissioning.

How to Quickly Complete Deployment Commissioning in Case of Many Errors onthe Network

The entire commissioning process consists of network data recording, channel attenuationinitialization, main channel commissioning, and BER optimization. If an error occurs duringany process, the entire commissioning is stopped.

All the preceding processes need to be performed to commission the entire network. If an erroroccurs during any process, the commissioning will take a long time.

To speed up commissioning and fault identification, commission a few associated links eachtime. In this manner, if an error occurs on a link, the error is reported in a timely manner. After



390

the fault is rectified, only these links need to be commissioned instead of the entire network.When the commissioning is successful, commission other associated links.

Are There Any Restrictions on Link CommissioningWavelength expansion commissioning is applicable to a network that is configured with MCAboards and meets expansion requirements. The U2000 of the current versions does not supportwavelength expansion commissioning of a network that is not configured with MCA boards.



391

9 Configuring Services and System Features

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure various services and system features.

9.1 Configuring BoardsIn the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.

9.2 Configuring ServicesThis section describes how to configure various services.

9.3 Configuring System FeaturesThis section describes how to configure system features.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 9 Configuring Services and System Features


392

9.1 Configuring BoardsIn the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.

9.1.1 Checking Board ParametersYou can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before youconfigure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status ofboard parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements. When you need to adjustthe parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to check and modify the relevant boardparameters.1. Check and modify the parameters for an optical transponder or Ethernet unit. Table 9-1

lists the parameters for the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.

Table 9-1 List of parameters for an optical transponder

Parameter Name Navigation Path ApplicationScenario

Procedure

Laser Status a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.

b. ChooseConfiguration> WDMInterface fromthe FunctionTree.

c. Click ByBoard/Port(Channel) andchooseChannel fromthe drop-downlist.

d. Click the BasicAttributes tab.

You can turn on orshut down a laser bysetting the laserstatus.

See Open and Closethe Laser on theWDM Board.



393


Procedure

Automatic LaserShutdown

a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.




When no light isinput, a laser isautomatically shutdown and stopstransmitting opticalsignals. The laserlife can beprolonged bydecreasing theworking time of thelaser. In addition,this functionprevents hazardouslaser radiationexposure fromcausing permanenteye damage.

See SettingAutomatic LaserShutdown on theWDM Board.

Actual WavelengthN0./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)





Used to query theoperatingwavelength at theWDM-side opticalport of a board.

See ConfiguringBoard WDM PortAttributes.



394


Procedure

ConfigureWavelength N0./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)




d. Click theAdvancedAttributes tab.

Used to set thewavelength No,wavelength andfrequency of thecurrent optical porton the WDM side ofa board.

LPT Enabled a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.




You can add theoverhead byte thatsupports the LPTprotocol to theframe format of aWDM-side signal,to monitor therunning status of thenetwork accesspoint or the servicenetwork.

See 15.29 Enablingand DisablingLPT.



395


Procedure

NULL MappingStatus




d. Click theAdvancedAttributes tab.

You can set NULLMapping Status toEnabled for a paththat has no signal,and check or viewOTN overhead byusing aninstrument, tomonitor the statusof paths in anetwork.

See 15.25 Settingthe NULLMapping Status.

OFC Enabled a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.




The OFC functionis used to controlthe transmit opticalpower of a laserwhen a fiber is cut,and check whetherthe fiber recoversby sending a shortlaser pulse.

See Enable theOpen Fiber Control(OFC).

2. Check and modify the parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit. Table 9-2 lists the

parameters for the tributary unit and the line unit.



396

Table 9-2 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit


Procedure






Automatic LaserShutdown

When no light isinput, a laser isautomatically shutdown and stopstransmitting opticalsignals. The laserlife can beprolonged bydecreasing the ontime of the laser. Inaddition, thisfunction preventshazardous laserradiation exposurefrom causingpermanent eyedamage.

See SettingAutomatic LaserShutdown on theWDM Board.

LPT Enabled You can add theoverhead byte thatsupports the LPTprotocol to theframe format of aWDM-side signal,to monitor therunning status of thenetwork accesspoint or the servicenetwork.

See 15.29 Enablingand DisablingLPT.

NULL MappingStatus

You can set NULLMapping Status toEnabled for a paththat has no signal,and check or viewOTN overhead byusing aninstrument, tomonitor the statusof paths in anetwork.

See 15.25 Settingthe NULLMapping Status.



397


Procedure

OFC Enabled The OFC functionis used to controlthe transmit opticalpower of a laserwhen a fiber is cut,and check whetherthe fiber recoversby sending a shortlaser pulse.

See Enable theOpen Fiber Control(OFC).

3. Check and modify the parameters for an Ethernet unit. Table 9-3 lists the parameters for

the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.

Table 9-3 List of parameters for an Ethernet unit


Procedure

Port Enabled a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.

b. ChooseConfiguration> EthernetInterfaceManagement >EthernetInterface fromthe FunctionTree.

c. Select InternalPort.

When youconfigure a servicefor the port on anEthernet board,enable the internalport (that is,VCTRUNK port).

See 15.32.1ConfiguringInternal Ports.



398


Procedure

TAG a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.



Set the port type ofthe internal port onan Ethernet boardon an NE based onthe tag attribute ofpackets that aretransmitted by theuser-sideequipment.



399


Procedure

Network Attribute a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.



l If the port is ofthe UNI type,the portprocesses thetag attributesspecified in802.1Q and theport has the tag,access andhybridattributes.

l If the port is ofthe C-Awaretype, the portdoes not processthe tag attributesin 802.1Q. Theport determinesthat the datapacket carries aC-VLAN tagand processesonly the datapacket that hasthe C-VLANtag.

l If the port is ofthe S-Awaretype, the portdoes not processthe tag attributesspecified in802.1Q. Theport determinesthat the datapacket carries anS-VLAN tagand processesonly the datapacket that hasthe S-VLANtag.



400


Procedure

Port Enabled a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.


c. Select ExternalPort.

When youconfigure a servicefor the port on anEthernet board,enable the externalport (that is, PORTport).

See 15.32.2ConfiguringExternal Ports.

Working Mode a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.



Set the transmit endand receive end tohave the samesetting of workingmode.



401


Procedure

MAC/PHYLoopBack




MAC loopback andPHY loopback areused to locate afault, but they caninterrupt services.In addition, they aremutually exclusive.When you set MACLoopBack toInloop, PHYLoopBack isautomatically set toNon-Loopback.When you set PHYLoopBack toInloop, MACLoopBack isautomatically set toNon-Loopback.

AutonegotiationFlow Control Mode



c. Select ExternalPort. Click theFlow Controltab.

When the WorkingMode of the port isAuto-Negotiation,select theautonegotiationflow control mode.



402


Procedure

Non-AutonegotiationFlow Control Mode



c. Select ExternalPort. Click theFlow Controltab.

When the WorkingMode of the port isnot Auto-Negotiation, selectthe non-autonegotiationflow control mode.

TAG a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.


c. Select ExternalPort. Click theTAGAttributes tab.

Set the port type ofthe external port onan Ethernet boardon an NE based onthe tag attribute ofpackets that aretransmitted by theuser-sideequipment.



403


Procedure

Network Attribute a. In the NEExplorer, selectthecorrespondingboard.



The Port Attribute(Ethernet Port)parameter specifiesthe position of aport in the network.Different portattributes supportdifferent packets.

4. Check and modify the parameters for an optical amplifying unit. Table 9-4 lists the

parameters for the optical amplifying unit.

Table 9-4 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit


Procedure









404

5. Check and modify the parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit. Table 9-5 lists theparameters for the spectrum analyzer unit.

Table 9-5 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit


Procedure

WavelengthMonitor Status



c. Click ByBoard/Port(Channel) andchoose MonitorWavelengthfrom the drop-down list.

Enable wavelengthmonitoring.

See MonitoringWavelengths byUsing the SpectrumAnalyzer Board.

6. Check and modify the parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit. Table 9-6 lists

the parameters for the optical supervisory channel unit.



405

Table 9-6 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit


Procedure






7. Check and modify the parameters for SDH units. Table 9-7 lists the parameters for the

SDH units.

Table 9-7 List of parameters for SDH unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Laser Switch a. In the NE Explorer,select thecorresponding board.

b. Choose Configuration> SDH Interface fromthe Function Tree.

c. Click By Board/Port(Channel) and choosePort from the drop-down list.

You can open or close alaser by setting the laserswitch.



406

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario

Optical (Electrical)Interface Loopback

a. In the NE Explorer,select thecorresponding board.

b. Choose Configuration> SDH Interface fromthe Function Tree.

c. Click By Board/Port(Channel) and choosePort from the drop-down list.

Sets loopback according tothe path.

Automatic Laser Shutdown a. In the NE Explorer,select thecorresponding board.

b. Choose Configurationfrom the Function Tree.

When no light is input, alaser is automatically shutdown and stopstransmitting optical signals.The laser life can beprolonged by decreasingthe on time of the laser. Inaddition, this functionprevents hazardous laserradiation exposure fromcausing permanent eyedamage.

VC4 Path Overhead a. In the NE Explorer,select thecorresponding board.

b. Choose Configuration> OverheadManagement from theFunction Tree.

You can query and setoverhead bytes of the VC4path, including J1 and C2.

VC3 Path Overhead a. In the NE Explorer,select thecorresponding board.

b. Choose Configuration> OverheadManagement from theFunction Tree.

You can query and setoverhead bytes of the VC3path, including J1 and C2.

PRBS Test a. In the NE Explorer,select thecorresponding board.

b. Choose Configurationfrom the Function Tree.

You can set PRBS test ofthe ports on the board, andperform the bit error test ofthe transmission linkwithout attaching a meter tothe equipment during thedeployment.



407

NOTEIf you select an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, a static optical add/drop multiplexer board, adynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board, an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator board,you can choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can query or setparameters.

Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply.

----End

9.1.2 Adding PortsClient-side ports and line-side ports of some OTU boards support color light and colorless light.You need to add different ports on the U2000 according to the SFP optical module used on theequipment.


There are client-side ports or line-side ports that are not added on the U2000.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT or U2000

ContextBy default, each board is added with client side ports. To add ports, you need to delete the clientside ports that are added by default on the U2000.

Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, right-click the board and then choose Path View.2. Right-click a blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add

Port. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the Port, Type, and Level. Click OK.

9.1.3 Configuring Electrical Ports of a BoardIf a board supports electrical ports, you must configure the electrical ports on the U2000 to enablethe board to access electrical signals.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.l Electrical port modules must be configured on the board.



408


For details on the electrical signals that a board can access, see the Hardware Description.


U2000/Web LCT

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Panel, right-click the required board and choose Path View from the shortcut

menu.

2. Right-click the port to be configured and choose Modify Port. The Modify Port dialogbox is displayed.

NOTE

If you need to modify Type to Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then add the port.Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.

3. Set Type to Electrical Port and click OK .

9.2 Configuring ServicesThis section describes how to configure various services.


Before configuring services, see Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to ThisManual in the Configuration guide to understand various services.

Configuring WDM Servicesl See Configuring WDM Services (By Trail) to configure WDM services by using trails.

l See Configuring WDM Services (Station By Station) to configure services station bystation.

Configuring Ethernet Servicesl See Configuring Ethernet Services to configure Ethernet services.



409

Configuring the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA BoardSee the following sections to configure the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA board and the WDM Services(by Station Service Package):l Configuring the TN11TOM Boardl Configuring the TN52TOM Boardl Configuring the THA/TOA Boardl Configuring the LOA Boardl Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)

9.3 Configuring System FeaturesThis section describes how to configure system features.

Background InformationBefore configuring system features, you can see Mapping Relationship Between Products andFeatures in the Feature Description to understand the features supported by the product on thelive network.

Configuring Protection Schemesl See Configuring Optical Line Protection to configure optical line protection.l See Configuring Intra-Board 1+1 Protection to configure intra-board 1+1 protection.l See Configuring Client 1+1 Protection to configure client 1+1 protection.l See Configuring SW SNCP to configure SW SNCP protection.l See Configuring ODUk SNCP to configure ODUk SNCP protection.l See Configuring VLAN SNCP to configure VLAN SNCP protection.l See Configuring Tributary SNCP Protection to configure tributary SNCP protection.l See Configuring Board-Level Protection to configure board-level protection.l See Configuring MS SNCP to configure MS SNCP protection.l See Configuring DBPS to configure DBPS protection.l See Configuring an Ethernet DLAG to configure DLAG Protection (OTN).l See Configuring Protection for ODUk SPRing to configure ODUk SPRing protection.l See Configuring OWSP to configure OWSP protection.l See Configuring Linear MSP to configure linear MSP protection.l See Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to configure two-fiber

bidirectional MSP ring protection.l See Configuring the Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to configure four-fiber

bidirectional MSP ring protection.l See Configuring SNCP Protection to configure SNCP protection.l See Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring to configure transoceanic MSP ring protection.l See Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection to configure Ethernet ring protection.l See Configuring DLAG to configure DLAG protection (OCS).



410

Configuring Data Featuresl See Configuring LCAS to configure LCAS.l See Configuring Ethernet Link Aggregation Groups to configure LAGs.l See Configuring the Spanning Tree to configure STP or RSTP.l See Configuring MSTP to configure MSTP.

Configuring System Featuresl See Configuring the IPA to configure IPA.l See Configuring ALC to configure ALC.l See Configuring APE to configure APE.l See Configuring EAPE to configure EAPE.



411

10 Commissioning the Network

About This Chapter

Commission the optical power for an entire network after the optical power for the equipmentin the network is commissioned. This chapter describes how to commission the optical powerfor a network through a case study.

Network commissioning serves to:

l Connect all the NEs in the network in line with the engineering design plan.l Test the services on the entire network to verify the service configuration.l Test the required functions of the network, for example, orderwire and protection switching.l Test the quality of long-term communication of the network by monitoring alarms and

performance events.

10.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal AlarmsViewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exceptionon the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.

10.2 Testing Protection SwitchingThis section describes how to test the protection switch function.

10.3 Testing Data CharacteristicsThis section describes how to test the data characteristics.

10.4 Testing System FeaturesThe system features includes IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE.

10.5 Testing Physical-Layer ClocksThis section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer.

10.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items.

10.7 Testing Ethernet Service ChannelsWhen the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service channelsmust be tested.

10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN SystemYou can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 10 Commissioning the Network


412

10.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS SystemThis section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using theU2000.

10.10 Testing Orderwire FunctionsOrderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.



413

10.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and RemovingAbnormal Alarms

Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exceptionon the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.

PrerequisiteThe NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.


Tools, Meters, and MaterialsU2000 or Web LCT. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use the U2000.

Querying Network-Wide Alarms on the U2000

1. Click the current critical alarm indicator (red) in the upper right corner of theU2000 to browse the current network-wide critical alarms.

NOTEThe figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current critical alarms. When the

indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are critical alarms to beacknowledged.

NOTE

Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance, handle Critical andMajor alarms before handling other abnormal alarms.

Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According to networkconditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannot be reported. For example,in general no service is accessed on the WDM side during deployment commissioning. In this case, relevantalarms are reported inevitably. These alarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services areaccessed on the client side.

In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze every reported alarm.In general, focus on the following alarms:

l Optical power low or high alarm

l Temperature threshold-crossing alarm

l Abnormal communication alarm

l Bit error-related alarm

l Abnormal service alarm

To handle a reported alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.

2. Click the current major alarm indicator (orange) in the upper right corner of theU2000 to browse the current network-wide major alarms.

NOTEThe figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current major alarms. When the

indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are major alarms to beacknowledged.



414

3. Click the current minor alarm indicator (yellow) in the upper right corner of theU2000 to browse the current network-wide minor alarms.

NOTEThe figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current minor alarms. When the

indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are minor alarms to beacknowledged.

Querying the Current Alarms of an NE on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse Alarms from the

Function Tree.2. In the displayed window, click the Browse Current Alarms tab.3. Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. For details, see the description of the

methods for analyzing and handling alarms by using the U2000.

10.2 Testing Protection SwitchingThis section describes how to test the protection switch function.

OptiX OSN 8800 supports the following protection modes:

l Optical line protectionl Intra-board 1+1 protectionl Client 1+1 protectionl SW SNCP protectionl ODUk SNCP protectionl OWSP protectionl ODUk SPRing protectionl Tributary SNCP protection


l Optical line protectionl Intra-board 1+1 protectionl Client 1+1 protectionl SW SNCP protectionl ODUk SNCP protectionl VLAN SNCP protectionl OWSP protectionl ODUk SPRing protectionl Board-level protectionl Tributary SNCP protectionl Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protectionl Intra-subrack DBPS protectionl DLAG protection




415

l Optical line protection

l Intra-board 1+1 protection

l Client 1+1 protection

l SW SNCP protection

l ODUk SNCP protection

l VLAN SNCP protection

l OWSP protection

l ODUk SPRing protection

l Board-level protection

l Tributary SNCP protection

l Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protection

l Intra-subrack DBPS protection

l DLAG protection

For the working principle for each protection mode and the operating process, see the FeatureDescription.

The testing methods for different types of protection switching are similar. The only differencelies in the navigation path on the U2000.

10.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication ProtectionThis section describes how to test inter-subrack communication protection.

Prerequisite

Subracks must be cascaded in ring mode.

Communication cables between subracks must be connected in ring mode.

Precautionsl All network cables must be properly connected.

l The logical cascading mode must be consistent with the physical cascading mode. Whenthe subracks are cascaded in ring mode, the subracks must work properly and there shouldbe no alarm indicating that subracks form a ring or alarm indicating a fault at a cascadedport.


U2000

Set-up Diagram

Figure 10-1 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communication protection is innormal state. Figure 10-2 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communicationprotection is in protection state.



416

Figure 10-1 Normal State

Master Subrack 0

ETH1 ETH2

ETH1 ETH2

Slave Subrack 1

ETH1

ETH2

ETH2

ETH1Normal State

Slave Subrack 2

Slave Subrack 3

Figure 10-2 Protection State

Master Subrack 0

ETH1 ETH2

ETH1 ETH2

Slave Subrack 1

ETH1

ETH2

ETH2

ETH1Protection

State

Slave Subrack 2

Slave Subrack 3

Procedure1. Remove the network cable connecting the slave subrack 1 to master subrack 0 from the

ETH1 port on master subrack 0. See Figure 10-2.

2. On the U2000, check whether all slave subracks are unreachable to the NMS. Check forthe NE_COMMU_BREAK, NE_NOT_LOGIN, and GNE_CONNECT_FAIL alarms.Observe the color of NE icons of slave subracks 1, 2, and 3.

3. If no preceding alarm is reported and the color of NE icons of all slave subracks does notchange, inter-subrack communication is normal and protection switching is successful.Then you can reconnect the network cable to the ETH1 port.

4. After the network cable is reconnected, inter-subrack communication protectionautomatically switches communication from the protection channel to the working channel.See Figure 10-1.



417

10.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board andClock Board for OptiX OSN 8800

1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect board and clock board. This sectiondescribes how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect board and clock board,thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.

Prerequisite

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, slots 9 and 10 must house the high cross-connection, systemcontrol and clock processing board.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect board.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 9 and 43 (or slots 10 and 44) must house the cross-connectboard.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 42 and 44 must house the clock board.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 75 and 86 must house the clock board.

The NE commissioning data must be configured.


U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer.

Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. The queried ActiveBoard should be the same as the Working Board.

NOTE

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, Working Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processingboard in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board inslot 10. Active Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board that is actually working.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board isthe cross-connect board in slot 10.Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9 or 10, and ProtectionBoard is the cross-connect board in slot 43 or 44. Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actuallyworking.

For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the clock board in slot 42, and Protection Board is the clockboard in slot 44. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working.

For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the clock board in slot 75, and Protection Board is the clockboard in slot 86. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working.

Step 4 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then clickWorking/Protection Switching. In the Microsoft Internet Explorer dialog box that is displayed,click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.



418

NOTE

When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the clockboard perform switching at the same time.

Step 5 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as theProtection Board.

Step 6 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then click RestoreWorking/Protection. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the OperationResult dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

NOTE

When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the clockboard perform switching at the same time.

NOTE

The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards and clock boards is non-revertive. When ProtectionBoard becomes Active Board, restore the cross-connect boards and clock boards to the original working/protection state by removing the protection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on the U2000.

Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as WorkingBoard.

----End

10.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Boardfor OptiX OSN 6800

1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect boards. This section describes how totest the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect boards, thus ensuring that the protectionswitching is normal.

Prerequisite

Slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect boards.

The NE commissioning data must be configured.


U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map and the NE Panel tab is displayed.


Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query, In the Operation Resultdialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as theWorking Board.

NOTE

Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connect board in slot 10.Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working.



419

Step 4 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In theConfirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that isdisplayed, click Close.


Step 6 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In theConfirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that isdisplayed, click Close.

NOTE

The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards is non-revertive. When Protection Board becomesActive Board, restore the cross-connect boards to the original working/protection state by removing theprotection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on the U2000.

Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as theWorking Board.

----End

10.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards1+1 protection is configured to protect the SCC boards. This topic describes how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the SCC boards, thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.

Prerequisite

The equipment must be configured with two SCC boards. The NE commissioning data must beconfigured.


U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed.


Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. In the Operation Resultdialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as theWorking Board.

NOTE

l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 9, and Protection Board is theSCC board in slot 10. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working.



l For the OptiX OSN 6800, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 18, and Protection Board is the SCCboard in slot 17. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working.



420

Step 4 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In theConfirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that isdisplayed, click Close.


Step 6 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In theConfirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that isdisplayed, click Close.

NOTE

The 1+1 SCC board protection switching is non-revertive. When Protection Board is Current WorkingBoard, you need to remove the protection board, or click Restore Working/Protection on theU2000 to switchservices back to the working board.

Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as theWorking Board.

----End

10.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection SwitchingThis section uses a ring network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure for the optical line protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe optical line protection must be configured.

The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must becorrectly established.

The equipment must be running normally.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the optical line protection switching is shown in Figure 10-3.



421

Figure 10-3 Testing the optical line protection switching

OLPFIU

TI

RO

OLP FIU

RO

TI

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

RI1

TO1

RI2

TO2

Tx

RxSignal

analyzer OTU1

OTUn

OADM

OTU1

OTUn

OADM

Station A Station B

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedurel Connecting test instruments

1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theRX input optical port and to the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTUrespectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on theclient side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve theloopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-3.

l Querying the normal channel status of station A

The related parameters of the OLP are configured on the U2000. For the configurationprocedures, see Creating Optical Line Protection in the Feature Description.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology.The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer todisplay the NE Explorer dialog box.

3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protectionfrom the Function Tree.

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-handpane.

5. Check the channel status of the optical line protection. If the NE name is A, theWorking Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1) and theProtection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). TheWorking Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal.

l Testing the protection switching for the equipment1. The optical line protection switching test can be performed using the following two

methods:– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RI1 port of the OLP board at

Station A to perform the switching.



422

– Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. Right-click thedesired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel to perform theswitching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in the operationresult dialog box.

2. Query the channel states of the optical line protection after the switching at station A.– Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query.

A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.– In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–

12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.

– In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose BrowseCurrent Alarms. The OLP_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available.5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, the following

two modes can be used respectively:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.– Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection

Group, and choose Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection groupand then choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click theprotection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operationresult dialog box.

6. After the time set in WTR Time(mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt isdisplayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Statusof the protection group should be Idle.

----End

10.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection SwitchingThis section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure for the intra-board 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.

PrerequisiteThe intra-board 1+1 protection must be configured.

The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must beestablished correctly.


Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator



423

Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-4 Testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching

OLP

TO1

TO2

RI1

RI2

OLP

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

TI

RO

RO OTU

TI

Tx

RxOTU

Signalanalyzer

Tx

Rx

Station A Station B

OADM

OADM

OADM

OADM



1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports for the signal analyzer to theRX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTUrespectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between.


3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.l Querying the normal channel status of station A.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the NE from the function tree and choose Configuration > Port Protection.4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click

Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. The switching status ofintra-board protection and channel status should be Normal.

5. Check the channel status of the intra-board 1+1 protection. If the NE name is A, theWorking Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1) and theProtection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). TheWorking Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment1. The switching test of the intra-board protection can be performed using the following

two methods.– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber for the RI1 port of the OLP board at

Station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-4.



424

– Method 2: Forced switching. In the protection group window for station A, right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel toperform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in theoperation result dialog box.

CAUTIONIn method 1, you must disconnect the fiber in the direction that the signals are sent tothe signal analyzer. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or noprotection switching is performed.

2. Query the channel states of the intra-board 1+1 protection at station A.– Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query.

A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.– In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–

12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.

– In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1 (RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2 (RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel.

3. In the NE panel for the station A, right-click the OLP board, and choose BrowseCurrent Alarms. The INTRA_OTU_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available withzero bit error generated.

5. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the followingtwo methods:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.– Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection

Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group,and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the sameprotection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operationresult dialog box.

6. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. ClickClose. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.

----End

10.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection SwitchingThis section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure for the client 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.

PrerequisiteThe client 1+1 protection must be configured.



425




U2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator

Set-up Diagram

The diagram for testing the client 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-5 Testing the client 1+1 protection switching

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

OTU1

OTU2

OLP

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

TI

RO

RI1

TO1

RI2

TO2

OTU3

OTU4

OLP

Station A Station B

RO

TI

Signalanalyzer

OADM

OADM

OADM

OADM


Procedurel Connecting Test instruments

1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theTI and RO ports on the client side of the OLP board with a fixed optical attenuator inbetween.

2. At station B, connect the RO port to the TI port on the client side of the OLP boardwith a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side,as shown in Figure 10-5.

3. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.

l Querying the normal channel status of station A.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of the station A in the Main Topology.The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer todisplay the NE Explorer dialog box.

3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protectionfrom the Function Tree.



426

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane.

5. Check the channel status of the client 1+1 protection. Working Channel Status andProtection Channel Status are Normal.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment1. The switching test for the client 1+1 protection can be performed using the following

two methods.

– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the workingOTU1 board at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-5.

– Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to the protection group of stationA. Right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force to ProtectionChannel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. ClickClose in the operation result dialog box.

CAUTIONIn Method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the OTU1 board atstation A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no protectionswitching is performed.

2. Query the channel status of the client 1+1 protection at station A.

– Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query.A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Ifthe NE name is A.

– In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF and Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.

– In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose BrowseCurrent Alarms. The CLIENT_PORT_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no biterror is generated.

5. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the followingtwo methods:

– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

– Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the ProtectionGroup, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group,and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the sameprotection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operationresult dialog box.



427

6. After the time set in WTR Time (mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt isdisplayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Statusfor the protection group should be Idle.

----End

10.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section uses a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the testprocedure for the SW SNCP protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe SW SNCP protection must be configured.




Set-up Diagraml For OptiX OSN 8800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure

10-6.l For OptiX OSN 6800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure

10-7.l For OptiX OSN 3800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure

10-7.



428

Figure 10-6 Testing the SW SNCP

Singalanalyzer

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

FIU

FIU

OADM OADM

A

B

FIU

FIU

OADM

2

3 4

EastWest

East West

OADM

1 TOM

TOM

7 8

6

6

87




429

Figure 10-7 Testing the SW SNCP protection switching

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

FIU

FIU

OADM OADM

A

B

FIU

FIU

OADM

2

3 4

EastWest

OADM

1

Signalanalyzer

East West

: Fixed optical attenuator1, 2, 3, 4: OTU Board


1. As shown in Figure 10-6, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports ofthe signal analyzer to the RX6 input optical port and TX6 output optical port of theTOM with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX6 inputoptical port and the TX6 output optical port of the TOM with a fixed optical attenuatorin between to achieve the loopback on the client side.

2. As shown in Figure 10-7, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports ofthe signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the clientside of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connectthe RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTUwith the fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.




430

l Querying the normal channel status of the station A1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology.

The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.2. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog

box.3. Select the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM Service

Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.4. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. Status of SW

SNCP should be Normal State.5. Check the channel status of the SW SNCP. Channel Status of Working cross-

connection is Idle, and Channel Status of Protection cross-connection is Idle.l Testing the protection switching of the equipment

1. The SW SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following twomethods.– Method 1: Fiber removing.

– Remove the fiber of the RX8 optical port for the TOM at station A to performthe switching, as shown in Figure 10-6.

– Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the second working OTU at stationA to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-7.

– Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for station A,select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu,select Force to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayeddialog box.

CAUTIONIn method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the signal analyzerat station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice, or no protectionswitching is performed. By doing this, the detected switching time is more scientific

2. Query the channel status of the SW SNCP protection at station A.– Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query. A prompt is displayed indicatingthe operation is successful. Click Close.

– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isSF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle. Status of theprotection group is SF Switching.

– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isForced switch, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is alsoForced switch. Status of the protection group is Forced (from working toprotection) switching state.

3. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse CurrentAlarms. The SW_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.



431

NOTE

For details about the board that reports the SW_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and PerformanceEvents Reference.


5. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the followingtwo methods:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.– Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click

Function. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialogbox.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayedmenu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

6. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.

----End

10.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section uses a ring network formed by two stations in which the tributary board and theline board are jointly used as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SNCPprotection switching.

PrerequisiteThe ODUk SNCP protection must be configured.




Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-8.



432

Figure 10-8 Testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

FIU

FIU

OADM OADM

A

B

FIU

FIU

1

2 3

OADM OADM

4

5 6

EastWest

East West

Signalanalyzer

: Fixed optical attenuator1, 4: Tributary Unit 2, 3, 5, 6: Line Unit


1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theRX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the tributaryboard with a fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on theclient side of the tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achievethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-8.




433

l Querying the normal channel status of station A1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running

Status of the NE A is displayed.2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the

Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control tab.4. Click Query. Then, all ODUk SNCP protection groups are listed. Status of the ODUk

SNCP protection is Normal State.5. Query the channel status of the ODUk SNCP protection. Channel Status of the

working cross-connection is Idle, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment1. The ODUk SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following two

methods.– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber between the D1 optical port on the

OADM board and the IN optical port on working line board 3 at station A toperform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-8.


CAUTIONIn method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the working line board3 at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or noprotection switching is performed. By doing this, the detected switching time is morescientific.

2. Check the channel status for ODUk SNCP protection of station A– Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query.– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is

SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle. Status of theprotection group is SF Switching.


3. In the NE panel of the station A, right-click the board and choose Browse CurrentAlarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.

NOTE

For details about the board that reports the ODU_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and PerformanceEvents Reference.




434

5. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the followingtwo methods:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber– Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click

Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialogbox.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,select the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed menu,choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

6. After the WTR Time(mm:ss) elapses, click Query. Status of the protection groupshould be Normal State.

----End

10.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section uses a ring network formed by two stations which use the LEM24 board as anexample to describe the test procedure for the VLAN SNCP protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe VLAN SNCP protection must be configured.




Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-9.



435

Figure 10-9 Testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

FIU

FIU

OADM OADM

A

B

FIU

FIU

OADM

2

3 4

EastWest

East West

OADM

1

Signalanalyzer

: Fixed optical attenuator1, 2, 3, 4: LEM24 Board


1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theRX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with afixed optical attenuator in between.


3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.


1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus of the NE A is displayed.



436

2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired Ethernet board in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration >

Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.4. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select one service. Click Set/

Query Switching and select Query Switching Status, and all the current protectiongroups are displayed. Current Status of VLAN SNCP should be Normal State.

5. Query the channel status of the VLAN SNCP protection. Link Status of the workingservice is Normal, and Link Status of the protection service is also Normal.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment1. The switching test for the VLAN SNCP protection can be performed using the

following two methods.– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the IN optical port of the working

OTU 2 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-9.– Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. In the VLAN

SNCP Service Management, select working service, and click Set/QuerySwitching. Select Force to Protection in the displayed menu to perform theswitching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

2. Query the channel states of the VLAN SNCP protection at station A.– Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the

Function Tree. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select oneservice. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status, all thecurrent protection groups are displayed.

– In the fiber removing mode, Link Status of the working service is SF, LinkStatus of protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the protectiongroup is SF Switching.

– In the forced switching mode, Link Status of the working service is Normal, LinkStatus of the protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the protectiongroup is Forced (from Working to Protection) Switching State.

3. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the LEM24 board and choose BrowseCurrent Alarms. The VLAN_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported by the LEM24.

4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, and nobit error is generated.

5. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the followingtwo methods:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.– Forced switching mode: Select the working service, and click Set/Query

Switching. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialogbox.NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Manual toWorking. Then right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Set/QuerySwitching. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

6. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status. A prompt isdisplayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Current Status ofthe protection group should be Normal State.

----End



437

10.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section uses a ring network as an example to describe the test procedure for the tributarySNCP protection switching. The ring network consists of two stations in which the tributaryboard and the line board are jointly used

PrerequisiteThe tributary SNCP protection must be configured.



Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000, optical fiber, fiber adapter, signal analyzer, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the tributary SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-10 Testing the tributary SNCP protection switching

OM

FIU

FIU

OM

OD

ND2

TOM2

TOM1

TOM2

TOM1TOM1

TOM2

TOM1

TOM2

ND2

OD

Signal analyzer

Station A Station B

: Fixed Optical Attenuator


1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theRX and TX ports on the client side of the TOM boards with a fixed optical attenuatorin between.

2. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on theclient side of the TOM boards with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achievethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-10.



438




2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.

3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from theFunction Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.

4. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Status ofthe tributary SNCP protection is Normal State.

5. Query the channel status of the tributary SNCP protection. Channel Status of theworking cross-connection is Idle, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment

1. The tributary SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the followingtwo methods:

– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the TXn optical port on the workingline board TOM1 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure10-10.


2. Check the channel status for tributary SNCP protection of station A

– Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree,and click SNCP Service Control. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicatingthat the operation is successful. Click Close.

– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isSF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle. Status of theprotection group is SF Switching.


3. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse CurrentAlarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.

NOTE

For more information, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.


5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, use the followingtwo methods:

– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

– Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and clickFunction. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialogbox.



439

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayedmenu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

6. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.

----End

10.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection SwitchingThe board-level protection is classified into two modes: the general mode and the extendedmode. In the extended mode, the SCS board is required. This section uses the extended board-level protection with two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for theboard-level protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe board-level protection must be configured.




Set-up DiagramFigure 10-11 shows the connection for testing the board-level protection switching.

Figure 10-11 Testing the board-level protection switching

FIU

FIU

L4G

TBE2

TBE1

TBE2

TBE1TBE1

TBE2

TBE1

TBE2

L4G

SCS

Signal analyzer

OADM

OADM

Station A Station B

TI1

RO1

TX1

RX1





440

1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theRO1 input optical port and T11 output optical port on the client side of the SCS witha fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. At station B, connect the TX1 output optical port and the RX1 input optical port onthe client side of the TBE with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve theloopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-11.



1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus of the NE A is displayed.


3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from theFunction Tree.

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-handpane. The switching status for board-level protection should be Idle.

5. Check the board status for board-level protection. If the TBE1 is in slot IU7 and theTBE2 is in slot IU8, then Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board Status isUsable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE, Protection Board Status is Usable, andActive Board is Working Board.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment

1. The board-level protection switching test can be performed using the following twomethods.

– Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber for the RX1 port of theTBE1, as shown in Figure 10-11.

– Method 2: Forced switching. In the board-level protection window for station A,right-click the desired protection group on the U2000. Select Forced Switchingto Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

2. Check the board status of station A

– Choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. ClickQuery. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

– In the fiber removing mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working BoardStatus is Unusable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection BoardStatus is Usable, Switching Status is Auto Switching, and Active Board isProtection Board.

– In the forced switching mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working BoardStatus is Usable; Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection Board Status isUsable; Switching Status is Forced Switching to Protection; and ActiveBoard is Protection Board.


4. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can beused to restore the switching status to normal.

– Reconnect the fiber.



441

– Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and selectClear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.

5. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. The switching status should be restored to Idle.

----End

10.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCPProtection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and MS SNCP protection switching.In this section, the service between station A and station C on a ring that consists of three stationsis used as an example.

PrerequisiteAn MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A(or subrack m).

An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station B(or subrack n).

An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.

A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and the(TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 10-12.

NOTE

The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRASto another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over theline after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then, the IN port of the L4G at station A receivesthe service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the electricalcross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see theConfiguration Guide.



Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, fiber adapter

Background InformationFor the MS SNCP protection switching that is triggered by the fault on the OTN side, see 10.2.8Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.

Set-up DiagramFigure 10-12 and Figure 10-13 show the DBPS protection and MS SNCP protection in thenormal and switching states.

In Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13, the L4G boards numbered 1, 4 and 5 are the working OTUboards. The L4G boards numbered 2, 3 and 6 are the protection OTU boards.



442

Figure 10-12 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (normal)

TBE TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

Station B

Master1 2

Master Slave

RXTXP2 P3

RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX2TX2

SMBP1

TX1RX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 TX2

TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

L4G 3

IN OUT INOUT

TX1 RX1

TX1RX1

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

INOUT IN OUT

Service signals

Observed service signals

DSLAM

Station A

C

L4G 1

RX1 TX1

Slave

Station

L4G 2L4G 4

L4G 6L4G 5



443

Figure 10-13 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (switching)

TBE

L4G 2

DSLAM

TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

A B

C

1 2

RXTX

P2 P3RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX1 TX1

SMB P1


TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

IN OUT INOUT

TX1 RX1

TX1RX1

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

INOUT IN OUT

RX2TX2

Service signals


Station

Station Station

Slave

Slave Master

Master

L4G 1L4G 3 L4G 4

L4G 6L4G 5


1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of stations A and B. SeeFigure 10-12. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the sametime. Make P1 receive the service signals (data packets from P2 or P3) forwarded bythe DSLAM.



444

2. Create the electrical cross-connection from the IN port of the L4G to the TX1 port ofthe TBE1 at station A. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see theConfiguration Guide.

3. Use fibers to connect the output optical port of the DSLAM to the RX2 port of theL4G at station C so that a loopback is enabled. Then create the electrical cross-connection from the RX2 port of the L4G to the OUT port of the L4G. For theconfiguration of the electrical cross-connection, see the Configuration Guide.

l Querying the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 10-12.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus of NE A is displayed.


3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protectionfrom the Function Tree.

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Workingboard is TBE1, Protection Board Status is Master.

5. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.

6. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt isdisplayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, theuplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,the TBE1 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections tothe west and east L4G boards.

l Querying the normal channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 10-12.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus of NE B is displayed.

2. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.

3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protectionfrom the Function Tree.

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Workingboard is TBE2, and Protection Board Status is Slave.

5. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.

6. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt isdisplayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the pass-through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the cross-connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.

l Querying the protection switching channel status of station A

1. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of TBE1 board at station A to perform theswitching, as shown in Figure 10-13.



4. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and chooseConfiguration > DistributedBoard-Level Protectionfrom the Function Tree.



445

5. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Workingboard is TBE1, and Protection Board Status is Slave.

6. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.7. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is

displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the pass-through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the cross-connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.

l Querying the protection switching channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 10-13.1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running

Status of NE B is displayed.2. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection

from the Function Tree.4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Workingboard is TBE2, and Working Board Status is Master.

5. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.6. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is

displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, theuplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,the TBE2 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections tothe west and east L4G boards.

7. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received

at P1) / Packet sending speed.

----End

10.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection SwitchingThis section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and ERPS protection switching.

Prerequisite

The fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, NE D and NE E must be established.


A pass-through service must be configured on the ring network consisting of NEs A, B, C, andE.

DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. ERPS ring protection is configured betweenNEs A, B, C, D, and E.

You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.


U2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, fiber adapter



446

Set-up DiagramAs shown in Figure 10-14, the DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. The ERPS ringprotection is configured between NEs A, B, C, D, and E.

Figure 10-14 Application of protection (DBPS+ERPS)

OADM D

OADM E

OADM B

OADM A

OADM C

R1Master LEM24

R2Slave

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

DSLAM

: DBPS protection path: Working path

: ERPS protection path

SMB

P1

P2

P3

: Observed service path

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

A B

CD

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

ERPS block

A B

CD

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

A B

CD

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

LEM24

A B

CD

ERPS block



447

Procedurel Connecting test instruments.

1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NEs A and B. See Figure10-14. Configure the P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the sametime, and configure the P1 port as a mirrored port for monitoring. In addition, enablethe P1 port to receive the service signals (data packets from the P2 or P3 port)forwarded by the DSLAM.

l Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE A works normally.1. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running

Status window of NE A is displayed.2. Right-click NE A and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection


Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE A,Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Master.

l Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE B works normally.1. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running

Status window of NE B is displayed.2. Right-click NE B and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection


Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE B,Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave.

l Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.1. At NE A, disconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board and the R1 port

to trigger protection switching.2. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running

Status window of NE A is displayed.

3. Right-click NE A, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.4. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed

Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.5. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE A,Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave.

l Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE B after protection switching occurs.1. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running

Status window of NE B is displayed.2. Right-click NE B, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Distributed

Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE B,Working board is LEM24, and Working Board Status is Master.



448

5. At NE A, reconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board to the R1 port.l Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally.

1. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus window of NE A is displayed.

2. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet

Protection > ERPS Management.4. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of

State Machine is displayed as Idle.l Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.

1. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in thedirection to NE E to trigger protection switching.

2. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > EthernetProtection > ERPS Management.

3. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status ofState Machine is displayed as Protection.

4. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24.5. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is

VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.

NOTE

Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working path.Otherwise, services will be interrupted.

l Calculate the switching time by using the following formula: Switching time = (Packetssent by P2 or P3 - Packets received at P1) / Packet sending speed.

----End

10.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection SwitchingThis section describes the testing procedure for the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching.In this section, the service between station A and station C is used as an example.

PrerequisiteAn SW SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A.

An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.

A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and the(TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 10-15.

NOTE

The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRASto another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over theline after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then the IN port of the L4G at station A receivesthe service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the electricalcross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see theConfiguration Guide.




449



Background InformationIntra-subrack DBPS protection must work with SW SNCP protection.

Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching is shown in Figure10-15.

Figure 10-15 and Figure 10-16 show DBPS protection and SW SNCP protection in the normaland switching states.



450

Figure 10-15 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (normal)

L4G

TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

C

1 2

RXTXP2 P3

RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX1TX1

SMB P1


TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

IN OUT INOUT

INOUT IN OUT

DSLAM

A

TBE

L4GL4G

L4G

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

RX2 TX2Service signals


Station

Station

Master

Master

Slave

Slave



451

Figure 10-16 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (switching)

TBE

L4G

DSLAM

L4G

TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

C

1 2

RXTXP2 P3

RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX1TX1

SMBP1


TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

L4G

IN OUT INOUT

INOUT IN OUTA

L4G

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

RX2 TX2Service signals

Observed service signalsStation

Station

Master

MasterSlave

Slave


1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point for stations A. See Figure10-15. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send packets at the same time. Make P1receive the packets (from P2 or P3) forwarded by the DSLAM.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A, as shown in Figure 10-15.





452

3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protectionfrom the Function Tree.

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Workingboard is TBE1, and Protection Board is TBE2;Working board Status is Master,and Protection Board Status is Slave.

5. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

6. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. Then, the relatedcross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working and protection L4G boardsin the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only with the working TBE1in the DBPS protection.

l Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station A

1. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A to performthe switching, as shown in Figure 10-16.

2. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > DistributedBoard-Level Protection from the Function Tree.

3. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Workingboard is TBE1 and Protection Board is TBE2. Working board Status is Slave,and Protection Board Status is Master.

4. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree, clickWDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

5. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. Then, the related cross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working andprotection L4G boards in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections onlywith the working TBE2 in the DBPS protection.

6. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.

l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets receivedat P1) / Packet sending speed.

----End

10.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) SwitchingThis section describes the testing procedure for the DLAG protection switching that is triggeredby the line failure after the fiber is removed.

Prerequisite

A DLAG protection group must be configured at station A.




U2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, fiber adapter



453

Set-up DiagramFigure 10-17 and Figure 10-18 show DLAG protection in the normal and switching states.

Figure 10-17 DLAG protection (normal)

1 2

P2RXTX

RX1 TX1

SMB P1

TX1RX1

RXTX

TBE

L4G

DSLAM

TBE

RXTX TX RX

TX1RX1

AINOUT

Port1/1

Port2/1 Port2/2

Station

Master Slave

Figure 10-18 DLAG protection (switching)

1 2

P2RXTX

RX1 TX2

SMB P1

TX1RX1

RXTX

TBE

L4G

DSLAM

TBE

RXTX TX RX

TX1RX1

AINOUT

Port2/1 Port2/2

Port1/1

Station

MasterSlave



454

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments.

1. Connect the SmartBits (SMB). See Figure 10-17. Ensure that P2 sends data packetsand P1 receives the data packets.

l Query the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 10-17



3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link AggregationManagement from the Function Tree.

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. If the TBE1 is in slot IU11 and the TBE2 is in slot IU12, Main Board is 111–11TBE, and Slave Board is 112–11TBE.

l Query the protection switching channel status of station A.

1. Remove the fiber in the RX1/TX1 optical port on the TBE1 board at station A toperform the switching, as shown in Figure 10-18.

2. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > EthernetDistributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.

3. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. In this case, Main Board is 112–11TBE, and Slave Board is 111–11TBE.

4. Reconnect the fiber into the RX1/TX1 optical port of TBE1 board at station A.

l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 - Packets received atP1) / Packet sending speed.

----End

10.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection SwitchingThis section uses a ring network formed by four stations, two adjacent stations which bearservices, as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SPRing protection switching.The ODUk SPRing protection switching mainly involves the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN6800.

Prerequisite

The ODUk SPRing protection must be configured.




U2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator



455

Set-up Diagram

The diagram for testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching is shown in Figure 10-19.

Figure 10-19 Testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching

OADM

OADM

FIU

FIU

OADM

FIU OADMFIU

OADM

FIU

FIU

OADM

OADM FIU OADMFIU

A

B C

D

(East)

(West)

ODU1-2

ODU1-1

ODU1-1ODU1-2

ODU1-1ODU1-2

ODU1-1 ODU1-1

ODU1-1 ODU1-2

ODU1-1

ODU1-1 ODU1-2

ODU1-2 ODU1-2

ODU1-2RxTx

TxRx

Tributary

Line

Line

Signalanalyzer

(East)

(East)

(East)

(West)

(West)

(West)

Line

Line Line

Line

Line

Line Tributary

TributaryTributary



1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theRX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with afixed optical attenuator in between.






456


2. Right-click the desired NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NEExplorer window.

3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree.4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close. All ODUk SPRing protection groups are listed in the protection group list inthe right-hand pane. The switching status of ODUk SPRing protection should beIdle.

5. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection. Channel Status of the eastworking board is Normal, Channel Status of the east protection board isNormal.Channel Status of the west working board is Normal, and ChannelStatus of the west protection board is Normal.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment1. The ODUk SPRing protection switching test can be performed using the following

two methods.– Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber of the main optical

channel from the D1 port of the east OADM board to the IN port of the workingline board, as shown in Figure 10-19.

– Method 2: Forced switching. In the ODUk SPRing protection window for stationA, right-click the desired East Working Unit on the U2000, and choose ForcedSwitching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.

2. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection of station A.– Choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. Click Query.

A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit is SF,

Channel Status of East Protection Unit is Normal, and Switching Status isEast Switching.

– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit isNormal, Channel Status of East Protection Unit is also Normal, and SwitchingStatus is East Switching.

3. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse CurrentAlarms. The ODUKSP_PS alarm must be reported.

NOTE

For details about the board that reports the ODUKSP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and PerformanceEvents Reference.


5. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can beused to restore the switching status to normal.– Reconnect the fiber.– In the ODUk SPRing protection window for station A, right-click the desired

protection group in the East Protection Unit, and choose Clear. Click OK in thedialog displayed box.

6. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. The switching status should be restored to Idle.

----End



457

10.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection SwitchingThis section describes the testing procedure for OWSP protection. In this section, two adjacentstations with services on a ring that consists of four stations are used as an example forillustration.

PrerequisiteOWSP protection must be configured




Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching is shown in Figure10-20.



458

Figure 10-20 Testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching

OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1

2 x DCP

OTU1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2

OADM(West)

OADM(East)

FIU

FIU

OADM

FIU OADMFIU

OADM

FIU

FIU

OADM

OADM FIU OADMFIU

λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2

λ2/λ1

λ2λ1

λ1λ 2

λ2λ1

λ1λ2

λ2/λ1

λ2/λ1 λ2λ1

λ2λ1

A

B C

D

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2 λ2/λ1

λ2/λ1

2 x DCP

2 x DCP2 x DCPλ2/λ1

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2λ2/λ1

λ1/λ2 λ1λ 2

λ1λ 2

(East)

(East)

(East)

(West)

(West)

(West)

RxTxRxTx

TxRxTxRx

Signal analyzer

: Working signal : Protection signal



1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to theRX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU1 witha fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on theclient side of the OTU2 with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve theloopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 10-20.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.

l Querying the normal channel status of station A1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology.

The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.



459

2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared

Protection from the Function Tree.4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-handpane. The switching status of the OWSP protection should be Idle.

5. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection. East Working Channel is 4-DCP-1(RI11), Channel Status is Normal. East Protection Channel is 2-DCP-2(RI12), Channel Status is Normal. West Working Channel is 2-DCP-1(RI11),Channel Status is Normal. West Protection Channel is 4-DCP-2(RI12), ChannelStatus is Normal.

NOTE

"4" in 4-DCP-2(RI12) is the slot number.

l Testing the protection switching of the equipment1. The OWSP protection switching test can be performed using the following two

methods:– Remove the fiber of the main optical channel from the D1 port of the east OADM

to the RI11 port of the DCP, as shown in Figure 10-20.– Right-click the East Working Channel on the U2000, and choose Forced

Switching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.2. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection of station A, which should be

consistent with the actual situation.– Choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared Protection from the

Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operationis successful. Click Close.

– After the fiber of the main optical channel is removed, the status of East WorkingChannel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel Status is SF. Thestatus of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2(RI12). The value ofChannel Status is Normal, and the value of Switching Status is EastSwitching.

– After the Forced Switching-Ring is selected, the status of East WorkingChannel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel Status isNormal. The status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2(RI12). The value of Channel Status is Normal, and the value of SwitchingStatus is East Switching.

3. Query the alarms on the U2000. The OWSP_PS alarm must be reported by DCP.4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit

error is generated.5. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be

used to restore the switching status to normal.– Reconnect the fiber.– Right-click East Working Channel, and choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed

dialog box.6. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click

Close. The switching status should be restored to Idle.

----End



460

10.2.19 Testing Linear MS Protection SwitchingThe linear MSP is configured to the network to protect services that are carried by the linear MSworking paths. This section describes how to test 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching.

Prerequisitel You must be an NMS user with "NE and NMS operator" authority or higher.l The linear MSP must have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration

Example: Configuring the 1+1 Linear MSP Services and Configuration Example:Configuring the 1:N Linear MSP Services in the Feature Description.

l The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must becorrectly established.


U2000, SDH analyzer

Set-up Diagram

Figure 10-21 shows the diagram for testing the 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching.

Figure 10-21 Testing the 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching

VC4:VC4-11

19

VC4:VC4-1

NE1:NE2:

1

19

Traffic flow of theworking path

STM-16 lineboard

STM-64 lineboard

1 x STM-1SDH analyzer

Opticalattenuator

Traffic flow of theprotection path

20-SLO16 1-SLQ64Line board

19-SLQ64Line boardLine board

20-SLO16 1-SLQ64Line board

19-SLQ64Line boardLine board

1 x STM-1

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to an NE2 service port as in the previous connection diagram.Loopback the service port of NE1 at the ODF side. The meter reads that services are normal.

Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.

Step 3 Select the optical interface board in slot 1, and choose Configuration > SDH Interface fromthe Function Tree. Check the By Function radio button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.



461

Step 4 Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A dialogbox is displayed. Click OK.

Step 5 Observe the SDH analyzer. No alarms related to services arise. It indicates that services arenormal after switching.

Step 6 Query the NE alarms. The ESC board should report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDIalarms.l If the switching scheme is set to Dual-Ended Switching, both NE1 and NE2 report these

two alarms.l If the switching scheme is set to Single-Ended Switching, only NE2 reports these two

alarms.

NOTE

Dual-Ended Switching and Single-Ended Switching are only available for 1+1 linear MSP. For 1:1 linearMSP, no optional switching scheme is available and the protections switching scheme is Dual-EndSwitching.

Step 7 Follow the previous steps 2 through 4 to switch on the laser.

Step 8 Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer.l Revertive Mode: Revertive.

– Query NE alarms. The MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms ends.l Revertive Mode: Non-Revertive.

– The meter reads that services are normal and the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDIalarms persists.

– Log in to the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDHProtection Subnet.

– Select the linear MS protection subnet. Select Start/Stop Protocol > Stop the ProtocolNetworkwide. Then choose Start/Stop Protocol > Start the Protocol Networkwide.

– Click Query. Observe the state of the working channel. The state must be Idle (NearEnd).

NOTE

Revertive and Non-Revertive are available only for 1+1 linear MSP. For 1:1 linear MSP, no optionalrestore modes is available and the restore mode is Revertive.

Step 9 Remove the loopback set up in step 1.

----End

10.2.20 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring ProtectionSwitching

If the network is configured as a bidirectional MSP ring, services carried by the MSs workingpaths are protected. This section describes how to test the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protectionswitching.

Prerequisitel The authority of "NE and NMS operator" or higher is required.l



462

The two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection or four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection musthave been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuringthe Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring in the Feature Description.


Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, SDH analyzer

Set-up DiagramWhen the switching is complete, the service is restored after the restoration time. The restorationtime consists of the transmission time for the service to pass through the optical fiber and throughthe equipment.

Figure 10-22 shows the diagram for testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protectionswitching. If the MSP is formed through the SLQ64 board and the STM-1 service running fromNE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction.

Figure 10-22 Testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection switching

20-SLO16

20-SLO16

VC4:VC4-1

NE1

1×STM-1

NE2

NE3

线路板

19

1

1 19

Service pass-through

VC4:VC4-1

NE1:

NE2:

NE4

19 1

NE3:

Traffic flow

19-SLQ641-SLQ64

1-SLQ6419-SLQ64

19-SLQ64

1-SLQ64

MSP ring

SDH analyzer

STM-16 line board

STM-64 line board

Optical attenuator

Line boardLine board

Line board

Line board

Line board

Line board




463

NOTESelect the set-up diagram and test method based on the actual networking conditions.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the previous set-up diagram. At theODF side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal.

Step 2 Run the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH ProtectionSubnet from the Main Menu to check the active/standby status of the resources before theswitching.

Step 3 Run the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.

Step 4 Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from theFunction Tree. Click the By Function radio button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.


Step 6 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarms related to services are generated, it indicates that servicesare normal after switching.

Step 7 Query the NE alarms. If NE1 and NE2 report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms,it indicates that MSP switching occurs between NE1 and NE2.

Step 8 Open the laser on the board in slot 1.

Step 9 Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services isgenerated, it indicates that services are normal after switching.

Step 10 Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 andNE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete.

Step 11 Remove the loopback set up in step 1.

Step 12 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining spans one by one.

----End

10.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring ProtectionSwitching

If the network is configured as a bidirectional MSP ring, services carried by the MSs workingpaths are protected. This section describes how to test the four-fiber bidirectional MSP protectionswitching.

Prerequisitel The authority of "NE and NM operator" or higher is required.l The two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection or four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection must

have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuringthe Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring of the Feature Description.



464



Set-up DiagramWhen the switching is complete, the service is restored after the restoration time. The restorationtime consists of the transmission time for the service to pass through the optical fiber and throughthe equipment.

Figure 10-23 shows the diagram for testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP protectionswitching. If the MSP is formed through the SLQ64 board and the STM-1 service running fromNE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction.

Figure 10-23 Testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection switching

19-SLQ64

1-SLQ64

18-SLQ64

2-SLQ64

18-SLQ642-SLQ64

NE1

NE2

NE3

线路板

VC4:VC4-1NE1:

NE2:

NE4MSP ring

NE3:

STM-16 line board

STM-64 line board

VC4:VC4-1

VC4:VC4-1

19-SLQ641-SLQ64

20-SLO16

20-SLO16

18-SLQ64 2-SLQ64

19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64


Traffic flow of the forward working path

Traffic flow of the backward protection path

Traffic flow of the backward working

pathTraffic flow of the

forward protection path

Optical attenuator

Line board

Line board Line board



Line board

Line board

Line board

SDH analyzer

Line boardLine board Line board


NOTESelect the test connection diagram and test method according to the actual networking conditions.



465

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the set-up diagram. At the ODF side,loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal.


Step 3 Test the span switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

NOTEThe working ring and protection ring in the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring are defined according to theactual service configured. In this example, the optical port of the board in slot 1 on NE1 works as the serviceoptical port. Therefore, the outer ring in the test connection diagram is the working ring and the inner ringis the protection ring.

1. Run the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.

2. Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface fromthe Function Tree. Click the By Function radio button and select Laser Switch from thedrop-down list.

3. Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. Adialog box is displayed. Click OK.

4. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarms related to services is generated, it indicates thatservices are restored after switching.

5. Query the NE alarms. If the NE1 and NE2 reports the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDIalarms, it indicates that MSP switching occurs between NE1 and NE2.

6. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet.7. Select the subnet to be viewed. Check the switching state of the four-fiber MSP ring. If one

direction of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Span(local end), it indicates that section switchingoccurs.

8. Open the laser on the board in slot 1.

9. Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services isgenerated, it indicates that services are restored after switching.

10. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete.

Step 4 Test the ring switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

1. Follow step 3 to step 5 in the "Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring ProtectionSwitching" to shut down the laser of the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1.

2. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates thatservices are restored after switching.

3. Query the NE alarms. The NE1 and NE2 should report the MS_APS_INDI_EX andAPS_INDI alarms.

4. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > SDH Maintain Protection Subnet from theMain Menu.

5. Select the four-fiber MSP ring protection subnet and query the switching state. If onedirection of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Ring(local end), it indicates that MSP ringswitching occurs.

6. Open the laser on the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1.



466

7. Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX andAPS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switchingbetween NE1 and NE2 is complete.

8. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms reported from NE1and NE2 ends, it indicates that the MSP switching for NE1 and NE2 concludes.

9. Remove the loopback set up in step 1.

Step 5 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining spans one by one.

----End

10.2.22 Testing SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section uses a network consisting of two OADM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure for the SNCP protection switching.

PrerequisiteSNCP must be created.



Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, SDH analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, fixed optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-24.

Figure 10-24 Testing the SNCP protection switching



467

Procedurel Assume that the board in slot 12 is a working board, and the board in slot 14 is a protection

board. According to Figure 6-22, connect the SDH analyzer to a service port on NE C andconfigure a loopback on NE A on the DDF side. The SDH analyzer should display that theservices are normal.

l Querying the channel status of NE C.

Configure relevant parameters for the SDH board. For more information, see CreatingSNCP in the Feature Description.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The NErunning status window is displayed.

2. Right-click the target NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorerwindow.

3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > SNCP ServiceControl.

4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the window.

5. Check the channel status of the SNCP protection. For Working Service, the value ofCurrent Status is Normal. For Protection Service, the value of Current Status isalso Normal.

l Testing the protection switching on the equipment.

1. For NE A, in the NE Explorer, select the SDH board in slot 12. ChooseConfiguration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Functionoption button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.

2. Select the port whose the laser is to be shut down, and set Laser Switch to Off. ClickApply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK.

3. Query the channel status of the SNCP protection group for NE C after a protectionswitching is performed.

NOTE

The SNCP protection switching occurs only on the NE that fails to receive services. In this example,although the laser of NE A is shut down in Step 2, the SNCP protection switching occurs on NE Cthat fails to receive the service from the working channel. That is why you need to perform thepreceding step.

– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control. ClickQuery. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

– For Working Service, the value of Current Status is SF. For ProtectionService, the value of Current Status is Normal. The value of Switching Statusis SF Switching.

4. Test the services by using an SDH analyzer. The test result indicates that services arenormal after a switching is performed.

5. See Step 1 and Step 2 for information on how to turn on the laser. Then wait for tenminutes.



468

– If the value of Revertive Mode for the SNCP protection is set to Revertive,observe the data on the SDH analyzer. In this case, the SDH analyzer indicates thata transient service interruption has occurred, and the service has later recovered.

– If the value of Revertive Mode for the SNCP protection group is set to Non-Revertive, do as follows:– Log in to the U2000, right-click the NE icon, and choose NE Explorer.– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control. In the

working service list, select all the services, and choose Function > ForcedSwitching to Working. A dialog box is displayed. Click OK, and clickClose in the displayed dialog box.

– Choose Function > Clear. Click Close in the displayed dialog box.– Choose Function > Query Switching Status. A dialog box is displayed. Click

Close. The value of Current Status should be Normal.6. Release the loopback on NE A.

----End

10.2.23 Testing SNCTP Protection SwitchingThis section uses a network consisting of two OADM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure for the SNCTP protection switching.

PrerequisiteSNCTP must be created.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be established.



Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, SDH analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, fixed optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram for testing the SNCTP protection switching is shown in Figure 10-25.



469

Figure 10-25 Testing the SNCTP protection switching

Procedurel Assume that the board in slot 12 is a working board, and the board in slot 14 is a protection

board. According to Figure 6-23, connect the SDH analyzer to a service port on NE C andconfigure a loopback on NE A on the DDF side. The SDH analyzer should display that theservices are normal.

l Querying the channel status of NE C.

Configure relevant parameters for the SDH board. For more information, see CreatingSNCTP in the Feature Description.

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The RunningStatus of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click the target NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorerwindow.

3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > SNCTP.

4. Click Query Protection Group. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operationis successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group liston the right of the window.

5. Check the channel status of the SNCTP protection. The value of Current Statusshould be Normal.



470

l Test protection switching on the equipment.1. In the NE Explorer of NE A, select the SDH board in slot 12, and then choose

Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Functionoption button and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.

2. Select the port whose laser is to be shut down, and set Laser Switch to Off. ClickApply. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.

3. Query the channel status of the SNCTP protection group for NE C after a protectionswitching is performed.

NOTE

The SNCTP protection switching occurs only on the NE that fails to receive services. In this example,although the laser of NE A is shut down in Step 2, the SNCTP protection switching occurs on NEC that fails to receive the service from the working channel. That is why you need to perform thepreceding step.

– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCTP. Click Query ProtectionGroup. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

– Query the channel status of the SNCTP protection group. The value of CurrentStatus should be Normal, and the Switching Status should be SF.

4. Test the services by using an SDH analyzer. The test result indicates that services arenormal after a protection switching is performed,

5. See Step 1 and Step 2 for information on how to turn on the laser. Then wait tenminutes.– If the value of Revertive Mode of the SNCTP protection is set to Revertive,

observe the data on the SDH analyzer. In this case, the SDH analyzer indicates thata transient service interruption has occurred, and the service has later recovered.

– If the value of Revertive Mode of the SNCTP protection group is set to Non-Revertive, do as follows:– Log in to the U2000. Right-click the NE icon, and choose NE Explorer.– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCTP. Then in Slot Mapping

Settings, right-click the protection channel on which a switching occurred.Then select Forced Switching to Working. A dialog box is displayed forconfirmation. Click OK, and click Close in the displayed dialog box.

– Right-click the channel, and then choose Clear. Click Close in the displayeddialog box.

– Right-click the channel, and then choose Query. A dialog box is displayed forconfirmation. Click Close. The value of Current Status should be Normal.

6. Release the loopback on NE A.

----End

10.2.24 Testing Transoceanic MSP Ring Protection SwitchingA network is configured with the transoceanic MSP ring protection, which protects the servicesin the working path. This section describes how to test the transoceanic MSP ring protectionswitching.

Prerequisitel The authority of "NE and NMS operator" or higher is required



471

l The transoceanic MSP ring protection must have been created and configured on theU2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring the Transoceanic MSP Ring in theFeature Description.

l The MSP protocols used on the entire ring must be all transoceanic protocols. If anotherprotocol is used on the ring, the protection switching cannot function normally.



Set-up DiagramCurrently, the transoceanic MSP does not support lower order services.

When the transoceanic MSP is in the protection state, the extra services in the protection channelthat is not preempted by the working services can be restored one minute after the protectionswitching.

Figure 10-26 shows the diagram for testing the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching. Ifthe STM-1 service running from NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction.



472

Figure 10-26 Testing the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching

20-SLO16

20-SLO16

VC4:VC4-1

NE1

1×STM-1

NE2

NE3

线路板

19

1

1 19

VC4:VC4-1

NE1:

NE2:

NE4

19 1

STM-16 line board

NE3:

19-SLQ641-SLQ64

1-SLQ6419-SLQ64

19-SLQ64

1-SLQ64

Transoceanic MSP ring

Traffic flow SDH analyzer


Line board

Optical attenuator

Line board


Line board

Line board

Line board


STM-64 line board

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the previous set-up diagram. At theODF side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal.


Step 3 Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.

Step 4 Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from theFunction Tree. Click the By Function option button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.




473

Step 6 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that servicesare normal after switching.

Step 7 Query the NE alarms. If the NE1 and NE3 report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms,it indicates that the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching occurs between NE1 and NE3.

Step 8 Wait one minute. Then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the FunctionTree.

Step 9 Click Query to query the services on the NE. Check whether the extra services on the protectionchannel that is not preempted by the working services are restored.

Step 10 Follow steps 2 through 4 to switch on the laser.

Step 11 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that servicesare normal after switching.

Step 12 Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 andNE3, it indicates that the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching for NE1 and NE3 iscomplete.

Step 13 Release the loopback performed in step 1.

Step 14 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining sections one by one.

----End

10.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection SwitchingThis section describes the testing procedure for the ERPS protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D must be established.


ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, and D.

You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.


Set-up DiagramAs shown in Figure 10-27, the ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, andD.



474

Figure 10-27 Application of ERPS protection

LEM24VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1BA

DC

LEM24 VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

LEM24

VC

TRU

NK

1

VC

TRU

NK

2

East portWest Port

LEM24

VC

TRU

NK

2

VC

TRU

NK

1

: ERPS working signal flow

: ERPS protection signal flow

SMB

East port

West Port

West Port

East port

East port West Port

Procedurel Connecting test instruments.

1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NE A, see Figure10-27. In addition, configure a client-side loopback at NE D.

l Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally.1. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running

Status window of NE A is displayed.2. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.3. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet

Protection > ERPS Management.4. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of

State Machine is displayed as Idle.l Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.

1. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in thedirection to NE D to trigger protection switching.

2. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > EthernetProtection > ERPS Management.

3. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status ofState Machine is displayed as Protection.

4. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24.5. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is

VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.



475

NOTE

Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working path.Otherwise, services will be interrupted.

----End

10.2.26 Testing the DLAG(OCS)By simulating the fault on the active board and checking the service switching status and alarmson the ring network, you can verify whether the DLAG is successfully configured.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The DLAG must be configured.



U2000

Set-up Diagram

The N1EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the DLAG. Figure10-28 shows the set-up diagram.

Figure 10-28 Testing the DLAG

U2000 NE1

NE4

NE2

NE3DLAG

N1EGSH

Working port: Port 1-4

Standby port:

Working board:

N1EGSHStandby board:

Port 1-4

N1EGSH

Working port: Port 1-4

Standby port:

Working board:

N1EGSHStandby board:

Port 1-4



476

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer of NE1, select NE1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed LinkAggregation Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to check the active board, main port, standby board, main port, working board, andworking port.

NOTE

Normally, the active board is the working board and the main port is the working port.

Step 3 Remove the active N1EGSH board on the NE1.

Step 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to query the current service. The current service is not interrupted. Theworking board is changed to the standby board, and the working port is changed to the standbyport, which indicates that the DLAG is configured successfully.

----End

10.3 Testing Data CharacteristicsThis section describes how to test the data characteristics.

10.3.1 Testing the LCASBy dynamically adding and deleting members, masking failed members, and restoring failedmembers, you can determine whether the LCAS is successfully configured.

PrerequisiteThe LCAS must be configured.

Background InformationDuring adjustment of the services with the LCAS function enabled, the corresponding alarm isreported on the U2000. This alarm can be used to verify whether the operation is successful.

l During adjustment of the services, the LCAS protocol checks whether the configuredmembers are the same as the actual negotiated members. When the actual bound membersat the source or sink end are less than the configured members, the opposite end reports analarm indicating the partial loss of bandwidth, such as LCAS_PLCR or LCAS_PLCT.

l When all members are deleted, the local end reports the LCAS_TLCR and LCAS_TLCTalarms. Normally, when the LCAS negotiation is unavailable, the performance events aredeleted forcibly due to the timeout.

l If the LCAS state at one end is switched from Enabled to Disabled, the LCAS_FOPR alarmindicating the failure of the LCAS protocol (the LCAS protocol fails in the receivedirection) is reported at the other end.


Procedure

Step 1 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically deleting members at one end:



477

1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE, and choose NEExplorer from the shortcut menu.

2. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed.

4. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is displayed.

5. Click Configuration.

6. In the Bound Path Configuration dialog box, select Display in Combination.

7. Select any bound path to be deleted from Selected Bound Paths and click .

8. Right-click the Ethernet board on the NE at the opposite end, and choose Browse CurrentAlarms from the shortcut menu.

9. In the Browse Current Alarms dialog box, the LCAS-related minor alarms LCAS_PLCRand LCAS_PLCT reported by the system are displayed.

NOTEIf all members of the bound paths are deleted, the major alarm LCAS_TLCR is reported at the local end,which indicates the complete loss of bandwidth in the receive direction.

Step 2 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically adding members at one end:

1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and choose NEExplorer from the shortcut menu.

2. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select Internal Port. The internal port configuration window is displayed.

4. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is displayed.

5. Click Configuration, and add bound paths as required.

6. Click OK.

7. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. Then the new members are added to the local end.

8. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCASfunction. Right-click this board, and select Browse Current Alarms from the shortcutmenu.


NOTEBecause new members are dynamically added to only one end, the total traffic does not change. In theBound Path tab, query the actual used paths and check whether they are the same as those before the newmembers are added. The Ethernet board at the local end reports the LCAS_PLCR alarm, but no packetsare lost. If the equivalent number of new members is added to the other end, after the WTR time for theLCAS, the previous LCAS_PLCR alarm clears.

Step 3 Verifying the LCAS by masking the failed members:

1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and select NEExplorer from the shortcut menu.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > SDH Service configuration. The list ofmembers configured with SDH services is displayed in the cross-connection window pane.

3. Select one or more members to be masked.



478

4. Click the Deactivate button in the right pane. The Confirm dialog box is displayed to querywhether to deactivate all the selected services.

5. Click OK. Masking the selected members is complete.

6. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCASfunction.

7. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >Ethernet Interface.

8. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed.

9. In the Internal Port page, select the Bound Path tab.

10. Click the Query button.

11. Query the The Used Channel column. The paths that correspond to the deactivatedmembers are masked and not displayed.

12. In the board list, select the board configured with the LCAS function. Right-click this board,and choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu.


14. Query the current alarms of the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS function on theopposite NE, and the same alarms are displayed.

NOTEThe LCAS_PLCT and LCAS_PLCR alarms indicate that the actual number of paths in the transmit(receive) VCTRUNK with the LCAS enabled is smaller than the configured number of paths. After thecross-connections are deactivated, paths that correspond to the originally used paths become invisible. Thisindicates that the failed members are successfully masked.

Step 4 Verifying the LCAS by restoring the failed members:

1. Based on Step 3, select the previously deactivated members. Click the Deactivate buttonin the lower area of the window. The failed cross-connections are restored.

2. The Confirm dialog box displays to query whether to activate the selected services. ClickOK to restore the failed members.

3. Perform substeps Step 3.7 to Step 3.10 in step 3. Then, in the The Used Channel column,the paths that correspond to the masked members are displayed.

NOTEAfter the WTR time (300s by default) of the LCAS, the previously reported LCAS_PLCR andLCAS_PLCT alarms clear. This indicates that the failed members are successfully restored.

CAUTIONDuring the process of dynamically deleting members or masking failed members, packet lossoccurs. The packet loss time equals the number of lost packets divided by the packet transmittingrate. The WTR time can be lengthy and is 300s by default.

If the preceding verification operations are successfully complete and the query results are thesame as those mentioned, it indicates that the LCAS function is successfully configured.

----End



479

10.3.2 Testing the LAGBy simulating the fault at the main port and checking the service switching status and alarms onthe ring network, you can verify whether the LAG is successfully configured.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The LAG must be configured.



Set-up DiagramThe EGSH board is used as an example to show the process of verifying the LAG. Figure10-29 shows the set-up diagram.

Figure 10-29 Testing the LAG

U2000 NE1

NE4

NE2

NE3LAG

N1EGSH

Working port:Port1

standby port: Port2

Data board:

N1EGSH

Working port:Port1

standby port: Port2

Data board:

Procedure

Step 1 The process for verifying the LAG in non-load-sharing mode is as follows.1. In NE Explorer for NE1, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.2. Click Query. Ensure that the state of the main port Port 1 is working, and the state of the

standby port Port 2 is non-working.3. Choose Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree, and select External Port in the right

pane.4. In the Basic Attributes tab, change the state of Port 1 from Enabled to Disabled.



480

5. Right-click the EGSH board in the board list and choose Browse Alarms from the shortcutmenu. Query whether the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported among the current alarms.

6. Repeat steps Step 1.1 to Step 1.2, and query the states of the ports. The state of Port 1 isnon-working, and the state of Port 2 is working.

NOTE

The preceding operations indicate that the system successfully switches the service transmittedthrough the main port to the standby port within 4s when the main port is unavailable.

Step 2 The process for verifying the LAG in load-sharing mode is as follows.

NOTE

In load-sharing mode, more than one standby port is available. Generally, traffic exists in the main andstandby links. When the main port is unavailable, traffic that originally exists in the main link is loaded bythe standby links. That is, all the standby links share the load of the main link.

1. In the NE Explorer for NE1, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > EthernetInterface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.

2. Click Query. Ensure that the state of the main port is working, and the states for the standbyports are working.

3. Choose Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree, and select External Port in the rightpane.

4. In the Basic Attributes tab, change the state of the main port from Enabled to Disabled.

5. Right-click the EGSH board in the board list and choose Browse Alarms from the shortcutmenu. Query whether the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported among the current alarms.

6. Repeat steps Step 2.1 to Step 2.2, and query the states of the ports. The state of the mainport is non-working, and the states of the standby ports are working.

----End

10.3.3 Testing the LPTBy simulating the link fault at the access point and querying the alarms reported on the NE, youcan verify whether the LPT is configured successfully.

Prerequisitel The Ethernet service must be configured on the specified port.

l The LPT function must be enabled for the transmission equipment at the local and oppositeends.



U2000

Procedure

Step 1 Select the corresponding Ethernet board. Select Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > LPT Management from the Function Tree.



481

Step 2 Click Query in the lower right corner, and ensure that the LPT state of the specified port isenabled.

Step 3 Select Ethernet Interface from Ethernet Interface Management at left hand pane, and selectExternal Port in the right pane.

Step 4 Click the Basic Attributes tab, and select Disabled from the Enabled/Disabled drop-down list.This causes the corresponding laser on the local board to shut down so that the access linkbecomes unavailable.

Step 5 In the Main Topology, right-click the opposite NE and choose Browse Current Alarms fromthe shortcut menu to query the alarms on the opposite NE. In the query results, the ETH_LOSand LPT_RFI alarms are displayed.

Step 6 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to open the laser that was previously shut down, and query the alarms onthe opposite NE.

Step 7 The ETH_LOS and LPT_RFI alarms on the opposite NE are cleared, indicating that the LPT issuccessfully configured.

----End

10.3.4 Testing the STP/RSTPBy checking the packet transmission when the STP/RSTP function is enabled and disabled, youcan verify whether the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.


The Ethernet LAN services must be configured.

The STP/RSTP must be configured.


Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, SMB meters

Set-up DiagramThe EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the STP/RSTP. Figure10-30 shows the set-up diagram.



482

Figure 10-30 Testing the STP/RSTP

U2000 NE1

NE4

NE2

NE3STP/RSTP

Data board:N1EGSH

SMB ASMB B

Data board:N1EGSH

Data board:N1EGSH

Data board:N1EGSH

ProcedureStep 1 In the NE Explorer of NE1-NE4, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Layer-2

Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Protocol Enabled tab, and select the corresponding EGSH board in the board list.Click Fast Config in the lower right corner.

Step 3 In the Fast Config window, double-click the Protocol Enabled drop-down list, selectDisabled, and click OK. This causes the STP/RSTP protocol that was previously enabled to bedisabled.

Step 4 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3.

Step 5 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets tothe ring network.

Step 6 Then SMB B receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives the packetstransmitted by itself.

NOTE

On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets arecycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.

Step 7 Repeat steps 1 through 3. In the Fast Config window, enable the STP/RSTP protocol on theEGSH boards of NE1-NE4.

Step 8 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network.

Step 9 Then, SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive thepackets transmitted by itself.

NOTE

The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoidedafter the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled, and the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.

----End



483

10.3.5 Testing the MSTPBy checking the packet transmission when the MSTP function is enabled and disabled, you canverify whether the MSTP is successfully configured.


The MSTP must be configured.


Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, SMB meters

Set-up DiagramThe N1EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the MSTP, andFigure 10-31 shows the setup diagram.

Figure 10-31 Testing the MSTP

U2000 NE1

NE4

NE2

NE3MSTP

SMB ASMB B

Data board:N1EGSH

Data board:N1EGSH

Data board:N1EGSH

Data board:N1EGSH

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 SwitchingManagement > Multiple Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Protocol Parameters tab, and set Enable Protocol to Disabled. Click Apply. Thiscauses the MSTP protocol that is previously enabled to be disabled.

Step 3 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3.



484

Step 4 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets tothe ring network.

Step 5 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives thepackets transmitted by itself.

NOTE

On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets arecycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.

Step 6 Repeat steps 1 through 3. Set Enable Protocol to Enabled for the MSTP protocol on theN1EGSH boards of NE-NE4.

Step 7 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network.

Step 8 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive thepackets transmitted by itself.

NOTE

The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoidedafter the MSTP protocol is enabled, and the MSTP is successfully configured.

----End

10.4 Testing System FeaturesThe system features includes IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE.

10.4.1 Testing IPAThis section describes how to test the IPA function.

Prerequisite

Optical power commissioning must be complete.

The IPA must be configured.


U2000


The IPA can be rebooted by using three methods: automatic reboot, manual reboot, testingreboot.

This section uses the manual reboot as an example to describe the procedure for testing IPA.

IPA Verification Diagram

For the IPA verification diagram, see Figure 10-32, Figure 10-33, Figure 10-34, or Figure10-35.



485

Figure 10-32 IPA verification diagram

fiber break

Station A Station B

Opticalamplifier unit 1




Figure 10-33 IPA verification diagram (Backward Raman)

fiber break

1 2

34

Site A Site B

RamanAmplifier

RamanAmplifier

Figure 10-34 IPA verification diagram (Forward Raman+Backward Raman)

fiber break1 2

34

Site A Site B

RamanAmplifier

RamanAmplifier

RamanAmplifier

RamanAmplifier



486

Figure 10-35 IPA verification diagram (Forward Raman+ROP+Backward Raman)

fiber break1 2

34

Site A Site B

RamanAmplifier

RamanAmplifier

RamanAmplifier

RamanAmplifier

ROP

ROP

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running Statusof the ONE is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click the NE A icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.

Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree.

Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, set the Enable/Disable to Enabled.

Step 5 Select NE B. See steps 2 through 4 to configure the IPA function.

Step 6 Remove the fiber of the output port on the OAU1.

NOTE

For the IPA function, if the Raman amplifier is configured and the optical supervisory channel (OSC) boardfunctions as the auxiliary detection board, you need to remove the fiber from the OUT port of the amplifierboard 1 and the fiber from the output port of the OSC board.

Step 7 Log in NE A and NE B separately. In the function tree in the left-hand pane, chooseConfiguration > IPA Management.

Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA protection pair. Right-click the Status column, andselect Query State. The state Power off should display.

Step 9 Insert the fiber of the output port of the OAU1.

Step 10 In IPA Protection, click Manual Reboot. A message indicating a successful operation isdisplayed in the prompt dialog box.

NOTE

Click Manual Reboot. The disabled laser will then be enabled again after the specified off period for thelaser.

Step 11 Click Close.

Step 12 In IPA Protection, select Status. Right-click Query State. Restart should display. After theOff Period, the board state is displayed as Power on.

----End



487

Related InformationFor details on the function, principle, and how to configure IPA protection groups, see theFeature Description.

10.4.2 Testing ALCThis section describes how to test the ALC function.

PrerequisiteThe ALC Link must be created. The parameters must be configured according to Parameters inthe Feature Description.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000, optical power meter

ALC Verification DiagramFor the ALC verification diagram, see Figure 10-36.

Figure 10-36 ALC verification diagram

V40

OAU1

DCM-D

OAU OAU

OAU3FromM40

ToD40

DCM-D

A

OAU2

DCM-D

DCM-D

OAU

M40

D40

OTM(NE51)

OLA(NE53)

OTM(NE54)

B StationCStationStation

To

: VOA

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to U2000. Choose Configuration > WDM ALC Management from the Main Topology.

Step 2 In WDM ALC Management, click the NG Complete Link tab. In the list of links, select a linkwhose Status is Idle.

Step 3 On the U2000, query and record the line attenuation and node gain for stations A, B, and C, alsorecord the input and output optical power of OAU1, OAU2, and OAU3.



488

Step 4 On the ALC link, adjust the variable optical attenuator (VOA) between stations A and B toincrease the attenuation between the two stations by 3 dB.

Step 5 Query the input and output optical power of OAU2 on the U2000. Compare the test value withthe input optical power value obtained before adjusting the VOA to ensure that the test value is3 dB lower. At the same time, check whether the difference between the line attenuation valueand node gain value of station B is not less than 3 dB. Also check whether an event that indicatesan ALC optical power anomaly exists.

NOTEFor the method for querying optical power, see the Supporting Tasks.

Step 6 When the icon of the downstream NE turns red, in the Link ID list, select the link. Click StartAutomatic Link Adjustment to start the ALC adjustment. Also check whether the ALCadjustment event occurs.

NOTE

For the NG link that is configured with the VOA board, when sign occurs at the downstream node, thesystem gives precedence to adjusting the VOA board after the ALC adjustment function is enabled. In addition,check whether the ALC adjustment event and the VOA adjustment event exist.

Step 7 After the ALC adjustment is complete, the icon for the NE restores to the original color, and anevent that indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.

NOTE

For the NG link that is configured with the VOA board, after the ALC adjustment is complete, the signdisappears, and an event that indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.

Step 8 Query the input and output optical power for OAU2/OAU3 on the U2000. Compare the testvalue with the value obtained before the adjustment is performed to check whether they are thesame. At the same time, check whether the line attenuation value and the node gain value forstation B are consistent. If that is the case, it indicates that the ALC has been enabled.

NOTE

If OAU1 is the adjustment board, use the following formula:Adjustment range of OAU1 with DCM = Adjustment range of OAU1 without DCM - DCM insertion loss- 1 dBm

----End

Related InformationFor details on the function, principle, and how to configure ALC links, see the FeatureDescription.

10.4.3 Testing APEThe APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end, which ensures the signal-to-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to determine if the APE function is started.

PrerequisiteThe system optical power commissioning must be completed.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000, VOA



489


When the flatness of the optical power for each channel at the receive end differs significantlyfrom that configured in deployment commissioning, the APE function can automatically adjustthe optical power of each channel at the transmit end. This ensures that the flatness of the opticalpower at the receive end is closer to that configured in deployment commissioning.

For a detailed description of the APE, see the Feature Description.

For details on how to configure the APE function and how to start the APE function on theU2000, see the Feature Description.

Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexer boards and optical multiplexer boardssupporting APE function are the M40V, WSM9, WSMD2, WSMD4, WSMD9, ROAM andRMU9 boards. This section describes the APE commissioning on the M40V board.

This section uses the M40V as an example to describe the APE function.

The following descriptions provide the details for commissioning the APE from west to east.The commissioning of the APE from east to west is the same as the commissioning from westto east.

The APE function testing configuration is shown in Figure 10-37.

Figure 10-37 APE function test configuration diagram

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

M40V

D40

D40

M40V

OTU

SC1 SC1

MCAOTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

West East

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to U2000. Configure the APE function on the U2000. Set the standard optical powercurve and the wavelength to be checked. Save the configuration data.

NOTE

It is recommended to set the power unbalance threshold to 1.5 dB.

Step 2 Add more VOAs at any OTU WDM-side output port, and adjust the attenuation to a minimum.

Step 3 Step up the attenuation of the VOA until the MCA detects that the optical power of the channelhas decreased by 3 dB.



490

NOTE

l The attenuation of a channel is configurable. The attenuation of a channel must be higher than thepower unbalance threshold. It is recommended that the attenuation for a channel be set to 3 dB.

l The ALC function may be enabled after the optical power decreases.

l After the MCA scan cycle, the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the poweris unbalanced.

Step 4 On the U2000, select the desired NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > OpticalPower Equilibrium from the Function Tree.

Step 5 Click Query to review information about the created APE pair.

Step 6 Select the desired APE pair from the APE Pair list.

Step 7 On the U2000, click Start Regulation on the bottom to start the APE function. After the APEadjusts the power, the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the receiveend and the standard optical power curve flatness should be less than the power unbalancethreshold.

NOTE

The APE completes adjusting the optical power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE eventreport dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.

Step 8 Remove the VOAs at the OTU WDM-side output port added in step 2.

Step 9 On the U2000, start the APE function by referring to step 7. After the APE adjusts the power,the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the receive end and the standardoptical power curve flatness should be less than the power unbalance threshold.

NOTE

The APE completes adjusting the power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event reportdialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.

----End

10.4.4 Testing EAPEEAPE adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality for each channelmeets the preset requirement and that the services are available. This section describes how totest the EAPE function.

PrerequisiteThe system optical power commissioning must be complete.

There is no optical power alarm or bit error alarm in the system.

The EAPE functions for the related trails are enabled.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000, Optical power meter, VOA

Background InformationWhen the receive performance for each channel at the receive end of the system changes greatly,the EAPE function adjusts the optical power of each channel at the transmit end. In this way, it



491

is ensured that the performance of the optical signals at the receive end is close to that in thedeployment commissioning.

l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing(ROADM) boards and optical multiplexer board supporting the EAPE function are theROAM, M40V, D40V, WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD2, WSMD9, VA1, and VA4boards.

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, the ROADM boards and optical multiplexer board supportingthe EAPE function are the ROAM, M40V, D40V, WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD2,WSMD9, VA1, and VA4 boards.

l For the OptiX OSN 3800, the ROADM boards supporting the EAPE function are the VA1,and VA4 boards.

l This section uses the west-to-east signal flow and the LOG board for OptiX OSN 8800 asan example to describe the EAPE commissioning, and the EAPE function is configured onthe OCh trail where the LOG is located.

l This section uses the west-to-east signal flow and the LOG board and the VA4 for OptiXOSN 6800/3800/6800A/3800A as an example to describe the EAPE commissioning, andthe EAPE function is configured on the OCh trail where the LOG is located.

EAPE Verification Diagraml For the EAPE verification diagram, see Figure 10-38 for OptiX OSN 8800.l For the EAPE verification diagram, see Figure 10-39 for OptiX OSN 6800/3800.

Figure 10-38 EAPE verification diagram

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

MR8V

MR8V

MR8V

MR8V

LOG

SC1 SC1

LSX

LOG

LSX

LOG

LSX

LOG

LSX

West East

: variable optical attenuator



492

Figure 10-39 EAPE verification diagram

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OAMR4

MR4

MR4

MR4

LOG

SC1 SC1

LSX

LOG

LSX

LOG

LSX

LOG

LSX

VA4

VA4

West East

: variable optical attenuator

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to U2000.

Step 2 Add a variable optical attenuator at the output port on the WDM side of the west LOG board.Adjust the attenuation to the minimum value.

Step 3 Choose Fault > Browse Events from the Main Menu.

Step 4 In the Filter dialog box, set filter criteria and click OK. The event viewing window is displayed.

NOTE

l All abnormal events are selected in the default event browsing template.

l If you set the startup template for viewing abnormal events, the Filter dialog box is not displayed. Alarmsthat meet the startup template condition are displayed instead.

Step 5 Increase the attenuation of the VOA section by section and click Refresh. Stop the adjustmentuntil EAPE abnormal event notification is displayed in the abnormal event list. When this occurs,the EAPE adjustment needs to be started. The adjustment steps are as follows.

Step 6 On the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail.

Step 7 In the Basic Setting tab of the Set Trail Browse Filter Conditions dialog box, select a properfiltering condition and click Filter All.

Step 8 Select the OCh trail where the LOG board is located. Click Maintenance, and select EAPEManagement from the drop-down list.

Step 9 If Current Status is Can Be Adjusted, click Start Adjustment to start EAPE adjustment. TheOperation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the verification is successful. Afterthe adjustment completes, Current Status is Adjustment Not Required.

Step 10 Repeat step 3 through step 5. Check the event list. EAPE adjustment result eventnotification should be reported indicating the adjustment is successful.

----End



493

Related InformationFor details on the description and how to configure the EAPE function, see the FeatureDescription.

The recommended commissioning environment is that there are more than three amplifierboards, and long fibers are used in the line.

10.5 Testing Physical-Layer ClocksThis section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer.

PrerequisiteFiber connections or clock cable connections between NEs must be established.

Clocks at the physical must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsANT-20 (or MP1550A, MP1552B, MP1570A, HP37718A) clock analyzer, frequencymeterU2000

Testing Items1. External clock source input/output and tracing test. This test checks whether an external

clock source is properly traced.2. Clock source selection and tracing test. This test checks whether clock synchronization is

achieved between two NEs that are interconnected by using fibers.3. Line clock source and external clock source selection test. This test checks whether a line

clock source and an external clock source function normally.4. Synchronous clock active/standby switching test. This test checks whether the active/

standby clock protection functions properly.5. Master/slave subrack cascading test. This test checks whether a synchronous clock can

function properly when multiple subracks are cascaded.

Test DiagramFigure 10-40 shows the diagram for the external clock source input/output and tracing test.

Figure 10-40 Test Diagram

A

BITS

Clock analyzer



494

NOTE

NE A is configured with clock and cross-connect boards.

Figure 10-41 shows the diagram for the clock source selection and tracing test.


A B

BITS

Clock analyzer

NOTE

NEs A and B are configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.

Figure 10-42 shows the diagram for the line clock source and external clock source selectiontest.


A

BITS

Fiber 1

NOTE

NE A is configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.

Testing Item 1: External Clock Source Input/Output and Tracing Test

Step 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source.



495

Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to NE A and the external clock source to check whether NE A properlytraces the external clock source.

----End

Testing Item 2: Clock Source Selection and Tracing TestStep 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source.

Step 2 Configure NE B to trace a line clock. See Configuring Clock Attributes.

Step 3 Attach a clock analyzer to NE B to check whether NE B properly traces the line clock source.

----End

Testing Item 3: Line Clock Source and External Clock Source Selection TestStep 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source.

Step 2 Configure the clock source priority table of NE A and assign the highest priority to the externalclock source. See Configuring Clock Attributes.

Step 3 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources.

Step 4 Disconnect the external clock source from NE A. Check whether NE A can switch the clock tothe line clock source by querying clock synchronization status.

Step 5 Reconnect the external clock source to NE A to enable NE A to trace the line clock source. Thencheck whether NE A can switch the clock to the external clock source by querying clocksynchronization status.

----End

Testing Item 4: Synchronous Clock Active/Standby Switching TestStep 1 Perform an active/standby switching when an NE properly traces a clock source. Then check

whether the NE properly traces a clock source by observing the data on the clock analyzer.

----End

Testing Item 5: Master/Slave Subrack Cascading TestStep 1 Connect the master subrack or the last slave subrack to an external clock source. Set the external

clock as the clock source for tracing.

Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to the master subrack or the last slave subrack to check whether the NEproperly traces the external clock source.

Step 3 Disconnect the master subrack or the last slave subrack from the external clock source. Configurethe NE to trace a line clock for any subrack on the NE. Then check whether the NE traces thisline clock by observing the data on the clock analyzer.

----End

10.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items.



496

10.6.1 Testing ProcessThis section describes the general process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.

Figure 10-43 shows the process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.

Figure 10-43 Process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features

Start

Check configurations

Formulate a commissioning plan

Start commissioning on

site

Perform short-term performance tests

on site

Examine the pre-test results

End

Precautionl Before Starting Deployment:

– Examine the IEEE 1588v2 Networking Diagram for xxx Office carefully and verify thatthe actual network configurations are the same as the planned network configurations.

– Prepare required versions according to the version mapping requirements.– Prepare and verify the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office.– Make plans properly and obtain the necessary permits for on-site operations in advance.

l Test Point Selection: perform the acceptance test using the TimeAcc-007 or an IEEE1588v2 time tester. Try to perform the test at the end of an IEEE 1588v2 link (a point



497

farthest from a BITS device). Supply GPS signals to the TimeAcc-007 or IEEE 1588v2time tester. Calibrate the test instrument before performing the test.

Procedure1. Check configurations.

l After completing IEEE 1588v2-related configurations according to the network designdiagrams, check the configurations based on parameters specified in the ClockConfiguration List for xxx Office.

2. Formulate a commissioning plan. Determine a proper commissioning sequence accordingto connections of OTN equipment to BITS devices and OptiX PTN equipment.l First commission BITS devices.l Configure delay compensation along the BITS link and ensure that the source of delay

compensation ports is BITS.l For a ring network, disable ports to trigger clock source switching and record the

switching. After delay compensation at the standby clock tracing link is completed,restore configurations.

l For OptiX PTN equipment where IEEE 1588v2 has been provided, configure delaycompensation on all OTN boards before connecting OTN equipment to OptiX PTNequipment.

3. Start commissioning on site. Start commissioning from BITS and determine a propercommissioning sequence according to site conditions. Commissioning at a site must coverall time/clock tracing links.l Calibrate the instrument according to the instructions.l Test time precision of BITS: To ensure time precision of OTN equipment, observe

performance of the BITS device and ensure that the clock source satisfies requirements.After completing compensation for test cable delay and antenna feeder delay, measureoutput at the 1PPS+TOD port on the BITS device. If the maximum difference betweenmeasurement values does not exceed 50 ns, delay compensation for the BITS device isnot required; otherwise, delay compensation for the BITS device is required (in thiscase, contact BITS maintenance personnel).

NOTE

After completing delay compensation for BITS input signals, restart the BITS device. It takes the BITSdevice over two hours to become stable after the restart.

l Measure and compensate for asymmetry delay site by site. For details, see 10.6.2Testing Delay Compensation.

4. Perform short-term performance tests on site.l To test short-term performance after asymmetry delay compensation is completed at a

site, boards can be reset (cold) after ensuring that services will not be affected. For short-term performance specifications at each site, see 10.6.3 Testing Items.

5. Examine the pre-test results and record the testing data.

10.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation

PrerequisitesAll fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected.

Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.



498

The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsTime tester and U2000

Testing DiagramFigure 10-44 shows the diagram for testing delay compensation.

Figure 10-44 Testing Diagram

A

B D

Node B

Node B

C

:BITS :Node B

2M E

F

2M

1PPS+TOD

:Straight cables

1PPS+TOD

2M

1PPS+TODConvergence layer

OTN network

Access layer

:OSN series WDM equipment :PTN equipment

Slave BITS

Master BITS

:Optical cable

:Special cables

:Crossover cables :1588 phase synchronization route

WestA、B、C、D

DirectionStation

East

Board

18-11ST2-2

18-11ST2-1

:Physical synchronization route

:Physical synchronization protection route:1588 phase synchronization protection route

Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node (NE A, B)The source OTN node is generally connected to the BITS device. They can be interconnectedin either of the following modes:l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board.l Connected through a GE port on the STG board.

Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is asfollows:

1. Determine clock synchronization status of the source node.

(1) In NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock >Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree.

(2) Click Query. Check the query result to see whether the NE is tracing the clockprovided by the BITS device.

2. Measure delay.



499

(1) After ensuring that the source node is tracing the clock provided by the BITS device,verify time precision of the source node.

(2) Set the port to be tested to a 1PPS+TOD output port.(3) When the test instrument is stably tracing the GPS, connect the test cable to the TOD

port on the OTN equipment. Considering the delay caused by the antenna feeder andtest cable, check the time displayed on the test instrument 10 minutes later. When themaximum time difference does not exceed 50 ns, record the time offset of the OTNequipment. Then, configure asymmetry delay compensation using the U2000.

3. Compensate for delay. On the OTN equipment, delay may be caused by a cable or serviceboard.

(1) Compensate for delay caused by a cable connecting the BITS device's 1PPS+TODport to the OTN equipment. For the compensation modes, see Setting CableTransmission Distance Permitted by an External Time Port.

(2) Compensate for delay caused by a service board. For the compensation modes, seeConfiguring the Cable Transmission Deviation for the Clock Port.

4. Calibrate delay. After delay compensation is completed, check the time difference on theOTN equipment after 10 minutes. If the maximum time difference does not exceed 100 ns,the delay compensation satisfies requirements. Otherwise, configure delay compensationagain.

Testing Delay Compensation for the Intermediate Nodes (NE A, B, C, D)The method of measuring asymmetry delay at an intermediate node varies according to theconfiguration.l ST2+SFIU boards. This configuration simplifies asymmetry delay compensation (no site-

by-site compensation) during deployment. That is, you only need to select sites for delaycompensation and the maintenance engineers will configure delay compensation at theselected sites. Adhere to the following principles when configuring delay compensationduring deployment:– Time will be transmitted to the downstream nodes and time must be received over two

or more paths.– Delay compensation must be configured for OTN equipment connected to OptiX PTN

equipment and the OTN equipment must satisfy time precision requirements.– At a node, compensating for a time offset caused by path switching must be completed.

This ensures that the time reaching downstream nodes satisfies requirements after timesource switching.

As shown in Figure 10-44, each of sites A, B, and D provides one port for transferring timesources to the downstream nodes and two or more ports for receiving time sources. At thesesites, delay compensation is required for path switching. After the delay compensation, nomore delay compensation is required during maintenance.

l OTU service boards or ST2+FIU boards. This configuration requires site-by-siteasymmetry delay compensation and the compensation must cover all paths at a site.For example, site D in Figure 10-44 has two time tracing paths: B-C and D-C. Compensatefor delay on path B-C (for details, see Testing Delay Compensation for the SourceNode), switch the time source (by disabling a port on path B-C), and then compensate fordelay on path D-C. Finally, enable the port on path B-C.

Test the time precision at the time output port on the intermediate node for 10 minutes. The timeoffset between the intermediate node and the GPS is within ±1 us.



500

Configuring Delay Compensation for the Sink Node and OptiX PTN Equipment(NE E, F)

OTN equipment may be connected to OptiX PTN equipment in either of the following modes:

l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board usedwith the STG board.

l Connected through a GE port on the TN52TOG board.

Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is asfollows:

1. Measure time precision of the OTN equipment.

(1) Measure time offsets between adjacent NEs using the time tester. Then, compensatefor the delay generated at the input port of the ST2 board on each downstream OTNNE based on the time offset as well as the delay generated at the output port of theST2 on each upstream OTN NE with the same number with reversed polarity. Fordetails, see Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node.

(2) Test the time precision at the time output port on the sink node for 10 minutes. Thetime offset between the sink node and the GPS is within ±1 us.

2. Measure time precision of the OptiX PTN equipment.

(1) On the OptiX PTN side, test the time offset between the OptiX PTN equipments andthe BITS device using the time tester. Then, compensate for the delay generated atthe TOD port on the OptiX PTN equipments based on the time offset.

(2) Test the time precision at the time output port on the OptiX PTN equipments for 10minutes. The time offset between the OptiX PTN equipments and the GPS is within±1 us.

10.6.3 Testing ItemsThis section describes the items to be tested in the testing of IEEE 1588v2 features.

Prerequisites

All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected.

Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.

The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.


Time tester and U2000

Testing Items1. Time precision of interconnected OTN devices using ST2+SFIU boards test: To verify that

OTN devices with ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time precision by overcoming asymmetryissues.

2. Long-term jitter in a physical clock synchronization mode test: To test long-term stabilitywhen NEs work in physical clock synchronization mode.



501

3. Long-term jitter in PTP clock synchronization mode: To test long-term stability when NEswork in PTP clock synchronization mode.

4. Time precision in case of fiber fault recovery test: To test the function of restoring clockor time in case of an exception such as a fiber cut.

5. Active/standby clock board switching test. This test verifies that the active/standby IEEE1588v2 switching performs properly.

NOTE

Select a testing item based on the actual network topology.

Test Diagram

Figure 10-44 shows the diagram for the testing items.

Testing Item 1: Time Precision of Interconnected OTN Devices Using TN11ST2+SFIU Boards Test

TestPurpose

To verify that OTN devices with TN11ST2+SFIU boards can ensure timeprecision by overcoming asymmetry issues.

TestConfiguration

All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.

TestInstrument

Time tester with a GPS receiver

TestProcedure

1. Test the time offset between two adjacent sites using the time tester.2. Test the time precision for 10 minutes.3. Extend the fiber that transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages between the two sites

by more than 10 m (connect the fiber a new fiber longer than 10 m using afiber adapter).

ExpectedResult

The time offset is within ±100 ns before and after the fiber is extended.

Testing Item 2: Long-Term Jitter in a Physical Clock Synchronization Mode Test

TestPurpose

To test long-term stability when NEs work in physical clock synchronizationmode

TestConfiguration

All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.

TestInstrument




502

TestProcedure

1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using thetime tester.

ExpectedResult

The time offset is within ±1 us.

Testing Item 3: Long-Term Jitter in a PTP Clock Synchronization Mode TestTestPurpose

To test long-term stability when NEs work in PTP clock synchronization mode.

TestConfiguration

All NEs work in PTP synchronization mode.

TestInstrument


TestProcedure

1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using thetime tester.

ExpectedResult

The time offset is within ±1 us.

Testing Item 4: Time Precision in Case of Fiber Fault Recovery TestTestPurpose

To test the function of restoring clock or time in case of an exception such as afiber cut.

TestConfiguration

All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode or PTP synchronizationmode.

TestInstrument


TestProcedure

1. On the sink site, test the time offset using the time tester.2. On the sink site, remove the WDM-side fibers that transmit IEEE 1588v2.

Check for clock/time source switching alarms and performance eventsgenerated on OTN and OptiX PTN devices before and after the fibers arereinserted.

3. Use the time tester to test the base station time precision and record it.4. Recover the fiber connections.

ExpectedResult

When time source protection is configured on the ring network, the time offsetis within 240 ns before a single-point fault occurs and after the fault is rectified.



503

Testing Item 5: Active/Standby Clock Board Switching Test

Step 1 When the NE under test properly traces the clock source for another NE, perform a switchingbetween the active and standby clock boards on this NE.

NOTE

l For the OptiX OSN 6800, STG active/standby status is independent of the XCS active/standby status.Therefore, the active/standby STG switching can be tested without affecting the active/standby XCS status.

l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the active/standby clock board status is associated with the active/standby cross-connect board status. Therefore, it is recommended to test only the active/standby clock board switching oractive/standby cross-connect board switching.

Step 2 Check whether the traced clock source is switched from one NE to another. (Clock sourceswitching is not triggered in normal cases.) Use a test instrument to measure the timesynchronization performance for the NE. Determine whether the time synchronizationperformance meets the clock source switching requirements (The time offset is within 240 nsbefore and after the switching).

----End

10.7 Testing Ethernet Service ChannelsWhen the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service channelsmust be tested.

10.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using LaptopsYou can perform the test by connecting laptops to both ends of the Ethernet service. By doingthis, you can test the availability of the Ethernet service channel.

Prerequisitel You must be a U2000 user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.l The EPL services must be configured and the port attribute is set to "Access". For

configuration details, see "Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board" inthe Configuration Guide.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsTwo laptops on which the Windows operating system is installed, two straight-through cables

Set-up DiagramFigure 10-45 shows the diagram for testing the Ethernet service channels.



504

Figure 10-45 Testing the Ethernet service channels

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

NE5

Laptop A

BLaptop

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the network port of the laptop to the Ethernet service port of the equipment accordingto Figure 10-45.

Step 2 Set the IP addresses for laptop A and laptop B. The two IP addresses must be set in the samenetwork section.l Set the IP address for laptop A.

– IP address: 192.168.0.100– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

l Set the IP address for laptop B.– IP address: 192.168.0.101– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

Step 3 Choose Start > Run on laptop A to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command: ping192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.

NOTE

Parameters for the Ping command:

l -n Num: transit Num packets to the laptop at the opposite end

l -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes

l -t: continuously transmit ping packets

Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command.l A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101: bytes=64

time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel is normal.l If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it indicates that the

Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the configuration ofthe Ethernet service. Correct the fault, and then continue the test.

NOTE

The value of time and TTL is determined by the actual test environment. The value discrepancy is normal.

----End



505

10.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the EthernetOAM Function

If the Ethernet board supports the OAM function, the OAM function can also be used to test theavailability of Ethernet service channels.

Prerequisitel The Ethernet service must be configured between sites.


U2000

Context

For the OptiX OSN 8800, the following boards support the OAM function.

l EGSH

l LEM24

l LEX4


l LEM24

l LEX4


l LEM24

l LEX4

Before testing the availability of the Ethernet service channels by using the OAM function, youmust configure the OAM maintenance points on the two sites.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click an NE icon in the Main Topology, and select NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select the Ethernet board in the Object Tree and choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click New. The Create MP dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.

Step 4 In Ethernet Service OAM, right-click the created Ethernet service maintenance point, andchoose Performance Detect.

Step 5 The Performance Detect dialog box is displayed. In Send Mode, select the specific mode, anddesignate the Destination MP ID in the Maintenance Point and Source MP ID.

Step 6 Click Start Detect. The statistics of the performance are displayed in the Details. View theresults of the statistics. Then determine the performance of the service between the localequipment and the opposite equipment through Loss Ratio and Delay.



506

Step 7 Change the length of the packet in Send Mode. Then test the performance of the packets withthe length of 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes.

----End

10.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN SystemYou can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.

Availabilityl OptiX OSN 8800 T16 support Orderwire of OTN System.l OptiX OSN 8800 T32 support Orderwire of OTN System.l OptiX OSN 8800 T64 support Orderwire of OTN System.l OptiX OSN 6800 support Orderwire of OTN System.l OptiX OSN 3800 support Orderwire of OTN System.

10.8.1 Setting the Orderwire BoardBefore you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l The optical supervisory channel boards must be created.l For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel boards

on the main subrack supports the orderwire function.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000/Web LCT

Background InformationThe orderwire can be used only when the orderwire board is configured with the NE.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the

Function Tree. Click the Orderwire Board Settings tab.2. Click Query to query the NE-side information.

3. Select a board from the Available Boards pane and click .



507

4. Click Apply.5. Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.

10.8.2 Configuring OrderwireTo provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you canconfigure orderwire for NEs.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l SC1 or SC2 board has been configured.


U2000/Web LCT

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the

Function Tree. Click the General tab.

2. Click Query to query information from the NE.3. Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.

NOTE

l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication.When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9seconds.

l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.

l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum lengthis eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the numberlength must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to 10.8.4 DividingOrderwire Subnets.

l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.

4. Click Apply.



508

10.8.3 Configuring Conference CallsTo provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrentvoice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.




Function Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.2. Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.3. In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure

a conference call, and click .

NOTE

If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence,"releasing loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certainnode.

4. Click Apply.5. Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.

NOTE

The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as theorderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call numberis recommended to be 9999.

6. In the Available Orderwire Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a

conference call, and click .

7. Click Apply.



509

10.8.4 Dividing Orderwire SubnetsWhen there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of theconversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls areconfigured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conferencecalls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.

l Conference calls must be configured.


U2000/Web LCT


Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of oneor two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference callnumber by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. Forexample, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conferencecall number of the subnet 1 is 199.

The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE canbelong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.


Function Tree.

2. Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.

NOTE

When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is inthe range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the OpticalInterface is in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.

3. Click the Optical Interface Subnet No. tab.

4. Click Query to query information from the NE.

5. Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field andenter a subnet number.

NOTE

The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

6. Click Apply.

7. Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parametervalues of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.



510

10.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS SystemThis section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using theU2000.

Availability

l OptiX OSN 8800 T32 support Orderwire of OTN System.l OptiX OSN 8800 T64 support Orderwire of OTN System.

10.9.1 Configuring OrderwireTo provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you canconfigure orderwire for NEs.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l TN1LSTI board has been configured.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the FunctionTree. Click the General tab.

Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.



511

NOTE

l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication.When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds.

l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.

l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length iseight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number lengthmust be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to Dividing Orderwire Subnets.

l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.

l A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire.

l A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire.

l If the length of the subnet number is 1, the first digit of the two orderwire numbers must be the same.If the length of the subnet number is 2, the first two digits of the two orderwire numbers must be thesame.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query to confirm that the parameter values are the same as the ones set previously.

----End

10.9.2 Configuring Conference CallsTo provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrentvoice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.


Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the FunctionTree. Click the Conference Call tab.



512

Step 2 Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.

Step 3 In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure aconference call, and click .

NOTE

If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasingloop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.

NOTE

The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the orderwirephone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is recommendedto be 9999.

Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.

----End

10.9.3 Dividing Orderwire SubnetsWhen there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of theconversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls areconfigured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conferencecalls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.


l Conference calls must be configured.



513


Background InformationSet the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of oneor two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference callnumber by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. Forexample, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conferencecall number of the subnet 1 is 199.

The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE canbelong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.

NOTE

When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the rangeof 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface isin the range of 0 and 10 to 99.

Step 3 Click the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface tab.

Step 4 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 5 Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and entera subnet number.

NOTE

The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parameter valuesof Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.

----End

10.10 Testing Orderwire FunctionsOrderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.



514

Prerequisitel The orderwire is connected to the EOW port of the SC1/SC2/HSC1/TNL1STIl Orderwire on each NE must be configured.l The orderwire phone set must be installed correctly at related stations.


Procedure

Step 1 Testing the addressing call.1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the orderwire of other NEs.2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the called station.3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise.4. See the previous steps to test addressing calls at other stations.

Step 2 Testing the subnet conference call.1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the subnet conference call number.2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the other station.3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise.4. See the previous steps to test subnet conference calls at other stations.

NOTE

l The subnet conference call covers only the optical ports that have the same subnet No. on the network. Thesubnet No. for the optical port can be set on the U2000. The subnet conference call number consists of thesubnet No., which replaces the first one or two digits of the network-wide call number. For example, if thesubnet No. is 1, the subnet conference call number is 199.

----End



515

11 Testing Bit Errors

About This Chapter

The network-wide bit error test must cover all the service channels in the network. You canperform the bit error tests to the concatenated service channels or to the service segments. Theremust be no bit error for 24 consecutive hours.

This section uses Project G as an example to illustrate the test for network-wide bit errors. Forthe network diagram for Project G, see Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1 Network diagram for Project G

A B C D E

: OTM : OLA : OADM

Each of the stations A, C and E have four LSX boards.

CAUTIONBefore the test, make sure that the input and output optical power for each board is in the optimalrange, and that there is no abnormal alarm or performance event.

11.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical ChannelTo ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a 10-minute bit error test for each channel in advance.

11.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 11 Testing Bit Errors


516

The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels ona transmission link are normal.



517

11.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical ChannelTo ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a 10-minute bit error test for each channel in advance.

PrerequisiteThere must be no abnormal alarm or performance event in the entire network.

Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter

Set-up Diagram

For the bit error test for one channel, see Figure 11-2, Figure 11-3, and Figure 11-4.

Figure 11-2 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station E

OTUSignal

analyzer OTU

Station A Station E

OUT

IN

Rx

Tx Rx

Tx

Tributaryboard

Signalanalyzer

Station A Station E

OUT

IN

Rx

Tx Rx

Tx

Lineboard

Lineboard

Tributaryboard


Figure 11-3 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station C

LSXSignal

analyzer LSX

Station A Station C

OUT

IN

Rx

Tx Rx

Tx



518

Tributaryboard

Signalanalyzer

Station A Station C

OUT

IN

Rx

Tx Rx

Tx

Lineboard

Lineboard

Tributaryboard


Figure 11-4 Testing bit errors for one channel from station C to station E

LSXSignal

analyzer LSX

Station C Station E

OUT

IN

Rx

Tx Rx

Tx

Tributaryboard

Signalanalyzer

Station C Station E

OUT

IN

Rx

Tx Rx

Tx

Lineboard

Lineboard

Tributaryboard


ProcedureStep 1 See Figure 11-2, for station A, connect the receive and transmit optical ports of a signal analyzer

to the TX output optical port and RX input optical port with a fixed optical attenuator in between.

Step 2 At station E, connect the TX output optical port to the RX input optical port with a fixed opticalattenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.

Step 3 Use the signal analyzer to perform a 10-minute bit error test for the service channel.

Step 4 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 10-minute bit error test again until there isno bit error.

Step 5 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 11-3 to perform 10-minute bit error tests to all the channelsbetween station A and station C.

Step 6 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 11-4 to perform 10-minute bit error tests to all the channelsbetween station C and station E.

----End



519

11.2 Testing All-Channel Bit ErrorsThe all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels ona transmission link are normal.

PrerequisiteNo abnormal alarm or performance event exists on the entire network.

Tools, Equipments and MaterialsSignal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter

Fiber ConnectionAt the local end, connect the output port on the signal analyzer to the RX port on the first OTUor tributary board. After the signals are looped back from the remote end, the signals are outputfrom the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board. This establishes the connection of a singlechannel. Connect the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board to the RX port on the secondOTU or tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between. Then connect the second OTUor tributary board to the third OTU or tributary board in the same way until OTU or tributaryboard (N-1) is connected to OTU or tributary board N. Finally, connect the TX port on the OTUor tributary board N to the IN port on the signal analyzer.

Precautions

CAUTIONl The number of cascaded OTUs or tributary boards should be less than or equal to 13.l There are five types of LC connector-shaped fixed optical attenuators: 15 dB, 10 dB, 7dB,

5 dB and 2 dB. According to the requirements for the optical power, use the correct fixedoptical attenuators when you perform the network commissioning.

Set-up DiagramThis section uses Project G as an example to describe how to test bit errors on all channels incascading order. Figure 11-5 shows the testing diagram. The testing diagram does not show theOLA and repeater stations because no signal is inserted into or extracted from an OLA stationor a repeater station.



520

Figure 11-5 Fiber connections for the all-channel bit error test

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

Station A

Signalanalyzer

IN

RxOUT

Tx

Station C

Station E

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

T

Station A

IN

RxOUT

Tx

Station C

Station E

LTx

Rx

Rx Tx

Signalanalyzer

T L

T L

T L

L T

L T

L T

L T

T

L

T

L

T

L

T

L

: Fixed optical attenuatorT: Tributary boardL: Line board

Procedure

Step 1 Use Figure 11-5 to connect the fibers according to the information inFiber Connection.

Step 2 Use the signal analyzer to perform the 24-hour bit error test.



521

Step 3 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 24-hour test again until there is no bit error.

----End



522

12 Checklist for Commissioning DuringDeployment

Correct setting and commissioning of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuringnormal network operation.

Check the configurations of NEs and boards according to Table 12-1 and rectify inappropriateconfigurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and incomplete parameter settings.

Table 12-1 Checklist for commissioning during deployment

No.

Item Related Operation

1 Communication between NEs on the network isnormal and login to an NE is successful.

Creating NEs in BatchesCreating Optical NEsUploading the NE Data

2 NE ID and IP are changed properly according to thecustomer planning requirements.


3 All NEs are synchronized with the NMS time and NEperformance monitoring can be enabled normally.

Synchronizing the NE Timewith the U2000/Web LCTServer ManuallySetting PerformanceMonitoring Parameters of anNE

4 When the network uses the HWECC communicationprotocol, a proper extended ECC communicationmode is selected when the number of NEs that adoptthe extended ECC communication exceeds eight.

Setting Manually ExtendedECC Communication

When the network uses IP over DCC communicationprotocol, the IP over DCC protocol is configuredproperly.

Configuring IP over DCC

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 12 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment


523

No.

Item Related Operation

When the network uses OSI over DCCcommunication protocol, the OSI over DCC protocolis configured properly.

Configuring OSI over DCC

5 Logical fiber connections are created on the entirenetwork and they are consistent with actual fiberconnections.

Creating Fiber Connections inGraphic Mode

6 OCh trails are complete and no discrete serviceexists.

Creating OCh Trails by TrailSearch

7 Optical cross-connections at an ROADM station arecomplete.

Creating Single-StationOptical Cross-Connection

8 Acceptance items such as bit errors and OSNRsatisfy the requirements and optical power on theentire network is commissioned correctly.

Testing Bit Errorsl Commissioning Optical

Power on Sitel Remotely Commissioning

Optical Powerl Automatic Commissioning

9 Attributes of every WDM optical port on a board areset properly.

Configuring Boards

10 Various services are configured correctly. Configuring Services

11 Protection schemes and system features areconfigured correctly.

Configuring System FeaturesTesting Protection SwitchingTesting Data FeaturesTesting System FeaturesTesting Ethernet ServiceChannels

TIP

In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the configurationsof an NE after configuring the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 12 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment


524

13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCCBoard

You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC boardof the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power failure.When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE data in theDRDB database of the SCC board to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted after a powerfailure, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues theconfiguration to the boards.


You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000 or Web LCT

PrecautionsNOTE

By default, the NMS automatically backs up the NE database into the flash memory every 30 minutes.

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management.

2. Select the NE from the Function Tree, and then click .3. In NE Configuration, select an NE or multiple NEs of which the database you want to

back up. Click Back Up NE Data and select Back Up Database to SCC. In the displayedconfirmation dialog box, click OK.

4. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Click Back Up NE Database > Back Up to SCC.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board


525

NOTEThe NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation in theprocess of backup.

2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.


(Optional) Related Operation Backing Up and Restoringthe NE Data

This section describesseveral NE data backup andrestoration methods. You canselect the method as required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 13 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board


526

14 Analyzing and Handling CommonDeployment Problems

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that mayhappen during the deployment process. You need to analyze and handle problems according toactual situations.

14.1 OSC/ESC ConflictThis section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequentswitching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase.

14.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary PortsThis section describes how to disable the unused auxiliary ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 14 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems


527

14.1 OSC/ESC ConflictThis section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequentswitching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.


Background InformationDuring the deployment commissioning phase, the commissioning of optical power for an OTUboard or a line board is not complete. When this occurs, the ECC link is unstable and the OSCand ESC channels may be frequently switched. The symptoms are as follows:l As shown on the NMS, the NE is occasionally unreachable. A query of the WDM-side

alarms for the corresponding OTU or line boards shows that the power_high or power_lowalarm is reported.

l Switching between different channels on the ECC link frequently occurs.

Procedure1. On the U2000, check the value of Communication Status. Then determine which port

fails in ESC communication after a check of the value of Port.


(2) Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.(3) Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.(4) Select the DCC Rate Configuration tab, and click Query.(5) On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, check whether Communication Status

for a channel whose Channel is GCC0, GCC12_18, GCC12_9, or RES_ODU isdisplayed as Receiving Failed. If yes, this Port fails in ESC communication.

2. On the U2000, disable all the failed ESC channels on all the NEs on the network.

(1) On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, change the value of Enabled/Disabledfor all channels for the failed Port identified in step 1 to Disabled. Click OK in thedisplayed dialog box.

NOTE

If Communication Status for all channels on the specified Port is Normal, skip the preceding sub-step.

(2) Click Apply. Then, click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box. Then clickClose in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

3. After the entire system is commissioned and the optical power on the entire line becomesstable, set the enable status of the ESC channels to Enabled. For details, see step 2.



528

NOTE

After the enable status of the ESC channels is set to Enabled, the supervisory channel on the ECC routeis automatically switched to the ESC channel.

14.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary PortsThis section describes how to disable the unused auxiliary ports.

PrerequisiteThe commissioning of the entire system must be complete.


Background InformationThe auxiliary ports that are not currently used must be disabled. If they are required in asubsequent phase, enable these auxiliary ports.

CAUTIONDisabling the unused auxiliary ports may make NEs go offline.

Procedure1. In the NE Explorer, choose Communication > Access Control from the left-hand

Function Tree.2. Optional: Set the unused serial port to disabled.

(1) Deselect the Enable Serial Port Access check box.(2) Click Apply.(3) A dialog is displayed indicating a This operation will reset the communication

between NEs. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.(4) A dialog is displayed indicating a Disabling access will disable the serial port

communication. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.3. Optional: Set the unused ETH/NMETH port to Disabled.

(1) Set Enabled/Disabled of the unused port to Disabled.(2) Click Apply.

4. Optional: Set the two NMETH ports to disabled.

(1) Deselect the Enable Ethernet Access check box.(2) Click Apply.(3) A dialog is displayed indicating a This operation will reset the communication

between NEs. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.



529

(4) A dialog is displayed indicating a Disabling access will disable the networkinterface communication. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.



530

15 Reference Operations for theCommissioning and Configuration

About This Chapter

This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and configuration. You canperform proper operations according to the network condition.

15.1 Configuring the NE DataThough an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE firstso that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.

15.2 Configuring Master/Slave SubrackThe OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelvesare required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralizedmanagement. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/WebLCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multipleshelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted forcentralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/Web LCT.

15.3 Configuring Wavelength GroomingThis chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service groomingat the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections.

15.4 Configuring the NE TimeTime consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshootingand network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE time before serviceconfiguration.

15.5 Performance ManagementTo ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance personnelshould periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance managementmeasures.

15.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEsAfter an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following tasksets.

15.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration


15 Reference Operations for the Commissioning andConfiguration


531

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board basedon the following task sets.

15.8 Modifying the Fibers ConfigurationAfter a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber basedon the following task sets.

15.9 Creating a Single NEAfter the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a singleNE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless ofwhether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matterwhat way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do notsupport the NE search function and you must create them one by one.

15.10 Switching a Logged-In NE UserDuring a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create anotherNE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.

15.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List ModeIn Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and insideNEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in thelist mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a fewfiber connections only.

15.12 Configuring the Edge PortAn edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port isto set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.

15.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-ConnectionThe intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) thatperforms grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through thecreation of single-board optical cross-connection.

15.14 Configuring Board WDM Port AttributesPort attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every boardhas its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameterscan be queried.

15.15 Configuring Board SDH Port AttributesConfigure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every boardhas its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameterscan be queried.

15.16 Opening/Closing LasersThis section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection offaults and the commissioning.

15.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA BoardYou can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA)board to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board.

15.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards

15.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation ParametersIn a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You alsoneed to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition,you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmissionfibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.




532

15.20 Configuring the Service ModeIf services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of theboard.

15.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiberis disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather thanremains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the outputoptical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

15.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM BoardAutomatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there isno input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interfaceboard does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost,the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the servicelife of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eyedamage.

15.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH BoardAutomatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there isno input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interfaceboard does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost,the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the servicelife of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eyedamage.

15.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection SwitchingYou can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection switchingof the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.

15.25 Setting the NULL Mapping StatusSome OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. Forthe channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping statusto Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored.

15.26 Configuring Path BindingBy configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals tomultiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower ordersignals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases.

15.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength MonitoringThe WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or opticalmultiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths andreports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the function,the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be configured on theU2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.

15.28 Configuring the FEC FunctionWhen configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enablethe function and set the FEC type of the current optical port.

15.29 Enabling and Disabling LPTWhen the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can bemonitored.

15.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans




533

This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.

15.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial PortThis section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel ofalarm signals of an external device.

15.32 Configuring Ethernet BoardsDuring the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes mustbe configured.

15.33 Verifying Ethernet ServicesAfter configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication isnormal.

15.34 Configuring the PRBS TestSome OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS)error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and theclient side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. Inthis way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting a meterto the equipment during the deployment.

15.35 Managing NE Power ConsumptionYou can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to ensurethat energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE runs in thenormal state.

15.36 Configuring NE Clock SourcesThe time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. Tosynchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board accordingto the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directionsand termination points for networkwide clock synchronization.

15.37 Backing Up and Restoring NE DataTo ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.




534

15.1 Configuring the NE DataThough an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE firstso that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.

15.1.1 Configuring the NE Data ManuallyBy configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l The NE must be created successfully.


Procedure on the U20001. Double-click the optical NE with unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then, double-

click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialogbox is displayed.

2. Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed,indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.

3. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configurationinterrupts the service on the NE.

4. Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.5. Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type, Cross-

Connect Type of Master Shelf, Cross-Connect Capacity of Master Shelf, NERemarks, Shelf Type, and and so on.

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type of Master Shelf and Cross-Connect Capacity of MasterShelf must be set based on the current license requirements; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.

6. Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed.7. Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.8. Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.9. Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.10. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.11. Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish.

NOTEVerification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration tothe NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the verification is successful, the NEstarts to work normally.

12. On the Main Topology, double-click the optical NE where the NE configured previouslyis located. select the NE in the left pane of the window to view the board information of




535

the NE. If the configured board information of the NE is displayed in the right pane, itindicates that the NE is configured successfully.

15.1.2 Replicating the NE DataYou can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already configuredand if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new NE.


l The NE must be created successfully.

l The type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with the type andsoftware version of the replicated NE.


U2000/Web LCT

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. Double-click the unconfigured NE on the main topology. Then, double-click the

unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box isdisplayed.

2. Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog box isdisplayed, indicating that the replication operation copies all the data of the source NE.

NOTE

After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the U2000 side is changed, but the data on theequipment side is not changed.

4. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operationresults in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied.

5. Click OK to start the replication. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed after afew seconds.

6. Click Close.




536

15.2 Configuring Master/Slave SubrackThe OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelvesare required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralizedmanagement. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/WebLCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multipleshelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted forcentralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/Web LCT.

This section describes how to configure master and slave subracks for new NEs.

15.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack ConfigurationIn the master/slave subrack mode, the master subrack and its multiple slave shelves are displayedas one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address.

Generally, the subrack where the optical amplifier board, optical supervisory channel (OSC)board, and fiber interface unit (FIU) exist is selected as the master subrack.

15.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NETo ensure proper functioning of the subracks and normal communication between subracks onan NE, set Shelf Link Mode to be consistent with the actual physical cascading mode of thesubracks on the U2000.

Prerequisite


Cables for communication between subracks must be installed.


U2000 or Web LCT

PrecautionsNOTE

The cables for communication between subracks are properly installed and no alarm indicating a cascadingfault is reported.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Shelf Link Management

from the Function Tree. Click the Shelf Link Management tab in the right-hand interface.

2. Double click Shelf Link Mode and select Tree or Ring based on the actual physicalcascading mode of the subracks.

3. Click Apply.




537



(Optional) Related Operation Testing Inter-SubrackCommunication Protection

This section describes how totest inter-subrackcommunication protection.

15.2.3 Changing a Subrack AttributeYou can set the attributes of the master or slave subrack to change the name of the master orslave subrack.

Prerequisite


The master or slave subrack has been created.


U2000/Web LCT

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. Double click the NE being required to Change the subrack attribute. Choose the desire

subrack from the upper side of the NE Panel.2. Right-click the subrack and then choose Modify Shelf Attribute from the shortcut menu

to display the Modify Shelf Attribute dialog box.

3. Change the Shelf name and click OK.

NOTE

For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type of Master Shelf and Cross-Connect Capacity of MasterShelf must be set based on the current license requirements; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.

15.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave SubrackThis section describes how to query the status of a slave subrack. The status includes PhysicalInstalled, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.

Prerequisite


The master or slave subrack has been created.




538


Procedure on the U20001. Choose the NE from the left pane of the NE Panel.

2. Click to refresh the state of the NE Panel. On the NE Panel, you can query the statusof the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.

3. Optional: Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.

Procedure on the Web LCT

1. Click to refresh the state of the Slot Layout. On the Slot Layout, you can query thestatus of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.

2. Optional: Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.

15.2.5 Deleting a Slave SubrackThe slave subrack that does not need to be managed by the U2000 can be deleted.


All boards that are manually created on the slave subrack are deleted.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. Double click the NE being required to Change the subrack attribute. Choose the desire

subrack from the upper side of the NE Panel.2. Right-click the subrack and then choose Delete the Shelf from the shortcut menu.




539

3. Click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

NOTE

When the slave subrack is deleted, the system automatically deletes the system boards, such as theAUX, PIU, EFI, and FAN.

15.3 Configuring Wavelength GroomingThis chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service groomingat the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections.

15.3.1 Basic ConceptsThe equipment provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. TheU2000 and Web LCT are used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of channels,and thus the remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power equalization canbe performed on pass-through and adding wavelengths.

There are two schemes supported by the WDM equipment for wavelength allocation:l Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)l Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)FOADM cannot reconfigure the wavelength allocation based on the requirements of servicedevelopment. The ROADM realizes the reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or cross-connecting wavelengths, changing the static wavelength allocation to a flexible and dynamicoperation. Making use of the ROADM technology, the U2000 and Web LCT software adjuststhe status of wavelengths (add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and dynamic adjustmentof wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80 wavelengths is supported.

Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by optical cross-connection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing the services at the opticallayer. Products provide flexible optical grooming. When there are changes in the services, usersneed only to make configuration accordingly on the U2000 and Web LCT.

Different nodes adopt different methods of optical grooming. The three main methods are listedas follows:l WSD9 + RMU9 (WSM9): Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for

multidimensional grooming. It supports the grooming of at most eight dimensions.l WSMD4+WSMD4: Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for the grooming in no

more than four dimensions.l ROAM (WSMD2): Applied to common nodes and suitable for two-dimensional grooming.

NOTE

Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming intwo transmission directions. Multidimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in multipletransmission directions.

For more details of optical grooming, see the Product Description.




540

15.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration FlowThis section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Beforeconfiguring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basicconfiguration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network.

Figure 15-1 Wavelength grooming configuration flow

Start

End

Creating theSingle-Station optical

cross-connections

Creating firbers

Creating theboard optical

cross-connections

Task Name Task Description

CreatingFibers on theU2000Creating FiberConnectionsby Using theWeb LCT

RequiredIf the single-station cross-connection is configured, you can create the logicfiber connection between NEs and between boards that are inside the NEson the U2000. Or create the logic fiber connection between NEs on theU2000 and the logic fiber connection between boards that are inside theNEs on the Web LCT.

CreatingSingle-StationOptical Cross-Connection

The inter-board service route can be established by creating the single-station optical cross-connection.

NOTEThe intra-board service route can be established by creating the board optical cross-connection.

15.3.3 Configuring the ROADMThis section uses project R as an example to describe how to configure the reconfigurable opticaladd/drop multiplexer (ROADM) on the U2000 and Web LCT when the WSS board is used.




541

Networking DiagramTangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the opticallayer.

Project R adopts a tangent ring networking that comprises seven ONEs: A, B, C, D, E, F and G.All of the ONEs are OADM stations. Figure 15-2 shows the networking diagram of Project R.

Figure 15-2 Networking diagram of Project R

B

C

D

G

F

A

E

: OADM

In project R, the uni-directional services are allocated as shown in Figure 15-3. There are twoservices between station B and station C. Between station A and station B, station B and stationD, station C and station D, station D and station E, station D and station G there is one servicerespectively. All of the services are STM-64 services.




542

Figure 15-3 Service allocation of Project R

B

C

D

G

F

A

E

W E

NS

WE

Service Signal Flow and Wavelength AllocationThis section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and boardconfiguration of the project.

Service Signal FlowTake station A and station C as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at theoptical layer in the WSD9+RMU9 mode and the ROAM mode. The wavelength route at stationA is shown in Figure 15-4. The wavelength route at station C is shown in Figure 15-5.




543

Figure 15-4 Services at station A of Project R

WSD9O AIN

EXPO

WSD9IN

O AIN

RMU9

O A

OUT

ROA

IN

RMU9

IN

OUT

DM1 DM1

DM7 DM7

INWSD9

DM1

DM7WSD9

DM1

DM8

AM1

AM8

TOA

AM1

AM8

O A

RMU9O A

EXPIOUT

AM1

AM7

RMU9

OUT

AM1

AM7O A

O A

O A

W E

S N

DM8 DM8

AM8 AM8

DM8

DM7

AM7 AM7

EXPO EXPO

EXPO

ROA

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

TOA

EXPI

EXPI EXPI

O A




544

Figure 15-5 Services at station C of Project R

ROAM

OD

IN

OUT

DM

EXPI

EXPO

EXPI

EXPO

O A

O A

W

IN

OUTO A

O A

E OD

DM

ROAM

M01 M40

M01 M40M02

M02

Wavelength Allocation DiagramFigure 15-6 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project R.

Figure 15-6 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R

B CW E W

DNo./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) E

8/1531.90/195.70

D AW S W

EE

10/1532.68/195.60

D AW N W

FE

12/1533.47/195.50

AE W

B

18/1535.82/195.20

/Frequency(THz)

/Frequency(THz)

/Frequency(THz)No./Wavelength(nm)

No./Wavelength(nm)

No./Wavelength(nm)

10/1532.68/195.60

12/1533.47/195.50




545

Configuration ProcessThis section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For theconfiguration of other stations, see the description for station C.


The related boards are configured.



Step 1 Station A configuration process1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection

Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connectiontab in the right-hand pane.

2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Select thecorresponding source port and sink port of the optical cross-connect service.

NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button onthe right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select SourceWavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from

the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to SelectedWavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to north at station A for the service12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.

NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source

port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or SinkWavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available

Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station D tostation F.




546

4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection iscompleted. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.6. Repeat steps Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the pass-through service from west to south at

station A for the service 10/1532.68/195.60 from station D to station E.




547

7. Repeat Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the service added from the east at station A for theservice 18/1535.82/195.20 from station A to station B.

8. The created optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

9. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station OpticalCross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed.All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-StationOptical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, thephysical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in theDetailed Physical Route window.




548

Step 2 Station C configuration process1. Click the NE182 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-

Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.


NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button onthe right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select SourceWavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from

the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to SelectedWavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to east at station C for the service12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.

NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source

port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or SinkWavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available

Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to east at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station B tostation D.

4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

NOTE

If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection iscompleted. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.




549

5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.6. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create two services dropped from the west at station C for

the services 10/1532.68/195.60 and 8/1531.90/195.70 from station B to station C.




550

7. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create the service added from the east at station C for theservice 8/1531.90/195.70 from station C to station D.

8. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station OpticalCross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed.All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-StationOptical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, thephysical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in theDetailed Physical Route window.

----End




551

Enabling the Port Blocking Function

After the port blocking function is enabled, the VOA is set to the default value (greater than 45dB) and the port is blocked when no OCh trail is found at the optical port that services traverse.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.

l The TN11RMU9 board must be installed.


After the port blocking function is disabled, the attenuation remains the same.

When the port blocking function is enabled:

l If no optical cross-connection in automatic mode is configured at the port, the port is inblocking state. In this case, the blocking function can be disabled after the attenuation isadjusted manually.

l If optical cross-connections in automatic mode are configured at the port, the OPA functionautomatically computes the attenuation according to the first optical cross-connection thattraverse the port. Then, the blocking function is disabled at the port.

l After all optical cross-connections at the port are deleted, the port is in blocking state.

When the port blocking function is disabled:

l The port is enabled with the port blocking function by default after being powered on.However, the port blocking function is disabled after attenuation is set.

l Attenuation at the port remains the same after optical cross-connections are configured.


U2000/Web LCT

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Select By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.

3. In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical port.

4. Double-click the Block Port field and select Enable.

5. Click Apply.

15.4 Configuring the NE TimeTime consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshootingand network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE time before serviceconfiguration.




552

15.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT andNEs

With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and theU2000/Web LCT server time. In this way, the U2000/Web LCT is able to record the correcttime at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported byNEs.

When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000, the time at which such alarms andevents occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regardto the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the U2000. This may cause trouble in fault location.In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in theNE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the U2000 provides two time synchronizationschemes: synchronizing with the U2000 server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server.

NOTE

The Web LCT improves the accuracy of NE time by synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time.

l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000 servertime as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000 server timemanually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time of theworkstation or computer where the U2000 server resides. This scheme features easyoperation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time.

l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the standard NTP server, all NEs and theU2000 are synchronized with the standard NTP server automatically. The NTP server canbe the U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme is applicable in networks thatrequire a high accuracy with regard to time.

When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the Web LCT, the time at which such alarmsand events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time withregard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the Web LCT. This may cause trouble in faultlocation. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recordedin the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the Web LCT provides one timesynchronization scheme: synchronizing with the Web LCT server.

In this scheme, all NEs use the Web LCT server time as the standard time. The NE time can besynchronized with the Web LCT server time manually or automatically. The Web LCT servertime refers to the time of the computer system where the Web LCT server resides. This schemefeatures easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regardto time.

15.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with theNMS Time

This section describes how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time.After you set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time, the NE time isautomatically synchronized with the NMS time at specified intervals.

Prerequisitel You must have logged in to an NE.l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l The NTP service must not be configured for the U2000 and NEs.




553


Web LCT or U2000

Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization

from the Function Tree. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM, and click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed. ClickClose.

3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply. The Auto-SynchronizationSettings dialog box is displayed. Click Yes.

NOTE

Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

4. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization

from the Function Tree.

2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.

3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply.

NOTE

Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

15.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP KeyOn the U2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automaticallysynchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server isaccessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the keyand password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.


l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.


U2000

Context

The NTP authentication of the NE must be the same as the standard NTP server. If the standardNTP server is configured with a key for authentication, the key of the NE must be the same asthe key of the server.




554

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE

Time Synchronization from the main menu. Click Standard NTP Key Management tab.

2. In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click .3. Click Close on the Result dialog box.4. Click Add and the Add Key and Password dialog box is displayed.5. Select the NE in the NE List pane, set Key ID and Password, and set Trusted to Yes.

Then, click Apply.6. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

15.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP ServerTime

You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize theNE time with the standard NTP server time.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l The key and password of an NE must be set by using the standard NTP key management

function.l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.


U2000

ContextAfter you change the value of Synchronous Mode from NULL to Standard NTP, when themodification is delivered to the NE, the time synchronization may be successful though theencryption key is incorrect.

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE

Time Synchronization from the main menu.

2. In the Object Tree, select an NE and click the .3. Set the Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.4. Set the Standard NTP Authentication to Enabled.5. Click Apply.6. In the displayed Result dialog box, click Close.7. In the pane at the bottom of the window, right-click, and then choose New from the shortcut

menu to create a standard NTP server.l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to NE ID, enter the NE ID of the standard

NTP server and Standard NTP Server Key.




555

l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to IP, enter the IP address of the standardNTP server and the Standard NTP Server Key.

8. Click Apply to synchronize the NE time.9. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.10. Click Query. Make sure that the parameter values of the NTP server are the same as the

ones set previously.

15.5 Performance ManagementTo ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance personnelshould periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance managementmeasures.

15.5.1 Setting the Board Performance ThresholdThe NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold.According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board. On theU2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performancethresholds for one or more boards at the same time.



Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a related board and choose Performance > Performance

Threshold.2. In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel.3. Set performance thresholds according to the requirement.

NOTE

On the U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template for the boards, clickUse Template and select the desired template. Click Open.

4. Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings.5. Click Apply.6. Click Query. Confirm that the value of Threshold value is the same as the value that is

set.

15.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring ParametersBy setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and startingthe performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed performance recordduring the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance status monitoring ofservices and NEs.




556

Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a BoardYou can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. TheU2000/Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but the automatic reporting feature isdisabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.



Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor

Status from the Function Tree.2. Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Criteria drop-down list.3. Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click

Apply.4. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.5. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.

Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NEBy setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performancemonitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running ofthe NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed bymaintenance personnel.


The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.


Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Topology view, choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring

Time from the Main Menu.

2. Select NEs from the NE list. Click .3. Select one or more NEs, and set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters

according to the requirement.

(1) Select Enabled.(2) Set the start time and date.




557

(3) Optional: Select To: check box, set the end time and date.

NOTE

l The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system and the end timemust be later than the start time.

l If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from the start time anddoes not stop.

4. Click Apply and then click Close in the Result dialog box.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor

Time from the Function Tree.

2. Set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters as required. Click Apply.

3. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.

4. When the NE time is later than the monitoring time that is set, you can query the 15-minuteand 24-hour performance monitoring of an NE normally.

Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port

To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an Ethernetport.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.

l The Ethernet service must be configured.

l The performance monitoring parameters must be set.




558


Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON

Performance.2. Click the Statistics Group tab.3. Select a port from the Object drop down list.4. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions.5. Click Start and the result is shown.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON

Performance.2. Click the Statistics Group tab.3. Select a port from the Select port drop down list.4. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions.5. Click Start.

15.5.3 Resetting Board Performance RegistersAfter a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset theperformance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.



Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance

Register from the Function Tree.2. Select the ports and registers that you want to reset and click Reset.3. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is

successful.4. Click Close.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance

Register from the Function Tree.2. Select the registers that you want to reset.




559

3. Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.

NOTE

All registers supported by the NE are provided as options for setting the register.

4. Click OK.

15.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEsAfter an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following tasksets.

15.6.1 Modifying the NE NameYou can change the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.



Procedure on the U20001. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the

Function Tree.2. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.

NOTE

You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, andnumbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and>.

3. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Close.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the

Function Tree.2. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.




560

NOTE

You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, andnumbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and>.

15.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE NameYou can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running ofthe NE.



Procedure1. Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose Object Attributes from the shortcut

menu. The Attribute dialog box is displayed.2. In the Attribute > NE Attribute tab, enter the new optical NE name and click OK.3. After the optical NE name is changed successfully, the optical NE is displayed by the new

name on the Main Topology.

NOTE

An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain thefollowing special characters: | : * ? " < >.

15.6.3 Modifying GNE ParametersDuring the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or thecommunication address.

PrerequisiteYou are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.


Precautions

CAUTIONThis is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the communicationbetween a GNE and the U2000, and the communication between the GNE and the non-gatewayNEs that are managed by the GNE.




561

NOTE

l It is not recommended to change the Port No..

l In the case of IP GNE, make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment asthe IP address of the U2000. When the U2000 server and the GNE are in different network segments,you need to set the network port attributes of the router through which the U2000 server and the GNEare connected. In this way, the U2000 can log in to the GNE.

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main

Menu.2. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab.3. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter GNE dialog box. The NE is shown

in list of GNE tab.4. Select the NE in the list, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu.5. In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set the parameters.6. Click OK. In the Warning dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

15.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEsWhen the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (the number isusually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change the GNE for certainNEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.



Precautions

CAUTIONThis operation may interrupt the NE communication.

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main

Menu.2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in

the list of the NE tab.3. Select the NE in the list. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE from the

drop-down list.4. Click Apply. Click Close in the Result dialog box.




562

5. Click Refresh.

15.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Normal NEWhen you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change theGNE to a normal NE.



Precaution

CAUTIONThis operation may interrupt the service.

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main

menu.2. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab.3. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in

list of GNE tab.4. Right-click the GNE that you want to change in the list, and choose Delete GNE from the

shortcut menu. Click OK in the Confirm and Reconfirm dialog box. Click Close in theResult dialog box.

Follow-up ProcedureAfter changing the GNE to a normal NE, modify the attributes of the NE that uses the GNE andselect another GNE.

15.6.6 Changing a Normal NE to a GNEWhen you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change anormal NE to a GNE.






563

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main

menu.2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in

the list of the NE tab.3. Select the NE in the list, Right-click a normal NE under the NE Name field and choose

Change to GNE from the shortcut menu.4. In the Change to GNE dialog box, select the Gateway Type, and enter the IP Address or

NSAP Address.5. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box. Click Close in the Result dialog box.

NOTE

The NE is now changed to a GNE and appears in the GNE tab.

15.6.7 Deleting NEsIf you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE removesall information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.


Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.

On the Web LCT, you have already logged out the NE.


Background InformationWhen the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the U2000.

Procedure on the U20001. Delete a single WDM NE.

(1) Choose an optical NE in the Main Topology. Right-click the NE in the left pane andthen choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

(2) In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.2. Delete NEs in batches.

(1) Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the MainMenu. The NE Configuration Data Management window is displayed.

(2) In the left-hand pane, select multiple NEs and click . The Configuration DataManagement List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs.

(3) Select the NEs to be deleted, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed.

(4) Click OK.




564

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE.2. Click OK.

15.7 Modifying the Boards ConfigurationAfter a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board basedon the following task sets.

15.7.1 Deleting BoardsTo modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boardsfrom the NE Panel or Slot Layout.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.l The services and protection groups must be deleted.


Procedure on the U20001. Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel and choose the desire subrack.2. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.

3. Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box.4. Click OK to delete the board.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Click required subrack on which board you want

to delete is present.2. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

NOTE

When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.

15.7.2 Adding BoardsWhen manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel/Slot Layout.

Prerequisitel For U2000, You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l The NE must be created.




565

l There must be idle slot on the NE Panel Slot Layout.


U2000 or Web LCT

Background InformationThe physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the shelf. A logical board refers to a boardthat is created on the U2000 or Web LCT. After a logical board is created, you can configurethe relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services canbe available.

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main topology, double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel.

2. Select the NE to be added in the left pane on the NE Panel after performing the precedingoperation and choose the desire shelf.

3. Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the list.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.

2. Select the shelf, right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from thelist.

NOTE

For Web LCT, click Add Physical Boards. All the slots in which physical boards are configured,and the system automatically creates corresponding logical boards.

15.8 Modifying the Fibers ConfigurationAfter a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber basedon the following task sets.

15.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable InformationYou can modify the name, attenuation, length, and medium type of a fiber/cable according toits connection status and physical features.



U2000




566

Procedure1. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable

Management from the main menu. The information of all fiber/cable is displayed in thepane on the right.

2. Modifying the fiber/cable information.

l In the Name column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, entera proper name for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Resultdialog box.

l In the Length(km) column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose ModifyFiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed,enter the actual length for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the OperationResult dialog box.

l Modify the attenuation of a fiber.

(1) In the Attenuation column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose ModifyFiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.

(2) In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the actual loss and click OK. ClickClose in the Operation Result dialog box.

l Modify the medium type of the fiber.

(1) In the Medium Type column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose ModifyFiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.

(2) In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, select the actual medium typeof the fiber from the drop-down list and click OK. Click Close in the OperationResult dialog box.

15.8.2 Deleting FibersWhen adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, youneed to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.

There are no services on the fiber to be deleted.


U2000/Web LCT

Procedure on the U20001. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable

Management from the main menu.

2. To delete a fiber or cable from both the NMS database and the NE database, right-clickthis fiber or cable and then choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. TheWarning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to delete the fiber/cable.




567

CAUTIONThe deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets, trails and user-defined information. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/cable. You can export thescript of the entire network first to avoid deletion by mistake.

3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber Management from

the Function Tree.2. Select the fiber you wish to delete, and click Delete.3. Click OK.

15.9 Creating a Single NEAfter the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a singleNE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless ofwhether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matterwhat way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do notsupport the NE search function and you must create them one by one.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating

the NE of the type.l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.


Background InformationFor U2000:l First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE.l If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the U2000 is

abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.

Procedure on the U20001. Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > NE... from the

shortcut menu. The Create NE dialog box is displayed.2. Select required NE from tree structure at left hand pane.3. Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks.4. To create a GNE, proceed to 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to 6.




568

5. Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list and set the IP address.

6. Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to whichthis NE is associated, from the Gateway drop-down list.

7. Select the optical NE in Associated ONE to which the WDM NE is associated.

NOTE

When creating the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 NE, you need not to choose the optical NE that is NEbelongs to and this NE is directly created on the Main Topology.

8. Enter the NE User and Password.

NOTEThe default NE user is root, and the default password is password.

9. Click OK, the cursor is displayed as "+", click on the blank space of the physical view andthe NE is created.

Result

After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as theIP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the U2000 database.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Click Add NE > Europe in the NE list. The Add NE dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter an NE ID and an Extended ID.

3. Select Gateway Type and set related parameters.

l If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.

l If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.

4. Enter the User Name and the Password.

NOTE

The default user name is lct and the default password is password.

5. Click OK. One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally andis in the Logged In state.

Postrequisite

After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:

l The communication between the U2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings ofcommunication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.

l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.

l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.

15.10 Switching a Logged-In NE UserDuring a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create anotherNE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.




569

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.l The NE user must be created.

Background InformationAn NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at the same time. After you use an NE user to login to an NE through a U2000/Web LCT server, if you use the same NE user to log in to the sameNE through another U2000/Web LCT server, the NE user is forced to log out from the firstU2000/Web LCT server.


Procedure on the U20001. Choose Administration > NE Security Management > NE Login Management from

the Main Menu, click the NE Login Management tab.

2. Select the required NE from the NE list, and click .

NOTE

When this button is used for the first time, or the configuration data is changed, or the selected object onthe Object Tree on the left is changed, this button becomes red.

3. Click Query to query the current NE user.4. In the NE Login Management Table, select the NE and click Switch NE User. In the

Switch Current NE User dialog box, enter User and Password, and set OfflineSwitching.

NOTE

If Offline Switching is selected, the system does not check the user name and password, and thuslater login of the NE may fail, which causes the NE unreachable by the NMS. Therefore, it isrecommended not to select Offline Switching.

5. Click OK.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE

status becomes Not Logged In.2. Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed.3. Enter the User Name and the Password.4. Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.

15.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List ModeIn Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and insideNEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in thelist mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a fewfiber connections only.




570

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.l The board on relevant NEs must be created.l The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created.l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Configure Wavelength No./

Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designedwavelength.


U2000


After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE.You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with theU2000 side.

Conflicting fibers see the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. ClickSynchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in theUncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fiberscannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networkingdesign, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create theremaining fibers.

NOTE

The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topologyview, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.


Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber/CableSynchronization from the Function Tree.

2. Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side andthat on the NE side are displayed.

NOTE

Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides. U2000 is thesame as the fiber data on NEs.

Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.

Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.

3. Handle different situations as follows:l If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click

Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronizedfibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.

l If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/Cableto delete the uncreated fibers in U2000 or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then click CreateFiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.




571

Step 2 Creating fiber connections in list mode.

1. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.2. Click Create, and the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box is displayed.

NOTEThe source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot be edge ports.

3. Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box.4. Click OK.5. Click New in the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box.6. Double-click the setting area of each attributes. Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port,

Sink NE and Sink Port.7. Click Apply.

TIP

You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5, click Apply.

8. Click Close on the Operation Result dialog box. Repeat Step 6-8 to create another fiberconnection.

9. Click Apply to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in theFiber/Cable Information list.

10. Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiberconnections are correct and the line communication is available.

15.12 Configuring the Edge PortAn edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port isto set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.






572

Background InformationNOTE

l The line-side ports of the FIU and the OTU do not need this configuration. By default, such a port isa Fixed Edge Ports.

l If fiber connection between NEs has been added to a port, the port automatically becomes the edgeport of NEs.

l If fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs has been added to a port, the port cannot beconfigured as the edge port of NEs.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. Click the NE on the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection

Management from the Function Tree. Select the Edge Port tab.

2. Select the desired port in the Available Edge Ports field. Click to add the portto Selected Edge Ports.

3. Click Apply. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. ClickClose.

NOTE

When the operation is performed on the U2000, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from the Selected Edge

Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge Ports.




573

15.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-ConnectionThe intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) thatperforms grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through thecreation of single-board optical cross-connection.


When creating an optical cross-connection of a board, make sure that the optical cross-connection of the single station where this board resides does not occupy the wavelength thatthe optical cross-connection of the board uses.


Background InformationSingle-board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection areindependent from each other. The user can create single-board optical cross-connection andconfigure services based on the planning to realize grooming at the optical layer. However, asfor the single-station optical cross-connection, grooming is realized after automatic computationof the equipment. The configuration of single-board optical cross-connection and that of single-station optical cross-connection are mutually exclusive in terms of resources. When the userconfigures an optical-layer grooming board with the single-board optical cross-connection ofone wavelength, this wavelength can no longer be configured for single-station optical cross-connection.

Procedure on the U20001. Click the NE icon in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-

Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.


3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on theright of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from

the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to SelectedWavelengths.

4. Click OK. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click Close.The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

Procedure on the Web LCT1. Click the NE icon in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-

Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.

2. Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.




574

3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on theright of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the

Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to SelectedWavelengths.

4. Click OK. The Create Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

5. Click OK. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

15.14 Configuring Board WDM Port AttributesPort attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every boardhas its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameterscan be queried.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list. Click Query.

The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the window.




575

NOTE

When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set fromthe perspective of function.

3. Select Basic Attributes, Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click correspondingparameter fields to enter or select parameters.

4. Click Apply.5. Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The attributes

values of the board are the same as the ones set previously.

15.15 Configuring Board SDH Port AttributesConfigure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every boardhas its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameterscan be queried.



Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > SDH

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the drop-down list. Click Query. Click

OK in the Confirm dialog box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Theparameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the window.

NOTE

When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set fromthe perspective of function.

3. Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.4. Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.5. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

15.16 Opening/Closing LasersThis section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection offaults and the commissioning.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

To forcibly turn on the laser, you must first disable the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.For details of procedure, see Enabling/Disabling the ALS Function.




576

Impact on SystemClosing the laser of the local board interrupts the services of the downstream board.


Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the WDM board1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list.3. In the Basic Attributes tab, double-click the desired optical port. In the Laser Status field,

choose On or Off to change the laser state.4. Click Apply.5. The Modifying the following attribute(s) may cause service interruption or NE login

failure. Are you sure to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialogbox is displayed. Click OK.

6. The This operation may interrupt services or the NE cannot be logged in to as a result.Please confirm again that you need to apply the modification to the attribute(s): LaserStatus? dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

7. Click Query.

Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the SDH board1. Double-click the desired ONE icon on main topology to display the NE Panel of the ONE.2. Right-click the desired board and choose WDM Configuration from the shortcut menu.

Then, the NE Explorer window is displayed.3. Select Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.4. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and then select Port from the drop-down list.5. Double-click the Laser Switch field of the required port, and then select On or Off from

the drop-down list to change the laser state.6. Click Apply.7. The Modifying the following attribute(s) may cause service interruption or NE login

failure. Are you sure to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialogbox is displayed. Click OK.

8. The This operation may interrupt services or the NE cannot be logged in to as a result.Please confirm again that you need to apply the modification to the attribute(s): LaserStatus? dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

15.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA BoardYou can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA)board to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board.





577

The OA board must be created.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an OAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The rated optical power value of thereceive port is displayed.

Step 2 Double-click the Rated Optical Power (dBm) fields of the input and output ports, and entervalues.

Step 3 Click Apply.

Step 4 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.

----End

15.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards



Background InformationThe TDC, LSXL, LSXLR, LSQ, and NS3 board supports the configuration of receivewavelengths.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. Choose Configuration > WDM

Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click Receive Band Type and select C.4. Double-click Receive Wavelength and make required settings.




578

5. Click Apply.

15.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation ParametersIn a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You alsoneed to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition,you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmissionfibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.

Prerequisite


Applicable to the LSXL, LSQ, LSXLR, TDC, NS3 boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiXOSN 8800.

The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must beestablished correctly.

Precaution

CAUTIONThis operation may interrupt services.

Procedurel Search the best dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > DispersionCompensation Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensationparameter.

3. Select the port, click Start Search. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. The searchstatus changes to Searching. After successful search, the search status changes to Thesearch is successful.




579

NOTE

l After successful search, only the search status automatically changes. Other parameters do notchange until you query them.

l If you start searching the best value, you cannot set the dispersion compensation value.

4. Click Query. After confirmation, you can query the best dispersion compensationvalue.

5. Optional: Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.

NOTEAfter you enable the fine tune switch, the board may be fine tuned and the query result of thedispersion compensation value may change.

6. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.

l Manually set the dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > DispersionCompensation Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensationparameter.

3. Set Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) and Fine Tune Switch.

NOTE

l The dispersion compensation value must be in the range of the dispersion compensation range.

l The dispersion compensation value and the best dispersion compensation value can be fine tunedonly if they are in the fine tune range.

4. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.

----End

15.20 Configuring the Service ModeIf services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of theboard.

Prerequisite




Precautions

CAUTIONModifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.




580


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical port. Double-click the ServiceMode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list. For details, seeService Mode (WDM Interface).

Step 4 Click Apply.


----End

15.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiberis disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather thanremains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the outputoptical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.


Service Type of the board on the client side must be set to ISC1G, ISC2G, InfiniBand 2.5Gor InfiniBand 5G.

Applies to TN12TQM, TN12LQMS, TN12LQMD, TN11LOM and TN13LQM board.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000/Web LCT

Precautions

CAUTIONl Set the LPT Enabled and Automatic Laser Shutdown functions to Disabled before the

OFC function is enabled.l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree.2. Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down

list.




581

3. Select the Basic Attributes tab. Double-click the OFC Enabled field, and selectEnabled.

4. Click Apply.5. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.

15.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDMBoard

Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there isno input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interfaceboard does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost,the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the servicelife of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eyedamage.


The OTU board must be created.


Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the

Function Tree. Select the By Function option button.2. Select Automatic Laser Shutdown from the drop-down list. Click Query and the attribute

of Automatic Laser Shutdown for the port or channel are shown in the window.3. Select an optical port and set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Enabled.

NOTEThis operation may cause service interruption or NE login failure. You can confirm the settingsaccording to actual service requirement.

4. Click Apply.5. Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value

of Automatic Laser Shutdown is the same as the one set previously. When this parameteris set to Enabled, the relevant laser on the client side of the board is shut down automaticallywhen an R_LOS alarm is reported from the WDM side of the board.

15.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH BoardAutomatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there isno input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interfaceboard does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost,the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the servicelife of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eyedamage.




582


The optical interface board must be created.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsU2000/Web LCT (U2000is recommended)


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdownfrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms) andContinuously On-test Period (ms).

Step 3 When you click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

----End

15.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering ProtectionSwitching

You can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection switchingof the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.


The OTU board must be applicable to the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.

For the boards for which you configure SD conditions, see the parameter description of eachOTU board in the Hardware Description.


Background InformationThe following protection trigger conditions are supported: B1_SD, OTUk_DEG andODUk_PM_DEG.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board and then choose Configuration > WDMInterface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Channel from the drop-down list.




583

Step 3 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Step 4 Double-click the SD Trigger Condition cell that you want to set. In the SD TriggerCondition dialog box, select one or more options and then click OK.

NOTE

After the configuration of the parameters for the SD trigger condition of automatic protection switching,the switching will enable when a selected alarm happens.

l The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that regenerator section B1 signals in the received signals aredegraded. This alarm occurs, when the processing board detects the B1 byte, indicating that the biterror rate of the regenerator section signals exceeds the specified threshold value.

l The OTUk_DEG is an alarm indicating that OTUk signal degraded. This alarm occurs when bit errorsare of burst distribution and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold. When biterrors are of Poisson distribution, if signals degrade this alarm occurs; if the bit error count crosses thethreshold, an OTUk_EXC alarm occurs.

l The ODUk_PM_DEG is an alarm indicating that ODUk PM signal degraded. This alarm occurs whenthe BIP8 detection mode is bursty mode and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses thethreshold.

Step 5 Click Apply in the lower right corner.

Step 6 Click Query. Confirm that the value of SD Trigger Condition is the same as the value that isset.

----End

15.25 Setting the NULL Mapping StatusSome OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. Forthe channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping statusto Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored.


The OTU boards or tributary boards and line boards must be configured. For details, seeHardware Description.




584


Background InformationFigure 15-7 shows the common networking mode for NULL mapping detection.

Figure 15-7 Networking diagram for NULL mapping test

Precaution

CAUTIONThe PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from theFunction Tree.

Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click the NULL Mapping Status and selectEnabled.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Start the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Select a board and choose Configuration > OTNOverhead Management > OPU Overhead.

Step 6 Check if the value of PT Received is the same as the PT to be received.

----End

15.26 Configuring Path BindingBy configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals tomultiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower ordersignals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases.




585


Applies to the TN11TDX board.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Path Binding from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 Click Configure, and the Configure Path Binding dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, andDirection. For details, see 16.1.11 Path Binding.Configure relevant information of the pathbinding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and Direction.

NOTEFor the bound path, ODU1-1 is required. If you want to select other paths as the bound path, you mustselect paths in the order from ODU1-2 to ODU1-4 according to the actual service situation.

Step 4 Click Apply.


----End

15.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength MonitoringThe WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or opticalmultiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths andreports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the function,the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be configured on theU2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.


Ensure the normal DCN communication between NEs.

The WMU board must be created after the physical WMU board is installed.


Background Informationl The wavelength locking function is achieved after the WMU board is configured with the

centralized wavelength monitoring function.




586

l When configuring wavelength monitoring, check the transmit directions of each OTUboard and the fiber connections. In addition, check which optical port on the WMU boardis connected. Based on the check result, configure the optical ports on the WMU board andwavelength monitoring of the OTU board.

l There are three types that the wavelengths be locked:– Scenario I: The OTU, WMU, and optical-layer boards are on the same NE, and logical

fiber connections are configured. In this case, the wavelengths can be lockedautomatically without any operation performed by the user.

– Scenario II: The OTU and WMU boards are on the same NE, but the optical-layer boardsare on another NE. In this case, you need to configure the mapping between the OTUboard and WMU board.

– Scenario III: The OTU board and the WMU board are on different NEs. Ensure that theNEs be allocated to the same optical NE and that the DCN communication between theNEs is normal. You need to configure the mapping between the OTU board and theWMU board.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the WMU board and choose Configuration > WavelengthMonitoring Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Wavelength Monitoring Unit field, and choose an optical port of the WMU boardfrom the drop-down list.

Step 3 Click Query. The information about the wavelength monitoring that has been configured isdisplayed.

NOTESee 16.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management to query and enter the parameters.

Step 4 Click New. The New Monitored Object dialog box is displayed. Select the NE and the OTUboard where the wavelengths to be detected are located.

NOTEClick New. The system displays all the OTU boards that are not configured with wavelength monitoringbut support wavelength monitoring.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close. Thewavelength monitoring that has been created is displayed in the user interface.




587

NOTE

l If the logical fiber connections are configured, click Calculate OTU. The system calculates all theOTU boards that have been logically connected based on the fiber connection relationship. ClickApply so that the wavelength monitoring configuration of the OTU boards is delivered.

l After you click Calculate OTU, if some of the displayed boards do not need wavelength monitoring,click Delete to remove them one by one.

----End

15.28 Configuring the FEC FunctionWhen configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enablethe function and set the FEC type of the current optical port.

Prerequisite


The corresponding OTU units must be created.





Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button and select Channel from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click FEC Working State and FEC Type fields,and select an appropriate value.

NOTEAfter changing the service type on the board, you need to check whether FEC Type is correct on the U2000.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The values ofFEC Working State and FEC Type are the same as the ones set previously.

----End




588

15.29 Enabling and Disabling LPTWhen the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can bemonitored.

Prerequisite


The corresponding OTU units must be created.

The services on the boards must be normal and must be of no protection.






Step 3 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Enable or disable the LPT.

l To enable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPTEnabled, and choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.

l To disable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPTEnabled, and choose Disabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.

Step 4 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of LPTEnabled is the same as the one set previously.

----End

15.30 Setting the Speed Level of FansThis section describes how to set the speed level of fans.

Prerequisite

Fan Speed Mode must be Adjustable Speed Mode.






589


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fan Attribute from the FunctionTree.

Step 2 Select a shelf for which you want to change the fan speed from the Subrack drop-down list.

Step 3 Select Adjustable Speed Mode in the Fan Speed Mode pane.

Step 4 Set Fan Speed Level.NOTE

The values of Fan Speed Level are as follows:

l For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800: Stop, Low, Medium, and High.

l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32/OptiX OSN 8800 T64: Stop, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, and High.

l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16: Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, and High.

Step 5 Click OK in the dialog box displayed. Click Apply.

----End

15.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm SignalsUsing the RS232 Serial Port

This section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel ofalarm signals of an external device.

PrerequisiteThe TNK2SCC, TN22SCC, TN52SCC, or TN16AUX board is installed on the NE.

The TN12SC1, TN12SC2, or TN11ST2 board is installed on the NE.

The SCC board and the SC1, SC2 or ST2 board are installed in the same subrack.


ContextA WDM device can transparently transmit one channel of alarm signals of an external deviceusing its RS232 serial port. In this manner, the WDM device can centrally manage alarms of theexternal device.

When the WDM device uses its RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of alarmsignals of an external device, the data source and sinks must be specified. Broadcastcommunication is required from the source to the sinks. The source can broadcast a commandto all the sinks. The sinks can send data to the source but only one sink is allowed to do so at atime. The source and sinks can be specified randomly.

Table 15-1 lists the interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarmsignals using their RS232 serial ports.




590

Table 15-1 Interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarm signals

Device Type Interface Board Port

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 EFI1 Serial

OptiX OSN 8800 T32 EFI1 Serial

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 EFI Serial

OptiX OSN 6800 EFI Serial

OptiX OSN 3800 AUX EXT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC/AUX board and choose Configuration > RS232Transparently Transmit from the Function Tree.

Step 2 From the RS232 Data Source drop-down list, select Shelf11(subrack)-17-52SCC-1.

Step 3 In the Available RS232 Data Sink area, select Shelf11(subrack)-12-12SC2–1, and click to add the selected board to the Selected RS232 Data Sink area.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

----End

15.32 Configuring Ethernet BoardsDuring the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes mustbe configured.

ContextFollow the process given below to configure an Ethernet board:




591

15.32.1 Configuring Internal PortsThe attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured withservices or used for tests. You can configure the internal ports (VCTRUNK ports) for an Ethernetboard.

Prerequisite


The Ethernet boards must be created.




CAUTIONTo ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributesof the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.

NOTE

The configuration items are different according to different boards.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and select Configuration > Ethernet InterfaceManagement > Ethernet Interface in the Function Tree. Select the Internal Port optionbutton.

Step 2 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG. Click Apply. For the configuration of relatedparameters, see TAG Attributes.

Step 3 Optional: Click Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the port encapsulation and mapping. ClickApply.

NOTE

This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.

The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a generalmechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can map the variable-lengthpayload into the byte-synchronized transport path. The client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented,such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), orcommon bit data streams. The GFP protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.

Step 4 Click the Network Attributes tab and set the Port Type of the internal port. Click Apply.




592

NOTE

l In the case of UNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute.

l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that thedata packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.

l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that thedata packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.

l When the working mode of a port is NNI mode, that is, when the port functions as a network-to-networkinterface, it is used for connecting to another network node.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.

Step 5 Optional: Click LCAS tab and set the port LCAS. Click Apply. For relevant information, seeLCAS of Feature Description .

NOTE


Step 6 Optional: Click Bound Path tab, click Query to browse the bound paths.NOTE


Step 7 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the port attribute. Click Apply.NOTE

l Broadcast packet suppression is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and all packets.The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see Advanced Attributes (Internal Port).


----End

15.32.2 Configuring External PortsThe attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured withservices or used for tests. You can configure the external ports for an Ethernet board.


The Ethernet board must be created.


Precaution

CAUTIONTo ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributesof the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.




593


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the appropriate Ethernet board and then select Configuration >Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select theExternal Port option button.

Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab and set the basic attributes of the external port.

NOTE

l Working mode: If Working Mode at one end is set to Auto-Negotiation, Working Mode at the otherend also must be set to Auto-Negotiation. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

l MAC loopback and PHY loopback: They are used for locating faults and are service-affecting. Thetwo are mutually exclusive. When the value of MAC loopback is set to Inloop, the value of PHYloopback is set to Non-Loopback automatically. The same applies to the reverse case.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see Basic Attributes (External Port).

Step 3 Click Apply.

Step 4 Click Flow Control tab, set the Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode andAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the external port.

NOTE

l Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is Auto-Negotiation. Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control means the port only transmits and does not receiveflow control frames. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit andreceive only PAUSE frames. Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control means that thesymmetric or dissymmetric flow control mode is selected according to the auto-negotiation.

l Non-Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is notAuto-Negotiation. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit andreceive PAUSE frames. Send Only means that the port is able to transmit PAUSE frames only. ReceiveOnly means the port is able to receive PAUSE frames only.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see Flow Control (External Port).

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG of the port. Click Apply. For the configurationof related parameters, see TAG Attributes.

Step 7 Click Network Attributes tab, set the port attributes of the external port.

NOTE

l In the case of UNI/NNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the TagAware/Access/Hybrid attribute.

l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that thedata packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.

l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that thedata packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.




594

Step 8 Click Apply.

Step 9 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold,Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.

NOTE

l Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet andall packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.

l For the configuration of related parameters, see Advanced Attributes (External Port).

Step 10 Click Apply.


----End

15.33 Verifying Ethernet ServicesAfter configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication isnormal.


Ethernet services must be created.


Background InformationNOTEYou can select different steps to verify Ethernet services based on the networking and applicationrequirements.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCTStep 1 Optional: Test Ethernet services. For details, see Testing Ethernet Services of Feature

Description.NOTEThe board supports the test of Ethernet services refer to Hardware Description.

Step 2 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet services. For details, see Configuring the IEEE802.1ag OAM of Feature Description.

Step 3 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet ports. For details, see Configuring the IEEE 802.3ahOAM of Feature Description.

----End

15.34 Configuring the PRBS TestSome OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS)error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and the




595

client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. Inthis way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting a meterto the equipment during the deployment.

15.34.1 PRBS Application ScenariosSpecific application scenarios are provided to meet different requirements of the PRBS test.

In the PRBS test, OTU boards are used as the meter board and the auxiliary board. There aretwo common networking modes for the PRBS test. In the first mode, the PRBS test is started onthe client side of the OTU board. In the second mode, the PRBS test is started on the WDM sideof an OTU board. The details on the two modes are provided as follows.

l Starting the PRBS test on the client side

See Figure 15-8. One OTU board is used as a meter board. The meter board generatesPRBS signals and sends the signals to the client side of the local auxiliary board. The signalsare then looped back on the WDM or client side or the auxiliary board at the opposite endby using fibers.

Figure 15-8 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the client side

Nearend

auxiliaryboard

IN

OUT

TX

RXFarend

auxiliaryboard

IN

OUT

1

1: Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback2: Loopback on the client side/fiber loopback

2Meterboard

TX

RX

WDM network

l Starting the PRBS test on the WDM side

See Figure 15-9. One OTU board is used as a meter board. The meter board generatesPRBS signals and sends the signals to the WDM side of the auxiliary board at the oppositeend. The signals are looped back on the WDM side of the auxiliary board at the oppositeend.

Figure 15-9 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the WDM side

IN

OUT

WDM network

Farend

auxiliaryboard

IN

OUT

1

1: Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback

Meterboard




596

NOTE

The LEM24 and LEX4 boards are applicable to this scenario (PRBS test on the WDM side) and functiononly as meter boards. When the LEM24 and LEX4 boards are used in this scenario, other OTU boardsmust be used as auxiliary boards at the far end.

15.34.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary BoardBefore you configure a PRBS test on the meter board, set PRBS Test Status of the auxiliaryboards at the local and remote ends.

Prerequisite


The corresponding OTU must be configured.

The service type must be set according to the board type.

The WDM-side outloop, client-side inloop, or fiber loopback is configured on the remoteauxiliary board based on the networking requirements.



Precautions

CAUTIONl Create cross-connections between the IP port and the ClientLP port before enabling the PRBS

on the client side. Otherwise, the PRBS test will fail to be enabled. Do not delete the createdcross-connections after the PRBS is enabled.

l After the PRBS Test Status is enabled, do not perform any other operations, such asmodifying the service type, opening or closing a laser, or configuring a loopback.

l After the PRBS test is complete, stop the test. Then, configure the PRBS Test Status of theboard to Disabled.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as an auxiliary board and chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.


Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click PRBS Test Status field, and selectEnabled.




597

Step 4 Click Apply. A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. ClickClose.

NOTE

Set the service type of the auxiliary board before configuring the PRBS test status.

----End

15.34.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter BoardIn the PRBS test, the OTU sends out the PRBS code and monitors the PRBS code that is loopedback from the remote board. After comparing the PRBS code that is sent with the code that isreceived, you can determine that the current link or equipment is normal or not.


The corresponding OTU must be configured.

The service type must be set according to the board type.

Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers of all OTUboards are turned on.

When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on the OTUboard which is used as auxiliary board.


Precautions

CAUTIONWhen the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test is used onlyin deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.Before starting the PRBS function on the client side, create a cross-connection between the IPand clientLP ports; otherwise, starting the PRBS function fails. After the PRBS function isstarted, the cross-connection cannot be deleted.




598


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as meter board and chooseConfiguration > PRBS Test from the Function tree.

Step 2 Select a channel or a port in the right pane, and set Duration and Measured in Time.

NOTE

Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10 minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the actual situation.

Step 3 Optional: Choose Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane inan accumulative manner.

NOTE

In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the previous nseconds.

Step 4 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the service isdisplayed.

Step 5 Click OK to start the PRBS test.

Step 6 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.

NOTE

l If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally working.

l If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line.

l If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be interrupted or have loudnoise.

----End

15.35 Managing NE Power ConsumptionYou can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to ensurethat energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE runs in thenormal state.

15.35.1 Monitoring NE Power ConsumptionYou can monitor the power consumption of an NE, to ensure that the actual NE configurationdoes not exceed the maximum power consumption.

Querying the Power Consumption of an NE

After you query the power consumption of an NE, if the power consumption exceeds thethreshold, you need to configure energy conservation for the NE in a timely manner.


It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.




599


Background InformationYou can use this function to query the power consumption threshold, and the nominal and currentpower consumption of an NE.

You can query the power consumption of an NE on a per-subrack basis. The power consumptionof an NE is displayed in the NE/Shelf Name format.

You can query the NE threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 on a per-partition basis.

The nominal power consumption of an NE is the sum of the nominal power consumption of allboards on the NE.

The current power consumption of an NE is the actual power consumption of a running NE andis calculated based on the actual voltage and current.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > PowerManagement from the Main Menu. Click the NE Power tab.

Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs. After the double-right-arrow buttonturns red, click the button.

Step 3 Click Query and the result is displayed.

----End

Querying the Power Consumption of a BoardYou can query the power consumption of a board to learn the board that has abnormally highpower consumption, which causes high NE power consumption or threshold crossing.




Background Informationl You can use this function to query the logical board status, board nominal power

consumption, physical board type, board current power consumption, and otherinformation.




600

l The nominal power consumption of a board is a fixed value and is coded in the software.l The current power consumption of a board is the actual power consumption of a running

board and is calculated based on the actual voltage and current.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > PowerManagement from the Main Menu. Click the Board Power tab.

Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more boards, and click .


----End

15.35.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NEYou can configure energy conservation for an NE to dynamically adjust the power consumptionof the NE. In this way, environment protection and energy conservation are achieved.




Background InformationThere are five power saving modes of an NE: Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-ConnectBoard, Idle Ports, Standby Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Cross-Connect Bus. The defaultvalue for Idle Cross-Connect Bus is Enable Power Saving, and cannot be changed. The modesIdle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Ports can be set to EnablePower Saving or Disable Power Saving. The item Standby Cross-Connect Board can be setto Hot Standby or Warm Standby (the power saving state).

Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board is applicable only to the XCM and SXM boards (whenthe SXM board is used with the XCT board) intended for the OptiX OSN 8800, but not applicableto the XCH boards.




601

Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > PowerManagement from the Main Menu. Click the Power Saving Configuration tab.

Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs, and click .

CAUTIONIf you enable energy conservation for idle ports, the lasers of the unused optical ports arecompletely turned off. If the optical ports carry services or DCN channels even if the ports arenot used, after you enable energy conservation, services may be interrupted or communicationfaults may occur at the optical ports.l If you enable energy conservation for an NE, you need to set the optical ports to Unused.

To achieve this, do as follows: In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board and chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Set Channel Use Status toUnused.

l You can set the optical ports to Unused regardless of whether the optical ports carry services.When enabling energy conservation for idle ports, ensure that the optical ports do not carryservices or DCN channels before setting them to Unused.

If you delete logical boards from an NE with energy conservation enabled or disable all DCNchannels, ESC communication and services will be affected.

Step 3 Set one or all of Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Ports to EnablePower Saving.

NOTE

l If you enable energy conservation for idle boards, energy conservation is enabled for the standby boardswhich are not added with logical boards and not configured with services on the subrack.

l If you enable energy conservation for a lower order cross-connect board that is not used, when youconfigure a lower order cross-connection for the board, the lower-order cross-connection is availableafter a delay of 1 or 2 seconds.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the set values.

----End

15.35.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption ReportBy viewing the network-wide power consumption report, you can learn the network-wide powerconsumption statistics, annually-conserved energy, and other information.






602


Background InformationQuerying the network-wide NE power consumption is time-consuming. If the number of NEsqueried exceeds 100, a dialog box is displayed asking you whether to continue.

The network-wide NE power consumption report is based on NEs instead of subracks.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > PowerManagement from the Main Menu. Click the Power Consumption Stat. Report tab.

Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs, and click .

NOTE

It is recommended that you do not select more than 100 NEs at a time. Otherwise, the operation may takea long time.


NOTE

l During the query process, you can learn the query status according to the progress bar.

l Click Cancel to stop the query.

Step 4 Optional: Click Print to print the NE power consumption report.

Step 5 Optional: Click Save As to save the report to any directory.

----End

15.36 Configuring NE Clock SourcesThe time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. Tosynchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board accordingto the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directionsand termination points for networkwide clock synchronization.

15.36.1 Adding Clock SourcesWhen configuring the clock used by the SCC board, you can add clock sources to providedifferent reference clocks. You can select different clock sources to decide the direction of clocksynchronization in the network.





603

Applies to the SCC board.

The NE must be configured with the OSC board.



Background InformationThe equipment does not allows you to set the clock source priority of an NE.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from theFunction Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities.

NOTEClock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.

Step 3 In the clock source list, right-click and choose Add Clock Source from the shortcut menu. TheAdd Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 In the Add Clock Source dialog box, select a clock source and click OK. The selected clocksource appears in the clock source list.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

15.36.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NEWhen configuring the clock used by the SCC board, clock sources are arranged in a descendingorder according to their priorities. The clock source with the highest priority is chosen forsynchronization. You can set clock source priorities to adjust the direction of clocksynchronization in the network.

Prerequisite


Applies to the SCC board.

The NE must be configured with the OSC board.




604


Background InformationThe equipment does not allows you to set the clock source priority of an NE.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from theFunction Tree.

NOTE

The clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.

Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities.

Step 3 On the U2000, select a clock source, and click or to adjust the clock source priority.

NOTE

On the Web LCT, select a clock source, and click or to adjust the clock source priority.

NOTE

The priority of the internal clock source is the lowest and cannot be adjusted.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query to display the current clock source priority of the NE.

----End

15.37 Backing Up and Restoring NE DataTo ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.

15.37.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration MethodsYou need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCCboard of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDBdatabase of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This sectiondescribes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method asrequired.




605

Comparison of Backup and Restoration MethodsThe locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, CF card,local server, and remote server. The data backup and restoration methods vary according tostorage locations. See Table 15-2.

Table 15-2 Data backup and restoration methods and application scenarios

Backup and Restoration Method Application Scenario

Back up/Restore the NE database to/from anSCC board

Backs up the NE data in the DRDB databaseof the SCC board to the flash database, whenthe SCC board does not have a CF card.l After a warm reset on the SCC board, the

MDB reads the configuration from theDRDB database.

l After a cold reset on the SCC board, theMDB reads the configuration from theFLASH database.

Back up/Restore the NE database to/from aCF card

Backs up the NE data in the DRDB databaseof the SCC board to the CF card, when theSCC board has a CF card.During the restoration, the database isrestored from the CF card to the DRDBdatabase of the SCC board.l After a warm reset on the SCC board, the

MDB reads the configuration from theDRDB database.

l After a cold reset on the SCC board, theMDB reads the configuration from theFLASH database.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMSserver

Stores the data in the computer where theNMS server resides.During restoration, select the backup file inthe directory where the NE data is saved.

Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMSclient

Stores the data in the computer where theNMS client resides.During restoration, select the backup file inthe directory where the NE data is saved.

NOTEAfter the warm resets on other boards, the NE memory data is issued to the boards. When the actualconfiguration of a board is consistent with the configuration saved in the database for restoration, theprocess of delivering configuration data to the board does not interrupt services.




606

NOTE

The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 8800 support CF cards.

The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 support CF cards.

The SCC board of the OptiX OSN 3800 does not support CF cards.

NE Database

The NE configuration data is saved in the NE database. There are three types of NE databases:l MDB: Memory database. The data in an MDB database is changed when the configuration

information is changed. The data will be lost when the SCC board is reset or a power failureoccurs.

l DRDB: Dynamic random database. The data that is verified is automatically saved in theDRDB database. The data will be lost when a power failure occurs but will not be lost aftera warm reset is performed.

l FDB: Flash database. There are FDB0 and FDB1 databases. The data can be savedpermanently.

When the NE configuration data is issued to the SCC board, it is saved in the MDB database. Ifthe verification is successful, the SCC board automatically copies the contents in the MDBdatabase to the DRDB database and issues the verified configuration data to the boards. TheDRDB database is copied from the DRDB database to the FDB database, as a backup of theDRDB database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board checks whetherthere is configuration data in the DRDB database. If there is configuration data, the data isrestored from the DRDB database. If the data in the DRDB database is damaged, the data isrestored from the FDB0 and FDB1 databases.

NE Configuration Data

The NE configuration data refers to the information in the DRDB database of the NE, such asthe board configuration, clock configuration and protection relationships of the NE. It is theinstruction file of the NE and the key for the NE to operate normally on the entire network.

NE Database Package

The NE database package is a package that contains all database files on an NE and a file listthat defines and manages those files.

The NE database package and NE configuration data are the same data on the NE of differentsoftware versions.

15.37.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF CardYou need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance. You can back up the NE datain the DRDB database of the SCC board to a CF card manually, to ensure the automaticrestoration of the operation after the data in the DRDB database is lost on the SCC board or apower failure occurs on the equipment.

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.l A CF card must be installed on the SCC board.




607




Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Managementfrom the Main Menu. The NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click .

Step 3 Select one or more NEs in the Configuration Data Management List.

Step 4 Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.

Step 5 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

Step 6 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

NOTEThe NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation during the backupprocess.

----End

Procedure on the Web LCT

Step 1 Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Choose Back Up NE Database > Manually Back Upto CF Card.

NOTEThe NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation during the backupprocess.

Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

----End

15.37.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMSClient

This section describes how to back up device data manually for multiple devices of the samedevice type. You can back up device data to the NMS server or the NMS client.

Prerequisite

The FTP, TFTP, or SFTP server must be configured and the FTP, TFTP, or SFTP service mustbe started.





608

Background Informationl The backup operation can be performed only for multiple devices of the same device type.l When you select the device type in the device tree, all the devices and the device type

versions related to the device type are displayed in the NE View table.l The files backed up from the server can be viewed on the Backup Information tab.

ProcedureStep 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data

Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Right click the device(s) that you want to back up in the NE View table.NOTE

The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.

Step 3 Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog.

Step 4 Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to back up the selected device information.NOTE

By default, NMS Server is selected and the NMS Server is selected, the selected device information issaved on the NMS server.

Step 5 Optional: If NMS Client is selected, click to select the location where the device datahas to be backed up.

Step 6 Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). On the NE View tab, thebackup progress is displayed.

----End

15.37.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC BoardWhen the database file is lost during the NE maintenance or because of an NE fault, you canrestore the DRDB database file that is backed up to the Flash database on the SCC board.




609

Prerequisitel You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.l The NE data must have been backed up from the DRDB database to the Flash database on

the SCC board.


Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the active SCC board in the NE panel, choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset. ClickOK in the Confirm dialog box.

NOTE

The reset modes for different SCC board are different. Select the reset mode as required.

Step 2 Click OK.

----End

15.37.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF CardWhen the database file is lost during the NE maintenance or because of an NE fault, you canrestore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the CF card.


The SCC board must be with a CF card and the NE data from DRDB database must be backedup to the CF card.


Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Managementfrom the Main Menu. The NE Configuration Data Management interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select one or more NEs and click .

Step 3 In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs.

Step 4 Click Restore NE Database. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that therestoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Click OK to start to restore the NE database.

NOTEThe NMS takes a few minutes for operation. Do not perform any operation during the process.




610

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureAfter the NE database is restored, the database on the CF card is restored to the DRDB databaseof the SCC board, but not issued to the boards. If you want to restore the configuration data ofthe boards, perform a warm reset on the SCC board. Then, perform warm resets on other boards.During the reset process of these boards, the NE issues the configuration data to the boards again.

15.37.6 Restoring Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMSClient

This section describes how to restore the device data from the NMS server or the NMS client.

Prerequisitel The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server must be configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service must be

started.l To perform the Recover operation from client, the SFTP server must be configured, and

the SFTP service must be started.


Background Informationl You cannot perform the restoration operation for multiple devices of different device types.l When you select the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the

device type is displayed in the NE View table.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE DataBackup/Restoration from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Right-click the device(s) whose data you want to restore in the NE View table.

Step 3 Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog.

Step 4 In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be restored. If the backup file is not listed inthe File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup file in the Select File dialogbox.




611

NOTE

In the Recover dialog box, you can select the Deliver To Board Activate to apply the configuration tothe board.

Step 5 Select NMS Server or NMS Client to restore the backup file for the selected device(s). Bydefault NMS Server is selected.l If NMS Server is selected, select the appropriate backup file from the NMS server. The

selected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field.

l If NMS Client is selected, click to select the backup file from the NMS Client. Theselected backup file path is displayed in the File To Be Recovered field.

Step 6 Click OK.The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the FileName drop-down list.

Step 7 Click Start, the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to start therestoration operation.

----End

Result

After the device data is restored, right-click the device in the NE View table. Select ActivationDatabase... to open the Activation Database dialog box, and then click Start to activate thedevice database.

NOTE

In the Activation Database dialog box, you can select the Deliver To Board Activate to apply theactivation to the board.

If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, theU2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.




612

16 Parameters Reference

About This Chapter

Describes the parameter-related information that needs to be configured for boards in differenttypes and WDM system functions on the U2000.

16.1 Parameters (Creating a Network)Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.

16.2 Parameters: WDM InterfaceThis section describes how to configure ports on WDM boards.

16.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide 16 Parameters Reference


613

16.1 Parameters (Creating a Network)Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.

16.1.1 Laser Spectrum AnalysisThe laser spectrum analysis is used to analyze an optical signal and to obtain parameters suchas optical power, central wavelengths and optical signal noise ratios (OSNRs) of the opticalpaths. You can use this function to determine the transmission quality of the current opticalsignal. In this user interface, you can query and print the spectrum analysis result of the opticalsignal.

ParametersField Value Description

Port Number l On the U2000, forexample: NE185-10-MCA-2(R02)

l On the Web LCT, forexample: 1(IN1)

Displays the port number ofeach path of the spectrumanalysis board.For MCA4, there are fourports. For MCA8, there areeight ports.

Compensation Power (dBm) Range: -10 to +30. Forexample: 20

Due to the factors such as thecoupling ratio and opticalboard attenuation of thespectrum analysis board, theoptical power value of eachpath after analysis has a fixeddeviation from the actualvalue. You can set this fieldto keep consistency betweenthe analysis value and theactual one.



614

Field Value Description

Spectrum Data Wavelength No, StandardWavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz), Central Wavelength(nm)/Frequency (THz),Wavelength Deviation (nm),Optical Power (dBm), OSNR(dB)

Displays the result of theoptical performance dataafter spectrum analysis.Wavelength No: indicates thewavelength No. of eachoptical path.Standard Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz): indicatesthe standard centralwavelength of the opticalpath.Central Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz): indicatesthe actual central wavelengthof the optical path.Wavelength Deviation (nm):deviation between thestandard wavelength and theactual wavelength.Optical Power (dBm): theoptical power of the opticalpath.OSNR (dB): the opticalsignal noise ratio of theoptical path.

Spectrum Waveform None Displays spectrum data ingraphics.

Profile None Displays the spectrum profileof the optical signal.

X-Axis Frequency Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis forthe Spectrum Data,Spectrum Waveform, andProfile represents thefrequency.

X-Axis Wavelength Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis forthe Spectrum Data,Spectrum Waveform, andProfile represents thewavelength.

Automatically query whenthis window is displayed

Checked, Unchecked Sets whether to automaticallyquery when the window isdisplayed.



615

16.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring ManagementWavelength monitoring boards such as the WMU can monitor wavelengths transmitted fromthe optical ports at the WDM side of the OTU boards (including service convergence units).This section describes how to query and set the wavelength monitoring.


Wavelength Monitoring Unit For example: OTM1-NE183-5-WMU-1(IN1)

Selects a wavelengthmonitoring unit.

Wavelength MonitoringObject

For example: OTM1-NE183-2-TMX-1(IN/OUT)

Displays the wavelengthmonitored object.

Wavelength For example: C/1/1529.16/196.050

Displays the wavelength ofthe monitored object.

16.1.3 Orderwire Board SettingsThis section describes how to set the orderwire board before running the equipment. The settingoptions contain orderwire board settings and settings for the first orderwire phone.


Orderwire BoardSettings

AvailableBoards

For example:SC1

The boards that can be set as theorderwire board.

Selected Board For example:SC1

The board that is selected as theorderwire board.

Settings for theFirst OrderwirePhone

AvailableBoards

For example:SC1

The boards that can be set as the firstorderwire board.

Selected Board For example:SC1

The board that is selected as the firstorderwire board.

16.1.4 GeneralThis section describes how to set orderwire phone before running the equipment. You can setcall waiting time, dialing mode, conference call number, one to three orderwire phone number,and orderwire phone port.



616


Call Waiting Time(s) 1-9Default: 9

The Call Waiting Time(s)parameter specifies thetimeout period of searching anorderwire route. If the periodof searching an orderwireroute exceeds the specifiedvalue, the orderwire phonechanges to the busy tonestatus.On the U2000, click CallWaiting Time(s) for moreinformation.

Dialing Mode Pulse, Dual-Tone FrequencyDefault: Dual-ToneFrequency

Displays the orderwire dialingmode.

Conference Call 100-99999999Default: 999

The Conference Callparameter specifies the phonenumbers of networkwideorderwire calls.On the U2000, clickConference Call for moreinformation.

Phone 1, Phone 2, Phone 3 100-99999999 The Phone parameterspecifies the phone numbersof orderwire addressing calls.An addressing call refers to apoint-to-point call.The overhead supports amaximum of 3-channelorderwire phone number. Assome of the equipmentssupport Phone1 only, Phone2and Phone3 are not available.When the value is null, afterthe configuration is delivered,the corresponding data onNEs remains unchangedinstead of being cleared.On the U2000, click Phone formore information.

Selected Orderwire Port For example: 12-SC2-1 Selects the line board port fororderwire transmission.



617


Available Orderwire Port Available Orderwire PortDefault: Bid-BidType-PortID

The Available OrderwirePort parameter specifieswhether the optical interfaceis used to make orderwirecalls.On the U2000, click AvailableOrderwire Port for moreinformation.

16.1.5 Conference CallThis section describes how to query and set the use mode of conference call at an NE, query andset conference call attributes, and select a conference call port.

Parameters


Conference Call Authorities Able to Listen and Speak,Able to Listen but not SpeakDefault: Able to Listen andSpeak

Displays or sets theconference call authorities.NOTEl Able to Listen and Speak:

The user of the conferencecall can either hear thevoices from other phones inthe networkwideconference call or let otherphone users hear his ownvoice.

l Able to Listen but notSpeak: The user of theconference call can onlyhear the voices from otherphones in the networkwideconference call but cannotlet other phone users hearhis own voice.

Selected Conference CallPort

For example: 12-SC2-1 The optical ports in this listare used for conference call.

Available Conference CallPort

Available Orderwire PortDefault: Bid-BidType-PortID

The Available ConferenceCall Port parameterspecifies whether the opticalinterface is used to makeconference calls.On the U2000, clickAvailable Conference CallPort for more information.



618

16.1.6 AuxiliaryThis section describes how to query and set auxiliary parameters.

Parameters


Subnet No. Length 1, 2Default: 1

The Subnet No. Lengthparameter specifies thelength of the subnet numberof the orderwire subnets if theentire network is divided intomultiple orderwire subnets.On the U2000, click SubnetNo. Length for moreinformation.

First Communication Port l On the U2000: S1, S2,RS232, RS422

l On the Web LCT: RS232,RS422

Selects the first datacommunication port for SDHNNI connection to achievethe communication with theopposite end of the SDH NNIorderwire.

First Phone Port F1 port, Phone2, Phone3 Selects the first phone portfor the SDH NNI orderwire.

16.1.7 NE AttributesThis section describes how to view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, andIP address.

Parameters


l On the U2000: IDl On the Web LCT: NE ID

For example: 1 Displays the unique ID of anNE on the NMS foridentifying an NE, which isthe basis of communicationbetween the NMS and an NE.

Extended ID 1 to 254Default: 9

For NE ID extension.On the U2000, clickExtended ID for moreinformation.

Name For example: NE70 Displays the NE name, forthe convenience of searchingfor the NE.



619


Remarks - Enters extra notes of the NEif desired.

Gateway Type l On the U2000: Non-gateway, Gateway

l On the Web LCT: IPGateway, Serial Port

The gateway type of an NEdecides the mode ofcommunication between theNE and the NMS.

Affiliated ONE For example: ONE A Selects the affiliated ONE.

Affiliated Gateway For example: NE181 When you are creating aNon-Gateway NE, you canselect a created gateway NEas its affiliated GNE here.

Affiliated Gateway Protocol IP Displays the protocol usedfor communication betweenthe affiliated Gateway NEand the NMS.

l On the U2000: NE Userl On the Web LCT: User

Name

For example: root The NE name is used whenlogging in to the NE. Beforethe NE is configured, use theinternally reserved user nameroot for login.

Password For example: password Corresponds to the above NEuser password. Thecorresponding password forthe reserved user root ispassword.

16.1.8 NE User ManagementThis section describes how to manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, deleteand modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.

Parameters (U2000)

Table 16-1 NE user parameters


NE For example: NE70 The operation objectselected.



620


NE user Up to 8 characters can besupported.

The name of NE user. Click NE User (NE UserManagement) for moreinformation.

User Level Monitor level, Operationlevel, Maintenance level,System level, Debug level

The operations carried out bythe NE user are classified intofive levels, namely monitorlevel, operation level,maintenance level, systemlevel and debug level fromthe lowest level to thehighest. Each user of higherlevel can perform all thefunctions that a lower leveluser can do. For example, anoperation level user has allthe rights processed by amonitor level user. Thedetailed right settings foreach level are:l Monitor level: all query

commands, log in/out,and modification of itsown password

l Operation level: allsettings for fault andperformance, partialsecurity settings, andpartial configuration

l Maintenance level:partial security settings,partial configuration,communication settings,and log management

l System level: all securitysettings, allconfiguration.

l Debug level: all securitysettings, allconfiguration, and alldebug commands

Click User Level (NE UserManagement) for moreinformation.



621


NE User Flag LCT NE user, EMS NE user,CMD NE user, General NEuser

Different NE users are usedfor logging in to NEs throughdifferent networkmanagement systems.LCT NE user: NE user usedwhen NEs are managed byLCT.EMS NE user: NE user usedwhen NEs are managed byEMS.CMD NE user: NE user usedwhen NEs are managed byCMD.General NE user: NE userused when NEs are managedby the network managementsystem of any type.Click NE User Flag (NE UserManagement) for moreinformation.

User Group Belonged Administrator User Group,Super Administrator UserGroup, Operator User Group,Monitor User Group,Maintainer User Group

Displays the user group ofNE user.

Detailed Description Up to 32 characters can besupported.

Displays the user description.

Whether the password isallowed to be modifiedimmediately

Yes, No Sets whether the password isallowed to be modifiedimmediately. This setting issupported only for release 5.0NEs.

Time of Canceling UserAutomatically(m)

5-60, Disable Specifies the time that willelapse before the NE userautomatically logs out.

User Valid Till(days) 1-999, Not overdue Specifies the number of thedays that the NE user will bevalid for.

Password Valid Till(days) 1-999, Not overdue Specifies the number of thedays that the NE userpassword will be valid for.

Isonline Yes, No Specifies whether the NEuser is online.



622

Parameters (Web LCT)

Table 16-2 NE user parameters


NE For example: NE70 The operation objectselected.

NE User For example: USER The name of the NE user. Thename consists of 4-16characters. It can be acombination of letters, digits,spaces and underlines. Notethat at least one letter must beincluded.

User Level Monitor level, Operationlevel, Maintenance level,System level, Debug level.

The operations carried out bythe NE user are classified intofive levels, namely monitorlevel, operation level,maintenance level, systemlevel, debug level from thelowest level to the highest.Each user of higher level canperform all the functions thata lower level user can do. Thedetailed right settings foreach level are:l Monitor level: all query

commands, log in/out,and modification of itsown password.

l Operation level: allsettings for fault andperformance, partialsecurity settings, andpartial configuration.

l Maintenance level:partial security settings,partial configuration,communication settings,and log management.

l System level: all securitysettings, allconfiguration.

l Debug level: all securitysettings, allconfiguration, and alldebug commands. Debuglevel is the highest level.



623


NE User Flag LCT NE User, EMS NEUser, CMD NE User,General NE User

Different NMSs log in to theNE using different NE users.LCT NE User: The LCT isthe local craft terminal of theWeb LCT. This user is theone that the LCT uses formanaging the NE.EMS NE User: The EMS isthe Web LCT. This user is theone that the Web LCT usesfor managing the NE.CMD NE User: CMD is thecommand line NMS. Thisuser is the one that is used formanaging the NE bycommand line.General NE User: NE userwithout partition NM.

New Password - The new password mustcontain at least eightcharacters in three formats(letters, digits, and specialcharacters). The newpassword cannot be the sameas the user name or reverse ofthe user name, or the same asone of the most recent fivepasswords. In addition, thenew password must containdifferent characters in at leasttwo character positions.

Confirm Password - The new password of the userthat you need to enter again.

User Group Belonged For example: AdministratorUser Group

Displays the belonged usergroup name.

Login Allowed Yes, No Sets whether the NE user isallowed to log in.

Permanently Valid or not Yes, No Sets whether the NE user ispermanently valid or not.

Valid From For example: 2005-05-0710:18:07

The start time of uservalidity.

Valid Till For example: 2005-05-0710:18:07

The expiration time of uservalidity.



624


Whether the password isallowed to be modifiedimmediately

Yes, No Sets whether the password isallowed to be modifiedimmediately.

Records of all Logins Yes, No Sets whether the NE user isvalid permanently.

Allowable Login Start Date For example: Sunday Sets the allowable login startdate. The parameter is validwhen Records of all Loginsis set to No.

Allowable Login Start Time For example: 00:00:00 Time format is hour: min:second.Sets the allowable login starttime. The parameter is validwhen Records of all Loginsis set to No.

Allowable Login End Date For example: Saturday Sets the allowable login endtime. The parameter is validwhen Records of all Loginsis set to No.

Allowable Login End Time For example: 23:59:59 Time format is hour: min:second.Sets the allowable login endtime. The parameter is validwhen Records of all Loginsis set to No.

Time to Lock User for NoActivities (Day)

0-255 Sets the time to lock the NEuser for no activities.

Maximum PasswordValidity (Day)

25-999 Sets the maximum passwordvalidity.

Password Modification Time For example: 2007-01-2310:28:26

Displays the passwordmodification time.

Last Login Time For example: 2007-01-2310:28:00

Displays the last login time ofthe NE user.

16.1.9 NE Time SynchronizationThis section describes how to set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the U2000 server time.



625


NMS Time l On the U2000,format: mm/dd/yyyyhh:mm:ss

l On the Web LCT, forexample: 2006-11-0420:30:00

Displays the time of theU2000 server in realtime.

NE Name For example: NE1 Displays the name of theNE.

NE ID Format: Extended ID-ID Displays the ID of theNE.

Synchronous Mode l On the U2000:Standard NTP, NMS,NULL

l On the Web LCT:NMS, NULL

Displays thesynchronization mode ofNE Time.On the U2000, clickSynchronous Mode (NETime Synchronization)for more information.

Standard NTP Authentication Enabled, Disabled Displays or sets whetherthe standard NTPauthentication isenabled.On the U2000, clickStandard NTPAuthentication for moreinformation.



626


Server Enabled ECC Server, Disabled Displays or sets whetherto set it to the NTP serverand the type of the NTPserver.When the ECC protocolis used forcommunication betweenNEs, the gateway NE isan ECC server. So, theServer Enabledparameter is set to ECCServer. While non-gateway NEs are ECCclients and the ServerEnabled parameter is setto Disabled.When the IP protocol isused for communicationbetween NEs, all NEsare IP clients and theServer Enabledparameter is set toDisabled.

Client Enabled ECC Client, IP Client,Disabled

Displays or sets whetherto set it to the NTP clientand the type of the NTPclient.When the IP protocol isused for communicationbetween the NE and theNTP server, the NE is anIP client and the ClientEnabled parameter areset to IP Client.

Synchronous Server NE ID, IP address Displays or sets the IPaddress or NE ID of theNTP synchronousserver.If the client type is ECCClient, set it to the NE IDof the synchronousserver.If the client type is IPClient, set it to the IPaddress of thesynchronous server.



627


Polling Period (min) 2 to 1440 Minutes Displays the period ofsynchronizing the NEtime with the NTP servertime.

The Number of Sampling 1 to 8 It indicates how manytimes the NTP servertime will be sampled in aquerying cycle. The NTPserver time is the averageof that sampled.

NE Current Time l On the U2000,format: mm/dd/yyyyhh:mm:ss


Displays the current timeof the NE.

Daylight Saving Time Yes, No Displays whether to savethe time in the daytime ornot.

Recent NE Synchronization Time l On the U2000,format: mm/dd/yyyyhh:mm:ss


The latest time when theNE was synchronized.If the difference betweenthe current NE time andthe latest time when theNE was synchronized iswithin two queryingcycles, it indicates theNTP server is runningnormally. Otherwise, itindicates the NTP serveris not running normally,and the color of theparameter box willchange to the one that isfor "Major Alarm".

l Set AutoSynchronizationParameter(U2000)

l SynchronizationStarting Time(Web LCT)

Synchronization StartingTime

l On the U2000,format: mm/dd/yyyyhh:mm:ss


Sets the start time ofsynchronizing the NEtime with the NMS time.Applied only when theNE time is synchronizedwith the NMS time.



628


Synchronization Period(days)

1 to 300Default: 1

Sets the cycle ofautomaticallysynchronizing the NEtime with the NMS time.Applied only when theNE time is synchronizedwith the NMS time.On the U2000, clickSynchronization Period(days) (NE TimeSynchronization) formore information.

Standard NTP Server Identifier NE ID, IP Sets the identifier of theNE.On the U2000, clickStandard NTP ServerIdentifier for moreinformation.

Standard NTP Server For example: 1-1 or129.9.0.1

Sets the ID or IP addressof the standard NTPserver.

Standard NTP Server Key 0 to 1024 Sets the key of thestandard NTP server.

16.1.10 Standard NTP Key ManagementThis section describes how to manage standard NTP keys.


NE Name For example: oadm1-NE112

Displays the name of an NE.

NE ID For example: 9-112 Displays the NE ID.

Key 1 to 1024 Sets the key number. When youcreate keys in batches, you can enterthe key numbers in the a-b format oruse a comma to separate thenumbers. For example, if you createfour keys whose numbers are 1, 2, 3,4, you can enter the key number as1-4, or "1,2,3,4".



629


Password 6 to 16 characters Specifies the password that containsat least a numeral and a letter.

Trusted Yes, No If you select No, when NEssynchronize clocks, the NEs verifythe key and the key is untrusted.Hence, the clock of the NE cannot besynchronized with the standard NTPserver.

16.1.11 Path BindingThis section describes how to configure or query the path binding.


Port For example, NE832-12-TDX-151(IMP1/IMP1)

Displays available opticalports.

Direction Uplink, Downlink Displays the sink of Ethernetservices.

Path Binding ODU1 (1, 2, 3, 4) Displays the bound paths.

Binding Path Count 1, 2, 3, 4 Displays the number ofbound paths.

Slot ID For example, 12-TDX Displays the board thatrealizes path binding.

Port ID For example, 151(IMP1/IMP1)

Displays ports available forthe board.

Available Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays available paths.

Selected Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays the selected paths.NOTE

The bound path ODU1-1 isrequired.

16.2 Parameters: WDM InterfaceThis section describes how to configure ports on WDM boards.

On the right side of the window, there are four domains from the top down:l The first field provides two option buttons (By Board/Port (Channel) and By Function)

that are used to select the attribute classification mode.



630

l The second field specifies the object that needs to be set after the classification, whichvaries with the first field.

l The third field specifies attributes, which vary with the second field. Double-click or selectto set attributes (for attribute description, refer to the parameter descriptions of differentboards).

l The last field provides two buttons at the bottom: Query and Apply. Before setting, youcan click Query to query the board attribute from the NE and after setting you need to clickApply to send the configurations.

16.2.1 Optical Transponder BoardThis section describes how to set parameters for optical transponder boards. The parameters arelaser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path usestatus.

Parameters (U2000)


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- SlotNo.- Board name- Optical portnumber (Optical port name)

Displays the position ofthis optical port.

Optical Interface Name For example: IN/OUT Displays the default names.Do not modify this field.

Laser Status Open, CloseDefault: Open

Sets the status of a laser.Click Laser Status (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Automatic Laser Shutdown Values of parameters vary withdifferent boards and products.For details, click the links in theDescription column.

Sets whether to shut downthe laser automatically ornot. If auto-shutdown is set,when the received signal islost, the laser shuts downautomatically, so that thelaser service life isextended and body injury isavoided.Click Automatic LaserShutdown (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC TransparentMapping (10.7 G), BitTransparent Mapping (10.7 G),Encapsulated to FEC5G,Encapsulated to OTU5G

Displays the flow controlmode of a trail to which thatservices at this port aremapped.Click Port Mapping (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.



631


Client Service Bearer Rate(M)

The transmission rate of theclient-side service variesaccording to different OTUboards as follows:l 100 to 2500 (applicable to

the LDMS, LDMD,12LDM, 12LQMS,12LQMD, 13LQM, andTOM boards)

l 100 to 5000 (applicable tothe 12LOM board)

l 16 to 2500 (applicable toother OTU boards)

Default: 2500

Displays the rate range ofclient services that theequipment can bear.Click Client Service BearerRate (Mbit/s) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Service Type For example: GE Queries or sets the servicetype of the client side.Click Service Type (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Service Mode SDH, OTNDefault: OTN

Sets the service mode for aport.Click Service Mode(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Client Rate (bit/s) 155M, 622M, 2.5GDefault: 155M

Sets the rate of accessingservices at the optical porton the client side of a board.Click Client Rate (bit/s)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Current Bearer Rate (M) 0 to 65535 Queries the rate of servicesaccessed at the optical porton the client side for suchOTUs at any rateClick Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)for more information.

LPT Enabled Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

Enables or disables theLPT function of theservice.Click LPT Enabled (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.



632


FC Internal Working Mode Normal Mode, Special Mode Sets the FC internalworking mode.

Timeslot Allocation Mode Manual, Automatic Sets the timeslot allocationmode.

Channel Use Status Used, UnusedDefault: Used

Sets whether to use thechannel or not.Click Channel Use Status(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,Outloop

Sets loopback according tothe port of the OTU board.

LCK Insertion in the ODULayer

Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

Sets whether to insert LCKor not.Click LCK Insertion in theODU Layer (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Max. Bearer Ratio (M) 34 to 2700 Displays the maximumtraffic that can beprocessed.Click Max. Bearer Ratio(M) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Min. Bearer Ratio (M) 34 to 2700 Displays the minimumtraffic that can beprocessed.Click Min. Bearer Ratio(M) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Rate band (M) 34 to 2700 Sets the rate oftransmission for thisoptical port.Click Ratio band (M)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

VOA Supported Support, Not SupportDefault: Not Support

Sets whether to supportVOA or not.Click VOA Supported(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.



633


FEC Working State Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enable

Sets whether the boardperforms FEC processingon data.Click FEC Working State(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

FEC Mode FEC, AFECDefault: AFEC

Sets the type of FEC.Click FEC Mode (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

PAUSE Frame Flow Control Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

Click PAUSE Frame FlowControl (WDM Interface)for more information.

Wavelength No./ OpticalInterface Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example: C/1/1560.61/192.10

Displays the workingwavelength of the opticalport.

Auto-Negotiation Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disabled

Sets whether to performport auto-negotiation.Click Auto-Negotiation(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Max. Packet Length 1518 to 9600 Sets the maximum packetlength of the data, and anypacket exceeding thislength is discarded.Click Max. Packet Length(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Band Type C Displays the band type ofthe optical port.Click Band Type (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Board Receiving/Transmitting Attributes

Single fed and single receiving,dual fed and selective receiving

Displays the receiving/transmitting attributes ofboard.Click Board Receiving/Transmitting Attributes(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.



634


Board Tracing Clock Source Local Clock Source, LineClock SourceDefault: Local Clock Source

Sets the tracing clocksource of the board.Click Board Tracing ClockSource (WDM Interface)for more information.

ESC Auxiliary Switch Disable, EnableDefault: Enable

Sets status of the ESCauxiliary switch.Click ESC AuxiliarySwitch (WDM Interface)for more information.

Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz)

For example:1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the workingwavelength, wavelengthnumber and frequency of aport that you configure.Click Planned WavelengthNo./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Planned Band Type L, RAMAN_C, C Plus,CWDM, C, C (320G), C192,SMC, RAMAN_L, C+L

Sets the band of theworking wavelength. If theboard supports the bandthat you configure, theactual band type is the sameas the configured bandtype.Click Planned Band Type(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(Thz)

For example:1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the actualworking wavelength,wavelength number andfrequency of a port.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of thecurrent workingwavelength.

Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz)

For example:1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the workingwavelength, wavelengthnumber and frequency of aport that you configure.



635


Configure Band Type C, CWDM Sets the band of theworking wavelength. If theboard supports the bandthat you configure, theactual band type is the sameas the configured bandtype.

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex,100M Half-Duplex, 100MFull-Duplex, 1000M Half-Duplex, 1000M Full-DuplexDefault: 1000M Full-Duplex

Displays the workingmodes of the Ethernet port.Auto-Negotiation canautomatically determinethe optimized workingmodes of the connectedports. This mode is easy tomaintain and isrecommended.During configuration,make sure that workingmodes of the connectedports are consistent. If theworking modes aredifferent, the services aredown.Click Ethernet WorkingMode (WDM Interface) formore information.

PRBS Test Status Disabled, EnabledDefault: Disable

Sets the PRBS status of thetributary board.Click PRBS Test Status(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Remarks - -

SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,ODUk_PM_DEG,ODUk_TCM1_DEG,ODUk_TCM2_DEG,ODUk_TCM3_DEG,ODUk_TCM4_DEG,ODUk_TCM5_DEG,ODUk_TCM6_DEG

Sets the SD switchingcondition. Values ofparameters vary withdifferent boards andproducts.

FC Distance Extension Enabled, Disabled Displays whether the FCdistance extension isenabled.



636


Cross-Connect Loopback Values of parameters vary withdifferent boards and products.For details, click the links in theDescription column.

In the boards, broadcastsoptical signals received bythe client side to opticaltransmission modules ofthe client side and WDMside, or broadcasts opticalsignals received by theWDM side to opticaltransmission modules ofthe WDM side and clientside.Click Cross-ConnectLoopback (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Ingress Rate (kbps) 64 to 1250 Displays the ingress rate.

Egress Rate (kbps) 64 to 1250 Displays the egress rate.

Port Work Mode For example: OSC Mode Displays the working modeof the optical port of aboard. Working mode ofthe optical port varies withthe board mode.

Non-Intrusive MonitoringStatus

Enabled, Disabled Sets the non-intrusivemonitoring status.

Hold-Off Time of AutomaticLaser Shutdown

0s to 2s, the increments is 100ms.Default: 0s

Specifies the time betweenthe point when the systemdetects an interruption ofthe services and the pointwhen the ALS is startedwhen the ALS function isenabled.

Board Mode For example: Eight OSCsConvergence

A board-level attribute ofgeneral configuration. Youcan manage boards byswitching the mode.

ESC Supervisory Channel Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to combineESC monitoring signals.

Protocol Type Normal, Enhanced Sets the protocol type of thechannel. Normal indicateslower transmission rate.Enhanced indicates highertransmission rate andsupports transmitting E1services.



637


Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz)

For example: C/1/1529.16/196.050

Displays the information ofthe optical port, includingband type, wavelengthnumber, wavelength andfrequency.Click Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Parameters (Web LCT)Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- SlotNo.- Board name- Opticalport number (Optical portname)

Displays the position of thisoptical port.

Optical Interface Name For example: RX1/TX1 Displays the default names.Do not modify this field.

Channel Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the pathor not.

Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,Outloop

Sets loopback according tothe port of the OTU board.Loopback may interruptservices and can be used onlyfor testing ortroubleshooting.

Service Type For example: GE Sets the service type of theclient side.

OFC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable theOFC function.This parameter can be editedonly when you set ServiceType of 13LQM or 12LOMboard to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.

Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC TransparentMapping (10.7G), BitTransparent Mapping(11.1G)

Displays the flow controlmode of the mapped trail ofthe service that passes theport.



638


Client Service Bearer Rate(M)

The transmission rate of theclient-side service variesaccording to different OTUboards as follows:l 100 to 2500 (applicable to

the LDMS, LDMD,12LDM, 12LQMS,12LQMD, 13LQM, andTOM boards)

l 100 to 5000 (applicable tothe 12LOM board)

l 16 to 2500 (applicable toother OTU boards)

Displays the range of clientservice rates that theequipment can bear.

Laser Status Open, Close Sets the status of a laser.

Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to shut down thelaser automatically or not. Ifauto-shutdown is set, whenthe received signal is lost, thelaser shuts downautomatically, so that thelaser service life is extendedand body injury is avoided.

Service Mode For example: OTN Selects the service mode ofthe port.

Board Mode For example: ITL Mode A board-level attribute ofgeneral configuration. Youcan manage boards byswitching the mode.

LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the LPTpass-through function of theservice.

FC Internal Working Mode Normal Mode, Special Mode Sets the FC internal workingmode.

Current Bearer Rate (M) For example: 50 Displays the rate of the clientservice that is currentlyaccessed.

FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Sets whether the boardperforms FEC processing ondata.

FEC Type FEC, AFEC Sets the FEC type.

Non-Intrusive MonitoringStatus

Enabled, Disabled Sets the non-intrusivemonitoring status.



639


Hold-Off Time of AutomaticLaser Shutdown

0s to 2s, the increments is100msDefault: 0s

Specifies the time betweenthe point when the systemdetects an interruption of theservices and the point whenthe ALS is started when theALS function is enabled.

Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz)

For example:1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the actual workingwavelength of the opticalport.An actual wavelength is theoptical wavelength emittedby a laser.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of theactual working wavelength.


For example:1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the workingwavelength configured forthe optical port.An configuration wavelengthis a logical wavelength.During the optical cross-connection configuration, iftemporarily no requiredactual wavelength isavailable, you can use thelogical wavelength toconfigure the optical cross-connection.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Configures the band for theworking wavelength.

Maximum Packet Length 1518-9600 Sets the maximum packetlength of the data. Packetsthat exceed this length arediscarded.



640


Ethernet Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10MHalf-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex,100M Full-Duplex, 1000MHalf-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex,

Displays the working modesof the Ethernet port. Auto-Negotiation canautomatically detect theoptimized combination ofworking modes of theopposite port. This mode iseasy to maintain and isrecommended.Make sure that the workingmodes of this port and theopposite port are consistent.If the port modes aredifferent, services are down.

OTN Overhead TransparentTransmission

Disabled, Enabled Enables or disables thefunction of OTN OverheadTransparent Transmission.

SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,ODUk_PM_DEG,ODUk_TCM1_DEG,ODUk_TCM2_DEG,ODUk_TCM3_DEG,ODUk_TCM4_DEG,ODUk_TCM5_DEG,ODUk_TCM6_DEG

Sets the SD switchingcondition.

FC Distance Extension Enabled, Disabled Displays whether the FCdistance extension isenabled.

NOTEIn the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According tothe corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parametersin this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the HardwareDescription for each type of equipment.

16.2.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer BoardThis section describes how to set and query the attenuation rate of a port, the fixed band, andthe parity of the working band.

Parameters (U2000)


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-1-M40-1 (OUT)




641


Optical Interface Name For example: OUT Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Optical Interface AttenuationRatio (dB)

Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Sets the actual attenuationratio of the optical port.On the U2000, click OpticalInterface Attenuation Ratio(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 The maximum attenuationrate allowed. When this rateis exceeded, the outputoptical power is too low,causing the signal-to-noiseratio of the receive end to fall.On the U2000, click Max.Attenuation Rate (dB)(WDM Interface-OpticalMultiplexer andDemultiplexer Unit) for moreinformation.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 The minimum attenuationrate allowed. When this rateis exceeded, the outputoptical power is too high,causing the signal-to-noiseratio of the receive end todecrease.On the U2000, click Min.Attenuation Rate (dB)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Fixed Band Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

On the U2000, click FixedBand (WDM Interface) formore information.

Parity of the Working band Odd, Even, FULLDefault: FULL

Displays the parity of theworking band.On the U2000, click Parity ofthe Working Band (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Actual Band C Displays the actual workingband of the multiplexer anddemultiplexer board.



642


Configure Band C Displays the working bandthat you configure.

Threshold of Input PowerLoss (dBm)

For example: -50 The power that is smallerthan this value cannot bedetermined.On the U2000, clickThreshold of Input PowerLoss (dBm) (WDMInterface-OpticalMultiplexer andDemultiplexer Unit) for moreinformation.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Sets the parity of the workingband for a port.

Configure Working BandParity

Even, Odd Sets the parity of the workingband for a port.

PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km))

0.00 to 1.00 Sets PMD coefficient.

Chromatic DispersionCoefficient (ps/(nm*km))

-15.00 to 30.00 Sets chromatic dispersioncoefficient.

Channel Number Mode C40 Mode, C80 Mode,CWDM Mode

Sets and queried the channelnumber mode for thecalculation of the resourceutilization.

DCM DispersionCompensation Direction

Send, Receive Set DCM dispersioncompensation direction.

DCM DispersionCompensation Value (ps/nm)

1.0 to 6500.0 Set DCM dispersioncompensation value.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-1-M40-1 (OUT)


Optical Interface Name For example: OUT Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Optical Interface AttenuationRate (dB)

For example: 20 Sets the actual attenuationratio of the optical port.



643


Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 40 Displays the maximumattenuation ratio allowed.When this ratio is exceeded,the output optical power istoo low, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receiveend to fall.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 0 Displays the minimumattenuation ratio allowed.When this ratio is exceeded,the output optical power istoo high, causing the signal-to-noise ratio of the receiveend to fall.

Actual Band C Displays the actual workingband of the multiplexer ordemultiplexer board.

Configure Band C Displays the working bandthat you configure.


-35.0 to -10.0 Input power that is smallerthan this value cannot bedetermined.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Displays the parity of thecurrent working band of theport. Currently only evenband is supported.


Even, Odd Configures the parity of thecurrent working band of theport. Currently only evenband is supported.

PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km))

0.00 to 1.00 Sets PMD coefficient.

Chromatic DispersionCoefficient (ps/ (nm*km))

-15.00 to 30.00 Sets chromatic dispersioncoefficient.

Channel Number Mode C40 Mode, C80 Mode,CWDM Mode

Sets and queries the channelnumber mode for thecalculation of the resourceutilization.

DCM DispersionCompensation Direction

Send, Receive Set DCM dispersioncompensation direction.

DCM DispersionCompensation Value (ps/nm)

1.0 to 6500.0 Set DCM dispersioncompensation value.



644


16.2.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplex BoardThis section describes how to set and query the added/dropped wavelengths for optical add anddrop multiplex boards.

Parameters (U2000)Field Value Description

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE711-15-MR2-1 (A1/D1)


Optical Interface Name For example: A1/D1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 40 Sets the attenuation ratio ofthe optical port.Click Optical InterfaceAttenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the maximumattenuation rate. When thisrate is exceeded, the outputoptical power is too low,causing the signal-to-noiseratio of the receive end to fall.Click Max. Attenuation Rate(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the minimumattenuation rate. When thisrate is exceeded, the outputoptical power is too high,causing the signal-to-noiseratio of the receive end to fall.Click Min. Attenuation Rate(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.



645


Channel Use Status Unused, UsedDefault: Used


Block Port Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

Sets whether to preventoptical signals fromtraversing the optical port.When Block Port is set toEnabled, the opticalattenuation rate of the opticalport is so high that opticalsignals cannot traverse theoptical port.When Block Port is set toDisabled, the opticalattenuation rate of the opticalport is within the normalrange and thus optical signalscan traverse the optical port.


Displays the fixed band.Click Fixed Band (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Synthesized Input OpticalPower Loss Threshold(dBm)

For example: -50 The power that is smaller thanthis value cannot bedetermined.Click Threshold of PowerLoss (dBm) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Band Type/Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength(nm)/Frequency (THZ)

C: 1529.16/196.05 to1560.61/192.10

L: 1570.42/190.90 to1603.57/186.95

C (320G): 1535.82/195.20 to1560.61/192.10

CWDM: 1471 to 1611

Queries the added/droppedwavelength of the board. It isapplicable to MR2.Click Band Type/Wavelength NO./Add-DropWavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Band Type C+L, C, L, C (320G),CWDMDefault: C

Queries the waveband type.Click Band Type (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.



646


Actual Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength(nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example:1/1529.56/196.00

Queries the added/droppedwavelength of the board. It isapplicable to CMR2 andCMR4.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Queries the actual wavebandtype.

Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength(nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example:1/1529.56/196.00

Sets the add and dropwavelength for a board.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Sets the band type.

Add/Drop Wave Band 1 to 40 Displays the add/drop waveband.Click Actual Add/Drop WaveBand (WDM Interface) formore information.

Actual Working Band Parity Odd, Even, All Displays the parity of theactual working band.


Odd, Even, All Sets the parity of the workingband.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE711-15-CMR2-1 (A1/D1)


Optical Interface Name For example: A1/D1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Actual Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example:1/1529.56/196.00

Queries the added/droppedwavelength of the board. It isapplicable to CMR2 andCMR4.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Queries the actual wavebandtype.

Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example:1/1529.56/196.00

Configures the added/dropped wavelength of theboard.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Configures the wavebandtype of the board.



647


Actual Working Band Parity Odd, Even, All Displays the parity of theactual working band.


Odd, Even, All Sets the parity of the workingband.


16.2.4 Tributary and Line BoardsThis section describes how to set parameters for tributary and line board boards, such as laserstatus, automatic laser shutdown and path use status.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE125-3-NS2-1 (IN/OUT)-2



Laser Status On, Off Sets the status of a laser.

Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to shut downthe laser automatically ornot. If auto-shutdown is set,when the received signal islost, the laser will shut downautomatically, so that thelaser service life is extendedand body injury is avoided.

Service Type For example: STM-64 Sets the service type of theclient side.

LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the LPTfunction for an EPL service.On the U2000, click LPTEnabled (WDM Interface)for more information.

Path Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the pathor not.



648


Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,Outloop

Sets loopback according tothe port of the board.

FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Sets whether the boardperforms FEC processing ondata.On the U2000, click FECWorking State (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

FEC Type FEC, AFEC Sets the FEC type.

Wavelength No./OpticalInterface Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

For example:1/1560.61/192.10

Working wavelength of theoptical port.

Max. Packet Length 1518 to 65535 Sets the maximum packetlength of the data, and anypacket exceeding this lengthwill be discarded.

Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,Outloop

Sets loopback according tothe path.

Optical Interface Status IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOS-MA, OOS-AUMA, IS-NR,LPBK, OOS-AU, LPBK,OOS-MA, LPBK, OOS-AUMA, LPBK

Displays the status of thisoptical port.


For example:1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the actual workingwavelength, wavelengthnumber and frequency of aport.

Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of thecurrent working wavelength.


For example:1/1529.16/196.05

Displays the workingwavelength, wavelengthnumber and frequency of aport that you configure.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Set the band of the workingwavelength. If the boardsupports the band that youconfigure, the actual bandtype is the same as theconfigured band type.



649


OTN Overhead TransparentTransmission

Enabled, Disabled Sets whether performs OTNoverhead transparenttransmission for the board.

Working Mode Autosensing, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full-duplex, 100 Mbit/s half-duplex, 100 Mbit/s full-duplex,1000 Mbit/s half-duplex, 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex0

Working modes of theEthernet port. Theautosensing mode isrecommended, because itcan automatically find outthe best working mode tocombine a port and itsinterconnected port and thusis convenient formaintenance, and thus isconvenient for maintenance.The port and itsinterconnected port musthave the same settings ofworking mode. Otherwise,this results in the failure ofservices.

Line Rate Standard Mode, SpeedupMode

Sets the rate of the line-sideport on the board.

SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,ODUk_PM_DEG

Sets SD trigger condition.

PMD Threshold (ps) For example: 50 Displays the PMD thresholdof the board.

OFC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable theOFC function. Thisparameter can be edited onlywhen you set Service Typeto ISC 1G or ISC 2G, and setAutomatic LaserShutdown and LPTEnabled to Disabled.

16.2.5 Optical Amplifier BoardThis section describes how to set or query parameters of optical amplifier boards.



650




Optical Interface Name For example: IN1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Optical Amplifier Gain (dB) 20 to 40 The gain of the opticalbooster amplifier is the ratioof output power to inputpower.


0 to 20 Set the attenuation ratio ofthe optical port.

Laser Status Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Sets the on/off status of alaser.Click Laser Status (WDMInterface-OpticalAmplifying Unit) for moreinformation.

Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 30Default: 0

The actual attenuation ratioof the optical port, which canbe obtained through query.Click Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Gain (dB) 20 to 40 Displays the actual gain foran optical amplifier board.The actual gain is the ratio ofthe output power to the inputpower.Click Gain (dB) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Gain Slope (dB) For example: 2.5 Displays the actual gain slopeof the optical boosteramplifier.



651


Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 15.0 The maximum attenuationrate of the optical port. If thisvalue is exceeded, the qualityof optical signals or signals ofthe next station degrades dueto low power.Click Max. Attenuation Rate(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 0.5 The minimum attenuationrate of the optical port. If thisvalue is exceeded, the qualityof optical signals or signals ofthe next station degrades dueto high power.Click Min. Attenuation Rate(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.


The default value is usuallyused.Click Fixed Band (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Nominal Gain Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Query the nominal gain ofthis optical amplifier.Click Nominal Gain (dB)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Synthesized Input OpticalPower Loss Threshold (dBm)

-35.0 to -10.0 Sets the threshold of thesynthesized input opticalpower loss. When thesynthesized input opticalpower is below this value, theloss of input signals occurs.Click Synthesized InputOptical Power LossThreshold(dBm) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Board Work Type C, L, C+L Queries and sets the boardwork type.Click Board Working Type(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.



652


Actual Band For example: C Displays the actual workingband.

Configure Band For example: C Displays the working bandthat you configure.

Nominal Gain UpperThreshold (dB)

For example: 35 Displays the upper thresholdof the gain of the opticalamplifier board.Click Nominal Gain UpperThreshold (dB) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Nominal Gain LowerThreshold (dB)

For example: 10 Displays the lower thresholdof the gain of the opticalamplifier board.Click Nominal Gain LowerThreshold (dB) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd, All Displays the parity of theactual working band.Click Parity of the WorkingBand (WDM Interface) formore information.

Parity of the Working Band ODD, EVEN, FULL Sets the parity of the workingband.

Rated Optical Power (dBm) -30.0 to 30.0Default:l Input port: -19l Output port: 4

Sets the rated optical powerof the input or output port ofan optical amplifier board.Click Rated Optical Power(dBm) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Forced Emitting Power(dBm)

For example: 20.0 Sets the forced launchedoptical power.

Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm)

5.0 to 30.0 Displays the fixed pumpoptical power. The value is inthe range of Min. FixedPump Optical Power andMax. Fixed Pump OpticalPower.

Min. Fixed Pump OpticalPower (dBm)

For example: 6.0 Displays the minimum fixedpump optical power that isqueried from the NE.



653


Max. Fixed Pump OpticalPower (dBm)

For example: 28.0 Displays the maximum fixedpump optical power that isqueried from the NE.

Pump Optical AmplificationCard Status

Online, Offline Displays whether the pumpoptical amplification board isonline.

Pump Optical AmplificationCard Working Status

Disabled, Enabled Sets the working status of thepump optical amplificationboard.




Optical Interface Name For example: IN1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Optical Amplifier Gain (dB) 20 to 40 The gain of the opticalbooster amplifier is the ratioof output power to inputpower.

Laser Status Open, Close Sets the on/off status of alaser.


0 to 20 Set the attenuation ratio ofthe optical port.

Gain (dB) For example: 20 Displays the actual gain ofthe optical booster amplifier.It is the ratio of output powerto input power.

Fixed Band C, CWDM The default is usually used.

Nominal Gain For example: 25 Sets the nominal gain of thisoptical amplifier.


-35.0 to -10.0 Sets the threshold of the inputoptical power loss. When theinput optical power is belowthis value, loss of input signalis considered to occur.



654


Board Work Type C, L, C+L Queries and sets the boardwork type.

Actual Band For example: C Displays the actual workingband.

Nominal Gain UpperThreshold (dB)

For example: 35 Displays the upper thresholdof the nominal gain of theoptical amplifier unit.

Nominal Gain LowerThreshold (dB)

For example: 10 Displays the lower thresholdof the nominal gain of theoptical amplifier unit.

Upper Threshold of ActualGain (dB)

For example: 35 Displays the upper thresholdof the actual gain of theoptical amplifier unit.

Lower Threshold of ActualGain (dB)

For example: 10 Displays the lower thresholdof the actual gain of theoptical amplifier unit.

Actual Working Band Parity Even Displays the parity of theactual working band.


Even Sets the parity of the workingband.

Rated Optical Power (dBm) -30.0 to 30.0Default:l Input port: -19l Output port: 4

Sets the rated optical powerof the input or output port ofan optical amplifier board.

Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm)

5.0 to 30.0 Displays the fixed pumpoptical power. The value is inthe range of Minimum FixedPump Optical Power andMaximum Fixed PumpOptical Power.

Minimum Fixed PumpOptical Power (dBm)

For example: 6.0 Displays the minimum fixedpump optical power that isqueried from the NE.

Maximum Fixed PumpOptical Power (dBm)

For example: 28.0 Displays the maximum fixedpump optical power that isqueried from the NE.



655


16.2.6 Optical Supervisory Channel BoardThis section describes how to set laser status and loopback, and query the wavelengths of anoptical port.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE711-6-SC2-1 (RM1/TM1)


Optical Interface Name For example: RM1/TM1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Laser Status Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Sets whether the laser isenabled.Applicable to the boards suchas HSC1, SC1, or SC2.Click Laser Status (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Port Enabled Enable, Disable Enables or disables the use ofthis optical port.

Return Clock West clock, East clock Set the return clock source.In the case of the opticalsupervisory channel boardwith dual optical interfaces,such as SC2, you set theoptical port that returns theclock to the SCC board. In thecase of the west clock, theoptical port 1 is used. In thecase of the east clock, theoptical port 2 is used.

FE TransparentTransmission

Enable, Disable Enables or disables the FEtransparent transmissionfunction.



656


Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

Performs correspondingloopback settings fordebugging or faultlocalization.Click Loopback (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Channel Use Status Used, UnusedDefault: Used


Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(Thz)

For example: SMC/240/1510.00/198.54

Displays the band type,working wavelength,wavelength number andfrequency of a port.Click Band Type/Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.


For example:240/1510.00/198.54

Displays the actual workingwavelength, wavelengthnumber and frequency of aport.



Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE107-16-SC1-1 (RM/TM)-1

Displays current optical port/channel number.

Optical Interface Name For example: RM/TM Sets/displays the optical portname.

Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,OutloopDefault: Non-Loopback

You can set optical portloopback for troubleshootingor testing.

Laser Status Open, Close Sets the laser status.Applicable boards: HSC1,SC1 and SC2.



657


Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency(THz)

For example:1/1510.00/198.54

Displays the workingwavelength of the opticalport.



16.2.7 Protection BoardThis section describes how to set parameters for protection boards. The parameters are laserstatus, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE185-6-OLP-2 (RI1/TO1)


Optical Interface Name For example: RI1/TO1 Displays the default names.Do not modify this field.


Values of parameters varywith different boards andproducts.

Sets the threshold of theoptical power loss. When theinput optical power is belowthis value, the loss of inputsignals occurs.On the U2000, clickThreshold of Input PowerLoss (dBm) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Initial Variance ValueBetween Primary andSecondary Input Power (dB)

-10.0 to 10.0 Sets the initial variance valuebetween primary andsecondary input power.On the U2000, click InitialVariance Value BetweenPrimary and Secondary InputPower (dB) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.



658


Variance Threshold BetweenPrimary and Secondary InputPower (dB)

3.0 to 8.0 Sets the variance thresholdbetween primary andsecondary input power.On the U2000, click VarianceThreshold Between Primaryand Secondary Input Power(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.


16.2.8 Spectrum Analysis BoardThis section describes how to set working wavelengths for spectrum analysis boards. Forexample, you can set parity of working band and fixed band.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-10-MCA-1 (RO1)


Optical Interface Name For example: RO1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Optical Monitoring Enabled, DisabledDefault: Enabled

Used to set the optical portmonitoring state. When themonitoring of an optical portis set to Disabled, the MCAboard does not analyze thewavelength at this port.


Usually use default value.Click Fixed Band (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Parity of the Working band FULL, Odd, EvenDefault: FULL

Displays the parity of theworking band.Click Parity of the WorkingBand (WDM Interface) formore information.



659


Wavelength Monitor Status Monitored, UnmonitoredDefault: Unmonitored

Sets whether to monitor thisport.Click Wavelength MonitorStatus (WDM Interface) formore information.

WDM System Mode NRZ Or DRZ System, CRZSystem (100GHzAlternation), CRZ System(50GHz Alternation),40Gbps System (100GHzAlternation), 40Gbps System(50GHz Alternation)

Sets the WDM system mode.

Actual Band C Displays the current workingband of a channel.

Configure Band C Sets the working band for aport.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Displays the parity of theworking band for a port.



Optical Switch No. 1 to 8 The MCA board can accesseight optical signals. Toselect one optical port toperform spectrum analysis,you need to know theanalyzed optical port No. ofthe board, that is, the opticalswitch status or the opticalswitch number.Click Optical Switch No.(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Monitor Interval (min) 5 to 49995Default: 10

Sets the time interval ofperformance monitoring onthe board.Click Monitor Interval (min.)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.



660


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE107-12-MCA8-1 (IN1)

Displays the current opticalport/path location.

Optical Interface Name For example: RO1 Do not modify this field. Usethe default value.

Optical Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables thespectrum analysis of the path.

Actual Band C Displays the optical band thatthe path is monitoring.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Currently only even band issupported.

Configure Band C Configures the optical bandthat the path monitors.


Even, Odd Displays the parity of thecurrent working band of theport. Currently only parityband is supported.

Optical Switch No 1 to 8 The MCA board can accesseight optical signals. Toselect one optical port toperform spectrum analysis,you need to know theanalyzed optical port No. ofthe board, that is, the opticalswitch status or the opticalswitch number.

Monitor Interval (min) 5 to 49995Default: 10

Sets the time interval ofperformance monitoring onthe board.

Wavelength Monitor Status Monitor, No MonitorDefault: Unmonitored

Sets whether to monitor theport.

Band For example: C Displays the band.

WDM Type NRZ or DRZ, 100-GHzSpacing with CRZ, 50-GHzSpacing with CRZ

Sets the WDM type.




661

16.2.9 Variable Optical Attenuation BoardThis section describes how to set the maximum or minimum attenuation rate for optical portsand path use status. You can set or query parameters related to working wavelengths, includingfixed band and the parity of working band.

Parameters (U2000)


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-1-VA4-1 (IN1/OUT1)


Optical Interface Name For example: IN1/OUT1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.

Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 40 Sets the attenuation ratio ofthe optical port.Click Optical InterfaceAttenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for moreinformation.

Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the maximumattenuation rate. When thisrate is exceeded, the outputoptical power is too low,causing the signal-to-noiseratio of the receive end to fall.Click Max. Attenuation Rate(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the minimumattenuation rate. When thisrate is exceeded, the outputoptical power is too high,causing the signal-to-noiseratio of the receive end to fall.Click Min. Attenuation Rate(dB) (WDM Interface) formore information.

Channel Use Status Unused, UsedDefault: Used



Displays the fixed band.Click Fixed Band (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.



662


Parity of the Working band FULL, Odd, EvenDefault: FULL

Displays the parity of theworking band.Click Parity of the WorkingBand (WDM Interface) formore information.

Actual Band C Displays the working band ofa channel.

Configure Band C Configures the working bandof the port.


For example: -50 The power that is smallerthan this value cannot bedetermined.Click Threshold of PowerLoss (dBm) (WDMInterface) for moreinformation.

Remarks - Sets the remarks of theoptical port.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Sets the parity of the workingband for a port.




Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE107-113-VA1-1 (IN/OUT)-1


Optical Interface Name For example: IN1/OUT1 Displays default names. Donot modify this field.


0-40 Sets the attenuation ratio ofthe optical port.

Max. Attenuation Ratio (dB) For example: 40 Displays the maximumattenuation ratio. If the actualattenuation ratio is greaterthan this value, the outputpower is so small that it maycause decrease of the opticalsignal noise ratio (OSNR) atthe receive end.



663


Min. Attenuation Ratio (dB) For example: 5 Displays the minimumattenuation ratio. If the actualattenuation ratio is smallerthan this value, the outputpower is so large that it maycause decrease of the opticalsignal noise ratio (OSNR) atthe receive end.

Path Use Status Used, UnusedDefault: Used

Sets whether the path is beingused.

Actual Band C Displays the current workingband of the path. Currentlyonly C band is supported.

Configure Band C Configures the working bandof the port.


For example: -50 Input power that is smallerthan this value cannot bedetermined.

Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Displays the parity of thecurrent working band of theport. Currently only evenband is supported.


Even, Odd Configures the parity of theworking band of the port.Currently only even band issupported.


16.2.10 Dispersion Compensation BoardThis section describes how to query parameters for dispersion compensation boards.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE183-35-TDC-1 (IN1/OUT1)




664




16.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.

16.3.1 Parameters: Edge PortBefore creating an optical cross-connection, you need to configure the corresponding port of theboard as an edge port.

Parameters


Fixed Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No.(port name)

Displays the fixed edge portof the NE. By default, the portof the FIU and the port at theOTU line side are fixed edgeport.Click Fixed Edge Port(Optical Cross-ConnectionManagement) for moreinformation.

Available Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No.(port name)

Displays available edge portof the NE.Click Available Edge Port(Optical Cross-ConnectionManagement) for moreinformation.

Selected Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No.(port name)

Displays the selected edgeport of the NE.Click Selected Edge Port(Optical Cross-ConnectionManagement) for moreinformation.



665

16.3.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-ConnectionYou can configure optical cross-connections on a single NE. An optical cross-connection refersto the cross-connection at the OCh level that can be dynamically created. An optical cross-connection can realize wavelength grooming. The optical cross-connection is classified intoboard optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. A single-stationoptical cross-connection refers to the end-to-end optical cross-connection within an NE.

Parameters

Table 16-3 Optical cross-connection parameters


Source Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the source slot ofthe optical cross-connection.

Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port ofthe optical cross-connection.

Source Band C Currently the Metroequipment supports C band.

Source Wavelength No. For example: 1 The Source WavelengthNo. parameter indicates thenumber of the wavelength towhich the source port of thesingle-station optical cross-connect service corresponds.

Sink Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the sink slot of theoptical cross-connection.

Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of theoptical cross-connection.

Sink Band C Currently the Metroequipment supports C band.

Sink Wavelength No. For example: 1 The Sink Wavelength No.parameter indicates thenumber of the wavelength towhich the sink port of thesingle-station optical cross-connect service corresponds.

Activation Status Active, InactiveDefault: Active

The Activation Statusparameter indicates the statusof the selected optical cross-connect service on theU2000.

Service Origin Create Manually,Intelligently Generate

Displays the mode ofcreating optical cross-connections.



666


OPA Mode Manual, Auto Optical cross-connectionpower adjustment mode. Ifyou select Auto, the dynamicoptical add/drop multiplexerboard automatically adjuststhe attenuation range of theoptical attenuator in theboard. If you select Manual,you need to manually adjustthe attenuation range of theoptical attenuator in thedynamic optical add/dropmultiplexer board.The Auto option is availablefor the following types ofoptical cross-connectiontrails:l Transparently transmitted

service, such asFIU>OAU1>WSM9>OAU1>FIU,OAU1>WSM9>OAU1,FIU>OAU1>WSM9>OAU1 andOAU1>WSM9>OAU1>FIU.

l Add service, such asOTU>WSM9>OAU1>FIU, OTU>WSM9>OAU1andOTU>RUM9>OAU1.

l Drop service, such asFIU>OAU1>WSD9>OTU,OAU1>ROAM>D40>OTU andOAU1>WSD9>OTU.

For all the optical cross-connections other than thethree types described above,you can only select theManual mode.

16.3.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-ConnectionThis section describes how to configure optical cross-connections on a board. Optical cross-connection is the cross-connection at OCh level that can be dynamically created. It canimplement wavelength grooming. Optical cross-connection contains board optical cross-



667

connection and single-station optical cross-connection. Board optical cross-connection is theoptical cross-connection operations on one board.

ParametersNOTE

Descriptions of the parameters on the U2000 are the same as that on the Web LCT.


Source Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the source slot ofthe optical cross-connection.

Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port ofthe optical cross-connection.

Source Band C Currently the Metroequipment supports C band.

Source Wavelength For example:2/1529.56/196.00

Numbers wavelengthssequentially. The value isexpressed in the order of"wavelength number/centralwavelength (nm)/frequency(THz)"Currently 80 wavelengths inC band are supported.

Sink Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the sink slot of theoptical cross-connection.

Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of theoptical cross-connection.

Sink Band C Currently the Metroequipment supports C band.

Sink Wavelength For example:2/1529.56/196.00

Numbers wavelengthssequentially. The value isexpressed in the order of"wavelength number/centralwavelength (nm)/frequency(THz)"Currently 80 wavelengths inC band are supported.

16.3.4 Parameters: Enabling the Port Blocking FunctionDuring network capacity expansion, if a port that is not configured with services is connectedto an OTU board, the new wavelength may be conflict with the existing wavelength on thenetwork. Wavelength conflict interrupts the existing services. This problem is resolved after theport is enabled with the port blocking function.



668


Block Port Enabled, DisabledDefault: Disabled

Sets whether to preventoptical signals fromtraversing the optical port.When Block Port is set toEnabled, the opticalattenuation rate of the opticalport is so high that opticalsignals cannot traverse theoptical port.When Block Port is set toDisabled, the opticalattenuation rate of the opticalport is within the normalrange and thus optical signalscan traverse the optical port.



669

A Glossary

A

AC See alternating current

access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have accessto a resource.

ACK See acknowledgement

acknowledgement A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information.Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (usingvoltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicatesuccessful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels.

ACL See access control list

add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signalscontained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Add/drop wavelength Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in theOADM equipment.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCoreproduct. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.

ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line

AGC See automatic gain control

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800Commissioning Guide A Glossary


670

AID access identifier

AIS See alarm indication signal

alarm A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network managementsystem during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recoveryalarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changesto cleared.

alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.

alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

alarm cause A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault causeis the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that isrepresentative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.

alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the currentstatus of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When theorange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellowindicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator onthe front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions forthe system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meetingthe conditions.

alarm severity The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-Trecommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,Minor, Warning.

alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.

alarm type Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following:Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarmindication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indicationrelated with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipmentEnvironment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usuallygenerated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security

ALC See automatic level control

ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (singlestation) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils opticalpower control on the line that contains the link.

ALC node The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit,variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node worktogether to achieve the ALC function.

ALS See automatic laser shutdown

alternating current Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to afrequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.



671

American NationalStandard Institute

An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocolstandards.

American StandardCode for InformationInterchange

American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system forrepresenting letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique numberbetween 0 and 127.

ANSI See American National Standard Institute

antistatic floor A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to preventaccumulated static electricity

APD See avalanche photodiode

APE automatic power equilibrium

APID access point identifier

application-specificintegrated circuit

A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late inthe manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable formany needs.

APS See automatic protection switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

arrayed waveguidegrating

A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiplewavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing(DWDM) system.

ASCII See American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASE amplified spontaneous emission

ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit

ASON See automatically switched optical network

asymmetric digitalsubscriber line

A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phonelines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL providescontinuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses mostof the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receiveinformation from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.

AsynchronousTransfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous inthe sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATAG autonomously generated correlation tag

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AU See administrative unit

auto-negotiation An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices toautomatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.



672

automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as afunction of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.

automatic lasershutdown

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmittersand optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signalconditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain rangeand controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics.

automatic protectionswitching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switchto a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatically switchedoptical network

A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transportservices. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but alsoother transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections.

avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free anavalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltagesthan other semiconductor electronics.

AWG See arrayed waveguide grating

B

background blockerror ratio

The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during afixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes ofdatabase recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to datasynchronization between active and standby boards.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

BAS See broadband access server

basic input/outputsystem

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output controlprograms, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system settinginformation. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

bayonet-neill-concelman

A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.

BBE background block error

BBER See background block error ratio

BC See boundary clock

BDI Backward Defect Indication

BEI backward error indication

BER See bit error rate

BIAE backward incoming alignment error



673

bill of material Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly.It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are avariety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG].

BIOS See basic input/output system

BIP See bit-interleaved parity

BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity order 8

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure thecommunications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parityorder 8

A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrangethe blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in thecorresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.

bit-interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by thetransmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that thefirst bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in thecovered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit ofall X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by settingthe BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of thesignal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position withinthe X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includesthe BIP-X.

BITS See building integrated timing supply

BMC best master clock

BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman

BOM See bill of material

boundary clock A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.

BPDU See bridge protocol data unit

BPS board-level protection switching

bridge protocol dataunit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

bridging The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channelssimultaneously.

broadband accessserver

A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocationand authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuringeffective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services.

broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.



674

broadcast service The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks.

building integratedtiming supply

In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can usea device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect thesynchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals tothe building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

BWS Backbone WDM System

C

cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.

capex See capital expenditure

capital expenditure Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. Acapital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assetsor to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond thetaxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets suchas equipment, property, or industrial buildings.

CAR See committed access rate

CBS See committed burst size

CC See connectivity check

CCI connection control interface

CCM See continuity check message

CD chromatic dispersion

CDMA See Code Division Multiple Access

CE See customer edge

CENELEC See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interpretsand executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and executeinstructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer'smain data-transfer path, the bus.

centralized alarmsystem

The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.

CF See compact flash

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channelsin a WDM device.

CIR See committed information rate



675

CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CLEI common language equipment identification

CLNP connectionless network protocol

CLNS connectionless network service

clock synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signalfrequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.

clock synchronizationcompliant withprecision time protocol

A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and controlsystem. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.

clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.

CM See configuration management

CMEP connection monitoring end point

CMI coded mark inversion

coarse wavelengthdivision multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

Code Division MultipleAccess

A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequencyexpansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use differentcode sequences for multi-address connection.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.

committed informationrate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

Common ObjectRequest BrokerArchitecture

A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces ofprograms (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the twoprograms are written in different programming languages and are running on differentplatforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, orORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the objectcomes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP,object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.



676

Configuration Data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE cancollaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factorfor normal running of an entire network.

configurationmanagement

1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization(ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.

2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configurationinformation of all nodes in the network.

configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.

congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network serviceefficiency.

connecting plate A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets.

connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is boundto the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to theinput of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point ischaracterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection pointis formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.

connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

continuity checkmessage

CCM is used to detect the link status.

convergence 1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one orseveral channels of required signals.

2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specificrouting protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.

convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide forthe specific requirements of the convergence service user.

CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture

corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.

CPLD Complex Programmable Logical Device

CPU See central processing unit

CRC See cyclic redundancy check

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSES consecutive severely errored second

CSMA carrier sense multiple access

CST Common Spanning Tree

current alarm An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.

current performancedata

Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of aperformance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data onlyin the specified monitoring period.



677

customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancycheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D

DAPI destination access point identifiers

Data backup A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data lossin the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area.

data communicationnetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

data communicationschannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

DBPS distribute board protect system

DCC See data communications channel

DCF See dispersion compensation fiber

DCM See dispersion compensation module

DCM frame A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module).

DCN See data communication network

DDF See digital distribution frame

DDN See digital data network

demultiplexer A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmissionover a communications channel as a single signal.

dense wavelengthdivision multiplexing

Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacingas carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

device set A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into differentdevice sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If anoperation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authorityover all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making itunnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately.It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, devicetype, or another criterion.

DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol



678

diamond-shaped nut A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.

digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.

digital distributionframe

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital subscriber lineaccess multiplexer

A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company thatreceives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections andputs the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.

dispersioncompensation fiber

A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersionof transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

dispersioncompensation module

A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for thedispersion of transmitting fiber.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typicaldense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

distributed linkaggregation group

The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protectiontechnology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the servicescan automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for theinter-board ports.

DLAG See distributed link aggregation group

DMUX; DEMUX See demultiplexer

DNI Dual Node Interconnection

domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.

DQPSK differential quadrature phase shift keying

DRDB dynamic random database

DRZ differential phase return to zero

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DSCR dispersion slope compensation rate

DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer

DSP Digital Signal Processing

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency

DTR data terminal ready

dual tone multiplefrequency

In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations oftwo specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and theother from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.

dual-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protectedentity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.



679

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing

Dynamic HostConfiguration Protocol

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client hostrequesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internetnetwork. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.

E

E2E End to End

EAPE enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium

EBS See excess burst size

ECC See embedded control channel

EDFA See erbium doped fiber amplifier

eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying

EFM See Ethernet in the first mile

ejector lever A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.

electric supervisorychannel

A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits themonitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC isintroduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagneticinterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

element managementsystem

An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type ofnetwork elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NEindividually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the networkmanagement system (NMS).

embedded controlchannel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)information between NEs.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See electromagnetic interference

EMS See element management system

enterprise systemconnection

A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

EPL See Ethernet private line



680

EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service

erbium doped fiberamplifier

An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length ofoptical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump ofErbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external lightsource pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.

ESC See electric supervisory channel

ESCON See enterprise system connection

ESD See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet in the firstmile

Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes theadvantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFMprovides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. Inaddition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)and Video On Demand (VOD).

Ethernet private LANservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-pointconnections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet virtualprivate LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

Ethernet virtualprivate line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

ETSI 300mm cabinet A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standardsof the ETSI.

European Committeefor ElectrotechnicalStandardization

The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims toreduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems andservices.

EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator

EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service



681

excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, thetraffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameterused to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet sizewhen the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parametermust be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than themaximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different networksegments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.

External cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces andoptical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.

eye pattern An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitudeversus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.

F

F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for networkproviders. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path forspecial maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.

fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 timesfaster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and soon. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the followingthree types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core opticalfibers).

fault A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A faultdoes not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of externalresources and intentional settings.

FBG fiber Bragg grating

FC See fiber channel

FDB flash database

FDDI See fiber distributed data interface

FE See fast Ethernet

FEC See forward error correction

fiber channel A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiberchannel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used fortransporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-modeand multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted paircopper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented andconnectionless services.

fiber distributed datainterface

A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications fortransmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based onthe token ring network.

fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.



682

fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.

fiber spool A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers.

Fiber trough The trough that is used for routing fibers.

fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physicalentities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (userinformation and network management information) and perform transmission functionin the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cabletransmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiberconnection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEsrepresents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of opticalfiber type.

field programmablegate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arrays.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the networkmanagement system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards,it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present,two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port IDand port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexistin the same port.

FMT See fiber management tray

FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer

FOAs fixed optical attenuator

Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unlessan equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on theprotection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward errorcorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.

four-wave mixing Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interactionof two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves,called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths.

FPGA See field programmable gate array



683

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.

frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupyingthe same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain framealignment.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in bothdirections, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-linetelephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heardat the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road withone lane for each direction.

G

gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the opticalamplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,which expressed in dB.

gain flattening filter Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flattenor smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequalsignal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/orRaman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that theamplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the outputspectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier.

Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be usedto enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is thegateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannotidentify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IPnetworks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of thenetwork and one IP address of the Ethernet port.

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

Gb See gigabit

GCC general communication channel

GCP See GMPLS control plan

GE See gigabit Ethernet

GE ADM The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. Itowns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use thenetwork resource more effectively.

generic framingprocedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has beenstandardized by ITU-T SG15.

GFF See gain flattening filter

GFP See generic framing procedure



684

gigabit In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9)bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a secondbetween two telecommunication points.

gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global PositioningSystem

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users.

GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching

GMPLS control plan The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, thetraditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product seriessupport the ASON features.

GNE See gateway network element

GPS See Global Positioning System

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options withgraphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

grounding The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called theground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit.

GSSP General Snooping and Selection Protocol

GUI See graphical user interface

H

Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interfaceto the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.

HCS See hierarchical cell structure

HDB high density bipolar code

HDLC See high level data link control

hierarchical cellstructure

This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment.That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cellreselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations.

high level data linkcontrol

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layerof the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame byadding a trailer and a header.

History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.

History PerformanceData

The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reportedand stored in the NMS.



685

I

IAE incoming alignment error

IC See integrated circuit

ICC ITU carrier code

ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol

ID See identity

identity The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitivelyrecognizable or known.

Idle resource opticalNE

When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayedon the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to otheroptical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDMsubracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-clickthe NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network.

IE See Internet Explorer

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, whenmodulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two erroredseconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30second measurement intervals.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

integrated circuit A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place andinterconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.

integrated servicesdigital network

A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for thevoice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on asmall number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensivetransmission service.

intelligent poweradjustment

A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacentregeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss ofoptical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, theperformance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well.Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the sliceof broken fiber.

Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces andoptical interfaces within the cabinet.

internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.



686

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communicationsand information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely acceptedISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computersconnected by communications networks.

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion

A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendationbodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) andradio networks (ITU-R).

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion-TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunicationstechnologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with aletter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. Forexample, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and opensystem communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet ControlMessage Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction andother information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP softwareon one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See alsocommunications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet EngineeringTask Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged withstudying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the InternetArchitecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groupsthat concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisherof the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet Explorer Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions ofInternet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience onthe Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

IP See Internet Protocol

IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected tothe Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal valuesof its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of theIP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifythe host itself.

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remoteNEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overheadDCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.

IPA See intelligent power adjustment



687

IPG inter-packet gap

ISDN See integrated services digital network

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

IST See internal spanning tree

ITU See International Telecommunication Union

ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication StandardizationSector

J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.

Jitter transfer The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearingat the output port.

L

label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See local area network

LAPD link access procedure on the D channel

LAPS link access protocol-SDH

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.

layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchicallyas successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transferof its characteristic information.

LB See loopback

LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCD See liquid crystal display

LCN local communication network

LCT local craft terminal

LED See light emitting diode

LHP long hop



688

light emitting diode A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic producton the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights andperimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, opticalmice and laser-class printers.

Link AggregationControl Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface toincrease bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE802.3ad.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

link capacityadjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides acontrol mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet thebandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member linksthat have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is theresponsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Control Protocol In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.

link stateadvertisement

The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is thecondition of the link.

linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEPis called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MACaddress of the destination MEP2.

linktrace reply For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to thesource MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message iscalled Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of theTTL of LTM minus 1.

liquid crystal display A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure,sandwiched between two transparent electrodes.

LLC See logical link control

LMP link management protocol

LOC loss of clock

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.

logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the uppersublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).

logical port A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.



689

loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP See loss of pointer

LOS See Loss Of Signal

loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.

Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

LP See logical port

LPT link-state pass through

LSA See link state advertisement

LSP See label switched path

LT linktrace

LTM See linktrace message

LTR See linktrace reply

M

MA Maintenance Associations

MAC See media access control

MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer

main distributionframe

A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.

main path interface atthe transmitter

A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector.

main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machineinteractive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarmsof different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basicnetwork operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. Thedevices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

MAN See metropolitan area network

managed object The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that maybe managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receiveport, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, andregenerator section.



690

Managementinformation

The information that is used for network management in a transport network.

managementinformation base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition existson other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switchcommand is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary ofan SDH network.

marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installationholes for the cabinet.

MD See maintenance domain

MDB Memory Database

MDF See main distribution frame

MDP message dispatch process

MDS message distribution service software

ME maintenance entities

mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by thetransmitter.

Mean Time BetweenFailures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measureof the reliability of the system.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

MEP maintenance end point

metropolitan areanetwork

A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computerresources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large localarea network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single largernetwork (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It isalso used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging themwith backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.

MFAS See multiframe alignment signal

MIB See management information base

MIP maintenance intermediate point

MLD See multicast listener discovery



691

MLM laser See multi-longitudinal mode laser

MO See managed object

mother board A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronicmodules.

mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements orcomponents.

MP See maintenance point

MPI main path interface

MPI-R main path interface at the receiver

MPI-S See main path interface at the transmitter

MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MS Multiplex Section

MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation

MSI multi-frame structure identifier

MSOH See multiplex section overhead

MSP See multiplex section protection

MSPP multi-service provisioning platform

MST See multiplex section termination

MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTA Mail Transfer Agent

MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

multi-longitudinalmode laser

An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes.

multicast listenerdiscovery

The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directlyconnected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to whichthe hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and themulticast router can manage members on the local network.

multiframe alignmentsignal

A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, alwaysoccupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish andmaintain multiframe alignment.

multiple spanning treeinstance

Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTPwithin an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology forframes classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MSTConfiguration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.



692

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex sectionoverhead

The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOHdefinition.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

multiplex sectiontermination

The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH framesignal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.

multiplexer Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number ofaggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channelsbeing fixed.

Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higherorder path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplexsection.

Multiprotocol LabelSwitching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.

MUX See multiplexer

MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator

N

NA No Acknowledgment

NCP See Network Control Protocol

NE See network element

NE database There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following:

(1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery;

(2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM;

(3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM.

In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the sametime. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDBto FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database isrestored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, themain control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due tothe exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.



693

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage thetelecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage andmaintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has aunique NE ID.

NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of theconfiguration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.

NE-side data The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NE-side data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is storedon the NMS side.

NEBS Network Equipment Building System

NEF See network element function

Network ControlProtocol

This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implementspath control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board whichmanages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCCboard.

network elementfunction

A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicateswith the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled.

network management The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity.ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management,accounting management, configuration management, security management andperformance management.

Network ManagementSystem

A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.

network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.

network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to allnodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.

network service accesspoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. Itsynchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.

NM See network management

NMS See Network Management System

NNI See network node interface

NOC network operation center

Noise figure An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing asystem.

NSAP See network service access point

NTP See Network Time Protocol



694

O

OA See optical amplifier

OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer

OADM frame A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.

OAM See operation, administration and maintenance

OC See optical coupler

OCI open connection indication

OCP See optical channel protection

OD optical demultiplexing

ODB optical duobinary

ODF See optical distribution frame

ODUk optical channel data unit-k

OEQ optical equalizer

OFC open fiber control

OLA See optical line amplifier

OLP See optical line protection

OM optical multiplexing

OMS optical multiplexing section

ONE See optical network element

Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructionsfor using their features when so requested by the user.

OOF See out of frame

OPA optical power adjust

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.

Open SystemsInterconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made bydifferent vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven differentcategories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message sourceand destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation,administration andmaintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in anoperational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriberaccess network to users/subscribers.

OpEx; OPEX operation expenditure

OPS optical physical section



695

optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source(or a detector).+

optical add/dropmultiplexer

A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channeland drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

optical amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of thestimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.

optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that theoptical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It isavailable in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.

optical channel A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system.

optical channelprotection

In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certainwavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the opticalchannel protection is configured.

optical coupler A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternatingoptical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness ofeach layer is a fraction of the light wavelength.

optical distributionframe

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

optical line amplifier A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input opticalsignals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA isthe EDFA amplifier.

optical line protection A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and single-ended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibersforms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line isnormal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carriesline signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.

optical networkelement

A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/dropmultiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The typesof ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE isequivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like acommon NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consistsof different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered likea sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks thatform the NE to display the board layout.

optical signal-to-noiseratio

The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratioof signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/noise power.

optical spectrumanalyzer

A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved.Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.

optical supervisorychannel

A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission networkand transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the workingchannel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).

Optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects,or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.



696

optical time domainreflectometer

A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication systemand measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the lightloss and locate the fiber fault.

optical transmissionsection

Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring andmaintenance tasks between NEs.

optical transponderunit

A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.

optical transportnetwork

A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data

optical wavelengthshared protection

In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection betweendifferent stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelengthsharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelengthshared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured withdistributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network whereservices are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then,two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one serviceamong stations.

OPU optical channel payload unit

OPUk optical channel payload unit-k

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

original equipmentmanufacturer

An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses acomponent made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of thesecond company under its own brand.

OSA See optical spectrum analyzer

OSC See optical supervisory channel

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSN optical switch node

OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio

OSPF See open shortest path first

OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer

OTM optical terminal multiplexer

OTN See optical transport network

OTS See optical transmission section

OTU See optical transponder unit

OTUk optical channel transport unit-k

out of frame An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specifiednumber of consecutive frame bit positions.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

overhead cabling Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.

OWSP See optical wavelength shared protection



697

P

PA pre-amplifier

packet over SDH/SONET

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POSinterface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport ofpacket data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switchednetwork

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on thebackplane.

pass-through The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any givendirection of transmission.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See printed circuit board

PCC protection communication channel

PCC See policy and charging control

PCS See physical coding sublayer

PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDL See polarization dependent loss

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PE Provider Edge

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should benot less than the committed information rate.

Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historyperformance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSESregister. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, soevery board functional module has a performance register. A performance register isused to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, soas to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.

PGND protection ground

phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency ofa voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with theincoming or reference frequency.

PHY See physical sublayer & physical layer



698

physical codingsublayer

The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet afterhaving been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Eachsublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications.

physical sublayer &physical layer

1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer:In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical mediumthat connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC

PID photonics integrated device

PIM-DM protocol independent multicast-dense mode

PIM-SM See protocol independent multicast sparse mode

PIN See Positive Intrinsic Negative

PIR See peak information rate

plesiochronous digitalhierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

PLL See phase-locked loop

PMD polarization mode dispersion

PMI payload missing indication

POH path overhead

point to multipoint A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations(from one to many).

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

Point-to-Point Protocolover Ethernet

PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulatingPPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standardPPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression.

Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect tothe frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.

polarization dependentloss

The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a componentwhen stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units.

policy and chargingcontrol

Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCCprovides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearernetwork.

POS See packet over SDH/SONET

Positive IntrinsicNegative

Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- andn-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to variouscomponents, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devicesfrom current overload.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PPPoE See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet



699

PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC primary reference clock

PRI See primary rate interface

primary rate interface An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line,or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line.

printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.

protection groundcable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, onehalf of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

Protection policy In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protectionpolicies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode giventhe priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above,the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connectionprotection.

Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol independentmulticast sparse mode

It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.

pseudo random binarysequence

A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.

PSI payload structure identifier

PSN See packet switched network

PSTN See public switched telephone network

PT payload type

PTMP See point to multipoint

PTN packet transport network

PTP Point-To-Point

public switchedtelephone network

A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the publicsubscribers. Sometimes called POTS.

Q

QA Q adaptation

QoS See quality of service

quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet lossratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of thetransmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of aservice provider to meet the demands of users.



700

R

radio networkcontroller

An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity ofthe radio resources.

RAI remote alarm indication

RAM See random access memory

random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit(CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannotbe written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatilememory that can be written to as well as read.

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).

reconfiguration opticaladd/drop multiplexer

The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block statusof any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel.This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADMis used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can bemodified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reducesmaintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power,which equalizes the optical power at the channel level.

Reed Solomon Code A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and GustaveSolomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications.

reference clock A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocksfor reference.

Reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.

REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.

Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.

REI Remote Error Indication

Resource ReservationProtocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

RF Radio Frequency

RFC Requirement for Comments

RFI remote failure indication

ring network A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,forming a circular pathway for signals.

RIP See Routing Information Protocol



701

RMON remote network monitoring

RNC See radio network controller

ROADM See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

Routing InformationProtocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a routebased on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vectorprotocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and isknown to waste bandwidth.

RS Code See Reed Solomon Code

RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It cancommunicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and thetransmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

RZ return to zero code

S

S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock referencesource through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronizationof the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NEwill trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protectionswitching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock qualityinformation of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte totransmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of themultiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization qualitygrades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can beimplemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.

Safe control switch The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement,which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off,IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, theIPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm.

SAN See storage area network

SAP service access point

SAPI source access point identifiers

SBS stimulated Brillouin scattering

SC See square connector

SD See signal degrade

SD trigger flag SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform aswitching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the networkmanagement system.

SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy



702

SDI See Serial Digital Interface

SDP serious disturbance period

Search domain Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IPaddresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example,10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category Baddress (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255.255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), whichis reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Net-id 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address.

Secure File TransferProtocol

A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.

Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without theNMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is foundby the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at thattime.

Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals.

Serial Line InterfaceProtocol

Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implementtransmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnectionfunction with a known IP address.

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies theforwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLAmay include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreementas a whole or partially.

Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.

SES See severely errored second

SETS See synchronous equipment timing source

settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Timeinterval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratiogreater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .

SF See signal fail

SFP See small form-factor pluggable

SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol

shock-proof reinforce A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipmentroom so that the cabinet stands stably.

shortcut menu A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an object's name or icon. This is alsoreferred to a context menu.

side door The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet againstunexpected touch and environment impact.



703

side mode suppressionratio

The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the totalsource spectrum to the second largest peak.

side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.

signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscribersignal cable.

signal degrade A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.

signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at agiven point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio andis usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end ofthe protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectionalfailure.

single-mode fiber A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wavelength can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance.

SLA See service level agreement

SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol

SLM single longitudinal mode

SM section monitoring

small form-factorpluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SMF See single-mode fiber

SMSR See side mode suppression ratio

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection

SNCTP See subnetwork connection tunnel protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR See signal to noise ratio

soft permanentconnections

An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPCincludes different classes of services (CoS).

SONET See synchronous optical network



704

span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spansdetermines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and variesaccording to transmission system type.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundantnetwork to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prunea loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SPC See soft permanent connections

SPM self phase modulation

SQL See structured query language

square connector Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".

SRLG Shared Risk Link Group

SRS stimulated Raman scattering

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

SSMB synchronization status message byte

SSU synchronization supply unit

STM Synchronous Transfer Mode

STM-1 See synchronous transport mode 1

STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module of order 4

storage area network An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers,tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system thedevices appear as locally attached devices.

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

structured querylanguage

A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying,updating, and managing data in relational database systems.

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions andclosely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on atopological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-networkplanning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view spacecan be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus onthe equipments under their management.

sub-network number A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A sub-network ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. Anoderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connectionprotection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protectionsubnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performancefalls below a required level.



705

subnetwork connectiontunnel protection

SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.

support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steelplates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling.Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed underthe supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfythe insulation requirements.

Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppressionstatus, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will notoccur even when the alarm conditions are met.

Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributaryboard switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set thesame, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higherpriority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clockinformation through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on theirclocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward thesynchronization information to downstream nodes.

synchronize NE time To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so asto synchronize all NEs with the server.

synchronous digitalhierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines thetransmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronousequipment timingsource

The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts ofmultiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.

synchronous opticalnetwork

A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers toconnect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple datatypes (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiplesof this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).

synchronous transportmode 1

Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

T

TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring

TCP See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM See time division multiplexing

TE See traffic engineering



706

TelecommunicationManagement Network

A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communicationsnetwork. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networksand services.

terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signalsinto one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signalsinto multiple channels of low rate signals.

TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol

TIM trace identifier mismatch

time divisionmultiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3 and so on), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engrosstime slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to betransmitted over one channel.

Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are ableto interconnect.

Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that thesynchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signalskeeps consistent with the UTC time.

time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TL1 See Transaction Language 1

TLV Type/Length/Value

TM See terminal multiplexer

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

TP traffic Policing

traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the loadof the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic managementparameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize theutilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused byunbalanced loads.

Transaction Language1

Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol.TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlyingmanagement systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (orNE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSScomponent. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1(TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is across-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manageoptical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined inGR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)



707

Transmission ControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.

tributary unit group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way thatmixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructedto increase flexibility of the transport network

Trivial File TransferProtocol

A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended forapplications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTPrestricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP issmall enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.

trTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker

TTI trail trace identifier

TTL See time to live

TU tributary unit

TUG See tributary unit group

U

UAS unavailable second

UAT See unavailable time event

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severelyerrored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. Theevent will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutiveseconds.

UNI See user network interface

universal timecoordinated

The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintainedatomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.

Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannotbe switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service isinterrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.

upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(NetworkManagement system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data storedat the NMS side.

Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operationrights of a user in the NMS.



708

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (forexample, ATM switches).

UTC See universal time coordinated

V

VB virtual bridge

VC See virtual container

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCI See virtual channel identifier

virtual channelidentifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used toidentify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches onits way to its destination.

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consistsof information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a blockframe structure which repeats every 125 μs or 500 μs.

virtual local areanetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to whichVP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network viaconnections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.

VLAN See virtual local area network

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See voice over IP

VPI See virtual path identifier

VPN See virtual private network

VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol



709

W

WAN See wide area network

wavelength divisionmultiplexing

A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiplechannels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.

Wavelength protectiongroup

The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protectionstructure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. Thewavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of thewavelength protection group.

WDM See wavelength division multiplexing

WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment

wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.

Working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.

WRR weighted round Robin

WSS wavelength selective switching

WTR Wait To Restore

WXCP wavelength cross-connection protection

WXCP service The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a typeof channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receivingprinciple and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching betweenworking and protection channels.

X

XFP 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable

XPM cross-phase modulation



710